Anritsu Lightning Vector Network Analyzer 37Xxxe Users Manual Operation

37xxxE to the manual 271c44cf-73c1-46f8-b73f-47ad86da428c

: Anritsu Anritsu-Lightning-Vector-Network-Analyzer-37Xxxe-Users-Manual-509466 anritsu-lightning-vector-network-analyzer-37xxxe-users-manual-509466 anritsu pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 553

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

LightningÔ
37xxxE
Vector Network Analyzer
Operation Manual

490 JARVIS DRIVE · MORGAN HILL, CA 95037-2809

P/N: 10410-00300
REVISION: A
PRINTED: AUGUST 2010
COPYRIGHT 2010 ANRITSU CO.

WARRANTY
The ANRITSU product(s) listed on the title page is (are) warranted against defects in materials and
workmanship for three years from the date of shipment.
ANRITSU’s obligation covers repairing or replacing products which prove to be defective during the
warranty period. Buyers shall prepay transportation charges for equipment returned to ANRITSU for
warranty repairs. Obligation is limited to the original purchaser. ANRITSU is not liable for consequential
damages.
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty does not apply to ANRITSU connectors that have failed due to normal wear. Also,
the warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the Buyer,
unauthorized modification or misuse, or operation outside of the environmental specifications of the
product. No other warranty is expressed or implied, and the remedies provided herein are the Buyer’s sole
and exclusive remedies.
TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
V Connector and K Connector are registered trademarks of ANRITSU Company.
GPC-7 is a registered trademark of Amphenol Corporation.
ANACAT is a registered trademark of EEsof, Inc.
QuietJet and ThinkJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Co.
Microsoft, Excel, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Acrobat and Acrobat Reader are trademarks of Adobe Corporation.
Iomega and Zip are registered trademarks of Iomega Company.
NOTICE
ANRITSU Company has prepared this manual for use by ANRITSU Company personnel and customers as
a guide for the proper installation, operation and maintenance of ANRITSU Company equipment and
computer programs. The drawings, specifications, and information contained herein are the property of
ANRITSU Company, and any unauthorized use or disclosure of these drawings, specifications, and
information is prohibited; they shall not be reproduced, copied, or used in whole or in part as the basis for
manufacture or sale of the equipment or software programs without the prior written consent of ANRITSU
Company.
UPDATES
Updates to this manual, if any, may be downloaded from the Anritsu Internet site at:
http://www.us.anritsu.com.

Safety Symbols
To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction, Anritsu Company uses the
following symbols to indicate safety-related information. For your own safety, please read the information
carefully BEFORE operating the equipment.

Symbols used in manuals
DANGER

This indicates a very dangerous procedure that could result in serious
injury or death if not performed properly.

WARNING

This indicates a hazardous procedure that could result in serious injury or death if not performed properly.

CAUTION

This indicates a hazardous procedure or danger that could result in
light-to-severe injury, or loss related to equipment malfunction, if
proper precautions are not taken.

Safety Symbols Used on Equipment and in Manuals
Some or all of the following five symbols may or may not be used on all Anritsu equipment. In addition, there
may be other labels attached to products that are not shown in the diagrams in this manual.
The following safety symbols are used inside or on the equipment near operation locations to provide information about safety items and operation precautions. Ensure that you clearly understand the meanings of
the symbols and take the necessary precautions BEFORE operating the equipment.
This indicates a prohibited operation. The prohibited operation is indicated symbolically in or near the barred circle.
his indicates a compulsory safety precaution. The required operation is
indicated symbolically in or near the circle.
This indicates warning or caution. The contents are indicated symbolically in or near the triangle.
This indicates a note. The contents are described in the box.

These indicate that the marked part should be recycled.

37xxxE OM

Safety-1

For Safety
WARNING
Always refer to the operation manual when working near locations at
which the alert mark, shown on the left, is attached. If the operation,
etc., is performed without heeding the advice in the operation manual,
there is a risk of personal injury. In addition, the equipment performance may be reduced.
Moreover, this alert mark is sometimes used with other marks and descriptions indicating other dangers.

WARNING
When supplying power to this equipment, connect the accessory 3-pin
power cord to a 3-pin grounded power outlet. If a grounded 3-pin outlet
is not available, use a conversion adapter and ground the green wire, or
connect the frame ground on the rear panel of the equipment to ground.
If power is supplied without grounding the equipment, there is a risk of
receiving a severe or fatal electric shock.

WARNING

Repair

This equipment can not be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to
remove the equipment covers or to disassemble internal components.
Only qualified service technicians with a knowledge of electrical fire
and shock hazards should service this equipment. There are
high-voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury
or fatal electric shock to untrained personnel. In addition, there is a risk
of damage to precision components.

WARNING
Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or use an
equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this equipment is lifted
by one person.

Safety-2

37xxxE OM

Narrative Table Of Contents
Chapter 1—General Information
This chapter provides a general description of the Anritsu Model 37xxxE Vector Network Analyzer
System and its major units: network analyzer, test set, and frequency source. It also provides
descriptions for the precision component kits, and equipment options. Additionally, it contains the
listing of recommended test equipment.
Chapter 2—Installation
This chapter provides instructions for performing an initial inspection, preparing the equipment for
use, setting up for operation over the IEEE-488.2 (GPIB) Bus, using a printer, and preparing the
units for storage and/or shipment. It also provides a listing of Anritsu Customer Service Centers.
Chapter 3—Network Analyzers, A Primer
This chapter provides an introduction to network analysis and the types of measurements that can
be made using them. It provides general and introductory description.
Chapter 4—Front Panel Operation
This chapter describes the front panel controls and provides flow diagrams for the menus called up
using the front panel controls. It contains the following sub-chapters:
· Front Panel Control-Group Descriptions
· Calibration Keys and Indicators, Detailed Description
· Save/Recall Menu Key and Menus, Key Description and Menu Flow
· Measurement Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Channel Keys and Menu, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Display Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Enhancement Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Hard Copy Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· System State Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Markers/limits Keys and Menus, Key Descriptions and Menu Flow
· Disk Storage Interface, Detailed Description
Chapter 5—Error And Status Messages
This chapter describes the type of error messages you may encounter during operation and provides a
tabular listing. This listing describes and defines the error types.
Chapter 6—Data Displays
This chapter provides a detailed description of the various data displays. It describes the graph
types, frequency markers, measurement limit lines, status displays, and data display controls.

37xxxE OM

i

Narrative Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 7—Measurement Calibration
This chapter provides a discussion and tutorial on measurement calibration. It contains step-by-step
calibration procedures for the Standard (OSL), Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM methods. It also
has a procedure for calibrating using a sliding termination.
Chapter 8—Measurements
This chapter discusses measurements with the 37xxxE VNA. It contains sub-chapters that provide a
detailed descriptions for Transmission and Reflection, Low Level and Gain, Group Delay, Active
Device, Multiple Source Control, Adapter Removal, Gain Compression, and Receiver Mode
measurements
Chapter 9—Time Domain
This chapter describes the Option 2, Time Domain feature. It provides an operational procedure and
a flowchart of the time domain menus.
Chapter 10—AutoCal
This chapter describes the Automatic Calibrator (AutoCal) feature and provides operational information and procedures.
Chapter 11—Operational Checkout Procedures
This chapter provides a procedure for operational checkout
Appendix A—Front Panel Menus, Alphabetical Listing
This appendix shows all of the menus that are called up using the front panel controls. It provides a
replica of the menu and descriptive text for all of the various menu choices. The listing is alphabetical by the menu call letters mentioned and/or illustrated in Chapter 4.
Appendix B—Model 37xxxE VNA Rear Panel Connectors
This appendix describes the rear panel connectors. It also provides pinout listing.
Appendix C—Performance Specifications
For printed versions of this manual, Appendix C contains the Technical Data Sheet, part number
11410-00573, which provides performance specifications.
Index

ii

37xxxE OM

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 General Information
1-1

SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-2

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-3

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-4

ONLINE MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-5

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
372xxE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
373xxE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1-6

OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1-7

PRECISION COMPONENT KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Calibration Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1-8

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1-9

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Chapter 2 Installation
2-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-2

INITIAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-3

PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Option 4, Additional SD Card for Secure Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2-4

GPIB SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2-5

SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
GPIB Interface to an External Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-6

ETHERNET SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-7

EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2-8

RACK MOUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

37xxxE OM

iii

Table of Contents (Continued)
2-9

STORAGE OR SHIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Chapter 3 Network Analyzers, A Primer
3-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3-2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Source Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Test Set Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Analyzer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3-3

NETWORK ANALYZERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Chapter 4 Front Panel Operation
4-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-2

KEY-GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-3

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4-4

SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

4-5

MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP

4-6

CHANNELS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4-7

DISPLAY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4-8

ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4-9

HARD COPY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4-10

SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

4-11

MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

4-12

STORAGE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Disk Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Disk File Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Formatting a Data File Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Copying Data Files From Drive to Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Recovering From Drive Write/Read Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

iv

37xxxE OM

Table of Contents (Continued)
4-13

COMMAND LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Create Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
List Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Change Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Delete Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Remove Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Copy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Chapter 5 Error and Status Messages
5-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5-2

ERROR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Chapter 6 Data Displays
6-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6-2

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Single Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Dual Channel Display: Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Four Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dual Trace Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Graph Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

6-3

FREQUENCY MARKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

6-4

LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

6-5

STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Analog Instrument Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Sweep Indicator Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6-6

DATA DISPLAY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
S-parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Data Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Display of Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

37xxxE OM

v

Table of Contents (Continued)
6-7

HARD COPY AND STORAGE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Storage Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Chapter 7 Measurement Calibration
7-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-2

DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Establishing the Test Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Understanding the Calibration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Calibrating for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7-3

SLIDING TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

7-4

SOLT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

7-5

OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

7-6

TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

7-7

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

7-8

TRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

7-9

MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Chapter 8 Measurements
8-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8-2

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8-3

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

8-4

GROUP DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

8-5

ACTIVE DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

8-6

MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Control Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

8-7

vi

ADAPTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

37xxxE OM

Table of Contents (Continued)
8-8

GAIN COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Power and VNAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Swept Power Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

8-9

RECEIVER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Set-on Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Receiver Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Receiver Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Procedure, Receiver Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59

8-10

EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
De-embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

8-11

OPTICAL APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Creating a Characterization (*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E Measurements . . . 8-74

Chapter 9 Time Domain
9-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-2

TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-3

OPERATING TIME DOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9-4

WINDOWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

9-5

GATING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

9-6

ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9-7

EXAMPLES, GATING AND ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9-8

TIME DOMAIN MENUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Chapter 10 AutoCal
10-1

INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10-2

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10-3

CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10-4

DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

37xxxE OM

vii

Table of Contents (Continued)
10-5

PHYSICAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

10-6

CHARACTERIZATION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

10-7

USING AUTOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

10-8

PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

10-9

AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Chapter 11 Operational Checkout Procedures
11-1

INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-2

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-3

INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-4

SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-5

NON-RATIO POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11-6

HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Appendix A Front Panel Menus, Alphabetical Listing
Appendix B Rear Panel Connectors
Appendix C Performance Specifications
Subject Index

viii

37xxxE OM

Chapter 1
General Information
Table of Contents
1-1

SCOPE OF MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-2

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-3

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-4

ONLINE MANUALS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-5

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
372xxE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
373xxE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1-6

OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1-7

PRECISION COMPONENT KITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Calibration Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1-8

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1-9

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Figure 1-1.

Model 37347E Vector Network Analyzer System

GENERAL INFORMATION

SCOPE OF MANUAL

Chapter 1
General Information
1-1

SCOPE OF MANUAL

This manual provides general information, installation, and operating
information for the Model 37xxxE Vector Network Analyzer (VNA)
system. (Throughout this manual, the terms VNA, 37xxxE VNA, and
37xxxE will be used interchangeably to refer to the system.)

1-2

INTRODUCTION

This section provides general information about the 37xxxE VNA
system and one or more precision-component calibration or
performance verification kits. The section also provides a listing of
recommended test equipment.

IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER

All Anritsu instruments are assigned a unique six- or seven-digit ID
number, such as “940101.” This number is affixed to a decal on the
rear panel of each unit. In any correspondence with Anritsu Customer
Service, please use this number.

1-4

ONLINE MANUALS

Manual updates, if any, are available on Anritsu's Internet download
page (http://www.us.anritsu.com/downloads/).

1-5

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The 37xxxE Network Analyzer (Figure 1-1) is a single-instrument system that contains a built-in source, test set, and analyzer. It is produced in two series— 372xxE and 373xxE—described below. All models provide up to 1601 measurement data points, a built-in SD Card
for storing and recalling front panel setups and measurement and calibration data. They also provide an on-screen display of total operational time and dates of system calibrations. They support operation
over the IEEE 488.2 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB).

1-3

1-3

37xxxE OM

OPTIONS

GENERAL INFORMATION

372xxE

373xxE

1-6

OPTIONS

The 372xxE is a fully functioning VNA for making passive-device measurements. The series offers three models that cover a range from
40 MHz to 65 GHz. The models are shown below:
Model

Frequency Range

37247E

40.0 MHz to 20.0 GHz

37269E

40.0 MHz to 40.0 GHz

37297E

40.0 MHz to 65.0 GHz

The 373xxE is a fully functioning VNA for making passive- and active-device measurements. The series offers three models that cover a
range from 40 MHz to 65 GHz. The models are shown below.
Model

Frequency Range

37347E

40.0 MHz to 20.0 GHz

37369E

40.0 MHz to 40.0 GHz

37397E

40.0 MHz to 65.0 GHz

The following instrument options are available:
q Option 1: Rack Mount Kit
q Option 2: Time (Distance) Domain Measurement Capability
q Option 4: Additional Secure Digital Memory Card (SD Card)
q Option 15: Flexible test set (provides access to all four samplers
and Source loops for each port)

1-4

37xxxE OM

GENERAL INFORMATION

1-7

PRECISION COMPONENT
KITS

Calibration Kits

PRECISION COMPONENT KITS

Two types of precision-component kits are available: calibration and
verification.

Calibration kits contain components used to identify and separate error sources inherent in microwave test setups. The Model 365X Calibration Kits contain all of the precision components and tools required
to calibrate the VNA for 12-term error-corrected measurements of test
devices with the connector type specified. When applicable, components are included for calibrating both male and female test ports. The
kits also support calibrations with broadband loads.
Each of the available calibration kits are described in detail in the Vector Network Analyzer Mechanical Calibration Kits Reference Manual,
PN: 10410-00278. A typical Model 365X Calibration Kit is shown in
Figure 1-2. The following is a list of available 365X Calibration Kits:

Figure 1-2.

Typical Model 365X
Calibration Kit

q Model 3650A SMA/3.5 mm Calibration Kit
q Model 3651A GPC–7 Calibration Kit
q Model 3652A K Connector Calibration Kit
q Model 3653A Type N Calibration Kit
q Model 3654D V Connector® Calibration Kit

Verification Kits

The Model 366X Verification kits consist of precision components of
the connector type specified with characteristics traceable to the
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). This type of
kit is usually kept in the metrology laboratory where it provides the
most dependable means of checking system accuracy. Each of these
kits contains a disk or USB drive providing factory-measured coefficient or test data for each component, allowing for comparison with
customer-measured data.
A typical Model 365X Verification Kit is shown in Figure 1-3. The following is a list of available 366X Verification Kits:

Figure 1-3.

Typical Model 366X
Verification Kit

q Model 3666 3.5 mm Verification Kit
q Model 3667 GPC–7 Verification Kit
q Model 3668 K Connector® Verification Kit
q Model 3669/3669B V Connector® Verification Kits

37xxxE OM

1-5

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

1-8
1-9

1-6

GENERAL INFORMATION

PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS

System performance specifications are provided in Appendix C.

PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE

The 37xxxE VNA system does not require any preventive
maintenance.

37xxxE OM

Chapter 2
Installation
Table of Contents
2-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-2

INITIAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-3

PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Option 4, External SCSI Drive Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2-4

GPIB SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interface Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2-5

SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
GPIB Interface to an External Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-6

ETHERNET SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2-7

EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2-8

RACK MOUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2-9

STORAGE OR SHIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Preparation for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

2-10

SERVICE CENTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Chapter 2
Installation
2-1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides information for the initial inspection and
preparation for use of the 37xxxE Vector Network Analyzer.
Information for interfacing the 37xxxE to the IEEE-488 General
Purpose Interface Bus and reshipment and storage information is also
included.

2-2

INITIAL INSPECTION

Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the container or cushioning material is damaged, retain until the contents of the shipment
have been checked against the packing list and the instrument has
been checked for mechanical and electrical operation.
If the 37xxxE is damaged mechanically, notify your local sales
representative or Anritsu Customer Service. If either the shipping
container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress,
notify the carrier as well as Anritsu. Keep the shipping materials for
the carrier’s inspection.
WARNING
Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment, or use an
equipment cart. There is a risk of back injury, if this equipment is lifted
by one person.

2-3

PREPARATION FOR USE

Except for units with Option 4 (see following page), no initial setup is
required. After unpacking, the 37xxxE is ready for use. The 37xxxE is
equipped with automatic line-power sensing, and will operate with any
of the following line voltages: 100V, 120V, 220V, 240V +5%, –10%,
48–63 Hz, 350 VA. The 37xxxE is intended for Installation Category
(Overvoltage Category) II.
WARNING

When supplying power to this equipment, always use a three-wire
power cable connected to a three-wire power line outlet. If power is supplied without grounding the equipment, there is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal electric shock.

37xxxE OM

2-3

PREPARATION FOR USE

Option 4, Additional SD
Card for Secure
Environments

2-4

INSTALLATION

The 37xxxE is available with a second Secure Digital memory card
(SD Card) for use in secure environments. This allows the VNA to be
shipped with the System Software and Factory Cal Data on both the
standard and additional SD Cards. When the unit requires periodic
calibration, the 2nd SD Card is installed, allowing the VNA to come
out of the secure environment for calibration, while the initial SD
Card (containing proprietary customer data) remains within the secure environment.

37xxxE OM

INSTALLATION

2-4

GPIB SETUP

GPIB SETUP

All functions of the 37xxxE (except power on/off and initialization of
the SD Card) can be controlled remotely by an external computer/controller via the IEEE-488.2 GPIB. The information in this section pertains to interface connections and cable requirements for the rear
panel GPIB connector. Refer to the Model 37xxxE Programming Manual, Anritsu Part Number 10410-00301, for information about remote
operation of the 37xxxE using the GPIB.
The 37xxxE GPIB operates with any IBM XT, AT, or PS/2 compatible
computer/controller equipped with a National Instruments
GPIB-PCII/IIA interface card and software.

Interface Connector

Interface between the 37xxxE and other devices on the GPIB is via a
standard 24-wire GPIB interface cable. For proper operation, order
Anritsu part number 2100-1, -2, -4, or -5 (1, 2, 4, or 0.5 meter length)
cables through your local sales representative. This cable uses a
double-sided connector; one connector face is a plug, the other a
receptacle. These double-function connectors allow parallel connection
of two or more cables to a single instrument connector. The pin
assignments for the rear panel GPIB connector are shown in Figure
B-2, located in Appendix B.

Cable Length Restrictions

The GPIB system can accommodate up to 15 instruments at any one
time. To achieve design performance on the bus, proper timing and
voltage level relationships must be maintained. If either the cable
length between separate instruments or the accumulated cable length
between all instruments is too long, the data and control lines cannot
be driven properly and the system may fail to perform. Cable length
restrictions are as follows:
q No more than 15 instruments may be installed on the bus.
q Total accumulative cable length in meters may not exceed two
times the number of bus instruments or 20 meters—whichever is
less.
NOTE
For low EMI applications, the GPIB cable should be a fully
shielded type, with well-grounded metal-shell connectors. (Use Anritsu 2100-series cables.)

37xxxE OM

2-5

SYSTEM GPIB INTERCONNECTION
INSTALLATION

2-5

SYSTEM GPIB
INTERCONNECTION

GPIB Interface to an
External Plotter

GPIB Addresses

2-6

ETHERNET SETUP AND
INTERCONNECTION

There are two rear panel GPIB IEEE-488 connectors. The IEEE 488.2
connector used to interface the 37xxxE to an external computer/
controller via a standard GPIB cable. The Dedicated GPIB connector is
used to interface to plotters and a second source for multiple source
operation via a standard GPIB cable.
The 37xxxE GPIB interface can be configured to control a suitable
external plotter (refer to Chapter 6, Data Displays). In this mode of
operation, the GPIB is dedicated to this application and only the
37xxxE and the plotter are connected to the GPIB. Standard GPIB
cables are used to interconnect to the plotter.
The 37xxxE leaves the factory with the default GPIB address set to
six. This address may be changed using the GP7 menu (see Appendix
A).
The 37xxxE model requires two IP addresses. One is internal and is
used only by the VNA for internal communication, and the other is the
IP address that can be used externally to communicate with the VNA.
The current implementation requires a continuous internal connection
and IP validity is checked as well as monitored.
The internal IP automatically updates when changes happen to the IP
address. It is highly recommended to allow the VNA to change the
internal IP automatically and retain that IP as long as it is in
operation. If it is required to assign two static IP addresses, then
changing the internal IP address is allowed, but assure that the IP is
valid, and, more importantly, available, especially if the instrument is
connected onto your LAN.
NOTE
Five classes of IP ranges are available: Class A, Class B,
Class C, Class D, and Class E. While only Classes A, B,
and C are commonly used, the VNA will accept any IP in
any range with the exception of reserved IPs. Anritsu
highly recommends IP addresses that are either Private
(Class A) or that belong to your own network. The
following Table shows a quick summary of the classes and
the IP assignments:
Class

2-6

Range

A

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

B

128.1.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

C

192.0.1.1 to 223.255.254.254

D

224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255

E

240.0.0.0 to 254.255.255.254

37xxxE OM

INSTALLATION

ETHERNET SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION

One known inconvenience is the actual assigned IP values do not
refresh automatically on the screen. A quick way to do get them
refreshed is to manually re-access the Network Utilities Menu, which
will then display them correctly.
The 37xxxE can be remotely controlled via a network server and an
Ethernet connection via the standard RJ45 connector on the rear
panel. The 37xxxE software supports the TCP/IP network protocol.
The TCP/IP protocol setup requires the following:
q IP Address: Every computer/electronic device in a TCP/IP network requires an IP address. An IP address has four numbers
(each between 0 and 255) separated by periods. For example:
128.111.122.42 is a valid IP address
q Internal IP: An IP address has four numbers (each between 0
and 255) separated by periods. For example, "128.111.122.42" is a
valid IP address.
q Subnet Mask: The subnet mask distinguishes the portion of the
IP address that is the network ID from the portion that is the
station ID. The subnet mask 255.255.0.0, when applied to the IP
address given above, would identify the network ID as 128.111
and the station ID as 122.42. All stations in the same Local Area
Network (LAN) should have the same network ID but different
station IDs
q Default Gateway: A TCP/IP network can have a gateway to communicate beyond the LAN identified by the network ID. A gateway is a computer or electronic device that is connected to two
different networks and can move TCP/IP data from one network
to the other. A single LAN that is not connected to other LANs
requires a default gateway setting of 0.0.0.0. This (0.0.0.0) is
Lightning’s default gateway setting. If you have a gateway, then
the default gateway would be set to the appropriate value of your
gateway.
NOTE
The default gateway setting is only activated after the system power is recycled.
q Ethernet Address: An Ethernet address is a unique 48-bit value
that identifies a network interface card to the rest of the network. Every network card has a unique ethernet address permanently stored into its memory Inappropriate setting of the Default Gateway IP Address will cause the Lightning system to
appear to be locked up at start up. The instrument will appear to
stop working at the following message:
Application loaded successfully, starting system…

37xxxE OM

2-7

EXTERNAL MONITOR CONNECTOR

2-7

2-8

INSTALLATION

EXTERNAL MONITOR
CONNECTOR

The rear panel External Monitor connector allows the internal display
information of the 37xxxE to be connected to an external VGA monitor
(either color or monochrome). The pinout of this 15-pin Type D
connector is shown in Figure B-5, located in Appendix B.

RACK MOUNT

To install the Option 1 Rack Mount rails, refer to the below-listed procedure.
Step 1.

Disconnect the line cord and any other attachments from the instrument.

Step 2.

Carefully place the instrument on its top (bottom-side up) on a secure
and stable work surface.

Step 3.

Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two handles or four bumper
assemblies (and tilt bail, if installed) from the front of the unit, and
the four feet at the rear (Figure 2-1). Save the screws for later use.

Figure 2-1.

Removing Cover

NOTES
q The green-headed screws are metric threads and must be used
only in the appropriately tapped holes
q The feet, handles, and bumpers are not reused in this application
Step 4.

2-8

Remove the center screws from the rear of the left and right side covers.

37xxxE OM

INSTALLATION
RACK MOUNT

Step 5.

Remove the two side carrying handle screws (if so equipped) located
under the plastic handle ends.

Step 6.

Remove the left and right side covers. These side covers are not reused
in this application.

Step 7.

Install the two Rack Mount Handles using the green-headed screws
removed earlier.
Refer to Figure 2-2, on the following page, for the remainder of the
assembly procedure.

Step 8.

Secure the new left cover (2) from this retrofit kit to the left side chassis of the instrument by installing the two center screws (6) to the top
and bottom and the previously removed center screw at the rear of the
left cover.

Step 9.

Secure the slide assembly (4) to the left cover by installing the four
mounting screws (5) to the left chassis.

Figure 2-2.

37xxxE OM

Mounting Rails

2-9

STORAGE OR SHIPMENT

INSTALLATION

Step 10.

Secure the new right cover (3) from this retrofit kit to the right side
chassis of the instrument by installing the center screw (6) through
the center of the right side cover and the previously removed center
screw at the rear of the right side cover.

Step 11.

Secure the slide assembly (4) to the right cover by installing the four
mounting screws (5) to the right chassis.
This completes the installation of the slide assembly.

2-9

STORAGE OR SHIPMENT

The following paragraphs describe the procedure for preparing the
37xxxE for storage or shipment.

Preparation for Storage

Preparing the 37xxxE for storage consists of cleaning the unit, packing
the inside with moisture-absorbing desiccant crystals, and storing the
unit in a temperature environment that is maintained between –40
and +70 degrees centigrade (–40 to 156 degrees Fahrenheit).

Preparation for Shipment

To provide maximum protection against damage in transit, the 37xxxE
should be repackaged in the original shipping container. If this
container is no longer available and the 37xxxE is being returned to
Anritsu for repair, advise Anritsu Customer Service; they will send a
new shipping container free of charge. In the event neither of these
two options is possible, instructions for packaging and shipment are
given below.
Use a Suitable Container
Obtain a corrugated cardboard carton with a 275-pound test strength.
This carton should have inside dimensions of no less than six inches
larger than the instrument dimensions to allow for cushioning.
Protect the Instrument
Surround the instrument with polyethylene sheeting to protect the finish.
Cushion the Instrument
Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or
urethane foam between the carton and the instrument. Provide at
least three inches of dunnage on all sides.
Seal the Container
Seal the carton by using either shipping tape or an industrial stapler.
Address the Container
If the instrument is being returned to Anritsu for service, mark the
Anritsu address and your return address on the carton in one or more
prominent locations.

2-10

37xxxE OM

Chapter 3
Network Analyzers,
A Primer
Table of Contents
3-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3-2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Source Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Test Set Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Analyzer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3-3

NETWORK ANALYZERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Chapter 3
Network Analyzers,
A Primer
3-1

INTRODUCTION

This section provides front panel operating and measurement application information and data. It includes discussions on the following topics:
q System description
q General discussion about network analyzers
q Basic measurements and how to make them
q Error correction
q General discussion on test sets

3-2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Model 37xxxE Vector Network Analyzer System measures the
magnitude and phase characteristics of networks, amplifiers,
attenuators, and antennas. It compares the incident signal that leaves
the analyzer with either the signal that is transmitted through the
test device or the signal that is reflected from its input. Figure 3-1 and
Figure 3-2 illustrate the types of measurements that the 37xxxE can
make.
INCIDENT

TEST
DEVICE

TRANSMITTED

Gain (dB)
Insertion Loss (dB)
Insertion Phase (degrees)
Transmission Coefficients (S12, S21)
Separation of Transmission
Components (Real and Imaginary)
Electrical Length (m)
Electrical Delay (s)
Deviation from Linear Phase (degrees)
Group Delay (s)

Figure 3-1.

37xxxE OM

Transmission Measurements

3-3

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

INCIDENT

TEST
DEVICE
TERMINATION

REFLECTED

Return Loss (dB)
Reflection Coefficients (S11, S22)
Reflection Coefficients vs Distance
(Fourier Transform)
Impedance (R + j X)
SWR

Figure 3-2.

Reflection Measurements

The 37xxxE is a self-contained, fully integrated measurement system
that includes an optional time domain capability. The system
hardware consists of the following:
q Analyzer
q Precision components required for calibration and performance
verification
q Optional use of Anritsu 67XXB, 68XXXA/B/C, or 69XXXA/B as a
second source
The 37xxxE internal system modules perform the following functions:

3-4

Source Module

This module provides the stimulus to the device under test (DUT). The
frequency range of the source and test set modules establish the
frequency range of the system. The frequency stability of the source is
an important factor in the accuracy (especially phase accuracy) of the
network analyzer. Hence, the 37xxxE always phase locks the source to
an internal 10 MHz crystal reference.

Test Set Module

The test set module routes the stimulus signal to the DUT and samples the reflected and transmitted signals. The type of connector used
is important, as is the “Auto Reversing” feature. Auto Reversing means
that it applies the stimulus signal in both the forward and reverse direction. The direction is reversed automatically. This saves you from
having to reverse the test device physically to measure all four scattering parameters (S-parameters). Frequency conversion (1st and 2nd
IFs) occurs in the test set module.

Analyzer Module

The analyzer module down-converts, receives, and interprets the 3rd
IF signal for phase and magnitude data. It then displays the results of
this analysis on a large, 190 mm (7-1/2 inch) diagonal color display.
This display can show all four S-parameters simultaneously. In addition to the installed display, you can also view the measurement results on an external color monitor.

37xxxE OM

NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

3-3

NETWORK ANALYZERS

NETWORK ANALYZERS

We will begin this discussion with a subject familiar to most Anritsu
customers: scalar network analysis. After showing comparisons, we
will proceed to the fundamentals of network analyzer terminology and
techniques. This discussion serves as an introduction to topics presented in greater detail later in this section. This discussion will touch
on new concepts that include the following:
q Reference Delay
q S-parameters: what they are and how they are displayed
q Complex Impedance and Smith Charts
Scalar Analyzer Comparison
Network Analyzers do everything that scalar analyzers do except display absolute power. In addition, they add the ability to measure the
phase characteristics of microwave devices and allow greater dynamic
range.

SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZERS

MICROWAVE
SIGNAL

MICROWAVE
DETECTOR

DETECTOR
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE

DETECTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE IS PROPORTIONAL
TO SIGNAL AMPLITUDE.

Figure 3-3.

37xxxE OM

Scalar Analyzer
Detection

If all a Network Analyzer added was the capability for measuring
phase characteristics, its usefulness would be limited. While phase
measurements are important in themselves, it is the availability of
this phase information that unlocks many new features for complex
measurements. These features include Smith Charts, Time Domain,
and Group Delay. Phase information also allows greater accuracy
through vector error correction of the measured signal.
First, let us look at scalar network analyzers (SNAs). SNAs measure
microwave signals by converting them to a DC voltage using a diode
detector (Figure 3-3). This DC voltage is proportional to the magnitude
of the incoming signal. The detection process, however, ignores any
information regarding the phase of the microwave signal.
In a network analyzer, access is needed to both the magnitude and
phase of a microwave signal. There are several different ways to perform the measurement. The method Anritsu employs (called Harmonic
Sampling or Harmonic Mixing) is to down-convert the signal to a lower
intermediate frequency (IF). This signal can then be measured directly
by a tuned receiver. The tuned receiver approach gives the system
greater dynamic range. The system is also much less sensitive to interfering signals, including harmonics.

3-5

NETWORK ANALYZERS

A NETWORK ANALYZER IS A TUNED RECEIVER
INTERMEDIATE
FREQUENCY (IF)

MICROWAVE
SIGNAL

TUNABLE
LOCAL
OSCILLATOR
• GREATER DYNAMIC RANGE
• LESS SENSIVITY TO INTERFERING SIGNALS

Figure 3-4.

NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

Vector Network Analyzer Basics
The network analyzer is a tuned receiver (Figure 3-4, left). The
microwave signal is down converted into the passband of the IF. To
measure the phase of this signal, we must have a reference to compare
it with. If the phase of a signal is 90 degrees, it is 90 degrees different
from the reference signal (Figure 3-5, left). The network analyzer
would read this as –90 degrees, since the test signal is delayed by 90
degrees with respect to the reference signal.
This phase reference can be obtained by splitting off some of the
microwave signal before the measurement (Figure 3-7, below).
REFERENCE
SIGNAL

Network Analyzer is
a Tuned Receiver

PHASE
DETECTOR

TEST
SIGNAL

MICROWAVE
SOURCE

PHASE MEASUREMENT
90

SPLITTER

REFERENCE
SIGNAL
DUT

TEST
SIGNAL
TIME

Figure 3-5.

Signals with a
90 Degree Phase
Difference

REFERENCE
SIGNAL

PHASE
DETECTOR

TEST
SIGNAL

Figure 3-7.

Splitting the Microwave Signal

The phase of the microwave signal after it has passed through the device under test (DUT) is then compared with the reference signal. A
network analyzer test set automatically samples the reference signal,
so no external hardware is needed.
Let us consider for a moment that you remove the DUT and substitute
a length of transmission line (Figure 3-6, left). Note that the path
length of the test signal is longer than that of the reference signal.
Now let us see how this affects our measurement.

MICROWAVE
SOURCE
SPLITTER
LONGER
PATH
LENGTH

Figure 3-6.

3-6

Split Signal where
a Length of Line
Replaces the DUT

37xxxE OM

NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

REFERENCE
SIGNAL

TEST
SIGNAL

PHASE
DETECTOR

MICROWAVE
SOURCE
SPLITTER
LONGER BY
ONE WAVELENGTH
LENGTH (360 degrees)

Figure 3-8.

TEST
SIGNAL
PHASE
DETECTOR

MICROWAVE
SOURCE
SPLITTER
SAME PATH
LENGTH -BUTWAVELENGTH
IS NOW SHORTER

1.1 WAVELENGTHS = 396 degrees

MEASURED PHASE

Assume that we are making a measurement at 1 GHz and that the
difference in path-length between the two signals is exactly 1
wavelength. This means that test signal is lagging the reference signal
by 360 degrees (Figure 3-8). We cannot really tell the difference
between one sine wave maxima and the next (they are all identical), so
the network analyzer would measure a phase difference of 0 degrees.
Now consider that we make this same measurement at 1.1 GHz. The
frequency is higher by 10 percent so therefore the wavelength is
shorter by 10 percent. The test signal path length is now 0.1
wavelength longer than that of the reference signal (Figure 3-9). This
test signal is:
1.1 X 360 = 396 degrees

Split Signal where
Path Length Differs
by Exactly One
Wavelength

REFERENCE
SIGNAL

Figure 3-9.

NETWORK ANALYZERS

Split Signal where
Path Length is
Longer than One

This is 36 degrees different from the phase measurement at 1 GHz.
The network analyzer will display this phase difference as –36 degrees.
The test signal at 1.1 GHz is delayed by 36 degrees more than the test
signal at 1 GHz.
You can see that if the measurement frequency is 1.2 GHz, we will get
a reading of –72 degrees, –108 degrees for 1.3 GHz, etc. (Figure 3-10).
There is an electrical delay between the reference and test signals. For
this delay we will use the common industry term of reference delay.
You also may hear it called phase delay. In older network analyzers
you had to equalize the length of the reference arm with that of the
test arm to make an appropriate measurement of phase vs. frequency.
To measure phase on a DUT, we want to remove this
phase-change-vs.-frequency due to changes in the electrical length.
This will allow us to view the actual phase characteristics. These characteristics may be much smaller than the phase change due to
electrical length difference.

+180
+90

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
0

FREQUENCY,
GHz

-90
-180

Figure 3-10.

37xxxE OM

Electrical Delay

3-7

NETWORK ANALYZERS

NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

MEASURED PHASE

There are two ways of accomplishing this. The most obvious way is to
insert a length of line into the reference signal path to make both
paths of equal length (Figure 3-11, below). With perfect transmission
lines and a perfect splitter, we would then measure a constant phase
as we change the frequency. The problem using this approach is that
we must change the line length with each measurement setup.
+180

REFERENCE
SIGNAL

+90
0

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

FREQUENCY,
GHz

PHASE
DETECTOR

TEST
SIGNAL

-90

SUBTRACT LINEAR
PHASE FROM
MEASURED PHASE

-180

MICROWAVE
SOURCE

SPLITTER

Figure 3-12.

BOTH LINE
LENGTHS
NOW EQUAL

Phase Difference
Increases Linearly
with Frequency

RESULTANT PHASE

Figure 3-11.

+2

+1

1.3 1.4

1.1
0

-1

1.2

FREQUENCY,
GHz

Split Signal where Paths are of Equal Length

Another approach is to handle the path length difference in software.
Figure 3-12 (left) displays the phase-vs.-frequency of a device. This
device has different effects on the output phase at different
frequencies. Because of these differences, we do not have a perfectly
linear phase response. We can easily detect this phase deviation by
compensating for the linear phase. The size of the phase difference
increases linearly with frequency so we can modify the phase display
to eliminate this delay.

-2

Figure 3-13.

3-8

Resultant Phase
with Path
Length

The 37xxxE offers automatic reference delay compensation with the
push of a button. Figure 3-13 (left) shows the resultant measurement
when we compensate path length. In a system application you can
usually correct for length differences; however, the residual phase
characteristics are critical.

37xxxE OM

NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

NETWORK ANALYZERS

Network Analyzer Measurements

PORT 1

FORWARD
REFLECTION

Figure 3-14.

PORT 2

DUT

REVERSE
REFLECTION

Forward and
Reverse
Measurements

S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION

PORT 1

S11 FORWARD
REFLECTION

PORT 2

DUT

S22 REVERSE
REFLECTION

Now let us consider measuring the DUT. Consider a two port device;
that is, a device with a connector on each end. What measurements
would be of interest?
First, we could measure the reflection characteristics at either end
with the other end terminated into 50 ohms. If we designate one end
as the normal place for the input that gives a reference. We can then
define the reflection characteristics from the reference end as forward
reflection, and those from the other end as reverse reflection
(Figure 3-14).
Second, we can measure the forward and reverse transmission
characteristics. However, instead of saying “forward,” “reverse,”
“reflection,” and “transmission” all the time, we use a shorthand. That
is all that S-parameters are, a shorthand! The “S” stands for
scattering. The second number is the device port that the signal is
being injected into, while the first is the device port that the signal is
leaving. S11, therefore, is the signal being injected into port 1 relative
to the signal leaving port 1. The four scattering parameters
(Figure 3-15) are:
q S11 Forward Reflection
q S21 Forward Transmission
q S22 Reverse Reflection

S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION

Figure 3-15.

S-parameters

PHASE

0

Figure 3-16.

37xxxE OM

S-parameters can be displayed in many ways. An S-parameter consists
of a magnitude and a phase. We can display the magnitude in dB, just
like a scalar network analyzer. We often call this term log magnitude.
We can display phase as “linear phase” (Figure 3-16). As discussed
earlier, we can’t tell the difference between one cycle and the next.
Therefore, after going through 360 degrees we are back to where we
began. We can display the measurement from –180 to +180 degrees.
The –180 to +180 approach is more common. It keeps the display
discontinuity removed from the important 0 degree area used as the
phase reference.

+180

-180

q S12 Reverse Transmission

FREQUENCY

Linear
Phase-with-frequen
cy Waveform

3-9

NETWORK ANALYZERS

There are several ways in which all the information can be displayed
on one trace. One method is a polar display (Figure 3-17). The radial
parameter (distance from the center) is magnitude. The rotation
around the circle is phase. We sometimes use polar displays to view
transmission measurements, especially on cascaded devices (devices in
series). The transmission result is the addition of the phase and log
magnitude (dB) information of each device’s polar display.

POLAR DISPLAY
90

180

NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

0

-90

Figure 3-17.

Polar Display

As we have discussed, the signal reflected from a DUT has both magnitude and phase. This is because the impedance of the device has
both a resistive and a reactive term of the form r+jx. We refer to the r
as the real or resistive term, while we call x the imaginary or reactive
term. The j, which we sometimes denote as i, is an imaginary number.
It is the square root of –1. If x is positive, the impedance is inductive; if
x is negative, the impedance is capacitive.
The size and polarity of the reactive component x is important in impedance matching. The best match to a complex impedance is the complex conjugate. This complex-sounding term simply means an impedance with the same value of r and x, but with x of opposite polarity.
This term is best analyzed using a Smith Chart (Figure 3-18), which is
a plot of r and x.

SMITH CHART

INDUCTIVE
50

CAPACITIVE

Figure 3-18.

3-10

Smith Chart

To display all the information on a single S-parameter requires one or
two traces, depending upon the format we want. A very common
requirement is to view forward reflection on a Smith Chart (one trace)
while observing forward transmission in Log Magnitude and Phase
(two traces). Let us see how to accomplish this in the 37xxxE.
The 37xxxE has four channels. Each channel can display a complete
S-parameter in any format on either one or two traces. All four
S-parameters can be seen simultaneously in any desired format. A
total of eight traces can be viewed at the same time. While this is a lot
of information to digest, the 37xxxE’s large color display makes
recognizing and analyzing the data surprisingly easy.

37xxxE OM

NETWORK ANALYZERS, A PRIMER

NETWORK ANALYZERS

Another important parameter we can measure when phase information is available is group delay. In linear devices, the phase change
through the DUT is linear-with-frequency. Thus, doubling the frequency also doubles the phase change. An important measurement, especially for communications system users, is the rate of
change-of-phase-vs.-frequency (group delay). If the rate of
phase-change-vs.-frequency is not constant, the DUT is nonlinear. This
nonlinearity can create distortion in communications systems.
Measurement Error Correction
Since we can measure microwave signals in both magnitude and
phase, it is possible to correct for six major error terms:
q Source Test Port Match
q Load Test Port Match
q Directivity
q Isolation
q Transmission Frequency Response
q Reflection Frequency Response
We can correct for each of these six error terms in both the forward
and reverse directions, hence the name 12-term error correction. Since
12-term error correction requires both forward and reverse measurement information, the test set must be reversing. “Reversing” means
that it must be able to apply the measurement signal in either the forward or reverse direction.

MAGNITUDE AND PHASE OF
EACH ERROR SIGNAL IS MEASURED

MAG

PHASE

THEN THE RESULTANT VECTOR IS
APPLIED MATHEMATICALLY, HENCE
VECTOR ERROR CORRECTION

Figure 3-19.

37xxxE OM

Magnitude and
Phase

To accomplish this error correction, we measure the magnitude and
phase of each error signal (Figure 3-19). Magnitude and phase information appear as a vector that is mathematically applied to the measurement signal. This process is termed vector error correction.
Summary
A vector network analyzer is similar to a scalar network analyzer. The
major difference is that it adds the capability for measuring phase as
well as amplitude. With phase measurements comes scattering, or
S-parameters, which are a shorthand method for identifying forward
and reverse transmission and reflection characteristics. The ability to
measure phase introduces two new displays, polar and Smith Chart. It
also adds vector error correction to the measurement trace. With vector error correction, errors introduced by the measurement system are
compensated for and measurement uncertainty is minimized. Phase
measurements also add the capability for measuring group delay,
which is the rate of change-of-phase vs. frequency (group delay). All in
all, using a network analyzer provides for making a more complete
analysis of your test device.

3-11/3-12

Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation
Table of Contents
4-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-2

KEY-GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-3

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

4-4

SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

4-5

MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP

4-6

CHANNELS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

4-7

DISPLAY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

4-8

ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

4-9

HARD COPY KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4-10

SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

4-11

MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

4-12

STORAGE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Disk Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Disk File Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Formatting a Data File Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Copying Data Files From Drive to Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Recovering From Drive Write/Read Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-13

COMMAND LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Create Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
List Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Change Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Delete Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Remove Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Copy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

24

Data Entry

Menu

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

MHz

X1

ns

cm

3
GHz 10
us

m

23

Enter
-3
kHz 10
ps mm

0

.

1

-

Channels

Markers/Limits

Channel
Menu

Limits

Clear
Ret Loc

Measurement

Ch 1

Ch 2

Ch 3

Ch 4

Setup
Menu

Data
Points

22
Readout
Marker

Marker
Menu

Hold

Display

Domain

Appl

Enhancement

Hard Copy

Menu
GPIB

System State

Calibration

Graph
Type

Set
Scale

Auto
Scale

Option
Menu

S
Params

Ref
Plane

Trace
Memory

Avg/
Smooth
Menu

Video
IF BW

21

Remote
Talk

2

Listen

Begin
Cal

Utility
Menu

Save/
Recall
Menu

Apply
Cal

Start
Print

Stop
Print

Power

Port 1

!

+24 dBm

!

+27 dBm

a

1

Port 2

+27 dBm

a

!

+24 dBm

2

CAUTION

CAUTION

+30 dBm MAX
40 VDC MAX

AVOID STATIC

Port 1
Source

!

!

+20 dBm

+30 dBm MAX

Port 2
Source

+20 dBm

40 VDC MAX

Port 1

DISCHARGE

b1
!

Bias Input

AVOID STATIC

DISCHARGE

b2
!

+30 dBm

Port 2

+30 dBm

5

!

6
Model 37xxxE Front Panel

Average

Local Lockout

!

Figure 4-1.

Trace
Smooth

SRQ

3
4

Default
Program

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14 15

16

17

0.5A MAX

18

19

20

Chapter 4
Front Panel Operation
4-1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the front panel keys, controls, and menus. The
chapter is organized into an overall description of the front panel
key-groups and detailed descriptions of individual keys within the
key-groups.

4-2

KEY-GROUPS

The following pages provide descriptions of the front panel key-groups
illustrated in Figure 4-1 on the previous page.
Index 1.

LCD display: Displays any or all of the four measurement channels, plus menus.

Index 2.

Power: Turns the 37xxxE on and off. When on, the
operating program runs a self test then recalls the
parameters and functions in effect when previously
powered down.

Index 3.

GPIB Indicators:
Remote: Lights when the 37xxxE switches to
remote (GPIB) control. It remains lit until the unit
returns to local control.
Talk: Lights when you address the 37xxxE to talk
and remains lit until unaddressed.
Listen: Lights when you address the 37xxxE to
listen and remains lit until unaddressed.
SRQ: Lights when the 37xxxE sends a Service
Requests (SRQ) to the external controller. The LED
remains lit until the 37xxxE receives a serial poll or
until the controller resets the SRQ function.
Local Lockout: Lights when a local lockout
message is received. The LED remains lit until the
message is rescinded. When lit, you cannot return
the 37xxxE to local control via the front panel.

37xxxE OM

4-3

KEY-GROUPS

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Index 4.

System State Keys: (Refer to section 4-10,
page 4-33, for details and menu flow diagrams.)
Default Program: Resets the front panel to the factory-preset state and displays Menu SU1 or SU3
(Appendix A). Pressing this key in conjunction with
the “0” or “1” key resets certain internal memories
and front panel key states (refer to sections 4-5 and
4-10).
NOTE
Use of the Default Program key will destroy
front panel and calibration setup data, unless they have been saved to disk.
Utility Menu: Displays the first in a series of menus
that let you perform storage and other utility-type
functions and operations.

Index 5.

Port 1 Test Connector: Provides an input test connection for the device-under-test (DUT).

Index 6.

Port 1 Source Loop: Provides for inserting additional amplification on Port 1 before the coupler.

Index 7.

Calibration Keys: (Refer to section 4-3, page 4-10,
for details and menu flow diagrams.)
Begin Cal: Calls up the first in a sequence of
menus that guide you through a measurement calibration. Refer to section 4-3 for a detailed discussion
of the calibration keys, indicators, and menus.
Apply Cal: Turns on and off the applied error correction and tune mode.

4-4

Index 8.

a1 Loop: Provides direct access to Reference A
channel on Port 1 over the entire frequency range.
Refer to the front panel for damage levels.

Index 9.

a2 Loop: Provides direct access to Reference B
channel on Port 2 over the entire frequency range.
Refer to the front panel for damage levels.

Index 10.

b1 Loop: Provides direct access to Test A channel
on Port 1 over the entire frequency range. Refer to
the front panel for damage levels.

Index 11.

b2 Loop: Provides direct access to Test B channel
on Port 2 over the entire frequency range. Refer to
the front panel for damage levels.

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

KEY-GROUPS

Index 12.

Save/Recall Menu Key: Displays the first of several
menus that let you save the current calibration or
front panel setup or recall a previously saved calibration or setup. Refer to section 4-4, page 4-20, for
menu flow diagram.

Index 13.

Markers/Limits Keys: (Refer to section 4-11,
page 4-36, for details and menu flow diagrams.)
Marker Menu: Displays the first in a series of
menus that let you set and manipulate marker frequencies, times, and distances.
Readout Marker: Displays a menu that lists all of
the active markers. If no markers are active, the
marker menu is displayed.
Limits: Displays one of the menus that let you manipulate the limit lines.

Index 14.

Port 2 Source: Provides for inserting additional
amplification on Port 2 before the coupler.

Index 15.

Hard Copy Keys: (Refer to section 4-9, page 4-31,
for details and menu flow diagrams.)
Menu: Displays option menus that let you define
what will happen each time you press the Start
Print key. The displayed menu also selects disk I/O
operations.
Start Print: Tells the printer or plotter to start output based on the current selections.
Stop Print: Immediately stops printing the data,
clears the print buffer, and sends a form-feed command to the printer.

Index 16.

37xxxE OM

Port 2 Test Connector: Provides an input test connection for the device-under-test (DUT).

4-5

KEY-GROUPS

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Index 17.

Display Keys: (Refer to section 4-7, page 4-25, for
details and menu flow diagrams.)
Graph Type: Displays the two menus that let you
choose the graph type for the active channel.
Set Scale: Displays the appropriate scaling menu,
based on the graph type for the active channel.
Auto Scale: Automatically scales the active channel for optimum viewing.
S Params: Displays Menu SP (Appendix A), which
lets you choose between S11, S12, S21, or S22. You
may display the same parameter on two or more
channels.
Ref Plane: Displays the first of two menus that let
you set the reference plane for the active channel in
time or distance. For a correct distance readout, you
must set the dielectric constant to the correct value.
Refer to the discussion in menu RD2 (Appendix A).
Trace Memory: Displays the menus that let you do
any of the following. (1) Store the measured data in
memory. (2) View the stored data. (3) Add, subtract,
multiply, or divide the measured data from the
stored data (normalize to the stored memory). (4)
View both the measured and the stored data simultaneously on the active channel. (5) Store/Recall
saved data to disk. Four memories exist—one for
each channel. This lets you normalize the data in
each channel independently. The LED on this button lights when the active channel is displaying
memory data or measurement data normalized to
memory.

Index 18.

Bias Input Connectors:
Port 1: Provides for supplying a bias voltage for the
Port 1 input.
Port 2: Provides for supplying a bias voltage for the
Port 2 input.

4-6

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Index 19.

KEY-GROUPS

Enhancement Keys: (Refer to section 4-8,
page 4-29 for details and menu flow diagrams.)
Option Menu: Displays a series of menus showing
the choice of optional features.
Video IF BW: Displays a menu that lets you chose
between 10 kHz, 1 kHz, 100 Hz, or 10 Hz intermediate frequency (IF) bandwidth filters.
Avg/Smooth Menu: Displays a menu that lets you
enter values for Averaging and Smoothing.
Trace Smooth: Turns the trace smoothing function
on and off.
Average: Turns the average function on and off.

Index 20.

USB Connector: Provides a USB connector used to
store selected front panel setups and calibrations.
NOTE
The USB interface CANNOT be used for
Printers and other USB peripherals. Refer
to Section 4-12 for storage information.

37xxxE OM

4-7

KEY-GROUPS

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Index 21.

Channels Keys: (Refer to section 4-6, page 4-24, for
details and menu flow diagrams.)
Channel Menu: Displays a menu that lets you select the format for the number of channels displayed.
Ch 1: Makes Channel 1 the active channel. The active channel is the one acted on by the keys in the
Display section. Only one channel can be active at
any one time.
Ch 2: Makes Channel 2 the active channel.
Ch 3: Makes Channel 3 the active channel.
Ch 4: Makes Channel 4 the active channel.

Index 22.

Measurement Keys: (Refer to section 4-5, page 4-21
for details and menu flow diagrams.)
Setup Menu: Displays the first of several menus
that let you select functions affecting measurements.
Data Points: Displays a menu that lets you select
between 1601, 801, 401, 201, 101, or 51 data points.
Hold: Toggles the instrument in and out of the hold
mode; or it triggers a sweep, depending on the function selected in menu SU4 (Appendix A).
Domain: Displays the first in a series of menus that
let you set the Time Domain display parameters.
(This key is only active if your 37xxxE is equipped
with the Time Domain option.)
• If already in the Domain menus, pressing this

key will return to the first menu in the sequence.
• If in the Domain menus and another (non-time

domain) menu is displayed by pushing a menu
key, the last displayed domain menu redisplays
when the Domain key is next pressed.
Applications Menu: Displays the first in a series of
menus that provide instructions for adapter removal
and gain compression.

4-8

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Index 23.

KEY-GROUPS

Data Entry Keys:
Rotary Knob: Used to alter measurement values
for the active parameter (Start Frequency, Stop Frequency, Offset, etc.).
Keypad: Provides for entering values for the active
parameter. The active parameter is the one to which
the menu cursor is pointing.
MHz/X1/ns/cm: Terminates a value entered on the
keypad in the units shown—that is; megahertz for
frequency, unity for dimensionless or angle entries,
nanoseconds for time, or centimeters for length.
GHz/103/ms/m: Terminates a value entered on the
keypad in the units shown—that is; gigahertz for
frequency, 1´103 power for dimensionless or angle
entries, microseconds for time, or meters for length.
kHz/10-3/ps/mm: Terminates a value entered on the
keypad in the units shown—that is; kilohertz for
frequency, 1´10-3 for dimensionless or angle entries,
picoseconds for time, or millimeters for length.
• Clear/Ret Loc: Local (Non-GPIB) Mode: (1) The

key clears entries not yet terminated by one of
the terminator keys above, which allows the previously displayed values to redisplay. Or (2) the
key turns off the displayed menu and expands
the data area to fill the entire screen, if you have
not made any keypad entries needing termination.
• GBIB Mode: The key returns the instrument to

local (front panel) control, unless the controller
has sent a local lockout message (LLO) over the
bus.
Index 24.

Menu Keys:
Arrow Keys: Moves the menu cursor up and down
to select items appearing in the menu area of the
LCD.
Enter: Implements the menu selection chosen using
the arrow keys.

37xxxE OM

4-9

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

4-3

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The Calibration keys (Begin Cal and Apply Cal, below) are described
below. The calibration menus are diagramed according to the method
of calibration performed: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM or LRL/LRM.
The menu sequencing is complex and looping and can be said to have
two parts: setup and calibration. The setup flow for the four calibration methods is diagramed in Figures 4-3 through 4-6. Each setup flow
chart leads to the main calibration sequence, which is diagramed in
Figure 4-6. A full description of each menu is provided in Appendix A,
where the menus are arranged in alphabetical order by call letter (C1,
C2, C3, etc).

CALIBRATION
KEY-GROUP

Begin Cal Key: This key displays a menu that lets you initiate the
calibration sequence. That is, to begin a sequence of steps that corrects
for errors inherent in a measurement setup.
Apply Cal Key: This key displays a menu (below) that lets you turn
on and off the error correction that may be applied to the displayed
channel(s) using the currently valid error-correction indicator. Additionally, the menu lets you turn the tune mode on and off and change
the number of forward sweeps between reverse sweeps (or reverse
sweeps between forward sweeps).
NOTE
Pressing the Clear key while in a calibration setup or sequencing will let you abort the calibration and return to
the first setup menu. Pressing the Setup Menu key will do
the same, but without requesting confirmation.

MENU CAL_APPLIED
.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

APPLY
CALIBRATION
FULL 12-TERM
(S11, S21
X22, S12

Begin
Cal

Apply
Cal

APPLY ON (OFF)
CALIBRATION
TUNE MODE ON (OFF)
NO. OF FWD (REV)
SWEEPS BETWEEN
REV (FWD) SWEEPS
XXXXX SWEEPS
(XXXXX (REMAINING)
PRESS 
TO TURN ON/OFF
PRESS 
TO TURN ON/OFF

Figure 4-2.

4-10

Calibration Key Group Menu

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

Standard Calibration Setup Flow—Description
1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C11.
2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of
the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME
DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C
then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3 or C3D.
3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow
returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made.
4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3 and C3D are the initial
selection set and are essentially the same for all four calibration
types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM.
5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3 or C3D are, for the most
part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3 or C3D depends upon
the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL or MICROSTRIP. For
the Standard Calibration, the WAVEGUIDE selection in Menu
C11A is not used.

37xxxE OM

4-11

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

M E N U
M E N U
M E N U
B e g in
C a l

C 1 1

B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N
K E E P E X IS T IN G
C A L D A T A
R E P E A T
P R E V IO U S C A L

N E X T C A L S T E P
T o M e n u
S U 1 /S U 3 *
T o C a l
S e q **

C A L M E T H O D
S T A N D A R D

S O L T (S T A N D A R D )

S S S T (T R IP L E
O F F S E T S H O R T )

T R A N S M IS S IO N
L IN E T Y P E :
X X X X X X X X

S E L E C T
1 P A T H 2 P O R T
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E
F O R W A R D P A T H
(S 1 1 , S 2 1 )

M E N U

S E
T R A N S
F R E Q R
C A L IB R A
C 5 C

S E L E C T
R E F L E C T IO N O N L Y
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E
P O R T 1 O N L Y
(S 1 1 )
P O R T 2 O N L Y
(S 2 2 )

C 5 B

L E C
M IS
E S P
T IO

T

S IO N
O N S E
N T Y P E

P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
T S

P
P
P

P
T

P T S
T S
T S
T S
T S
S

N E X T C A L S T E P

* Setup Menu SU1/SU3 – See Figure 4-6
** Cal Seq (Calibration Sequence) – See Figure 4-5
*** Reflection Pairing Menu C13A or C13B – See Figure 4-4

P R E V IO U S M E N U

R E F L E C T IO N
P A IR IN G
X X X X X X

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R T U R N O N /O F F

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

W 1 -C O N N (M )
W 1 -C O N N (F )
S M A (M )
S M A (F )
G P C -3 .5 (M )
G P C -3 .5 (F )

L O A D T Y P E
X X X X X X X X

C

C 5 D
M E N U

M E N U

IN C L U D E
IS O L A T IO N
(S T A N D A R D )

C .W .
(1 P O IN T )

C 2 C

N F R
(2
P O

H A R M O N IC C A L
F O R T IM E D O M A IN

E
S T O
T IN
O IN
X X X
F R E

P
T S
Q

N E X T C A L S T E P
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

C R E T E
U E N C IE S
1 6 0 1
T S )

T IM E D O M A IN
(H A R M O N IC )

S T A R T (S T E P )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

O V
D
U L
P
X X
P

D IS
E Q
T O
IN

G H z

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U

C 2 D

U T
R ,
N
L R

S T
P O
S E
A N

A R
IN T
L E C
G E

C 1 3

M E N U

L O A D IM P E D A N C E
X X X X X X

IN D IV ID U A L
F R E Q IN S E R T

F IN IS H E D
N E X T C A L S T E P

C 6

M E N U C 1 2 A _ P 1 o r _ P 2

S E L E C T
T Y P E O F L O A D

P O R T X
S H O R T D E V IC E

B R O A D B A N D
F IX E D L O A D

U S E R D E F IN E D
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

S L ID
(M A Y
R E Q
B R O
F IX E

M E N U C 1 7

E N T E R
R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E

E N T E R T H E
IN D U C T A N C E
C O E F F IC IE N T S

IN G L O A D
A L S O
U IR E A
A D B A N D
D L O A D )

T E R M 1 - L 0
-X X X X .X X e -1 2
T E R M 2 - L 1
-X X X X .X X e -2 4
T E R M 3 - L 2
-X X X X .X X e -3 3

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

T E R M 4 - L 3
-X X X X .X X e -4 2
E N T E R T H E
O F F S E T L E N G T H

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

M E N U

T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *
T o C a l
S e q **

C 1 6 A

O F F S E T L E N G T H
X X .X X X X m m

E N T E R
M IC R O S T R IP
P A R A M E T E R S

E N T E R
T H R O U G H L IN E
P A R A M E T E R S

W ID T H O F
S T R IP
X X .X X X X m m

O F F S E T L E N G T H
X X X X X X m m

T H IC K N E S S O F
S U B S T R A T E
X X X X .X X X X m m

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

A

M E N U

Z c
X .X X X p 9

M E N U C 1 6

E F F E C T IV
D IE L E C T R
X .X X
(R E C O M M
1 .0

2 5 M IL K IT
U S E R D E F IN E D

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

E

C 6 A

B R O A D B A N D L O A D
P A R A M E T E R S

S U B S T R A T E
D IE L E C T R IC
X .X X

S E L E C T
M IC R O S T R IP
K IT T O U S E

1 5 M IL K IT

S T A R T C A L
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

M E N U

1 0 M IL K IT

T E S T S IG N A L S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

C 4 B

S P E C IA L (M )
S P E C IA L (F )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

M IC R O S T R IP
P A R A M E T E R S
X X X X X X X X X X X

C L E A R A L L

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

S E L E C T P O R T X
O P E N & S H O R T

T H R O U G H L IN E
IM P E D A N C E
X .X X X X 9

T H R O U G H L IN E
P A R A M E T E R S
X X X X X X X X

F IL L R A N G E
( X X X E N T E R E D )

O F F S E T L E N G T H
+ X X .X X X X m m
C

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U C 2 0

R E F L E C T IO N
P A R IN G

S T O P F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

T E R M 3 -C 2
+ X X X .X X e - 3 6

M O R E

T o M e n u
C 1 3 A o r B ***

P O R T 2
O P E N /S H O R T

N U M B E R O F P T S
X X X P O IN T (S )

2 .4 m m (M )
2 .4 m m (F )

R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E
X X X .X X X 9

P O R T 1
O P E N /S H O R T

IN C R E M E N T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

T E R M 2 -C 1
+ X X X .X X e - 2 7

M O R E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T R S

S T A R T F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

T N C (M )
T N C (F )

E N T E R T H E
O F F S E T L E N G T H

M E N U C 3 D

T ,
S ,
T
"

T E R M 1 -C 0
+ X X .X X e - 1 5

U S E R D E F IN E D

M IC R O S T R IP
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )

D IS C R E T E F IL L
IN P
IN C
T H E
"F IL

7 /1 6 (M )
7 /1 6 (F )

U S E R D E F IN E D

M IX E D
(O P E N -S H O R T
S H O R T -O P E N )

T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *

E N T E R T H E
C A P A C IT A N C E
C O E F F IC IE N T S

T E R M 4 -C 3
+ X X X .X X e - 4 5

M A T C H E D
(O P E N -O P E N
S H O R T -S H O R T )
T o C a l
S e q **

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

T Y P E N (M ) 7 5 W
T Y P E N (F ) 7 5 W

S P E C IA L (M )
S P E C IA L (F )

S E L E C T
R E F L E C T IO N
P A IR IN G

A

N E X T C A L S T E P

N O R M A L
(1 6 0 1 P O IN T S
M A X IM U M

C A L IB R A T IO N
R A N G E

A B
A N
E S
T A
X X
T O

C .W . F R E Q
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z

S E L E C T
C A L IB R A T IO N
D A T A P O IN T S

E X C L U D E
IS O L A T IO N

M E N U

S IN G L E P O IN T
C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N

C 1

P O R T X
O P E N D E V IC E

G P C -7

M E N U

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

C 2 B

M E N U C 1 2 _ P 1 o r _ P 2

T Y P E N (M )
T Y P E N (F )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

T H R O U G H L IN E
P A R A M E T E R S

S T A R T C A L

U S IN G
S T A R T
W IL L R
X X X D A
X X X .X X
T R U E S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

A U T O IN C R O N (O F F )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

P O R T 2 C O N N
X X X X X X X X

Q

S E L E C T P O R T X
C O N N E C T O R T Y P E

V -C O N N (M )
V -C O N N (F )

T E S T S IG N A L S

R E V E R S E P A T H
(S 1 2 )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

P O R T 1 C O N N
X X X X X X X X

,

S E L E C T P O R T X
C O N N E C T O R T Y P E
K -C O N N (M )
K -C O N N (F )

R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E

A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

B O T H P A T H S
(S 2 1 , S 1 2 )

W A S
X X X X X G H z

E Q
E D
R E
X X

M E N U C 4 A _ P 1 o r _ P 2

C 3

S .

F R
E R
T F
.X X

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

R IP
S S
E R >
L E C T

F O R W A R D P A T H
(S 2 1 )

B O T H P O R T S
(S 1 1 , S 2 2 )

4-12

A X
X
X
X
X
P

A X
X
X
X
X
P

M E N U

C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S

X X X
E N T
L A S
X X X

O F D A T A P O IN T S

1 6 0 1 M
8 0 1 M A
4 0 1 M A
2 0 1 M A
1 0 1 M A
5 1 M A X

O F D A T A P O IN T S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

R E V E R S E P A T H
(S 2 2 , S 1 2 )
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U

S T
R E
N T
S E

N U M

M E N U C 4 _ P 1 o r _ P 2

C O A X
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )

N E X T F R E Q .
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

S E L E C T U S E
O F IS O L A T IO N
IN C A L IB R A T IO N
M E N U C 5 A

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

X X X D A T A P O IN T S
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T E P S IZ E
N U M

IN P U T A F R E Q ,
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O IN S E R T

X X X D A T A P O IN T (S )
X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T E P S IZ E

S E T C E N T E R /S P A N

M E N U

F U L L 1 2 -T E R M

R E F L E C T IO N
O N L Y

S E T S T A R T /S T O P

N E X T C A L S T E P

S E L E C T
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E

T R A N S M IS S IO N
F R E Q U E N C Y
R E S P O N S E

S T O P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

C O A X IA L

M IC R O
P
< E
T O

C 5

R A N G E

C 2 A

IN S E R T
IN D IV ID U A L
F R E Q U E N C IE S

C E N T E R
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S P A N
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

W A V E G U ID E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

1 P A T H
2 P O R T

C A L F R E Q

M E N U

R A N G E

S T A R T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

T R A N S M IS S IO N
L IN E T Y P E

T R M

N E X T C A L S T E P

M E N U C 2

1 6 0 1 M
8 0 1 M A
4 0 1 M A
2 0 1 M A
1 0 1 M A
5 1 M A X

L R L /L R M

C H A N G E C A L
M E T H O D A N D
L IN E T Y P E

M E N U

C A L M E T H O D

S S L T (D O U B L E
O F F S E T S H O R T
W IT H L O A D )

A U T O C A L

C A L F R E Q

C 1 1 A

C H A N G E
C A L M E T H O D
A N D L IN E T Y P E

C 2 _ C E N T E R

IM P E D A N C E
X X .X X X 9
IN D U C D A N C E
X X .X X X p H

IC

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

E N D E D
0 )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

A o r B

B

Figure 4-3.

Menu Sequencing, Standard Calibration

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

SSLT and SSST (Offset-Short)
Calibration Setup Flow—Description
1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C13.
2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of
the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME
DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C
then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B.
3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow
returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made.
4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B are the
initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four
calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM.
5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3A, C3C, or C3B are, for
the most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3A, C3C, or
C3B depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL,
WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP.

37xxxE OM

4-13

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

M E N U

M E N U

C 1 1 A

M E N U

T o M e n u
S U 1 /S U 3 *

C 1 1

B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N
B e g in
C a l

T o C a l
S e q **

C A L M E T H O D
S T A N D A R D
T R A N S M IS S IO N
L IN E T Y P E :
X X X X X X X X

L R L /L R M

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

X X X D A T A P O IN T S
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T E P S IZ E

A X
X
X
X
X
P

P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
T S

A

S P A N
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
X X X D A T A P O IN T (S )
X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T E P S IZ E
N U M

A X
X
X
X
X
P

1 P A T H
2 P O R T

S E L E C T U S E
O F IS O L A T IO N
IN C A L IB R A T IO N

M E N U C 5 A

IN C L U D E
IS O L A T IO N
(S T A N D A R D )

S E L E C T
1 P A T H 2 P O R T
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E

T R A N S M IS S IO N
F R E Q U E N C Y
R E S P O N S E

P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
T S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U

P O R T 1 O N L Y
(S 1 1 )
P O R T 2 O N L Y
(S 2 2 )

N O R M A L
(1 6 0 1 P O IN T S
M A X IM U M

B O T H P O R T S
(S 1 1 , S 2 2 )

C .W .
(1 P O IN T )

C 2 C

N F R
(2
P O

C A L IB R A T IO N
R A N G E
H A R M O N IC C A L
F O R T IM E D O M A IN

C 5 B

L E C
M IS
E S P
T IO

C 1

S E L E C T
C A L IB R A T IO N
D A T A P O IN T S

M E N U

T

S IO N
O N S E
N T Y P E

F O R W A R D P A T H
(S 2 1 )
R E V E R S E P A T H
(S 1 2 )
B O T H P A T H S
(S 2 1 , S 1 2 )
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

S T A R T (S T E P )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
U S IN G
S T A R T
W IL L R
X X X D A
X X X .X X
T R U E S

A B
A N
E S
T A
X X
T O

O V
D
U L
P
X X
P

E

S T O
T IN
O IN
X X X
F R E

B

M IC R O S T R IP
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )

D IS
E Q
T O
IN

C R E T E
U E N C IE S
1 6 0 1
T S )

T IM E D O M A IN
(H A R M O N IC )
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
M E N U

C 2 B

S IN G L E P O IN T
C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N

P
T S
Q

N E X T C A L S T E P
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

G H z

C .W . F R E Q
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z
N E X T C A L S T E P
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

F R
E R
T F
.X X

E Q
E D
R E
X X

Q

S .
W A S
X X X X X G H z

A U T O IN C R O N (O F F )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
P R E V IO U S M E N U
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R T U R N O N /O F F

U S E R D E F IN E D

L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3]
+ X X X X .X X X X

L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3]
+ X X X X .X X X X

L 3 [e -4 2 H /H z 3]
+ X X X X .X X X X

E N T E R T H E
O F F S E T L E N G T H

E N T E R T H E
O F F S E T L E N G T H

E N T E R T H E
O F F S E T L E N G T H

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

C

W A V E G U ID E
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )

M E N U C 1 6
S E L E C T
M IC R O S T R IP
K IT T O U S E
1 0 M IL K IT
1 5 M IL K IT
2 5 M IL K IT
U S E R D E F IN E D
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *
T o C a l
S e q **

O F F S E T L E N G T H
+ X X X .X X X X m m

F o r S S L T

IO N

H O R T 2 ,
H O R T 1 )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

F

M E N U

T H IC K N E S S O F
S U B S T R A T E
X X X X .X X X X m m

M IX
(S H
S H O
S H O

S U B S T R A T E
D IE L E C T R IC
X .X X

F o r S S S T

IC

M A
(S H
S H
S H

C 1 3 B

S E L E C
F L E C T
P A IR IN
E D
O R T 1 -S
R T 2 -S
R T 3 -S

R E

Z c
X .X X X p 9

E

M IX
(S H
S H O

T
G

M A T C H E D
(S H O R T 1 -S H O R T 1 ,
S H O R T 2 -S H O R T 2 )

C 1 6 A

W ID T H O F
S T R IP
X X .X X X X m m

E F F E C T IV
D IE L E C T R
X .X X
(R E C O M M
1 .0

C 1 3 A

S E L E C
F L E C T
P A IR IN
E D
O R T 1 -S
R T 2 -S

R E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

T
G

IO N

H O R T 2 ,
H O R T 3 ,
H O R T 1 )

T C H E D
O R T 1 -S H O R T 1 ,
O R T 2 -S H O R T 2 ,
O R T 3 -S H O R T 3 )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

E N D E D
0 )

S E L E C T
W A V E G U ID E
K IT T O U S E

K IT -

C U T O F F F R E Q :
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z

F o r S S L T

W A V E G U ID E
P A R A M E T E R S
X X X X X X
R E F L E C T IO N
P A IR IN G
X X X X X X

S H O R T 1
X X .X X X X m m

S H O R T 2
X X .X X X X m m
U S E IN S T A L L E D
W A V E G U ID E K IT

F

U S E R D E F IN E D

L O A D T Y P E
X X X X X X X X

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

E
D

F o r S S S T

T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *
T o C a l
S e q **

C 1 5 A

C

E N T E R W A V E G U ID E
P A R A M E T E R S

M E N U

W A V E G U ID E
C U T O F F F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

S E
W A V E
K IT T
-IN S T A L L E

O F F S E T L E N G T H
O F S H O R T 1
X .X X X X m m

ID E N T IF IE R :
X X X X

O F F S E T L E N G T H
O F S H O R T 2
X .X X X X m m
P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

L E
G
O
D

C T
U ID E
U S E
K IT -

C U T O F F F R E Q :
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S H O R T 1 :
+ X X .X X X X m m

E
M E N U
S
W A V
K IT
W A V E G U
C U T O F F
X X X .X X

C 1 5 D

E L E C
E G U
T O U
ID E
F R E
X X X
Q

T
ID E
S E

S H O R T 3 :
+ X X .X X X X m m

U S E R D E F IN E D

O F F S E T L E N G T H
O F S H O R T 3
+ X .X X X X m m
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

C

S L ID
(M A Y
R E Q
B R O
F IX E

IN G L O A D
A L S O
U IR E A
A D B A N D
D L O A D )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

X X X X G H z

O F F S E T L E N G T H
O F S H O R T 1
+ X .X X X X m m
O F F S E T L E N G T H
O F S H O R T 2
+ X .X X X X m m

S H O R T 2 :
+ X X .X X X X m m

C

B R O A D B A N D
F IX E D L O A D

C 1 5 C

U S E IN S T A L L E D
W A V E G U ID E K IT

T E S T S IG N A L S
S T A R T C A L

M E N U

C 6

S E L E C T
T Y P E O F L O A D

Figure 4-4.

4-14

M E N U

C 1 5

-IN S T A L L E D

C 3 B

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

M E N U
M E N U

C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S

T H R O U G H L IN E
P A R A M E T E R S

T H R O U G H L IN E
IM P E D A N C E
X .X X X X 9

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

ID E N T IF IE R
X X X X

M E N U

O F F S E T L E N G T H
X X X X X X m m

E N T E R
M IC R O S T R IP
P A R A M E T E R S

U S E R D E F IN E D

D

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E
M E N U

S P E C IA L C (M )
S P E C IA L C (F )

E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

C 2 A

,

F

S T A R T C A L

IN S E R T
IN D IV ID U A L
F R E Q U E N C IE S

X X X
E N T
L A S
X X X

L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2]
+ X X X X .X X X X

S P E C IA L B (M )
S P E C IA L B (F )

T E S T S IG N A L S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

N E X T F R E Q .
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2]
+ X X X X .X X X X

M IC R O S T R IP
P A R A M E T E R S
X X X X X X X X X X X

F IN IS H E D
N E X T C A L S T E P

IN P U T A F R E Q ,
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O IN S E R T

L 2 [e -3 3 H /H z 2]
+ X X X X .X X X X

S P E C IA L A (M )
S P E C IA L A (F )

T H R O U G H L IN E
P A R A M E T E R S

A L L

M E N U

S P E C IA L C (M )
S P E C IA L C (F )

M E N U C 1 4 A

L O A D T Y P E
X X X X X X X X

F IL L R A N G E
( X X X E N T E R E D )

S P E C IA L B (M )
S P E C IA L B (F )

L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ]
+ X X X X .X X X X

O F F S E T L E N G T H
+ X X X .X X X X m m

E N T E R
T H R O U G H L IN E
P A R A M E T E R S

D

L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ]
+ X X X X .X X X X

S E L E C T P O R T X
O F F S E T S H O R T
C O N N E C O T R T Y P E

R E F L E C T IO N
P A IR IN G
X X X X X X

O F F S
E N T E R
IN D U C
C O E F F

P O R T X
E T S H O R T 3
T H E
T A N C E
IC IE N T S

L 1 [e -2 4 H /H z ]
+ X X X X .X X X X

O F F S E T L E N G T H
+ X X X .X X X X m m

M E N U C 2 0

M E N U C 2 1 C

L 0 [e -1 2 H ]
+ X X X X .X X X X

C 3 C

C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S

O F F S
E N T E R
IN D U C
C O E F F

P O R T X
E T S H O R T 2
T H E
T A N C E
IC IE N T S

L 0 [e -1 2 H ]
+ X X X X .X X X X

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E
M E N U

M E N U C 2 1 B

L 0 [e -1 2 H ]
+ X X X X .X X X X

R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E
X X X .X X X 9

T o C a l
S e q **

P O R T 2 S H O R T S
U S E R D E F IN E D

S T O P F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

P O R T X
E T S H O R T 1
T H E
T A N C E
IC IE N T S

S P E C IA L A (M )
S P E C IA L A (F )

E N T E R
R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E

T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *

P O R T 1 S H O R T S
U S E R D E F IN E D

S T A R T F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

C L E A R

S E L E C T
R E F L E C T IO N O N L Y
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

T ,
S ,
T
"

(M )
(F )

M E N U C 1 7

C 2 D

A R
IN T
L E C
G E

O F F S
E N T E R
IN D U C
C O E F F

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

S T A R T C A L

IN D IV ID U A L
F R E Q IN S E R T

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

C 5 C

S T
P O
S E
A N

D

T E S T S IG N A L S

N U M B E R O F P T S
X X X P O IN T (S )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

R E V E R S E P A T H
(S 2 2 , S 1 2 )

U T
R ,
N
L R

F
E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

IN P
IN C
T H E
"F IL

W 1 -C O N N
W 1 -C O N N

R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E

N E X T C A L S T E P

M E N U C 2 1 A

M E N U C 1 4
S E L E C T P O R T X
O F F S E T S H O R T
C O N N E C O T R T Y P E

T H R O U G H L IN E
P A R A M E T E R S

IN C R E M E N T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

E X C L U D E
IS O L A T IO N

F O R W A R D P A T H
(S 1 1 , S 2 1 )

R E F L E C T IO N
O N L Y

C 5 D

C 3 A

F IR M
R A T IO N
M E T R S
C O N N
N N (M )

L O A D T Y P E
X X X X X X X X

D IS C R E T E F IL L
M E N U

C O N
C A L IB
P A R A
P O R T 1
W 1 -C O

R E F L E C T IO N
P A IR IN G
X X X X X X X X

O F D A T A P O IN T S

1 6 0 1 M
8 0 1 M A
4 0 1 M A
2 0 1 M A
1 0 1 M A
5 1 M A X

M E N U

P O R T 2 C O N N
W 1 -C O N N (M )

S E T S T A R T /S T O P

M E N U

F U L L 1 2 -T E R M

M E N U

C E N T E R
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

C 5

M E N U

R A N G E

N E X T C A L S T E P

R IP
S S
E R >
L E C T

S E L E C T
C A L IB R A T IO N T Y P E

S E
T R A N S
F R E Q R
C A L IB R A

O F D A T A P O IN T S

1 6 0 1 M
8 0 1 M A
4 0 1 M A
2 0 1 M A
1 0 1 M A
5 1 M A X

T R A N S M IS S IO N
L IN E T Y P E

W A V E G U ID E

N E X T C A L S T E P

S T A R T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

N U M

T R M

S T
R E
N T
S E

R A N G E

S E T C E N T E R /S P A N

S S S T (T R IP L E
O F F S E T S H O R T )

M IC R O
P
< E
T O

C A L F R E Q

C 2

S T O P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

C O A X IA L

C H A N G E C A L
M E T H O D A N D
L IN E T Y P E

M E N U

C A L M E T H O D

S S L T (D O U B L E
O F F S E T S H O R T
W IT H L O A D )

R E P E A T
P R E V IO U S C A L
A U T O C A L

N E X T C A L S T E P
S O L T (S T A N D A R D )

K E E P E X IS T IN G
C A L D A T A

M E N U

C O A X
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )

C 2 _ C E N T E R

C A L F R E Q

C H A N G E
C A L M E T H O D
A N D L IN E T Y P E

M E N U

C 6 A

B R O A D B A N D L O A D
P A R A M E T E R S
IM P E D A N C E
X X .X X X 9
IN D U C T A N C E
X X .X X X p H
P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

A

Menu Sequencing, SSLT and SSST
(Offset-Short) Calibration

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

LRL/LRM Calibration Setup Flow—Description
1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C15.
2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of
the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME
DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C
then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F.
3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow
returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made.
4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F are the
initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four
calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM.
5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3E, C3G, or C3F are, for
the most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3E, C3G, or
C3F depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL,
WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP.

37xxxE OM

4-15

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

M E N U
M E N U

C 1 1

M E N U

K E E P E X IS T IN G
C A L D A T A

T o M e n u
S U 1 /S U 3 *

R E P E A T
P R E V IO U S C A L

T o C a l
S e q **

A U T O C A L

C A L M E T H O D
S T A N D A R D
T R A N S M IS S IO N
L IN E T Y P E :
X X X X X X X X
C H A N G E C A L
M E T H O D A N D
L IN E T Y P E

C 1 1 A

C A L F R E Q

B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N
B e g in
C a l

M E N U

C H A N G E
C A L M E T H O D
A N D L IN E T Y P E

C 2
R A N G E

S T A R T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

N E X T C A L S T E P

S T O P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

C A L M E T H O D

S E T C E N T E R /S P A N

S T A N D A R D
(N O T U S E D F O R
W A V E G U ID E )

X X X D A T A P O IN T S
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T E P S IZ E

O F F S E T S H O R T

N U M

L R L /L R M

1 6 0 1 M
8 0 1 M A
4 0 1 M A
2 0 1 M A
1 0 1 M A
5 1 M A X

T R A N S M IS S IO N
L IN E T Y P E
C O A X IA L

N E X T C A L S T E P

W A V E G U ID E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M IC R O S T R IP

R A N G E

C E N T E R
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

M E N U C 3 E

S P A N
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S

S E T S T A R T /S T O P

N U M

P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
T S

A

O F D A T A P O IN T S

1 6 0 1 M
8 0 1 M A
4 0 1 M A
2 0 1 M A
1 0 1 M A
5 1 M A X

A X
X
X
X
X
P

M E N U C 1 8

R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E
T E S T S IG N A L S

P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
T S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

T o C a l
S e q **

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

N E X T C A L S T E P

N U M B E R O F
B A N D S U S E D

C H A R A C T E R IZ E
C A L D E V IC E S

O N E B A N D

D E V IC E 1
L IN E 1 (R E F )
X .X X X X m m

R E F L E C T IO N T Y P E

D E V IC E 2
L IN E /M A T C H
X .X X X X m m /F U L L B A N D

L E S S T H A N Z o

B A N D S

L O C A T IO N O F
R E F E R E N C E
P L A N E S

T W O

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R S W IT C H

E N D S O F
L IN E 1 (R E F )

M E N U

M E N U

C 5 D

S E L E C T U S E
O F IS O L A T IO N
IN C A L IB R A T IO N

M E N U

M E N U

IN C L U D E
IS O L A T IO N
(S T A N D A R D )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U

C 2 C

C A L IB R A T IO N
R A N G E

C R E T E
U E N C IE S
1 6 0 1
T S )

T IM E D O M A IN
(H A R M O N IC )

H A R M O N IC C A L
F O R T IM E D O M A IN

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

S T A R T (S T E P )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

C .W .
(1 P O IN T )
D IS
E Q
T O
IN

M E N U

C 2 D

D IS C R E T E F IL L
IN P
IN C
T H E
"F IL

U T
R ,
N
L R

S T
P O
S E
A N

A
IN
L E
G

R T ,
T S ,
C T
E "

S T O
T IN
O IN
X X X
F R E

P
T S
Q

N E X T C A L S T E P
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

G H z

C 2 A

F IL L R A N G E
( X X X E N T E R E D )
IN D IV ID U A L
F R E Q IN S E R T
C L E A R

E N T E R
R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E
T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *

F R
E R
T F
.X X

E Q
E D
R E
X X
,

S .
Q

R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E
X X X .X X X 9

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E
T o C a l
S e q **

D E V IC E 2
L IN E /M A T C H
X X .X X X X /L O W B A N D
D E V IC E 3
L IN E /M A T C H
X X .X X X X /H IG H B A N D
F R E Q
W H IC
O F D
A N D
IS E X

A
H
E V
D E
C H

F T E
T H E
IC E
V IC
A N

R

U S E
2
E 3
G E D

W A V E G U ID E
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )
M E N U

W A S
X X X X X G H z

A U T O IN C R O N (O F F )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
P R E V IO U S M E N U
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R T U R N O N /O F F

M E N U

C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S

E N T E
W A V E G
C U T O
F R E Q U E

L R L /L R M
P A R A M E T E R S

T E S T S IG N A L S

C 1 5 B

1 5 M IL K IT
2 5 M IL K IT
U S E R D E F IN E D
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

W A V E G U ID E
C U T O F F F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

W ID T H O F
S T R IP
X X .X X X X m m
T H IC K N E S S O F
S U B S T R A T E
X X X X .X X X X m m
Z c
X .X X X p 9

S U B S T R A T E
D IE L E C T R IC
X .X X
E F F E C T IV
D IE L E C T R
X .X X
(R E C O M M
1 .0

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

S T A R T C A L

F IN IS H E D
N E X T C A L S T E P

M E N U C 1 6

1 0 M IL K IT

R
U ID E
F F
N C Y

T o C a l
S e q **

C 1 6 A

E N T E R
M IC R O S T R IP
P A R A M E T E R S

S E L E C T
M IC R O S T R IP
K IT T O U S E

C 3 F

W A V E G U ID E
C U T O F F F R E Q

M E N U

B R E A K P O IN T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H Z

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R S W IT C H

IN P U T A F R E Q ,
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O IN S E R T

A L L

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U C 1 7

L R L /L R M
P A R A M E T E R S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

X X X
E N T
L A S
X X X

U S IN G
S T A R T
W IL L R
X X X D A
X X X .X X
T R U E S

E

M E N U

IN S E R T
IN D IV ID U A L
F R E Q U E N C IE S

IN C R E M E N T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

S T O P F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

O V
D
U L
P
X X
P

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

D E V IC E 1
L IN E 1 (R E F )
X X .X X X X

S T A R T C A L

N E X T F R E Q .
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

N U M B E R O F P T S
X X X P O IN T (S )

C 3 G

T E S T S IG N A L S

S T A R T F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
A B
A N
E S
T A
X X
T O

M A T C H IN D U C T A N C E
+ X X X X .X X X X p H

C H A R A C T E R IZ E
C A L D E V IC E S

M IC R O S T R IP
P A R A M E T E R S
U S E R D E F IN E D

N E X T C A L S T E P

N O R M A L
(1 6 0 1 P O IN T S
M A X IM U M

N F R
(2
P O

B

C .W . F R E Q
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z

S E L E C T
C A L IB R A T IO N
D A T A P O IN T S

E X C L U D E
IS O L A T IO N

M A T C H IM P E D A N C E
+ X X X .X X X 9

N E X T C A L S T E P

C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S

C 2 B

S IN G L E P O IN T
C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N

C 1

M A T C H P A R A M E T E R S

M E N U C 1 8 B

M IC R O S T R IP
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )

C

G R E A T E R T H A N Z o

C H A N G E L R L /L R M
P A R A M E T E R S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

P R E S S
< E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

B A N D S

B

R E F L E C T IO N
O F F S E T L E N G T H
+ X X X .X X X m m

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

N E X T C A L S T E P

A

N E X T C A L S T E P

N E X T C A L S T E P

M ID D L E O F
L IN E 1 (R E F )

S T A R T C A L

C H A N G E L R L /L R M
P A R A M E T E R S

C H A N G E L R L /L R M
P A R A M E T E R S

O N E B A N D

N E X T C A L S T E P

T W O
T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *

M E N U C 1 9

M E N U C 1 8 A

C H A N G E L R L /L R M
P A R A M E T E R S

L R L /L R M
P A R A M E T E R S

X X X D A T A P O IN T (S )
X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T E P S IZ E

O F D A T A P O IN T S
A X
X
X
X
X
P

C O A X
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )

C 2 _ C E N T E R

C A L F R E Q

E

IC

E N D E D
0 )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

C

B

Figure 4-5.

4-16

Menu Sequencing, LRL/LRM Calibration

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

TRM Calibration Setup Flow—Description
1. Pressing the Begin Cal key calls Menu C17.
2. With one exception, the flow is from left to right in the direction of
the arrow head. The exception occurs in Menu C1, for the TIME
DOMAIN choice. Here the flow direction reverses to Menu C2C
then returns to a left-to-right flow on to Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I.
3. Arrowheads that point both left and right indicate that the flow
returns to the right-most menu after a choice had been made.
4. The group of menus to the left of Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I are the
initial selection set and are essentially the same for all four
calibration types: Standard, Offset-Short, TRM, and LRL/LRM.
5. The group of menus that follow Menu C3H, C3J, or C3I are, for the
most part, type specific. The selection of Menu C3H, C3I, or C3J
depends upon the choice made in Menu C11A: COAXIAL,
WAVEGUIDE, or MICROSTRIP.

37xxxE OM

4-17

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

M E N U
M E N U

C 1 1

M E N U

C A L F R E Q

B E G IN C A L IB R A T IO N
B e g in
C a l

K E E P E X IS T IN G
C A L D A T A

T o M e n u
S U 1 /S U 3 *

R E P E A T
P R E V IO U S C A L

T o C a l
S e q **

A U T O C A L

C A L M E T H O D
S T A N D A R D
T R A N S M IS S IO N
L IN E T Y P E :
X X X X X X X X

M E N U

C 1 1 A

C H A N G E
C A L M E T H O D
A N D L IN E T Y P E

C 2

C A L F R E Q

S T A R T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

N E X T C A L S T E P
C A L M E T H O D

S E T C E N T E R /S P A N

S T A N D A R D
(N O T U S E D F O R
W A V E G U ID E )

X X X D A T A P O IN T S
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T E P S IZ E

O F F S E T S H O R T

N U M

L R L /L R M

1 6 0 1 M
8 0 1 M A
4 0 1 M A
2 0 1 M A
1 0 1 M A
5 1 M A X

T R M

C H A N G E C A L
M E T H O D A N D
L IN E T Y P E

T R A N S M IS S IO N
L IN E T Y P E

N E X T C A L S T E P

C O A X IA L

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

W A V E G U ID E

M E N U C 3 H
C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S
T R M R E F L E C T
O F F S E T L E N G T H
+ X X X .X X X X m m

S P A N
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S E T S T A R T /S T O P
X X X D A T A P O IN T (S )
X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z
S T E P S IZ E
N U M

P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
T S

T R M

A

O F D A T A P O IN T S

1 6 0 1 M
8 0 1 M A
4 0 1 M A
2 0 1 M A
1 0 1 M A
5 1 M A X

O F D A T A P O IN T S
A X
X
X
X
X
P

R A N G E

C E N T E R
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

R A N G E

S T O P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

C O A X
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )

C 2 _ C E N T E R

A X
X
X
X
X
P

T R M M A T C H
IM P E D A N C E

D

T E S T S IG N A L S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

S T A R
P R E
T
O

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

T C
S S
O S
R C

A L
< E N T E R >
E L E C T
H A N G E

M IC R O S T R IP
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )
M E N U

M E N U

C 5 D

S E L E C T U S E
O F IS O L A T IO N
IN C A L IB R A T IO N

M E N U

M E N U

IN C L U D E
IS O L A T IO N
(S T A N D A R D )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U

C 1

C A L IB R A T IO N
R A N G E

C R E T E
U E N C IE S
1 6 0 1
T S )

T IM E D O M A IN
(H A R M O N IC )

H A R M O N IC C A L
F O R T IM E D O M A IN

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

S T A R T (S T E P )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

C 2 D

D IS C R E T E F IL L
IN P
IN C
T H E
"F IL

U T
R ,
N
L R

S T
P O
S E
A N

A
IN
L E
G

R T ,
T S ,
C T
E "

A B
A N
E S
T A
X X
T O

O V
D
U L
P
X X
P

E
S T O
T IN
O IN
X X X
F R E

P
T S
Q

N E X T C A L S T E P
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

G H z

M E N U

C 2 A

F IL L R A N G E
( X X X E N T E R E D )
IN D IV ID U A L
F R E Q IN S E R T

IN P U T A F R E Q ,
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O IN S E R T

T E S T S IG N A L S

F R
E R
T F
.X X

E Q
E D
R E
X X
,

Q

S .
W A S
X X X X X G H z

A U T O IN C R O N (O F F )
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

S T A R
P R E
T
O

T C
S S
O S
R C

A L
< E N T E R >
E L E C T
H A N G E

W A V E G U ID E
(S e e M e n u C 1 1 A )
M E N U

D

P R E V IO U S M E N U
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R T U R N O N /O F F

T R M R E F L E C T
O F F S E T L E N G T H
+ X X X .X X X X m m

IN D U C T A N C E
+ X X X X .X X X X p H
P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

M E N U

M E N U C 1 6
S E L E C T
M IC R O S T R IP
K IT T O U S E

T o C a l
S e q **

1 0 M IL K IT
1 5 M IL K IT
2 5 M IL K IT
U S E R D E F IN E D
M E N U

D

T E S T S IG N A L S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

C 1 5 B

E N T E
W A V E G
C U T O
F R E Q U E

R
U ID E
F F
N C Y

T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *

W ID T H O F
S T R IP
X X .X X X X m m
T H IC K N E S S O F
S U B S T R A T E
X X X X .X X X X m m
Z c
X .X X X p 9

S U B S T R A T E
D IE L E C T R IC
X .X X
E F F E C T IV
D IE L E C T R
X .X X
(R E C O M M
1 .0

W A V E G U ID E
C U T O F F F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

W A V E G U ID E
C U T O F F F R E Q

C

C 1 6 A

E N T E R
M IC R O S T R IP
P A R A M E T E R S

T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *

T R M M A T C H
IM P E D A N C E

F IN IS H E D
N E X T C A L S T E P

IM P E D A N C E
+ X X X .X X X 9

C 3 I

C O N F IR M
C A L IB R A T IO N
P A R A M E T E R S

C L E A R A L L

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

T R M M A T C H
P A R A M E T E R S

D

M IC R O S T R IP
P A R A M E T E R S
X X X X X X X X

X X X
E N T
L A S
X X X

U S IN G
S T A R T
W IL L R
X X X D A
X X X .X X
T R U E S

M E N U C 6 B

R E F L E C T T Y P E

IN S E R T
IN D IV ID U A L
F R E Q U E N C IE S

IN C R E M E N T
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

S T O P F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

M
IO N
E R S
T
G T H
m

T R M M A T C H
IM P E D A N C E

N E X T F R E Q .
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

N U M B E R O F P T S
X X X P O IN T (S )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

T o C a l
S e q **

L E S S T H A N Z o

S T A R T F R E Q
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

A P P R O X IM A T E S T O P
X X X .X X X X X X X X X G H z

R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E
X X X .X X X 9

G R E A T E R T H A N Z o

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U

T R M
O F F
+ X X

C

T o M e n u
C A L _ S U 2 *

C 3 J

C O N F IR
A L IB R A T
A R A M E T
R E F L E C
S E T L E N
X .X X X X m

T R M

N E X T C A L S T E P

C .W .
(1 P O IN T )
D IS
E Q
T O
IN

B

C .W . F R E Q
X X .X X X X X X X X G H z

N O R M A L
(1 6 0 1 P O IN T S
M A X IM U M

N F R
(2
P O

C 2 C

P

S IN G L E P O IN T
C .W . C A L IB R A T IO N

S E L E C T
C A L IB R A T IO N
D A T A P O IN T S

E X C L U D E
IS O L A T IO N

C 2 B

M E N U C 1 7
E N T E R
R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E

R E F E R E N C E
IM P E D A N C E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M IC R O S T R IP

G R E A T E R T H A N Z o
L E S S T H A N Z o

P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
P T S
T S

N E X T C A L S T E P

N E X T C A L S T E P

R E F L E C T T Y P E

E

IC

E N D E D
0 )

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

P R E S S < E N T E R >
W H E N C O M P L E T E

S T A R T C A L
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R C H A N G E

B

T o C a l
S e q **

Figure 4-6.

4-18

Menu Sequencing, TRM Calibration

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

CALIBRATION KEY-GROUP

From Standard,
Offset-Short, and
LRL/LRM Calibration
Flowcharts

MENU C7, C8, C9 Series



CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
CONNECT
CALIBRATION
DEVICE(S)

CAL_MEAS_DEV

MEASURING

PORT 1:
XXXXXXXXXXXX

PORT 2:
XXXXXXXXXXXX
PRESS 
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

MENU CAL_NEXT_DEV
P R E S S 
FOR NE XT C AL
S TE P
OR
P R ES S 
TO R E-ME A SU R E

YES
CAL
DONE

NO

PRESS <1> FOR
PORT 1 DEVICE
GO
TO NEXT
CAL STEP

PRESS <2> FOR
PORT 2 DEVICE

MENU CAL_COMPLETED
CONNECT NEW CALIBRATION STANDARDS

SERIES = REFLECTION DEVICES
* C7
C8 SERIES = SLIDING LOAD
C9 SERIES = TRANSMISSION DEVICES

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
COMPLETED
PRESS

TO STORE CAL
DATA ON DISK
OR
PRESS 
TO PROCEED

Figure 4-6.

37xxxE OM

Calibration Sequence Menus

4-19

SAVE/RECALL MENU KEY

4-4

SAVE/RECALL MENU
KEY

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Pressing this key displays the first of a menu set (below) that lets you
save or recall control panel setups and calibration data. Full menu descriptions can be found in the alphabetically ordered Appendix A under the menu’s call letters (SR1, SR2, SR3, etc).

SD CARD

Either Storage Device
USB DRIVE

Figure 4-7

4-20

Save/Recall Key-Group Menus

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-5

MEASUREMENT
KEY-GROUP

MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP

The individual keys within the Measurement key-group are described
below. Flowcharts of the Setup Key and Data Points key menus are
shown in Figure 4-8. As described for the calibration menus, the flow
is left-to-right and the double arrowhead lines indicate that the flow
returns to the calling menu once a selection has been made. Full menu
descriptions can be found in the alphabetically ordered Appendix A
under the menu’s call letters (SU1, SU2, DF, etc).
Setup Menu Key: Pressing this key calls Sweep Setup Menu SU1 or
SU3. Depending upon which menu items you select, additional menus
may also be called.
Data Points Key: Pressing this key calls Menu SU9 or SU9A. Menu
SU9 provides for data point selection. Menu SU9A is called if the C.W.
MODE selection in Menu SU1 is on.
Hold Key: If the instrument is sweeping, pressing this key results in
an immediate halt of the sweep at the current data point. The LED on
the button lights, indicating that the Hold Mode is active.
If you restart the sweep after performing any recall-from-disk operations in the Hold Mode (sweep stopped at some data point), the sweep
restarts from the beginning. The instrument may be taken out of the
hold mode as follows:
q By pressing the Default Program key. This causes the 37xxxE to
revert to a predefined state
q By pressing the Begin Cal key. This causes the 37xxxE to resume
sweeping and begin the Calibration Menu sequence
NOTE
See the description for Menu SU4 for a discussion of the
interaction between the Hold Mode and the selection of
“Single Sweep” or “Restart Sweep.”
Domain Key: This key function is fully described in paragraph 4-2
(page 4-8). Additionally, if the Time Domain option is installed, making
a selection other than “Frequency Domain” lets you display measured
data in the time domain. It also calls a further sequence of Time Domain Menus. Refer to section 9-2 for additional details.
Appl: Pressing this key calls a menu that lets you select the following
applications: Adapter Removal, Swept Frequency Gain Compression,
or Swept Power Gain Compression.

37xxxE OM

4-21

MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP

Figure 4-8.

4-22

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Measurement Key-Group Menus Menu Flow (Sheet 1 of 2)

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

MEASUREMENT KEY-GROUP

Figure 4-8.

37xxxE OM

Measurement Key-Group Menus Menu Flow
(Sheet 2 of 2)

4-23

CHANNELS KEY-GROUP

4-6

CHANNELS KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The individual keys within the Channels key-group are described below:
Ch 1-4 Keys: These keys (below) define the active channel. One (and
only one) must always be active as indicated by the associated LED.
Pressing a button makes the indicated channel active. If channel indicated by the key is already active, pressing the key has no effect.
The active channel will be the channel acted upon by the S Params,
Graph Type, Ref Plane, Trace Memory, Set Scale, Auto Scale,
Markers/Limits and Domain keys. When in the single channel display
mode, the active channel will be the one displayed.
Channel Menu: Pressing this key calls menu CM (below). Here, you
select the number of channels to be displayed. When in the single display mode, only the active channel will be displayed. Full menu description can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under
the menu’s call letters (CM).

Figure 4-9.

4-24

Channel Key-Group Menu

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-7

DISPLAY KEY-GROUP

DISPLAY KEY-GROUP

The individual keys within the Display key-group are described below.
Menu flow diagrams are shown in Figure 4-10. Full menu description(s) for menu SP and all others mentioned below can be found in
the Appendix A alphabetical listing under the menu’s call letters (SP,
GT1, RD1, etc.).
Graph Type Key: Pressing this key calls menu GT1 or GT2. These
menus let you select the type of display to appear on the active channel for the selected S-Parameter.
Set Scale Key: Pressing this key calls the appropriate scaling menu
(SS1, SS2, SS3, etc.) depending upon the graph type being displayed
on the active channel for the selected S-Parameter.
Auto Scale Key: Pressing this key autoscales the trace or traces for
the active channel. The new scaling values are then displayed on the
menu (if it is displayed) and graticule. The resolution will be selected
from the normal sequence of values you have available using the knob.
When the active channel has a Real and Imaginary type display, the
larger of the two signals will be used to autoscale both the real and
imaginary graphs. Both graphs will be displayed at the same resolution.
S Params Key: Pressing this key calls menu SP. This menu allows
you to select the S-Parameter to be displayed by the active channel for
the selected S-Parameter.
Ref Plane Key: Pressing this key calls menu RD1. This menu lets you
input the reference plane in time or distance. You do this by selecting
the appropriate menu item. For a correct distance readout, the dielectric constant must be set to the correct value. This is accomplished by
selecting SET DIELECTRIC, which calls menu RD2.

37xxxE OM

4-25

DISPLAY KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

On menu RD1, selecting AUTO automatically adjusts the reference delay to unwind the phase for the active channel.
The 37xxxE unwinds the phase as follows:
q First, it sums the phase increments between each pair of measured data points, then it takes the average “Pdelta” over the entire set of points
q Next, it corrects the phase data by applying the following formula:
Pcorrect = Pmeasured - NxPdelta
Where P = phase
Assuming there are fewer than 360 degrees of phase rotation between
each data point, the operation described above removes any net phase
offset. The endpoints of the phase display then fall at the same phase
value.
Trace Memory Key: Pressing this key brings up menu NO1. This
menu—which relates to the active channel—allows you to store data
to memory, view memory, perform operations with the stored memory,
and view both data and memory simultaneously. Four memories exist,
one for each channel. This allows each channel to be stored and normalized independent of the other channels. Data from the trace memory may be stored on the disk or recalled from it.
NOTE
Trace memory will automatically be set to VIEW DATA
(that is, turned off), if a sweep with a greater number of
points is selected while operating on a stored trace.

4-26

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

DISPLAY KEY-GROUP

Figure 4-10.

37xxxE OM

Display Key-Group Menus (1 of 2)

4-27

DISPLAY KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

D is p la y

S e t
S c a le

G ra p h
T y p e

A u to
S c a le

R e f
P la n e

S
P a ra m s

T ra c e
M e m o ry

M E N U

N O 1

T R A C E M E M O R Y
F U N C T IO N S
V IE W
V IE W
M E N U

D

S 1 1 , U S E R
b 2 / 1

M E N U

S 2 2 , R E V
b 2 / a 2

R E F L

M E N U
M E N U

R A T IO

M E N U

P R E S S < 1 >
T O R E D E F IN E
S E L E C T E D P A R A M E T E R

(R a )

a 2

(R b )

A U T O

A IR
(1 .0 0 0 6 4 9 )

b 1

(T a )

b 2

(T b )

D IS T A N C E
X X X .X X X m m

P O L Y E T H Y L E N E
(2 .2 6 )

T IM E
X X X .X X X

T E F L O N
(2 .1 0 )

P D 1

S 2 1 / U S E R

1

U S
C H
C H
P H

P H A S E

L O C K

E R L A B E L
A N G E R A T IO
A N G E
A S E L O C K

C H A N G E
P R E V IO U S

a 1

(R a )

a 2

(R b )

b 1

(T a )

b 2
1

U S E R R A T IO
b 2 / a 1
U S E R
a 1

(U N IT Y )

D E N O M IN A T O R

P A R A M E T E R
D E F IN IT IO N

L A B E L
M E N U

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
O R S W IT C H

S E T
D IE L E C T R IC
C O N S T A N T

a 1

1

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

R D 2

R D I

S E T
R E F E R E N C E
P L A N E

N U M E R A T O R
2

T R A N S

P D 2

P A R A M E T E R

T R A N S

S 1 2 , R E V
b 1 / a 2

M E M O R Y

V IE W D A T A
A N D M E M O R Y

S P

S E L E C T
P A R A M E T E R
S 2 1 , F W
b 2 / a 1

D A T A

S E T D IE L E C T R IC
X X X
M E N U

(T b )

P R E V IO U S

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

P D 3

P A R A M E T E R
D E F IN IT IO N

(U N IT Y )

P H A S E
M E N U

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

m s

a 1

(R a )

a 2

(R b )

M E N U

M E N U

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

O T H E R
X X X X .X X
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

L O C K

P R E V IO U S

M IC R O P O R O U S
T E F L O N
(1 .6 9 )

G P 5

S E L E C T L A B E
--------A B C D E F G H IJ K
N O P Q R S T U V W
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 (
! # $ % & @ ^ _ '{ }
B K S P C L R D O
T U
T O
C H A
F

R N K N
IN D IC A
R A C T E
U N C T IO

V IE W D A T A (X )
B Y M E M O R Y
S E L E C T
T R A C E M A T H
S T O R E D
T O M E M O
(S T O R E D
(N O T S T O

A T A
R Y
)
R E D )

D IS K
O P E R A T IO N S
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U

N O 2

S E L E C T
T R A C E M A T H
A D D

(+ )

S U B T R A C T
M U L T IP L Y
D IV ID E

(-)
(* )

(/)

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

M E N U

N O 3

T R A C E M E M O R Y
D IS K O P E R A T IO N S
C H A N N E L X
S A V E M E M O R Y
T O H A R D D IS K
S A V E M E M O R Y
T O F L O P P Y D IS K
R E C A L L M E M O R Y
F R O M H A R D D IS K

M E N U D S K 2 o r
D S K 3

R E C A L L M E M O R Y
F R O M F L O P P Y D IS K
P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T

L
L M
X Y Z
)~
N E

O B
T E
R O R
N

P R E S S < E N T E R >
T O S E L E C T
N U M B E R S M A Y
A L S O B E
S E L E C T E D
U S IN G K E Y P A D

Figure 4-10.

4-28

Display Key-Group Menus (2 of 2)

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-8

ENHANCEMENT
KEY-GROUP

ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP

The individual keys within the Enhancement key-group are described
below. Full menu description(s) for menu OPTNS and all others mentioned below can be found in the Appendix A alphabetical listing under the menu’s call letters (OPTNS, EM, CAL_BW, etc).
Option Menu Key: This key brings up the OPTNS menu. Depending
on choices selected, this menu causes other menus to appear. A menu
flow diagram for this key is shown in Figure 4-12 on the following
page.
Video IF BW Key: Pressing this produces a menu that lets you choose
between four different IF bandwidths. This menu is shown below.
Avg/Smooth Menu Key: Pressing this key brings up the EM Menu
(Figure 4-11). When pressed during the calibration sequence, it brings
up the EM Cal Menu instead. These menus are shown below.
Trace Smooth and Average Keys: The Average and Trace Smooth
keys set their respective functions on and off with the appropriate
LED indicating when the function is selected.

Figure 4-11.

37xxxE OM

Enhancement Key-Group Menus

4-29

ENHANCEMENT KEY-GROUP

Figure 4-12.

4-30

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Enhancement Key-Group (Options Menu Key)

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-9

HARD COPY KEY-GROUP

HARD COPY KEY-GROUP

The individual keys within the Hard Copy key-group are described below. Full descriptions for menus can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under the menu’s call letters (PM1, PM2, PM3, etc.)
Menu Key: Pressing this key brings up menu PM1. This menu allows
you to define what will happen every time you press the Start Print
key. A menu flow diagram is shown in Figure 4-13.
Start Print Key: Pressing this key starts outputting the measured
data as defined by the setup defined by the selected MENU key.
Stop Print Key: Pressing this key can result in any of the following
actions if the printer is selected:
q If the printer is active, the key aborts the printing and sends a
form feed command to the printer. Aborting the printing clears
the print buffer
q If the printer is not active and another form of output is active,
pressing this key aborts printing, but does not send a form feed
to the printer
Plotting Functions: The 37xxxE can plot an image of either the entire
screen or subsets of it. Plots can be either full size or they can be
quarter size and located in any of the four quadrants. You can select
different pens for plotting different parts of the screen. You cannot,
however, plot tabular data.

37xxxE OM

4-31

HARD COPY KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

USB DRIVE

SD CARD

USB DRIVE

SD CARD
USB DRIVE

Figure 4-13.

4-32

Hard Copy Key-Group Menus

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

4-10

SYSTEM STATE
KEY-GROUP

SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP

The individual keys within the System State key-group are described
below. The menu flow for the Utility Menu key is shown in Figure 4-14
on page 4-35. Full descriptions for menus can be found in the
alphabetical listing (Appendix 1) under the menu’s call letters (U1, U2,
U3, etc.)
Default Program Key: Pressing this key brings up the default menu.
If pressed again, it recalls the factory selected default values for the
control panel controls. The values are defined in Table 4-2 on the
following page.
Pressing this key then the 1 key resets front panel key states and internal memories 1 through 4.
Pressing this key then the 0 key resets front panel key states, internal
memories 1 through 10, and certain hardware settings.
NOTE
Use of this key will destroy control panel and calibration
setup data, unless they have been saved to disk.
Utility Menu Key: Pressing this key calls menu U1. This menu accesses subordinate menus to perform system, disk, and system utilities. The only functions performed directly from the U1 Menu are
“Blank Frequency Information.” and “Data Drawing.”

37xxxE OM

4-33

SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Table 4-2.
Function

4-34

Default Settings
Default Setting

Instrument
State

Measurement Setup Menu Displayed

Measurement

Maximum sweep range of source and test set
Source Power: Model Dependent
Resolution: Normal (401 points)

Channel

Quad (four-channel) display
Channel 1 active

Display

Channel 1: S11, 1:1 Smith Chart
Channel 2: S12, Log Magnitude and Phase
Channel 3: S21, Log Magnitude and Phase
Channel 4: S22, 1:1 Smith Chart
Scale: 10 dB/Division or 90/Division
Offset: 0.000dB or 0.00 degree
Reference Position: Midscale
Electrical Delay: 0.00 seconds
Dielectric: Air (1.000649)
Normalization: Off
Normalization Sets: Erased

Enhancement

Video IF Bandwidth: Normal
Averaging: Off
Smoothing: Off

Calibration

Correction: Off and Calibration erased
Connector: K Connector
Load: Broadband

Markers/Limits

Markers On/Off: All off
Markers Enabled/Disabled: All enabled
Marker Frequency: All set to the start-sweep frequency
(or start -time distance)
D Reference: Off
Limits: All set to reference position value (all off all enabled)

System State

GPIB Addresses: Unchanged
Frequency Blanking : Disengaged,
Error(s): GPIB SRQ errors are cleared, Service Log
errors are not cleared
Measurement: Restarted

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

SYSTEM STATE KEY-GROUP

USB

SD CARD

SD CARD

USB

SD CARD

USB
SD CARD
USB DRIVE
SD CARD
USB DRIVE
USB

Figure 4-14.

37xxxE OM

System State Key-Group Menus

4-35

MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP

4-11

MARKERS/LIMITS
KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The individual keys within the Markers/Limits key-group are described below. The menu flow for the Marker Menu key is shown in
Figure 4-15 on the following page. Full descriptions for these menus
can be found in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under the menu’s
call letters (M1, M2, M3, etc.)
Marker Menu Key: Pressing the Marker Menu key calls Menu M1. This
menu lets you toggle markers on and off and set marker frequencies,
times, or distances.
Readout Marker Key: Pressing this key calls different menus, depending upon front panel key selections, as described below:
q It calls menu M1 if there are no markers available within the selected frequency range
q It calls menu M3 if no Delta ref marker has been selected
q It calls menu M4 if the DReference mode is off and the selected
marker is in the current sweep range (or time/distance)
q It calls menu M5 if the DReference mode and marker are both on
and the DReference marker is in the selected sweep range (or
time/distance)
q It calls menu M6 if ACTIVE MARKER ON ALL CHANNELS has
been previously selected in menu M9
q It calls menu M7 if SEARCH has been previously selected in
menu M9
q It calls menu M8 if FILTER PARAMETER has been previously
selected in menu M9
Limits Key: Pressing this key calls the appropriate Limit menu based
on the graph type selected using the Graph Type key and menu.
Marker Readout Functions: This menu choice, which appears on several marker menus, provides for several filter-related measurements.
It also allows for performing a marker-value search and for reading
the active marker value on all displayed channels.

NOTE
Full menu descriptions can
be found in the alphabetical
listing (Appendix A) under the
menu call letters (LF1, LF2,
LF3, etc.)

Limit Frequency Readout Function: The 37xxxE has a
Limit-Frequency Readout function. This function allows frequency
values to be read at a specified level (such as the 3 dB point) on the
data trace. This function is available for all rectilinear graph-types.
The graph-type and their menu call letters are listed below:
q
q
q
q
q
q

4-36

Log Magnitude, Menu LF1
Phase, Menu LF2
Group Delay, Menu LF3
Linear Magnitude, Menu LF4
SWR, Menu LF5
Real, Menu LF6

q
q
q
q
q

Imaginary, Menu LF7
Power Out, Menu LF8
Real, Menu LF6
Imaginary, Menu LF7
Power Out, Menu LF8

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP

Figure 4-15.

37xxxE OM

Markers Menus (1 of 3)

4-37

MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Markers/Limits

Markers/Limits

Markers/Limits

Markers/Limits
Limits

Limits

Limits

Limits

MENU L2

MENU L1

MENU L3

SINGLE LIMITS

SINGLE LIMITS
- LOG MAG -

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

A

READOUT LIMIT

B

TEST LIMITS
- PHASE -

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF
XXX.XXX ˚

- LOG MAG -

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX mV

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX mV

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

SINGLE LIMITS

- SMITH CHART-

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX mV

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

MENU L4

SINGLE LIMITS

- LINEAR POLAR-

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX mV

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

READOUT LIMIT
B

TEST LIMITS

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX ˚

A

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS
TEST LIMITS

B

SEGMENTED LIMITS

C

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

READOUT LIMIT
DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS
TEST LIMITS

B

SEGMENTED LIMITS

C

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Markers/Limits

Markers/Limits

Limits

Markers/Limits

Limits

MENU L5

Limits

MENU L6

SINGLE LIMITS

Markers/Limits

Limits

MENU L7

MENU L8

SINGLE LIMITS

SINGLE LIMITS

SINGLE LIMITS

- PHASE -

- LOG POLAR -

- GROUP DELAY-

- LINEAR MAG -

UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF
XXX.XXX ˚

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX fs

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX ˚

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX fs

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

READOUT LIMIT

A

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

TEST LIMITS

TEST LIMITS

B

SEGMENTED LIMITS

C

READOUT LIMIT

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS
B

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Figure 4-15.

4-38

A

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

READOUT LIMIT

A

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

TEST LIMITS

B

TEST LIMITS

B

SEGMENTED LIMITS

C

SEGMENTED LIMITS

C

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Markers/Limits Key-Group Menus (2 of 3)

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Markers/Limits

MARKERS/LIMITS KEY-GROUP

Limits

MENU L9

SINGLE LIMITS

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

UPPER LIMIT ON/OFF
XXX.XXX ˚

A

READOUT LIMIT

A

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

READOUT LIMIT

B
C

B

SEGMENTED LIMITS

C

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

A

B
C

SEGMENTED LIMITS
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

C

MENU LFX
READOUT LIMIT
INTERCEPTS

MENU LSX

SEGMENTED LIMITS

- XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX

Markers/Limits

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX xx

Limits

LOWER LIMIT
XXX.XXX xx
L IMIT DIFFERENCE
Δ (UPPER-LOWER)
INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

MENU L13

SINGLE LIMITS

X.XXXX GHz
X.XXXX GHz
X.XXXX GHz
X.XXXX GHz
X.XXXX GHz
X.XXXX GHz

- SWRUPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Markers/Limits

A

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
DEFINE UPPER
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
DEFINE LOWER
SEGMENTED OFFSETS
HORIZONTAL
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

VERTICAL
XX.XXX dB
CLEAR ALL
DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS
TEST LIMITS
SINGLE LIMITS

Limits

TEST LIMITS

B

SEGMENTED LIMITS

C

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU
LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

MENU LD1

DEFINE UPPER SEGS
SEGMENT ON (OFF)
X

TEST LIMITS

READOUT LIMIT

- IMAGINARY -

TEST LIMITS

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

MENU L14

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

SINGLE LIMITS

STOP POSITION

A

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS
B

A

READOUT LIMIT
DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS
TEST LIMITS

B

SEGMENTED LIMITS

C

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

HORIZONTAL
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

VERTICAL
XX.XXX dB
BEGIN NEXT
ATTACH NEXT
CLEAR SEGMENT
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

MENU LD1

DEFINE LOWER SEGS
SEGMENT ON (OFF)
X
START POSITION
HORIZONTAL
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
VERTICAL
XX.XXX dB

VERTICAL
XX.XXX dB

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

TEST LIMITS

VERTICAL
XX.XXX dB

HORIZONTAL
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

READOUT LIMIT

START POSITION
HORIZONTAL
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

STOP POSITION

- POWER OUT--

A

READOUT LIMIT

A

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

SEGMENTED LIMITS

READOUT LIMIT

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

TEST LIMITS

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX ˚

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

DISPLAY ON(OFF)
LIMITS

- PHASE -

- REAL -

- IMAGINARY-

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

A

SINGLE LIMITS

SINGLE LIMITS

- REAL -

READOUT LIMIT

MENU L12

MENU L11

MENU L10

- LINEAR MAG -

Limits

Limits

Limits

SINGLE LIMITS

Markers/Limits

Markers/Limits

Markers/Limits

BEGIN NEXT
ATTACH NEXT
CLEAR SEGMENT
PREVIOUS MENU

B

MENU LTST

TEST LIMITS
LIMIT ON (OFF)
TESTING
BEEP FOR ON (OFF)
TEST FAILURE
LIMIT TEST TTL
FAIL CONDITION
TTL LOW/TTL HIGH
CHANNEL 1 TEST
PASS (FAIL)
CHANNEL 2 TEST
PASS (FAIL)
CHANNEL 3 TEST
PASS (FAIL)
CHANNEL 4 TEST
PASS (FAIL)

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Figure 4-15.

37xxxE OM

Markers/Limits Key-Group Menus (3 of 3)

4-39

STORAGE INTERFACE

4-12

STORAGE INTERFACE

Disk Files

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The 37xxxE has two internal storage devices: a 8 GB SD Card and a
USB 2.0 storage interface. The format, directory structure, and files
are compatible with MS-DOS, Version 5.0 and above.
The following file types may be found on the 37xxxE SD Card:
q Program Files: Binary files used to load the operating program.
They are provided on the SD Card and a backup copy is provided
on a USB drive. Application programs cannot read them.
q Calibration Data Files: Binary files used to store and retrieve
calibration and other types of data. Application programs cannot
read them. File size depends on the calibration type.
q Test Files: Typically tab-delimited ASCII files with the "txt" file
extension. They can be read by application programs.
q S2P Parameter Data Files: Files that define a 2-port file format
that includes all four S parameters with the "s2p" file extension.
They can be read by application programs.
q Tabular Measurement Data Files: ASCII files used to store actual measurement data. They can be read by application programs. File size depends on the type of measurement and the selected options.
q Trace Memory Files: Binary files used to store trace data. Application programs cannot read them. Used to perform trace math
operations on collected trace data.
q Cal Kit and AutoCal Files: Characterization data files for Coax
or Waveguide calibration components and AutoCal modules.

4-40

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Disk File Output Device

COMMAND LINE

You can select the output drive destination for the disk file as either
the SD Card (C:) or the USB drive (A:). The format of the file is also
selected. The default condition is a text file to the SD Card.
You may then proceed with normal measurements. The Start Print
key may then be used at the instant you intend to capture the data.
Menu DISK 3 then appears and allows the creation of a new file or to
overwrite an existing file in the current directory.
Note that the output for text and S2P files have predefined formats.
Tabular data format is configured via the Print Options (Menu PM5)
or Tabular Data (Menu PM3). Bitmap format is configured via the
Print Options (Menu PM5), Options (Menu PM5, or Graphical Data
(Menu PM3A). HPGL format is configured via the Plot Options (Menu
PL1).
You are able to direct hard copy output to the SD Card or USB drive,
in addition to the printer and plotter. In addition to text (*.txt), S2P
(*.s2p), and tabular (*.dat) files, bitmaps (*.bmp) and HPGL (*.hgl)
files are offered to satisfy your desktop publishing requirements. Specifically, color bitmaps and graphic language files can be imported into
Windows applications.

Formatting a Data File
Drive

Copying Data Files From
Drive to Drive

Recovering From Drive
Write/Read Errors

Formatting a USB drive and an SD Card are no longer supported in
the 37xxxE series VNA. The 37xxxE series is compatible with FAT16
and FAT32 formatted USB drives.
Use the COPY FILES selection on the “USB Drive Utilities” and “SD
Card Utilities” menus to copy data files between the SD Card and USB
drive.
If you experience a read or write error during a drive operation, you
should:
q Verify first character of filename is alphabetical and not numeric
q Verify that the drive has been properly formatted
q Verify that the write-protect tab on the drive is not engaged
q Retry the drive operation
Repeated drive errors may indicate a defective drive.

4-13

COMMAND LINE

The Command Line menu choice provides several DOS compatible
commands. Command line options are:
q CREATE DIRECTORY (MD)
q LIST DIRECTORY (DIR)
q CHANGE DIRECTORY (CD)

37xxxE OM

4-41

COMMAND LINE

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

q DELETE FILES (DEL)
q REMOVE DIRECTORY (RD)
q COPY FILES (COPY)
These options are NOT case sensitive.
Create Directory

List Directory

This command is performed by: MD c:\pat-h\dir_name or
MD a:\path\dir_name. The c: is used to refer to the SD Card, and a: is
for the USB drive.
This command is performed by “DIR” command. This may be used as
DIR c:\path or without any path specified. The syntax is:
DIR c:\path or DIR a:\path.
If c: or a: is not used, the default is the current SD Card directory. You
may use wild cards as follows:
q DIR *.cal
q DIR filter?.cal

Change Directory

This command is performed by CD c:\path or CD a:\path. Both of
these options do not require a device name. The device name is referred to by c: or a:.
If you choose to do CD dir_name, this implies the current SD Card directory.

Delete Files

This command is used to delete a particular file(s) in a directory, or delete the entire contents of the directory by using the wild card option.
The command line is:
q DEL filename
q DEL c:\path\filename
q DEL a:\path\*

4-42

37xxxE OM

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Remove Directory

COMMAND LINE

This command is used to delete a particular directory. The command is
only valid when the entire directory is empty:
q RD c:\path\directory
q RD a:\path\directory

Copy Files

This command is performed by the command line COPY source: destination:
COPY c:\path\name a:\path\name
Any combination of the drive is allowed, except for the same directory,
and the same name.
Once the COMMAND LINE is selected, the system will prompt a one
line dialog box to allow command entry. The dialog box remains open
only for the user interface.

Conventions

Be aware of the following conventions when using the Command Line
choice. There is a limitation of five sublevel directories in the 37xxxE
models:
q Any directory change will force the system to use that as the current directory for other menus that deal with the file system. For
example, if the user changes the directory to c:\lib\junk, then
any activity for saving hard copy or calibration files will be saved
on the junk directory.
q The default directory is the root directory.
q GPIB support: GPIB mnemonics will provide functionality for
each of the above operations. The format is shown below:
Function

37xxxE OM

Path

List directory

DIR “[device:/][”

Make directory

MD “[device:/][path]name”

Change directory

CD “[device:/][path]napath]nameme”

Delete File(s)

DEL “[device:/][path]name”

Remove directory

RD “[device:/][path]name”

Copy files

COPY “[device:][/path/][source]” “[device:][/path/][destination]”

4-43

COMMAND LINE

FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Vector Network Analyzer
Clear/Ret Loc _____ Esc
Start Print ________
Hold _____________

Print Screen, F12
Pause

Default
Program
Avg/Smooth
Menu
Channel Menu

Utility Menu

Options Menu

Ctrl

Trace Smooth

A v e ra ge

V ide o I F B W

Alt

Marker Menu

Readout
Marker

Limits

Shift

Ch 1

Ch 2

Ch 3

Ch 4

F3

F4

Command
Line

Recall
S a ve

S Params
Graph Type

Set Scale
Auto Scale

Copyright (c) 1994-2010 by Anritsu Company

F1

Alt

Default
Program
Avg/Smooth
Menu

Trace Smooth

Shift

Channel Menu

Marker Menu

Ctrl
Vector Network Analyzer
Clear/Ret Loc _____

Esc

Start Print ________
Hold _____________

Print Screen, F12
Pause

F2

Ch 1

Utility Menu
Average

Options Menu

F5

F6

Command
Line

Recall
Save

Video IF BW

Readout
Marker

Limits

Ch 2

Ch 3

Ch 4

F2

F3

F4

S Params
Graph Type

Set Scale
Auto Scale

Recall CAL
from SD
Save CAL
to SD
Ref Plane
Auto Ref
Plane

Recall NRM
from SD
Save NRM
to SD
Trace Memory

Ref Plane
Auto Ref
Plane

Save S2P
to USB
Save S2P
to SD

Save DAT
to USB
Save DAT
to SD

Hardcopy
Menu

Shift

Domain

Applications

Begin Cal

Stop Print

Store Data
to Memory

Setup Menu

Data Points

F8

F9

F 10

F7

Recall CAL
from HDD
Save CAL
to HDD

Alt

Save TXT
to Floppy
Save TXT
to SD

Ctrl

Recall NRM
from SD
Save NRM
to SD

Apply Cal

Start Print

F 11

F 12

Save TXT
to USB
Save TXT
to SD

Save S2P
to USB
Save S2P
to SD

Save DAT
to USB
Save DAT
to SD

Hardcopy
Menu

Alt

Trace Memory

Domain

Applications

Begin Cal

Stop Print

Shift

Store Data
to Memory

Setup Menu

Data Points

F8

F9

F 10

Ctrl

Apply Cal

Start Print

F 11

F 12

Copyright (c) 1994-2010 by Anritsu Company

F1

F5

F6

F7

Actual-Size Keyboard Templates for 37xxxE

4-44

37xxxE OM

Chapter 5
Error and Status
Table of Contents
5-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5-2

ERROR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Chapter 5
Error and Status Messages
5-1

INTRODUCTION

This chapter lists, describes, and provides corrective action for the error messages that point to problems that the operator can correct. Any
error messages that appear on the display but do not appear in this
chapter will require action by a qualified service representative.

5-2

ERROR MESSAGES

Error messages are provided in Tables 5-1 and 5-2.

Table 5-1.

General Error Messages (1 of 3)
Error Message

Description

Corrective Action

ATTENUATOR UNAVAILABLE

Option 6 Port 2 Test Step Attenuator is
not installed.

Install Option 6 Step Attenuator,

BANDS MUST SEQUENCE

Frequency bands in Multiple Source
mode must sequence in a 1-2-3-4-5 order.

None, no skipping is allowed.

BOTH LIMITS MUST BE ON

Must have both limits activated.

Turn on limits.

DIFFERENT H/W SETUP. RECALL
ABORTED

Source is different from the recalled
setup.

Reconfigure system to duplicate the
hardware setup that was used to store
the saved data.

DIFFERENT S/W VERSION, RECALL
ABORTED

Saved state not compatible with hardware or software version.

Load compatible software (S/W) version
and retry.

DISCRETE FREQS LOST

Change in frequency caused discrete fill
frequencies to be lost.

None.

DISPERSIVE MEDIUM, ONLY TIME
USED

Distance does not apply for dispersive
media.

None.

FREQUENCIES HAVE REACHED UPPER
LIMIT

Frequencies being defined in Multiple
Source mode have reached upper limits
of Sources.

Redefine frequencies to not exceed limits of Sources.

ILLEGAL IN C.W. MODE

Attempted to readout limit frequency.

None, no limit lines are permitted in CW
mode.

ILLEGAL IN TIME DOMAIN

Attempted to readout limit frequency

None.

LOGO FILE NOT FOUND

Attempted to read a non-existent logo
file from disk.

Create user-defined logo using application on external controller.

MEAS DATA NOT AVAILABLE FOR
STORAGE

Measurement data is not available for
storage on the USB drive or SD Card.

None.

MEMORY LOCATION CORRUPTED

Requested memory location is corrupted.

None. If problem reoccurs after storing a
new setup, contact Anritsu Customer
Service.

NO BANDS ARE STORED

No frequency bands have been defined
and stored.

Need to define and store frequency
bands to turn on Multiple Source mode.

37xxxE OM

5-3

ERROR MESSAGES

Table 5-1.

ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES

General Error Messages (2 of 3)
Error Message

Description

Corrective Action

NO STORED MEMORY DATA

No data is stored in the USB drive or SD
Card memory.

None.

OPTION NOT INSTALLED

Selected an option that is not installed.

None.

OUT OF CAL RANGE

Entered values out of the selected calibration range.

Change calibration range or re-enter values that are within the current range.

OUT OF H/W RANGE

Entered value is out of the instrument’s
hardware range.

Re-enter values that are within range.

OUT OF RANGE

Entered value is out of range.

Re-enter values that are within range.

OUT OF RANGE, 10 PERCENT MIN

Entered value is out of the instrument’s
range by greater than 10 percent.

Re-enter frequency or power value.

OUT OF RANGE, 20 PERCENT MAX

Entered smoothing or group delay value
exceeds the range by greater than 20
percent.

Re-enter values that are within range, 0
to 20%.

OUT OF SWEEP RANGE

Entered a frequency that is out of the instrument sweep range.

Re-enter frequency.

OUT OF WINDOW RANGE

Attempted to set marker outside start to
stop range.

Redefine marker to be within frequency
start/stop range.

POWER OUT OF CALIBRATED RANGE

Power range has been changed to be
outside the range of the active linearity
calibration. Linearity calibration is turned
off.

Perform linearity calibration over new
power range.

POWER RESTORED TO CAL RANGE

Power range is outside of the linearity
calibration range when the calibration
was turned on. The power range is
changed to the calibration range.

If new power range is desired, perform
new linearity calibration over new power
range.

RECEIVER OUT OF RANGE BY EQUATION

Equation defined in Multiple Source
mode places receiver frequency out of
range when attempting to store band.

Redefine frequency.

SOURCE 1 OUT OF RANGE BY EQUATION

Equation defined in Multiple Source
mode places Source 1 frequency out of
range when attempting to store band.

Redefine frequency.

SOURCE 2 OUT OF RANGE BY EQUATION

Equation defined in Multiple Source
mode places Source 2 frequency out of
range when attempting to store band.

Redefine frequency.

STANDARD CAL NOT VALID FOR WAVEGUIDE

Cannot use waveguide when calibrating
with the standard method.

Use the Offset Short method with waveguide.

START F FOLLOWS PREVIOUS STOP F

Start frequency of current band immediately follows stop frequency of previous
band. Cannot be modified.

None.

START GREATER THAN STOP

Entered start frequency is greater than
the stop frequency.

Re-enter frequency values such that the
start frequency is lower than the stop
frequency.

START MUST BE LESS THAN STOP

Entered start frequency is greater than
the stop frequency.

Re-enter frequency values such that the
start frequency is lower than the stop
frequency.

STEP IS TOO LARGE

Entered discrete fill step extends the
stop fill out of range.

Re-enter so that step is within range.

5-4

37xxxE OM

ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES

Table 5-1.

ERROR MESSAGES

General Error Messages (3 of 3)
Error Message

Description

Corrective Action

STOP IS OVER RANGE

Entered value exceeds the instrument’s
stop frequency.

Re-enter stop frequency.

SYSTEM BUS ADDRESSES MUST BE
UNIQUE

GPIB address is being used by another
bus instrument.

Select a different, unique GPIB address.

SYSTEM UNCALIBRATED

37xxxE is uncalibrated for the selected
measurement values.

Perform a measurement calibration.

TOO FEW POINTS, 2 MINIMUM

Entered too few discrete file points, 2 is
minimum.

Re-enter data points.

TOO MANY POINTS, 1601 MAXIMUM

Entered too many discrete file points,
1601 points are the maximum allowed.

Re-enter data points.

UNDEFINED DIVIDE BY ZERO

Denominator cannot be zero in equation.

Make denominator a value other than
zero.

WARNING: NO GPIB CONTROL OF
SOURCE SWEEP

Neither Source power nor flat-port power
can be modified when receiver mode is
user-defined with NO Source GPIB control.

None.

WARNING: SET ON RECEIVER MODE

Phase-lock setting is undefined when
VNA is Set-On Receiver mode.

None.

WARNING: SOURCE 2 DOES NOT EXIST

2nd, external, frequency source is not
present.

Connect frequency source.

WINDOW TOO SMALL

Attempted to set start greater than or
equal to stop.

Re-enter frequency values.

Table 5-2.

Disk Error Messages
Error Message

Description

Corrective Action

7140: USB DRIVE GENERAL ERROR

Invalid media or format.

Use FAT16 or FAT32 format in the
37xxxE.

7142: USB DRIVE READ ERROR

Read error when accessing disk file.

Use FAT16 or FAT32 format in the
37xxxE.

7143: DISK WRITE ERROR

Error in writing to disk file.

Use FAT16 FAT32 format in the 37xxxE.

7147: USB DRIVE UNAVAILABLE

USB drive is not available.

Install USB drive.

7170: SD CARD GENERAL ERROR

General error in accessing SD Card.

Retry and if still fails, reformat SD Card.

7172: SD CARD READ ERROR

Read error when accessing disk file.

Retry and if still fails, reformat SD Card.

7173: SD CARD WRITE ERROR

Error in writing to disk file.

Retry and if still fails, reformat SD Card.

7177: SD CARD UNAVAILABLE

SD Card is not available.

Ensure SD Card is installed.

8140: GENERAL DISK BUFFER ERROR

Out of RAM.

Press the System State, Default Program
key and retry.

FILE NOT FOUND

Disk file not found.

None.

USB DRIVE HAS NO ROOM FOR FILE

USB drive is full.

Delete files or install a new USB drive.

USB DRIVE NOT READY

USB drive is not ready (or not installed.).

Install USB drive.

USB DRIVE WRITE PROTECTED

Write protection feature in place.

Remove write protection feature.

SD CARD HAS NO ROOM FOR FILE,
DELETE EXISTING FILES(S) TO CREATE SPACE

SD Card is full.

Delete files.

37xxxE OM

5-5

ERROR MESSAGES

Table 5-3.

ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES

Ethernet-Related-Error Messages (1 of 1)
Error Message

Description

Corrective Action

INVALID IP REQUESTED

An Invalid IP is requested.

Enter a valid IPv4 compatible address.

IP IS RESERVED

IP Entered is a reserved IP

Examples of reserved IPs:
127.x.x.x
x.0.0.0
x.0.0.1
255.255.255.255
Addresses ending in 0 or 255

CHANGES TO INT. IP ADDRESS ARE
ONLY ALLOWED WITHIN SAME
SUBNETPLEASE CHANGE IP
ADDRESS FIRST

Internal IP address entered cannot be
changed since it is not in the same
subnet as the VNA’s IP address.

Change the IP Address first to the new
IP. Make sure that the IP entered is a
known available and valid IP. See Note
below.

CONNECTION LOST.
RE-ESTABLISHING DEFAULT
NETWORK

When a connection is lost, or an IP entry
takes too long to validate, the network
will re-establish a default network setup.

Try the same values again.

NOTE
Five classes of IP ranges are available: Class A, Class B,
Class C, Class D, and Class E. While only Classes A, B,
and C are commonly used, the VNA will accept any IP in
any range with the exception of reserved IPs. Anritsu
highly recommends IP addresses that are either Private
(Class A) or that belong to your own network. The
following Table shows a quick summary of the classes and
the IP assignments:
Class

5-6

Range

A

1.0.0.1 to 126.255.255.254

B

128.1.0.1 to 191.255.255.254

C

192.0.1.1 to 223.255.254.254

D

224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255

E

240.0.0.0 to 254.255.255.254

37xxxE OM

Chapter 6
Data Displays
Table of Contents
6-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6-2

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Single Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Dual Channel Display: Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Four Channel Display: Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dual Trace Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Graph Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

6-3

FREQUENCY MARKERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

6-4

LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

6-5

STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Analog Instrument Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Sweep Indicator Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

6-6

DATA DISPLAY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
S-parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Data Display Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Display of Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

6-7

HARD COPY AND DISK OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Disk Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Chapter 6
Data Displays
6-1
6-2

INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides discussion and examples of the various types of
data displays.

DISPLAY MODES AND
TYPES

The 37xxxE displays measurement data using a “Channel Concept.”
This means that each channel can display both a different
S-Parameter and a different graph type. As you select each channel,
the graph type, scaling, reference delay, S-Parameter, etc., associated
with that channel appears on the screen. You can display the same
S-Parameter on two or more channels.
Several graph-types are possible: polar, rectilinear, or Smith chart. The
rectilinear graph-type may be magnitude, phase, magnitude and
phase, SWR, group delay, real, imaginary, and real and imaginary. The
Smith chart graph-type is specifically designed to plot complex impedances.

Single Channel Display:
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4

You select this display type (Figures 6-1 and 6-2) by choosing “Single
Display” on Menu CM (Appendix A). Possible graph types are Smith,
polar, rectilinear, or dual (split) rectilinear (magnitude and phase).
S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

LOG MAG.

REF=

0.040000000

Figure 6-1.

37xxxE OM

0.000 dB

10.000 dB/DIV

GHz

20.000000000

Single Channel Display, Log Magnitude

6-3

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

DATA DISPLAYS

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

LOG MAG.

REF=

0.000 dB

0.040000000

GHz

PHASE

Figure 6-2.
Dual Channel Display:
Ch 1 and 3 or Ch 2 and 4

10.000 dB/DIV

REF=

20.000000000

0.00
|

90.00
|

/DIV

Single Channel Display, Magnitude and Phase

If you have chosen a dual display of magnitude and phase, the affected
area of the LCD screen is subdivided into two smaller portions (Figure
6-3). You select this display type by choosing “Dual Display” in Menu
CM (Appendix A).
S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

1

IMPEDANCE
.5

2

.2

5

0

-5

-.2

-2

-.5
2.036000000 -

5.030000000 GHz

S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION
PHASE

2.036000000

Figure 6-3.

6-4

REF=

0.00
|

GHz

90.00
|

/DIV

5.030000000

Dual Channel Display

37xxxE OM

DATA DISPLAYS

Four Channel Display:
Ch 1, 2, 3, 4

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

From four-to-eight graph types are displayed. In each quadrant, the
graph type can be any of the possible choices listed in the GT menu
(Appendix A). If you have chosen to display magnitude and phase on a
channel, the quadrant displaying that channel is further subdivided as
described above. You select this display type by choosing “All Four
Channels” in Menu CM. An example of a four-channel display appears
in Figure 6-4, below.
S11

S21
0.000 dB

1

Z

LOGM+P
10.000 dB/DIV

2

.5

.2

5

0

2.036000000

GHz

5.030000000

-5

-.2

-2

-.5
-1
S12
0.000 dB

0.00
|

90.00
|

S22

LOGM+P
10.000 dB/DIV

Z
2

.5

.2

2.036000000

GHz

5.030000000

5

0

-5

-.2

-2

-.5
0.00
|

Figure 6-4.

37xxxE OM

90.00
|

/DIV

/DIV

1

-1

Four-Channel Display

6-5

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

Dual Trace Overlay

DATA DISPLAYS

For rectilinear graph types, two traces can be displayed, one overlaid
(superimposed) on the other (Figure 6-5). By menu selection, the two
traces can be Channel 1 overlaid on Channel 3 or Channel 2 overlaid
on Channel 4. Each trace is in a different color. Channels 1 and 2 are
displayed in red, while Channels 3 and 4 are displayed in yellow.
CH1:S11 FWD REFL

CH3:S21 FWD TRANS

LOG MAG.

LOG MAG.

REF=

0.000 dB

REF=

10.000 dB/DIV

2.036000000

Figure 6-5.

6-6

0.000 dB

10.000 dB/DIV

GHz

5.030000000

Dual Trace Overlay

37xxxE OM

DATA DISPLAYS

Graph Data Types

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

The data types (real, imaginary, magnitude, phase) used in the displayed graph-types reflect the possible ways in which S-Parameter
data can be represented in polar, Smith, or rectilinear graphs. For example: Complex data—that is, data in which both phase and magnitude are graphed—may be represented and displayed in any of the
ways described below:
q Complex Impedance—displayed on a Smith chart graph
q Real and imaginary—displayed on a real and imaginary graph
q Phase and magnitude components—displayed on a rectilinear
(Cartesian) or polar graph
q Group delay plot—group-delay measurement units are time,
those of the associated aperture are frequency and SWR
The quantity group delay is displayed using a modified rectilinear-magnitude format. In this format the vertical scale is in linear
units of time (ps-ns-ms). With one exception, the reference value and
reference line functions operate the same as they do with a normal
magnitude display. The exception is that they appear in units of time
instead of magnitude.
Examples of graph-data types are shown in Figure 6-6 through 6-11,
on the following pages.

37xxxE OM

6-7

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

DATA DISPLAYS

S11 FWD REFL

REF=

1.000 U

200.000 mU/DIV

90

LINEAR POLAR

135

45

180

0

0

-135

-45

-90

Figure 6-6.

Linear Polar Graticule

S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION
LOG MAG.

REF=

-38.569 dB

REF=

483.588 mU

2.036000000
S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION
LINEAR MAG.

2.036000000

Figure 6-7.

6-8

GHz

GHz

20.000 dB/DIV

10.020000000

200.000 mU/DIV

10.020000000

Dual Channel Rectilinear Graticule

37xxxE OM

DATA DISPLAYS

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

S21 FWD TRANS

REF=

0.000 dB

1.000 dB/DIV

90

LOG POLAR

135

45

180

0

-135

-45

-90

Figure 6-8.

Log Polar Graticule

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

1

IMPEDANCE

2

.5

.2

5

0
.2

.5

1

2

5

-5

-.2

-.5

-2

-1
2.036000000 -

Figure 6-9.

37xxxE OM

10.020000000 GHz

Normal Smith Chart

6-9

DISPLAY MODES AND TYPES

DATA DISPLAYS

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

1

IMPEDANCE

.5
2

.2

-.17

0

.2

.5

1

2

5

-5.8

-.2

-2
-.5

-1
2.036000000 -

Figure 6-10.

10.020000000 GHz

3 dB Compressed Smith Chart

S11 FORWARD REFLECTION

.20

IMPEDANCE

.15

.10

.05

0
.82

.85

.90

.95

1.0

1.05

1.10

1.15

1.20

-.05

-.10

-.15

20

Figure 6-11.

6-10

20 dB Compressed Smith Chart

37xxxE OM

DATA DISPLAYS

6-3

FREQUENCY MARKERS

FREQUENCY MARKERS

The example below shows how the 37xxxE annotates markers for the
different graph-types. Each marker is identified with its own number.
When a marker reaches the top of its graticule, it will flip over and its
number will appear below the symbol. When markers approach the
same frequency, they will overlap. Their number will appear as close to
the marker as possible without overlapping.
S11

S12
-20.000 dB

1

Z

LOGM+P
10.000 dB/DIV

2

.5

.2

5

2

1

3

2
0

2.036000000

GHz

10.020000000

3
-5

-.2

3

2

1

1
-2

-.5
-1
S21
0.000 dB

3.91
|

60.00
|

S22

LOGM+P
10.000 dB/DIV

/DIV

1

Z
2

.5

2
.2

1

1

2.036000000

GHz

10.020000000

5

2

3
0

3

2

-5

-.2

3
1
-2

-.5
7.99
|

Figure 6-12.
Marker Designation

6-4

LIMITS

37xxxE OM

60.00
|

/DIV

-1

Marker Annotation

Depending on menu selection, you may designate a marker as the “active” or the “delta reference” marker. If you choose a marker to be active—indicated by its number being enclosed in a square box—you
may change its frequency or time (distance) (or point number in CW
Draw) with the Data Entry keypad or knob. If you have chosen it to be
the delta-reference marker, a delta symbol (D) appears one character
space above the marker number (or one character space below a
“flipped” marker). If the marker is both active and the delta reference
marker, the number and the delta symbol appear above (below) the
marker. The delta symbol appears above (below) the number.
Limit lines function as settable maximum and minimum indicators for
the value of displayed data. These lines are settable in the basic units
of the measurement on a channel-by-channel basis. If the display is
rescaled, the limit line(s) will move automatically and thereby maintain their correct value(s).

6-11

STATUS DISPLAY

DATA DISPLAYS

Each channel has two limit lines (four for dual displays), each of which
may take on any value. Limit lines are either horizontal lines in rectilinear displays or concentric circles around the origin in Smith and polar displays.
Each channel can produce segmented limits. They allow different upper and lower limit values to be set at up to ten segments across the
measurement range.

6-5

STATUS DISPLAY

In addition to the graticules, data, markers, and marker annotation,
the 37xxxE displays certain instrument status information in the data
display area. This information is described below.

Reference Position Marker

The Reference Position Marker indicates the location of the reference
value. It is displayed at the left edge of each rectilinear graph-type. It
consists of a green triangular symbol similar to the cursor displayed in
the menu area. You can center this symbol on one of the vertical
graticule divisions and move it up or down using the “Reference Position” option. When you do this, the data trace moves accordingly. If you
also select the reference value option, the marker will remain stationary and the trace will move with the maximum allowable resolution.
When changing from a full-screen display to half- or quarter-screen
display, the marker will stay as close to the same position as possible.

Scale Resolution

Each measurement display is annotated with the scale resolution. For
log-magnitude displays resolution ranges from 0.001 to 50 dB per division. Linear displays of magnitude range from 0.001 to 50 units per division. Cartesian phase displays can range from 0.01 to 90 degrees per
division. The polar display is 45 degrees per display graticule.

Frequency Range

Each measurement display is annotated with the frequency range of
the measurement.

Analog Instrument Status

Display
Area

The 37xxxE displays analog-instrument-status messages (in red when
appropriate) in the upper right corner of the data-display area (left).
They appear at the same vertical position as line 2 of the menu area. If
more than one message appears, they stack up below that line.

Menu
Area

Display screen
showing the data

6-12

37xxxE OM

DATA DISPLAYS

Measurement Status

Sweep Indicator Marker

6-6

DATA DISPLAY
CONTROL

DATA DISPLAY CONTROL

The 37xxxE displays measurement-status messages (in red when
appropriate) in the upper-right corner of the graticule (channel) to
which they apply.
A blue sweep-indicator marker appears at the bottom of each displayed graph-type. It indicates the progress of the current sweep.
When measuring quiet data—that is, data having few or no perturbations—this indicator assures that the instrument is indeed sweeping.
Its position is proportional to the number of data points measured in
the current sweep. If the sweep should stop for any reason, the position of the indicator will stop changing until the sweep resumes.
The following figure shows the algorithm that the 37xxxE uses to
display the active channel.

S E L E C T A C T IV E C H A N N E L
(P R E S S C H 1 , C H 2 , C H 3 , C H 4 )

C H A N N E L
P R E S E N T L Y
D IS P L A Y E D
?

N O

Figure 6-13.

37xxxE OM

N O

D U A
C H A N
D IS P L A
1 -3
?

L
N E L
Y E D

Y E S

Y E S

C O N T IN U
D IS P L A Y IN G A C T IV
(S IN G L E , D U A L , O R F O
D IS P L A Y

S IN G L E
C H A N N E L
D IS P L A Y E D
?

E
E C H A N N E L
U R -C H A N N E L
)

C H A N G E T O
A C T IV E C H A N N E L

Y E S

N O

C H A N G E T O D U A L 1 -3
+ C H A N G E T O
A C T IV E C H A N N E L

C H A N G E T O D U A L 2 -4
+ C H A N G E T O
A C T IV E C H A N N E L

Active Channel Algorithm

6-13

DATA DISPLAY CONTROL

S-parameter Selection

Data Display Update

DATA DISPLAYS

If you select a new S-parameter using Menu SP (Appendix A), it appears on the then-active channel in the same graph-type in which it
was last displayed. The following table shows the displayable S-parameters based on the correction type you have in place. If you attempt to display other S-parameters, an error message appears. In
cases when there is no last-displayed S-parameter stored, the display
will default as shown. If an S-parameter is selected for which there
was no last-displayed graph-type, the display defaults to S21, S12 Log
Magnitude and Phase and S11, S22 Smith.
When you change a control panel parameter that affects the appearance of the display, the entire display changes immediately to reflect
that change. For example, if you press Autoscale, the entire display
rescales immediately. You do not have to wait for the next sweep to see
the results of the change. The following parameters are supported for
this feature: Reference Delay, Offset, Scaling, Auto Scale, Auto Reference Delay, Trace Math, IF BW, and Smoothing. In the case of Averaging, the sweep restarts.
Correction Type

None

Displayable
S-parameters
All

Default Display Position
CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

S11

S12

S21

S22

Frequency
Response
Reverse Transmission

S12

Forward Transmission

S21

Both

S12, S21

Port 1 Reflection Only

S11

Port 2Reflection Only

S22

S12
S21
S12

S21

S11
S22

Reflection Only, Both

S11, S22

S11

Forward 1-Path 2-Port

S11, S21

S11

Reverse 1-Path 2-Port

S12, S22

12-Term

All

S22
S21
S12

S11

S12

S22
S21

S22

If the knob is used to vary any of the above parameters, the change occurs as the measurement progresses–that is, the continuing trace will
reflect the new setting(s).
When you change a marker frequency or time (distance), the readout
parameters will change. This change reflects the changes in measurement data at the marker’s new frequency, using data stored from the
previous sweep.
Display of Markers

6-14

Once you have selected a marker to display, it will appear on the
screen. It does not matter what resolution you have selected. When
you set a marker to another calibrated frequency and then lower the

37xxxE OM

DATA DISPLAYS

HARD COPY AND STORAGE OUTPUT

resolution, that frequency and the marker will continue to display. It
will display even if its frequency is not consistent with the data points
in the lower-resolution sweep.

6-7

HARD COPY AND
STORAGE OUTPUT

In addition to the LCD screen, the Model 37xxxE is capable of
outputting measured data as a:
q Tabular Printout
q Screen-Image Printout
q Pen Plot
q Disk Image of the Tabular Data Values
The selection and initiation of this output is controlled by the Hard
Copy keys.

Tabular Printout

An example of a tabular format is shown in Figure 6-14 (page 6-16).
The tabular formats are used as follows:
q Tabular Printout Format: Used when printing three or four channels.
q Alternate Data Format: Used when printing one or two channels.
In tabular printouts, the 37xxxE shifts the data columns to the left
when an S-Parameter is omitted. Leading zeroes are always
suppressed. The heading (Model, Device ID, Date, Operator, Page)
appears on each page.

Screen-Image Printout

Plotter Output

In a Screen-Image Printout, the exact data displayed on the screen is
dumped to the printer. The dump is in the graphics mode, on a
pixel-by-pixel basis.
The protocol used to control plotters is “HP-GL (Hewlett-Packard
Graphics Language). HP-GL contains a comprehensive set of vector
graphics type commands. These commands are explained in the Interfacing and Programming Manual for any Hewlett-Packard plotter,
such as the 7470A.
When the plotter is selected as the output device, it is capable of drawing the graph shown on the screen or of drawing only the data trace(s).
Multiple traces may be drawn on a single sheet of paper (in different
colors, if needed).

Storage Output

37xxxE OM

The 37xxxE can write-to or read-from the SD Card or USB drive all
measured data. This data is stored as an ASCII file in the exact same
format as that shown for the tabular printout in Figure 6-14
(page 6-16). If read back from the storage device, the data is output to
the printer and prints as tabular data.

6-15

HARD COPY AND STORAGE OUTPUT

Figure 6-14.

6-16

DATA DISPLAYS

Example of a Tabular Printout

37xxxE OM

Chapter 7
Measurement
Calibration
Table of Contents
7-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-2

DISCUSSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Establishing the Test Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Understanding the Calibration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Calibrating for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Verification Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7-3

SLIDING TERMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

7-4

SOLT CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

7-5

OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

7-6

TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

7-7

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

7-8

TRM CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

7-9

MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Chapter 7
Measurement Calibration
7-1

INTRODUCTION

This section provides discussion and examples for performing a measurement calibration. It also provides a detailed procedure for calibrating with a sliding termination.

7-2

DISCUSSION

Measurements always include a degree of uncertainty due to imperfections in the measurement system. The measured value is always a
combination of the actual value plus the systematic measurement errors. Calibration, as it applies to network analysis, characterizes the
systematic measurement errors and subtracts them from the measured value to obtain the actual value.
The calibration process requires that you establish the test ports, perform the calibration, and confirm its quality. Let us examine each of
these steps.

Establishing the Test Ports

Figures 7-1 and 7-2 are two of the most common approaches used to
make measurements on two-port devices. In many cases, you may need
adapters to change between connector types (N, SMA, GPC-7, etc.) or
between genders (male [M] or female [F]).

PORT 1
PORT 2

Figure 7-1.

37xxxE OM

Establishing the Test Port

7-3

DISCUSSION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

The use of cables and/or adapters does not effect the final measurement result, if they were in place for the calibration process. The vector error corrections established during the calibration process eliminates cable and/or adapter effects as long as the ports used are stable
and exhibit good repeatability. Figure 7-2 shows such a configuration.

ADAPTERS

PORT 1 PORT 2

Figure 7-2.

Using Adapters on the Test Port

Many calibration kits include adapters that are designed to have equal
phase length. These parts are called phase equal adapters (PEA).
Anritsu designs in-series adapters (e.g., K Connector M-M, M-F, F-F)
to be phase insertable when technically possible. When available, it is
good practice to use PEAs to establish test ports (Figure 7-3).

33KKF50
33KFKF50

TEST SET CONNECTOR
KM
TEST PORT 1
KM
TEST PORT 2
KF

CABLE CONNECTOR
KM
Figure 7-3.

7-4

Use of PEAs to Establish Test Ports

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

DISCUSSION

This approach offers two advantages:
q It minimizes wear on the more expensive test set and cable connectors
q It provides a simple solution to measuring non-insertable devices
(e.g., a filter with K female input and output connectors) by
merely swapping PEAs after calibration. See Figure 7-4
NOTE
In this and other discussions, we will talk about
“insertable” and “non-insertable” devices. Insertable devices have an insertable connector pair (i.e., male input
and female output connectors) and can be measured after
a through calibration. A non-insertable device has a
non-insertable pair of connectors. This would be the case if
it included female connectors on both ports or different
connector types on each port. Therefore, “non-insertables”
cannot be connected directly into the measurement path
without an adapter.
USING THE PHASE-EQUAL INSERTABLE
(PEI)
Calibration
M

F

M

F

F

M

PEA

PEA
TEST
PORT

TEST
PORT

Measurement
M

F

M
PEA

F

F

M

DUT

TEST
PORT

Figure 7-4.
Understanding the
Calibration System

F

M

PEA
TEST
PORT

Using Phase-Equal Insertables

Measurement errors must be reduced by a process that uses calibration standards. The standards most commonly used are Opens, Shorts,
and Z0 (Characteristic Impedance) Loads. In conjunction with a
through connection, these standards can correct for the major errors in
a microwave test system. These errors are Directivity, Source Match,
Load Match, Isolation, and Frequency Tracking (reflection and transmission).
Calibration also corrects for many internal system errors, such as RF
leakage, IF leakage, and system component interaction.
Random errors such as noise, temperature, connector repeatability,
DUT sensitive leakages, frequency repeatability, and calibration variables are not completely correctable. However, some of them can be
minimized by careful control. For instance: temperature effects can be
reduced by room temperature control, calibration variables can be re-

37xxxE OM

7-5

DISCUSSION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

duced through improved technique and training, and frequency errors
can be virtually eliminated by the fully synthesized internal source.

ERRORS REDUCED BY CALIBRATION

·

Directivity

·

Source Match

·

Load Match

·

Frequency Sensitivity (Tracking)

·

Isolation

We know that adapters and cables degrade the basic directivity of the
system, but these errors are compensated by vector error correction.
In general, transmission measurement errors are source match, load
match, and tracking; while reflection measurement errors are source
match, directivity, and tracking.
Error modeling and flow graphs are techniques used to analyze the
errors in a system. Error models describe the errors, while flow graphs
show how these errors influence the system. Error models (Figure 7-5)
can become quite complex.

DIRECTIVITY, SOURCE MATCH,
AND TRACKING ERRORS

INTERNAL SYSTEM ERRORS

·

RF Leakage

·

IF Leakage

·

System Interaction

DISTORTED MEASUREMENT

ED

E

S

S 11M

S 11A

RANDOM ERRORS

·

Frequency

·

Repeatability

·

Noise

·

Connector Repeatability

·

Temperature/Environmental
Changes

·

Calibration Variables

Figure 7-5.

Example of Error Modeling

The 37xxxE offers a selection of calibration possibilities depending on
the user’s needs. These possibilities are as follows:
q Frequency Response
q Reflection Only—1 Port
q 1 Path, 2 Port
q 12-Term—2 Port, Both Directions

TRANSMISSION MEASUREMENT
ERRORS

7-6

·

Source Match

·

Load Match

·

Tracking

These calibration types are described below.
Frequency Response: Corrects for one or both of the transmission error
terms associated with measurements of S21, S12, or both.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

DISCUSSION

Reflection Only: Corrects for the three error terms associated with an
S11 measurement (EDF, ESF, and ERF), an S22 measurement (EDR,
ESR, and ERR), or both.
REFLECTION MEASUREMENT ERRORS

·

Source Match

·

Directivity

·

Tracking

CALIBRATION TYPES

·

Frequency Response

·

Reflection Only—1 Port

·

1 Path, 2 Port

·

12 Term—2 Port, Both Directions

37xxxE OM

1 Path, 2 Port: Corrects for the four forward-direction error terms
(EDF, ESF, ERF, and ETF), or the four reverse-direction error terms
(EDR, ESR, ERR, and ETR).
Full 12-Term: Corrects for all twelve error terms associated with a
two-port measurement. A 12-Term error model is shown in Figure 7-6.
Measurement calibration using the 37xxxE is straightforward and
menu directed. A short time spent in preparation and preplanning will
make the process simple and routine. (Example: Adjusting the coaxial
cables used in the measurement setup such that insertion of the DUT
causes minimal flexing of these cables).
The screen prompts on the 37xxxE guide you through the calibration
process—a process that consists of connecting and disconnecting
connectors and moving the slide on a sliding load (if one is used).
The most critical part of the calibration process is properly seating and
torquing the connectors. Also, you will notice that the calibration takes
longer when the ports are terminated with a load. This is intentional.
It allows for more averaging during the isolation measurement.

7-7

DISCUSSION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

PORT 1

E XF
1

PORT 1

PORT 2

PORT 2
S21M

S11

E SF

DUT

ETF

DUT

EDF

S22

S2 1

RF IN

S21

ERR

ELR

ELF

S22

S11

ESR

EDR

S22
S12

ETR

1

S12M

ERF

RF

S12

EXR

S11M
Forward Direction Terms

Reverse Direction Terms

12 - TERM
E XF
PORT 1

PORT 1

PORT 2
S21M

RF IN

S21

PORT 2
S21

RF IN

S21

ETF

ETF

DUT

DUT

1 Path - 2 Port Terms

Frequency Response - Transmission Only Terms

EDF
S11

E SF

ERF
S11M

PORT 1

PORT 1

PORT 2

RF IN

PORT 2

RF IN

DUT

DUT

EDF
S11

E SF

ERF

S1 1

ER F

S11M
Reflection Only Terms

Figure 7-6.

7-8

Frequency Response - Reflection Only Terms

Error Models

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Calibrating for a
Measurement

CALIBRATING FOR A REFLECTION
MEASUREMENT USES THREE
STANDARDS:

·

Short

·

Open

·

Termination

IDEAL TERMINATIONS

·

Reflectionless

·

Perfect Connector

·

Infinite-Length, Dimensionally Exact, Reflectionless Transmission
Line

PRACTICAL Zo TERMINATIONS

·

Broadband Load

·

Sliding Termination

37xxxE OM

DISCUSSION

Let us assume that we want to correct for three errors in the reflection
measurement: source match, directivity, and tracking. We accomplish
this using three standards.
Shorts are the easiest to visualize. They totally reflect all of the incident RF energy output at a precise phase. The terms zero-ohms impedance, voltage null, and 180° phase all define an RF Short.
Opens are similar to Shorts, but their response is more complex. The
terms voltage maximum, infinite impedance, and 0° phase all define a
perfect Open. A perfect Open, however, is only a concept. In reality
Opens always have a small fringing capacitance.
To account for the fact that the Open will not predictably reflect impedance at an exact 0° phase reference, we alter its response using coefficients that accurately characterize the fringing capacitance. The coefficients are different for each coaxial line size, since each size has a
different fringing capacitance. To maximize accuracy, ensure that
these coefficients are installed prior to the calibration (Menu U3).
As Opens and Shorts provide two references for a full reflection, Z0 terminations provide a zero-reflection reference.
Ideal Z0 terminations must consist of two parts, a perfect connector
and an infinite-length perfect transmission line that absorbs all of the
RF energy that enters it (no reflections).
Infinite length transmission lines are unwieldy at best, so you must
use less-than-ideal terminations. For calibration purposes there are
two common types: broadband loads and sliding terminations.

7-9

DISCUSSION

BROADBAND LOAD

·

Easy to Use

·

Inexpensive

·

Adequate for Most Applications

SLIDING LOAD

·

Connector

·

Long Transmission Line

·

Movable Microwave Load

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Broadband loads are widely used. An example is the Anritsu 28 Series
Termination. These terminations are easy to use as calibration tools,
and they are adequate for most applications.
Sliding Loads are the traditional vector network analyzer Z0 calibration reference. They provide the best performance when the application requires high-precision return loss measurements. Sliding loads
consist of a connector, a long section of precision transmission line, and
a microwave load that is movable within the transmission line. One
thing to remember with sliding loads is that they have a low-frequency
limit and must be used with a fixed load below this cutoff frequency
for full frequency coverage. Anritsu sliding loads cut off at 2 GHz.
(V-connector sliding loads cut off at 4 GHz).
Pin depth—the relationship between the interface positions of the
outer and center conductors—is the most critical parameter under
your control in a sliding load. An example of its criticality is that an
incorrect pin depth of 0.001 inch can cause a reflection return loss of
44 dB. And, since we are trying to calibrate to accurately measure a 40
dB return loss, correct pin depth makes a big difference!
Cables in the measurement system are another cause for concern. The
main criteria for a cable are stability and repeatability. Anritsu offers
two types of cables that meet these criteria: semi-rigid and flexible.
Our semi-rigid cables provide maximum stability with limited flexibility of movement. Our flexible cables allow more freedom of movement
and provide good phase stability.

7-10

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Evaluating the Calibration

DISCUSSION

The 37xxxE provides an accurate representation of complex data.
However, it can only provide accuracy to the extent of the supplied
calibration data. For this reason, it is necessary to periodically verify
the calibration data and the 37xxxE system performance.
Calibration verification reveals problems such as a poor contact with
one of the calibration components, improper torquing, or a test port out
of specification. Problems like these can easily occur during a calibration procedure. Anyone who has experienced one of these problems and
stored bad data—after having performed a complete calibration procedure—knows the frustration it can cause. Additionally, it can be very
costly to use incorrectly taken measurement data for design or quality
assurance purposes.
The best way to confirm a calibration is to measure a precision,
known-good device and confirm its specifications.

Verification Kits

Anritsu has developed several precision-component kits: for 3.5 mm
connectors, for GPC-7 connectors, K Connectorsâ and V Connectorsâ.
These are, respectively, the Models 3666, 3667, and 3668 and 3669 Verification Kits.
Each of the kits contain 20 dB and 50 dB attenuators, an airline, and a
Beatty Standard. A Beatty Standard is a two-port mismatch similar to
a beadless airline. It consists of a center conductor with a discontinuity
in the middle providing the mismatch (Figure 7-7).
Typically, these verification kits will be used by calibration or metrology labs. Each of the kits contain several precision components, all of
which have been characterized at specified frequencies. The data on
these components is stored on a disk provided with the verification kit.

5 0 9

S

Figure 7-7.

37xxxE OM

1 1

5 0 9
2 5 9

5 0 9

The Beatty Standard

7-11

DISCUSSION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

The verification of the kit components is straight forward. The
components are first measured with the 37xxxE, then they are
compared with the data recorded on the USB drive. If the measured
data compares favorably with the recorded data (taking tolerances into
consideration), then the system is known to be operating properly and
providing accurate data.
There is one caution that you need to observe when using Verification
Kits. Because the verification components have been characterized,
you must handle them carefully so that you do not change their known
characteristics. Consequently, you should not have them available for
daily use. Rather, you should only use them for the accuracy verification checks taken every 6-to-12 months (or at any other time the system’s integrity is in doubt).
This completes the discussion on calibration. Refer to paragraph 7-3
for a procedure showing how to calibrate the sliding load.

7-12

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

7-3

SLIDING TERMINATION

SLIDING TERMINATION

Sliding terminations (loads) are the traditional Z0 calibration-reference devices for vector network analyzer calibration. When correctly
used and perfectly aligned, they can be more accurate than precision
fixed loads. However, sliding terminations have a 2 GHz (4 GHz for
V-Connector sliding loads) low-frequency limit and must be used with
a fixed load for full frequency-range coverage.
Sliding terminations consist of a connector, a long section of precision
transmission line, and a microwave load that is movable within the
transmission line. Pin depth—the relationship between the interface
positions of the outer and center conductors—is the most critical parameter that you can control in a sliding termination. An example of
its criticality is that an incorrect pin depth of 0.001 inch can cause a
reflection return loss of 44 dB. Since you are usually calibrating to accurately measure a greater than 40 dB return loss, correct pin depth is
essential.
Since setting an accurate pin depth is so important, this discussion
centers on describing how to set the pin depth for male and female
sliding terminations. Calibration with the sliding termination is essentially the same as described below for the broadband load.
The procedure below uses the Model 3652A Calibration Kit and its
17KF50 and 17K50 Sliding Terminations. Calibration is similar for the
Model 3650A SMA/3.5mm, Model 3651A GPC-7 and Model 3654D
V connector kits. For the 3651A, the procedure is simpler because the
GPC-7 connector is genderless, there are no male and female versions.
Procedure
Step 1.

Remove the Pin Depth Gauge from the kit, place it
on the bench top.
NOTE
The gauge is convertible between male and female. The
following procedure describes the zeroing process for the
female fitting. The procedure for the male fitting begins
with Step 16.

37xxxE OM

7-13

SLIDING TERMINATION

7-14

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 2.

Push the outer locking ring towards the gauge to expose the center pin.

Step 3.

Take the 01-210 Ref Flat from the kit.

Step 4.

While holding the gauge as shown, press the Ref
Flat firmly against the end of the exposed center
pin.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 5.

SLIDING TERMINATION

While pressing the Ref Flat against the center pin,
check that the pointer aligns with the “0” mark. If it
does not, loosen the bezel lockscrew and rotate the
bezel to align the pointer with the “0” mark. Tighten
the bezel lock screw.
NOTE
Gently rock the Ref Flat against the center
pin to ensure that it is fully depressed and
you have accurately set the gauge for zero.

37xxxE OM

Step 6.

Remove the sliding termination with the female-connector (17KF50, for this example) from the
kit, and slide the load all the way toward the end
closest to the connector.

Step 7.

With either hand, pick up the sliding termination
near its connector end.

Step 8.

Cup the sliding termination in your palm, and support the barrel between your body and crooked elbow.

7-15

SLIDING TERMINATION

7-16

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 9.

Remove the flush short by holding its body and unscrewing its connector.

Step 10.

Install the gauge onto the end of the sliding termination.

Step 11.

If the COARSE SET adjustment—which has been
set at the factory—has not moved, the inner dial on
the gauge will read “0.” If it doesn’t, perform the
Coarse Set Adjustment in Step 15.

Step 12.

Place the sliding termination, with the gauge attached, on the bench top.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

SLIDING TERMINATION

Step 13.

Loosen the FINE LOCK ring and turn the FINE
ADJ ring to position the gauge pointer 2-3 small divisions on the “–” side of zero.

Step 14.

Turn the FINE LOCK ring clockwise to both tighten
the adjustment and place the pointer exactly to “0.”
The Sliding Termination is now ready to use.
NOTES
Ensure that the inner dial reads “0.”
The following step is not normally necessary.
It needs to be done only if the adjustment
has changed since it was set at the factory.

37xxxE OM

Step 15.

With the 01-211 Flush Short installed, loosen the
COARSE LOCK and gently push the COARSE SET
adjustment rod in as far as it will go. This coarsely
sets the center conductor to be flush against the attached short. Return to Step 2.

Step 16.

The procedure for adjusting the male-connector sliding termination is essentially the same as that described above. The only difference is that you must
install the female adapter on the end of the gauge
shaft, over the center conductor. To install this
adapter, proceed as follows:
š

Zero-set the gauge as described in Steps 2
through 5.

š

Push the outer locking ring back toward the
gauge and turn it clockwise onto the exposed
threads.

š

Loosen the lock ring one turn in a counterclockwise direction.

7-17

SLIDING TERMINATION

7-18

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 17.

Remove the 01-223 Female Adapter (“F ADAPTER
FOR PIN GAUGE”) from the kit.

Step 18.

Install the female adapter over the center pin and
screw it into the locking ring, and tighten the outer
ring until it is snug against the housing.

Step 19.

Inspect the end of the adapter, you should see no
more than two exposed threads. If so, repeat Steps 7
through 10.

Step 20.

Connect the gauge to the sliding termination and
zero set the center pin using the FINE ADJ as previously described in Steps 2 through 5.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

7-4

SOLT CALIBRATION

Calibration Procedure

SOLT CALIBRATION

The SOLT calibration for the 37xxxE Vector Network Analyzer system
uses a Short, Open, Load, and a Thru line connection to categorize the
inherent errors in the measurement system. These errors include
those caused by connectors as well as internal system errors such as
RF leakage, IF leakage, and component interaction. For maximum
accuracy, install the capacitive coefficients (for the open device) using
Menu U3.
A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing a
Short-Open-Load-Throughline calibration is given below.
Step 1.

Press the Begin Cal key.

.

Begin
Cal

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Apply
Cal

MENU C11
BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA
REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL

Step 2.

Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE
TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes SOLT and
COAXIAL are not presently shown in blue as being
selected.)

AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD
STANDARD
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX
CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

7-19

SOLT CALIBRATION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 3.
MENU C11A
CHANGE CAL METHOD
AND LINE TYPE

When menu C11A (left) appears, move the cursor to
the following:
a. SOLT (STANDARD), then press the Enter key.
This selects Standard (SOLT) as the calibration
method.

NEXT CAL STEP
CAL METHOD

b. COAXIAL, then press the Enter key. This selects coaxial transmission line media.

SOLT (STANDARD)
SSLT (DOUBLE
OFFSET SHORT
WITH LOAD)

c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key.
This causes menu C11 to return to the screen.

SSST (TRIPLE
OFFSET SHORT)
LRL/LRM

Step 4.

When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the SOLT
calibration method and COAXIAL line type have
been selected. Select NEXT CAL STEP and press
the Enter key to proceed. This brings up menu C5.

Step 5.

Menu C5 (left) lets you select the type of calibration.
For this example, move the cursor to FULL
12-TERM and press the Enter key. This selection calibrates for all twelve error terms.

Step 6.

The next menu, C5D, lets you choose whether to include or exclude the error terms associated with
leakage between measurement channels. For a normal calibration, you would choose to include these
error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to INCLUDE ISOLATION ( STANDARD ) and press
the Enter key.

TRM
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE
COAXIAL
WAVE GUIDE
MICROSTRIP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MENU C5
CALIBRATION
TYPE
FULL 12-TERM
1 PATH
2 PORT
TRANSMISSION
FREQUENCY
RESPONSE

MENU C5D
SELECT USE
OF ISOLATION
IN CALIBRATION

REFLECTION
ONLY

INCLUDE
ISOLATION
(STANDARD)

PRESS 
TO SELECT

EXCLUDE
ISOLATION
PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-20

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 7.
MENU C1
SELECT
CALIBRATION
DATA POINTS

SOLT CALIBRATION

Next, menu C1 appears. It lets you select the number
of frequency points at which calibration data is to be
taken. The choices are:
a. NORMAL: Data is taken at up to 1601 equally
spaced frequencies across the calibration frequency range. Use this selection for this example.

NORMAL
(1601 POINTS
MAXIMUM)

b. C.W.: Data is taken at one point. This choice
brings up menu C2B (below) that lets you select
the single CW frequency point.

C.W.
(1 POINT)
N-DISCRETE
FREQUENCIES
(2 TO 1601
POINTS)

MENU C2B

TIME DOMAIN
(HARMONIC)

SINGLE POINT
CALIBRATION

PRESS 
TO SELECT

C.W. FREQ
XX.XXXX GHz
FINISHED
ENTRY, NEXT
CAL STEP
INPUT FREQ AND
PRESS 
TO SELECT

c. N-DISCRETE FREQUENCIES: This selection
lets you specify a discrete number of frequency
points, from 2 to 1601.

MENU C2
FREQ RANGE OF
CALIBRATION

d. TIME DOMAIN: This selection is the calibration mode for low-pass time-domain processing.
It lets you select frequencies at integer (harmonic) multiples of the start frequency.

START
0.0400000000GHz
STOP
20.000000000 GHz
201 DATA PTS
0.099800000 GHz
STEP SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINTS
1601 MAX PTS
801 MAX PTS
401 MAX PTS
201 MAX PTS
101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS

Step 8.

The next menu, C2 (left), lets you set your start and
stop frequencies. For this example, move the cursor
to START, press 40 on the keypad, and hit the MHz
terminator key. Perform like operations for the
STOP choice, except make entry read 20 GHz. After
setting the frequencies, select NEXT CAL STEP
and press the Enter key.

NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

7-21

SOLT CALIBRATION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 9.

When menu C3 (left) appears, if you want to change
any of the parameters shown in blue letters, place
the cursor on that parameter and press the Enter
key. For this example, we will change them all, starting with the top one. Move the cursor to PORT 1
CONN and press the Enter key.

Step 10.

In menu C4 (below), which appears next, move the
cursor to K CONN (M) and then press the Enter key.
This choice presumes that you have a K-Female connector on the device-under-test (DUT). Remember, in
this menu you choose the connector type on the test
port, or the connector type that mates with the DUT
connector. When menu C3 returns, observe that K
CONN (M) is now shown in blue for the PORT 1
CONN choice.

MENU C3
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
PORT 1 CONN
K CONN (M)
PORT 2 CONN
SMA (M)
REFLECTION
PAIRING
MIXED
LOAD TYPE
SLIDING
THROUGHLINE
PARAMETERS
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

MENU C4
SELECT PORT 1
CONNECTOR TYPE
K-CONN (M)
K-CONN (F)
V-CONN (M)
V-CONN (F)
W1-CONN (M)
W1-CONN (F)
SMA (M)
SMA (F)
GPC-3.5 (M)
GPC-3.5 (F)
GPC-7
USER DEFINED
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-22

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

SOLT CALIBRATION

Step 11.

With menu C3 (left) displayed, move the cursor to
PORT 2 CONN and press the Enter key. Following
the procedure in Step 10, select K CONN (M) for the
Port 2 connector.

Step 12.

When menu C3 returns:

MENU C3
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
PORT 1 CONN
K CONN (M)
PORT 2 CONN
K CONN (M)
REFLECTION
PAIRING
MIXED
LOAD TYPE
SLIDING
THROUGH
PARAMETERS
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

a. Observe that PORT 2 CONN now reflects K
CONN (M).
b. Move the cursor to REFLECTION PARING
and press the Enter key. This brings up menu
C13 (below).

MENU C13
SELECT
REFLECTION
PAIRING
MIXED
(OPEN–SHORT
SHORT–OPEN)
MATCHED
(OPEN–OPEN
SHORT–SHORT)
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Reflection Pairing lets you mix or match the
Open and Short reflection devices in the Calibration Sequence menus. The MIXED choice
lets you calibrate using first an Open on one
port and a Short on the other, then a Short on
one port and an Open on the other. Conversely,
MATCHED lets you calibrate first using an
Open on both ports then using a Short on both
ports. For this example, choose MIXED and
press the Enter key.

37xxxE OM

7-23

SOLT CALIBRATION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 13.
MENU C3
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
PORT 1 CONN
TYPE N (M)
PORT 2 CONN
TYPE N (F)

When menu C3 returns:
a. Observe that REFLECTION PARING now reflects MIXED.
b. Move cursor to LOAD TYPE and press the Enter key. This brings up menu C6 (below).

MENU C6

REFLECTION
PARING
MIXED

SELECT
TYPE OF LOAD

LOAD TYPE
BROADBAND

BROADBAND
FIXED LOAD

THROUGH
PARAMETERS

SLIDING LOAD
(MAY ALSO
REQUIRE
BROADBAND
FIXED LOAD)

REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL

PRESS 
TO SELECT

PRESS 
TO SELECT

This menu lets you select either of two load
types, broadband or sliding. Broadband loads
are adequate for all but the most demanding reflection measurements. They are easier to use
and less expensive than sliding loads. If you
choose a sliding load, refer to paragraph 7-3 for
a procedure on setting pin depth.
For this example, select BROADBAND LOAD
and press the Enter key.

MENU C6A
ENTER
BROADBAND LOAD
IMPEDANCE
BROADBAND
LOAD
IMPEDANCE
50.000 W

c. The next menu to appear, C6A (left), prompts
you to enter an impedance value. For this example, use the rotary knob to change the displayed
value to 50W. Alternatively, you can key in
50 ohms. That is, press 50 on the keypad and
the X1 terminator key. If the value is 1 mW, key
in .001 and press the 10–3 terminator key. Conversely, if the value is 1 MW, key in 1000 and
press the 103 terminator key.

PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-24

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 14.

SOLT CALIBRATION

When menu C3 again returns:

MENU C20

a. Observe that LOAD TYPE now shows
BROADBAND.

ENTER
THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS

b. Move cursor to THROUGH PARAMETERS
and press the Enter key.

OFFSET LENGTH
0.0000 mm
THROUGHLINE
IMPEDANCE
50.000 W

Step 15.

Menu C20 (left) appears next. It lets you define the
length of the offset and the impedance of the
throughline. For this example, enter 0 mm for length
and 50 ohms for impedance.

Step 16.

When menu C3 reappears, move the cursor to REFERENCE IMPEDANCE and press the Enter key.
This brings up menu C17 (left).

Step 17.

Move cursor to REFERENCE IMPEDANCE and
use the rotary knob to change the displayed value to
50W.

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

MENU C17
ENTER
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
50.000 W

Press the Enter key when you have completed your
value entry.

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

37xxxE OM

7-25

SOLT CALIBRATION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 18.

When menu C3 returns, select TEST SIGNALS to
bring up menu SU2 (left).

Step 19.

Menu SU2 lets you define the power level of the signals at the two test ports. Power delivered to the
DUT by the test set must be such that the measured
signals are well above the noise floor but below the
0.1 dB compression level of the Test Set samplers.
(Noise floor and maximum signal into Port 2 levels
are specified in Appendix C.)

MENU SU2
TEST SIGNALS
POWER CONTROL
0.0 dB
(0 TO -20)
PORT 1 ATTN
20 dB (0 - 70)
PORT 1 POWER
XX.XX dBm

For measuring high power signals, a Port 2 attenuator in the forward transmission path allows up to
1 Watt of power (30 dBm) before 0.1 dB compression
occurs.

PORT 2 ATTN
X0 dB (0-40)
CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS
(CAL EXISTS)

Determine the required input power level and the
expected output RF power level from the DUT.
Ideally, the Port 2 step attenuator should be set so
that the input to the test sampler (left) is less than
–10 dBm. For example, if the input to the DUT is set
for –20 dBm and the device gain is 40 dB, set the
PORT 2 ATTN menu option for 20 dB.

FLATNESS
CORRECTION
AT XX.X dBm
SOURCE 2 PWR
XX.X dBm
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT

(If you needed to calibrate the test port for power
flatness, you would move the cursor to FLATNESS
CORRECTION and press the Enter key.)
Finally, move the cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and
press the Enter key. This returns you to menu SU1.
When you get there, press the Enter key to return to
menu C3.

P2

TB

0 to 40 dB Sampler

7-26

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 20.
MENU C3
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
PORT 1 CONN
TYPE N (M)
PORT 2 CONN
SMA (M)

SOLT CALIBRATION

When menu C3 reappears, select START CAL and
press the Enter key to begin the calibration procedure.
Continue the calibration sequence by following the
prompts as they appear. Connect the appropriate Isolation Devices, Broadband Loads, Opens, Shorts, and
Throughlines, when requested in the calibration sequence.

REFLECTION
PAIRING
MIXED
LOAD TYPE
SLIDING
THROUGH
PARAMETERS
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

37xxxE OM

7-27

OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT)

7-5

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

OFFSET-SHORT
CALIBRATION (SSLT)

The Offset-Short calibration, now also referred to as the Double Offset-Short Calibration, is the standard technique for waveguide; however, this method can be used for the coaxial and microstrip line types
as well. It uses two shorts, two loads, and a thru line to categorize the
inherent errors in the waveguide measurement system. These errors
include those caused by connectors as well as internal system errors
such as RF leakage, IF leakage, and component interaction.

Calibration Procedure

A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing an Offset-Short calibration for waveguide is given below.
Step 1.

Press the Begin Cal key.

.

Begin
Cal

MENU C11
BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA
REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL

Step 2.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Apply
Cal

Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE
TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes OFFSET
SHORT and WAVEGUIDE are not presently shown
in blue as being selected.)

AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD
XXXXXXX
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX
CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-28

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 3.
MENU C11A
CHANGE CAL METHOD
AND LINE TYPE

OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT)

When menu C11A (left) appears, move cursor to the
following:
a. SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT), then
press the Enter key. This selects Offset Short as
the calibration method.

NEXT CAL STEP
CAL METHOD
SOLT (STANDARD)

b. WAVEGUIDE, then press the Enter key. This
brings menu C5 (bottom left) to the screen.

SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT WITH
LOAD)

c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key.
This causes menu C11 to return to the screen.

SSST (TRIPLE
OFFSET SHORT)
LRL/LRM

Step 4.

When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the OFFSET SHORT calibration method and WAVEGUIDE
line-type have been selected. Select NEXT CAL
STEP and press the Enter key to proceed.

Step 5.

Menu C5 appears next. This menu (bottom left) lets
you select the type of calibration. For this example,
move the cursor to FULL 12-TERM and press the
Enter key.

Step 6.

The next menu, C5D (below), lets you choose
whether to include or exclude the error terms associated with leakage between measurement channels.
For a normal calibration, you would choose to include
these error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) and press the
Enter key.

TRM
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE
COAXIAL
WAVEGUIDE
MICROSTRIP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MENU C5
SELECT
CALIBRATION TYPE
FULL 12-TERM
1 PATH
2 PORT
TRANSMISSION
FREQUENCY
RESPONSE
REFLECTION
ONLY
PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

MENU C5D
SELECT USE
OF ISOLATION
IN CALIBRATION
INCLUDE
ISOLATION
(STANDARD)
EXCLUDE
ISOLATION
PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-29

OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT)

Step 7.

Menu C1 (left), which appears next, lets you select
the number of frequency points at which calibration
data is to be taken. Of these choices, which were described in paragraph 7-4, choose NORMAL (1601
POINTS MAXIMUM) for this example.

Step 8.

The next menu, C2 (below), lets you set your start
and stop frequencies. For this example, move cursor
to START, press 40 on keypad, and press the MHz
terminator key. Perform like operations for the
STOP choice, except make entry read 20 GHz. After
setting the frequencies, select NEXT CAL STEP
and press the Enter key.

MENU C1
SELECT
CALIBRATION
DATA POINTS
NORMAL
(1601 POINTS
MAXIMUM)

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

C.W.
(1 POINT)
N-DISCRETE
FREQUENCIES
(2 TO 1601
POINTS)
TIME DOMAIN
(HARMONIC)

MENU C2

PRESS 
TO SELECT

FREQ RANGE OF
CALIBRATION
START
0.0400000000GHz
STOP
20.000000000 GHz
201 DATA PTS
0.099800000 GHz
STEP SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINTS
1601 MAX PTS
801 MAX PTS
401 MAX PTS
201 MAX PTS
101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS

MENU C3B
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS
INSTALLED

NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

REFLECTION
PAIRING
XXXXXXXX
LOAD TYPE
BROADBAND
THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

7-30

Step 9.

When menu C3B (bottom left) appears, if you want
to change any of the parameters shown in blue letters, place the cursor on that parameter and press
the Enter key. (These choices operate the same as
was described for menu C3 in section 7-4.) For this
example, we change the waveguide parameters.
Move the cursor to WAVEGUIDE PARAMETERS
and press the Enter key.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSLT)

Step 10.

When menu C15 (left) appears, move cursor to one of
the two available choices and press the Enter key.
These choices are described below.

MENU C15
SELECT
WAVEGUIDE
KIT TO USE

a. USE INSTALLED WAVEGUIDE KIT: Selecting this choice uses the values shown in blue
for IDENTIFIER, CUTOFF FREQ, SHORT 1,
and SHORT 2. Select this choice, for this example.

–INSTALLED KIT—
IDENTIFIER
XXXX
CUTOFF FREQ:
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

b. USER DEFINED: Selecting this choice brings
up menu C15A (below), which lets you specify
waveguide parameters. After defining your
waveguide parameters, you are returned to
menu C3B.

SHORT 1
XX.XXXX mm
SHORT 2
XX.XXXX mm
USE INSTALLED
WAVEGUIDE KIT

MENU C15A

USER DEFINED

ENTER
WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS

PRESS 
TO SELECT

WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ:
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 1
XX.XXXX mm
OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 2
XX.XXXX mm
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Step 11.

37xxxE OM

Continue the calibration sequence by following the
prompts as they appear. Connect the appropriate Isolation Devices, Broadband Loads, Shorts, and
Throughlines, when requested in the calibration sequence.

7-31

TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST)
CALIBRATION

7-6

TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT
CALIBRATION (SSST)

Calibration Procedure

MEASUREMENT

The Triple Offset-Short calibration method can be used in coax, waveguide, and microstrip line types, and is most accurate when used over
narrower frequency ranges. As the name implies, this method uses
three offset-shorts to categorize the inherent errors in the measurement system. These errors include those caused by connectors as well
as internal system errors such as RF leakage, IF leakage, and component interaction.
A detailed, step-by-step procedure for performing a Triple Offset-Short
calibration is given below:
Step 1.

Press the Begin Cal key.

.

Begin
Cal

MENU C11
BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA

Step 2.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Apply
Cal

Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE
TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes that OFFSET SHORT and WAVEGUIDE are not presently
shown in blue as being selected.)

REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL
AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD
STANDARD
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX
CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-32

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION
(SSST)

Step 3.
MENU C11A

TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION

When menu C11A (left) appears, move cursor to the
following:
a. SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET SHORT), then press
the Enter key. This selects Triple Offset-Short as
the calibration method.

CHANGE CAL METHOD
AND LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP

SOLT (STANDARD)

b. COAXIAL, then press the Enter key. This brings
menu C5 (left) to the screen.

SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT WITH
LOAD)

c. NEXT CAL STEP, then press the Enter key.
This causes menu C11 to return to the screen.

CAL METHOD

SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET
SHORT)

Step 4.

When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the SSST
calibration method and COAXIAL line-type have
been selected. Select NEXT CAL STEP and press
the Enter key to proceed.

Step 5.

Menu C5 appears next (lower left). This menu lets
you select the type of calibration. For this example,
move the cursor to FULL 12-TERM and press the
Enter key.

Step 6.

The next menu, C5D (below), lets you choose
whether to include or exclude the error terms associated with leakage between measurement channels.
For a normal calibration, you would choose to include
these error terms. Therefore, move the cursor to
INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) and press
the Enter key.

LRL/LRM
TRM
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE
COAXIAL
WAVEGUIDE
MICROSTRIP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C5
CALIBRATION
TYPE
FULL 12-TERM

Menu C5D

1 PATH
2 PORT

SELECT USE
OF ISLOATION
IN CALIBRATION

TRANSMISSION
FREQUENCY
RESPONSE

INCLUDE
ISOLATION
(STANDARD)

REFLECTION ONLY

EXCLUDE
ISOLATION

PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-33

TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION (SSST)
CALIBRATION

Step 7.

Menu C1 appears next (left) and lets you select the
number of frequency points for which calibration
data is to be taken. Select NORMAL (1601 POINTS
MAXIMUM) (refer to section 7-4 for a description).

Step 8.

The next menu, C2 (below), lets you set your start
and stop frequencies. For this example, move the cursor to START, press 65 on the keypad, then press
the GHz terminator key. Perform like operations for
the STOP choice, except make the entry read
110 GHz. After setting the frequencies, select NEXT
CAL STEP and press the Enter key.

MENU C1
SELECT
CALIBRATION
DATA POINTS

MEASUREMENT

NORMAL
(1601 POINTS
MAXIMUM)
C.W.
(1 POINT)
N-DISCRETE
FREQUENCIES
(2 TO 1601
POINTS)

MENU C2
FREQ RANGE OF
CALIBRATION

TIME DOMAIN
(HARMONIC)

START
0.0400000000GHz

PRESS 
TO SELECT

STOP
20.000000000 GHz
201 DATA PTS
0.099800000 GHz
STEP SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINTS
1601 MAX PTS
801 MAX PTS
401 MAX PTS
201 MAX PTS
101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT
Menu C14
SELECT PORT n
OFFSET SHORT
CONNECTOR TYPE
W1-CONN (M)
W1-CONN (F)
SPECIAL A (M)
SPECIAL A (F)

Step 9.

This brings up the Menu C14 (lower left) for selecting the connector types on ports 1 and 2. Select the
W1-CONN connectors with the appropriate sex for a
W1 (1mm) calibration.

SPECIAL B (M)
SPECIAL B (F)
SPECIAL C (M)
SPECIAL C (F)
USER DEFINED
PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-34

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION
(SSST)

TRIPLE OFFSET-SHORT CALIBRATION

Step 10.

When menu C3B (left) appears, if you want to
change any of the parameters shown in blue letters,
place the cursor on that parameter and press the Enter key.

Step 11.

When menu C3 (lower left) returns:

MENU C3B
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS
INSTALLED

a. Observe that PORT 1 CONN and
PORT 2 CONN now reflects W1 CONN (M).

REFLECTION
PAIRING
MIXED

b. Move the cursor to REFLECTION PARING
and press the Enter key. This brings up menu
C13 (below).

LOAD TYPE
BROADBAND
THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS

MENU C13
SELECT
REFLECTION
PAIRING

TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

MIXED
(SHORT1-SHORT2,
SHORT2-SHORT3,
SHORT3-SHORT1)
MATCHED
(SHORT1-SHORT1,
SHORT2-SHORT2,
SHORT3-SHORT3)

MENU C3
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

PORT 1 CONN
W1-CONN (M)
PORT 2 CONN
W1-CONN (M)

Step 12.

Reflection Pairing lets you mix or match Offset Short
devices in the Calibration Sequence menus, as per
the kit available. Generally, on-wafer calibration substrates have matched components; however, it is
more convenient, on a coaxial calibration, to use
MIXED pairing in the case of the same connector
types on both ports. The MIXED choice lets you calibrate using different offset shorts on the two ports.
Conversely, MATCHED pairing lets you calibrate in
sequence using one offset short type in each step. For
this example, choose MIXED and press the Enter
key.

Step 13.

When menu C3 reappears, confirm the calibration
parameters selected for the calibration, then select
START CAL and continue the calibration sequence
by following the prompts as they appear.

Step 14.

Connect the appropriate Isolation Devices, the three
Offset Shorts, and the Throughlines when requested
in the calibration sequence.

REFLECTION
PAIRING
XXXXXXXX
LOAD TYPE
BROADBAND
THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

37xxxE OM

7-35

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

7-7

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

The LRL/LRM (line-reflect-line/line-reflect-match) calibration* feature
provides an enhanced capability for error compensation when making
measurements in coaxial, microstrip and waveguide transmission media. Instead of using the standard Open, Short, and Load, the
LRL/LRM calibration method uses two lines and a reflection or match.
The difference in length between line 1 and line 2 creates the measurements necessary for the error solutions.
The LRL/LRM calibration technique uses the characteristic impedance
of a length of transmission line or a precision match as the calibration
standard. A full LRL/LRM calibration consists of two transmission line
measurements, a high reflection measurement, and an isolation
measurement. Using this technique full 12-term error correction can
be performed with the 37xxxE.
Three-line LRL/LRM calibration can also be selected. In a two-line
LRL measurement, the difference in length between line one and line
two is necessary for calibration but limits the frequency range to a 9:1
span. The use of three lines in the calibration extends the frequency
range to an 81:1 span. A combination of LRL and LRM can accomodate
any broadband measurement.
1. Through the use of LRL/LRM calibration and an external computer, in conjunction with ANACAT software, multiple-level de-embedding is possible. This calibration allows you to make semi-conductor chip measurements up to 40 GHz with a single test fixture.
2. In addition, any non-coaxial transmission media, including mixed
media interconnects, can be accommodated. For example, a test device with a waveguide input and a coplanar microstrip output can
be measured. Software automatically compensates for the
microstrip dispersion.
A detailed procedure for calibrating for a measurement using the
LRL/LRM method is provided in the following pages.

*LRM Calibration Method of Rhode & Scharwz, Germany

7-36

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

LRL/LRM Calibration
(Microstrip)

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

Microstrip is a dispersive media. The 37xxxE applies dispersion
compensation during calibration for microstrip measurements.
Because the 37xxxE must know the specific microstrip parameters,
during the calibration procedure menus are available for entering the:
q width of the strip
q thickness of the substrate
q substrate dielectric constant
q effective dielectric constant Zc
q characteristic impedance (reference)
When testing microstrip devices it is necessary to launch from coax to
microstrip. In production testing this launching must be temporary, so
that the device can easily be installed in and be removed from the fixture. The requirement for launching to 65 GHz is met by the Anritsu
Universal Test Fixture (UTF). The UTF provides accurate, repeatable
launch to substrates from 5 to 70 mils thick, and from 0.15 to 2 inches
long. Offset connections and right angles can be configured. DC bias
probes can be mounted to the UTF to inject bias onto the substrate.
UTF calibration/verification kits are available for alumina in 10 mil,
15 mil, and 25 mil microstrip, and for 25 mil coplanar waveguide. Although a UTF is not essential, the following calibration procedures
presume its use.
Step 1.

Select the desired LRL line substrates from the appropriate microstrip calibration kit. When called for
in the calibration sequence, mount the LRL line substrates on the UTF following the procedure given in
the 3680 OMM.

Step 2.

Press the Begin Cal key.

.

Begin
Cal

37xxxE OM

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Apply
Cal

7-37

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 3.

Select CHANGE CAL METHOD AND LINE
TYPE, in menu C11 (left). (This assumes LRL and
MICROSTRIP are not presently shown in blue as being selected.)

Step 4.

When menu C11A (bottom left) appears, highlight
the following selections.

MENU C11
BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA
REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL

a. LRL/LRM and press the Enter key.

AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD
XXXXXXXX

b. MICROSTRIP and press the Enter key.

TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX

c. NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter key.
Step 5.

When menu C11 reappears, confirm that the
LRL/LRM calibration method and MICROSTRIP
line-type have been selected. Select NEXT CAL
STEP and press the Enter key to proceed.

Step 6.

Continue through the calibration sequence, and
make the following selections from the menus that
appear:

CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

INCLUDE ISOLATION (STANDARD) (Menu
C5D)
NORMAL (1601 POINTS MAXIMUM) (Menu C1)
START (Your start frequency) (Menu C2)
STOP (Your stop frequency) (Menu C2)

MENU C11A
CHANGE CAL METHOD
AND LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
CAL METHOD
SOLT (STANDARD)
SSLT (DOUBLE OFFSET SHORT WITH
LOAD)
SSST (TRIPLE OFFSET SHORT)
LRL/LRM
TRM
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE
COAXIAL
WAVEGUIDE
MICROSTRIP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MENU C5D

MENU C1

MENU C2

SELECT USE
OF ISOLATION
IN CALIBRATION

SELECT
CALIBRATION
DATA POINTS

FREQ RANGE OF
CALIBRATION

INCLUDE
ISOLATION
(STANDARD)

NORMAL
(1601 POINTS
MAXIMUM)

EXCLUDE
ISOLATION

C.W.
(1 POINT)

PRESS 
TO SELECT

N-DISCRETE
FREQUENCIES
(2 TO 1601
POINTS)
TIME DOMAIN
(HARMONIC)
PRESS 
TO SELECT

START
0.0400000000GHz
STOP
20.000000000 GHz
201 DATA PTS
0.099800000 GHz
STEP SIZE
MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINTS
1601 MAX PTS
801 MAX PTS
401 MAX PTS
201 MAX PTS
101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-38

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 7.

When menu C3G appears, if you want to change
microstrip parameters to be different from those
shown in blue, place the cursor on MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS and press the Enter key.

Step 8.

When menu C16 (left) appears, move the cursor to
the Anritsu 3680 UTF calibration kit you wish to use
or to USER DEFINED; then press the Enter key.

MENU C3G
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
USER DEFINED
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

The calibration kit selections shown in menu C16
are for the following 3680 Connection Substrate
Kits:
10 MIL KIT — 36804B-10M
15 MIL KIT — 36804B-15M
25 MIL KIT — 36804B-25M
If you choose USER DEFINED, the next menu that
appears (C16A), lets you characterize your parameters. Move the cursor to each selection, key in a
value, then press the Enter key to return to menu
C16.

MENU C16
SELECT
MICROSTRIP
KIT TO USE
10 MIL KIT
15 MIL KIT
25 MIL KIT
USER DEFINED
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

MENU C16A
ENTER
MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
WIDTH OF
STRIP
XX.XXXX mm
THICKNESS OF
SUBSTRATE
XXXX.XXXX mm
Zc
XXX.XXX pW
SUBSTRATE
DIELECTRIC
XX.XX
EFFECTIVE
DIELECTRIC
XX.XX
(RECOMMENDED
0.00)
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

37xxxE OM

7-39

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

MENU C3G
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
CHANGE
MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
XXXXXXXXX
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MENU C18
CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
NEXT CAL STEP

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 9.

Select LRL/LRM PARAMETERS, when menu C3G
returns.

Step 10.

When menu C18 appears, you have two choices to
make: whether your calibration is to be two-line or
three-line, and where you want to have your reference plane.
a. Select the reference plane: Highlight MIDDLE
OF LINE 1 (REF) or ENDS OF LINE 1
(REF) and press the Enter key.
b. Select the type of LRL/LRM calibration: Highlight ONE BAND for a two-line calibration or
TWO BANDS for a three-line calibration.
As mentioned earlier in a two-line measurement,
the difference in length between line 1 and line 2 is
necessary for calibration, but limits the frequency
range to a 9:1 span. By using three lines in the calibration, you extend the frequency range to an 81:1
span.
If you select TWO BANDS, skip to Step 12.

NUMBER OF
BANDS USED
ONE BAND
TWO BANDS
LOCATION OF
REFERENCE
PLANES
MIDDLE OF
LINE 1 (REF)
ENDS OF
LINE 1 (REF)
PRESS 
TO SELECT

7-40

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

Step 11.

When menu C18A (left) appears, make the following
selections (for 2-line):

MENU C18A
CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
NEXT CAL STEP
CHARACTERIZE
CAL DEVICES
DEVICE 1
LINE 1 (REF)
X.XXXX mm
DEVICE 2
LINE /MATCH
X.XXXX mm
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

a. Move the cursor to DEVICE 1 LINE 1 (REF)
and key in the value.
b. Move the cursor to DEVICE 2 LINE/MATCH.
Here you have another decision to make:
whether your calibration is to be LRL or LRM.
For this selection, the Enter key acts as a toggle.
c. If you toggle such that LINE turns red, then
key in the value for line 2. This value depends
on your frequency range.
d. If you toggle MATCH red, observe that
FULLBAND appears. This indicates that your
reflective device covers the full calibration
range.
e. When you have made both selections, move the
cursor to NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter
key to produce the next menu. Skip to Step 13.

37xxxE OM

7-41

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 12.

When menu C18B (left) appears, make the following
selections (for 3-line):

MENU C18B
CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
NEXT CAL STEP
CHARACTERIZE
CAL DEVICES
DEVICE 1
LINE 1 (REF)
XX.XXXX
DEVICE 2
LINE/MATCH
XX.XXXX/LOWBAND
DEVICE 3
LINE/MATCH
XX.XXXX/HIGHBAND
FREQ AFTER
WHICH THE USE
OF DEVICE 2
AND DEVICE 3
IS EXCHANGED
BREAKPOINT
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHZ
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

a. Move the cursor to DEVICE 1 LINE 1 (REF)
and key in the value (typically 1.00 cm). Press
the Enter key to select.
b. Move the cursor to DEVICE 2 LINE/MATCH.
Both here, and for the next choice, you have another decision to make: whether your calibration
is to be LRL or LRM. For this selection, the Enter key acts as a toggle.
c. If you toggle such that LINE turns red, then
key in the value for line 2. This value depends
on your frequency range.
d. If you toggle MATCH red, observe that
LOWBAND appears. This indicates that your
reflection device is a low-band load. This load
must have a passband such that it passes all
frequencies from the start to the breakpoint (see
below).
e. Move the cursor to DEVICE 3 LINE/MATCH.
If device 3 is a line, key in the value. If it is a
match, the term HIGHBAND will appear. This
indicates that your match is a high-band load.
This load must have a passband such that it
passes all frequencies from the breakpoint to
the stop frequency.
f.

Move the cursor to BREAKPOINT and enter
your breakpoint frequency. For two-line LRL calibrations, select a breakpoint equal to the upper
frequency of the low frequency LRL line. For a
combined LRL and LRM calibration, select a
breakpoint equal to the top frequency of the calibration divided by six; for instance, to cover the
frequency range 0.04 to 60 GHz, select 10 GHz
as the breakpoint.

g. When you have made all selections, move the
cursor to NEXT CAL STEP and press Enter to
produce the next menu.

7-42

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

Step 13.

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

The next menu, C19, gives you choices for your reflective device.

MENU C19

a. Move the cursor to REFLECTION OFFSET
LENGTH and key in a value (typically
0.0000 mm).

CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
NEXT CAL STEP
REFLECTION
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXXX mm

b. Move the cursor to GREATER THAN Z0 or
LESS THAN Z0, depending on whether your reflective device is an Open or a Short. Press the
Enter key to select.

REFLECTION TYPE
GREATER THAN Zo

NOTE
Choose GREATER THAN Z0 for an Open
and LESS THAN Z0 for a Short.

LESS THAN Zo
MATCH PARAMETERS
MATCH IMPEDANCE
+XXX.XXX W

c. When you complete your choices, move the cursor to NEXT CAL STEP and press the Enter
key.

MATCH INDUCTANCE
+XXXX.XXXX pH
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Step 14.

When menu C3G reappears, move cursor to START
CAL and press Enter.

Step 15.

Continue the calibration sequence by following the
prompts as they appear. Mount the appropriate LRL
line substrates when requested in the calibration sequence.

MENU C3G
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

For the REFLECTIVE DEVICE and BROADBAND LOAD prompts, remove all substrates from
the UTF and allow the lower jaws to short the center conductor. Separate the connector blocks by at
least an inch. (The BROADBAND LOAD prompt
only appears if you selected to include isolation in
menu C5B.)

CHANGE
LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
CHANGE
MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
XXXXXXXXX
START CAL

Step 16.

Store the calibration.

PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

7-43

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

LRL/LRM Calibration
(Coaxial)

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

An LRL cal kit is necessary to perform the coaxial calibration. Calibration kits for GPC-7 are available from Maury Microwave and Agilent.
Two line lengths are used as the impedance standard. The calibration
frequency range is limited by the difference in the lengths of the two
lines. Their length must be different by approximately 90 degrees at
the mid-band frequency. A good calibration can be achieved over the
range of 18 degrees to 162 degrees making it possible to calibrate LRL
over a 9:1 frequency range.
LRL calibration is very sensitive to uncalibrated source match. If some
padding is placed at the test ports, the directivity and source match
will be improved. If the goal is high level measurements, then padding
should be included. If low level measurements are being performed,
then the padding must be left out.
Step 1.

Same as Steps 1 through 6 in the Microstrip procedure, except choose COAXIAL in menu C11A.

Step 2.

When menu C3E (left) appears, if you want to
change line impedance, place cursor on REFERENCE IMPEDANCE and press the Enter key.

Step 3.

When menu C17 (left) appears, move cursor to REFERENCE IMPEDANCE, key in the value, then
press the Enter key.

Step 4.

Same as Steps 9 through 16 in the microstrip procedure.

MENU C3E
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

MENU C17
ENTER
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
50.000 W

In the coaxial, three-line calibration there are factors you need to be aware of. Note that it is the line
length differences that are important to the LRL calibration, namely (L2–L1) and (L3–L1) where L1 is
the length of line 1, L2 is the length of line 2, and L3
is the length of line 3.
Longer length differences are used for longer wavelengths (lower frequencies). For frequencies up to
and including the breakpoint frequency, the larger
absolute value of the (L2–L1) and (L3–L1) differences is used. At frequencies above the breakpoint,
the smaller absolute value of the (L2–L1) and
(L3–L1) differences is used.

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

7-44

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

LRL/LRM CALIBRATION

Consideration must also be given to selecting the
breakpoint frequency. Divide the frequency range to
satisfy the 9:1 rule for any given pair of lines. The
range is thus divided by the frequency breakpoint
into the intervals [f1, f2] and [f2, f3]. Based on these
intervals, next determine the appropriate length differences; the longer difference is associated with the
lower interval [f1, f2]. Note that if the differences
are equal to each other, concurrent frequency ranges
are implied and only two lines need be used.
Select a line 1 reference (L1) around which to place
these two differences. Use any combination of positive or negative differences around line 1. The software selects which interval is associated with either
of line 2 or line 3 by comparing the absolute values
of the differences with line 1. Data from the two
lines, which make up the larger absolute difference,
are used for the interval [f1, f2]. Data from the two
lines, which make up the smaller absolute difference, are used for the interval [f2, f3].

37xxxE OM

7-45

TRM CALIBRATION

LRL/LRM Calibration
(Waveguide)

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

The waveguide procedure is very similar to the coaxial and microstrip
procedures already described.
Step 1.

MENU C3F
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

The only difference is with menu C3F (left). For a
waveguide calibration, move the cursor to WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF FREQ and press Enter. This action calls menu C15B, which lets you enter the
waveguide cutoff frequency. After doing so, you are
returned to menu C3F.

LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ
TEST SIGNALS
START CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Follow Steps 1 through 6 in the Microstrip procedure, page 7-37, except choose WAVEGUIDE in
menu C11A.

Step 2.

When menu C3F reappears, place cursor on
CHANGE LRL/LRM PARAMETERS and press
the Enter key.

Step 3.

Follow Steps 9 through 13, page 7-40, in the
Microstrip procedure.

MENU C15B
ENTER
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF
FREQUENCY
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ
XX.XXXX GHz
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

7-8

7-46

TRM CALIBRATION

The TRM Calibration procedure is the same as the LRL/LRM procedure, previous page, except that certain parameters have been set by
default so that the calibration is simpler to perform (e.g., the L-parameter in the LRM calibration has been set to equal a length of 0 mm for
a through, and the R-parameter is set for a short).

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

7-9

MERGE CAL FILES
APPLICATION

MERGE CAL FILES APPLICATION

The Merge Cal Files application allows the user to combine two or
more calibrations that were performed on the VNA, but having differing frequency ranges. This is of particular importance when a wide
band RF calibration cannot be performed because wide band calibration components, such as loads and shorts, are not available. Such a
case exists when using Anritsu’s 37x97E wideband VNAs. Here, the
preferred calibration method would be to perform a standard method
(SOLT) coaxial calibration in the 0.04 to 65 GHz bands, a triple offset-short (SSST) coaxial calibration in the 65 to 110 GHz band, then
combine the calibrations to yield a wideband 0.04 to 110 GHz calibration that can be saved and recalled.
The resultant calibration file setup will be the first calibration file
setup except that the frequency points and RF correction values of the
second calibration file will be intermingled with the frequency points
and RF correction values of the first.The start and stop frequencies
will be adjusted to reflect the lowest and highest frequencies in the intermingling. If there are frequency points in common, then the correction values of the first file will be used and that frequency and data
point in the second file will be discarded.
Both RF calibration files must be the same type, that is, full 12 Term,
1 Path 2 Port Forward, 1 Path 2 Port Reverse, etc., and the total number of frequency points of the first and second files added together cannot exceed 1601.
In most cases, it doesn’t matter which calibration file is chosen as the
first calibration file; however, if the VNA is a 37397E used in a Broadband setup that crosses the 65 GHz switchpoint, it is advised that the
first calibration data be from the lower frequency band and the second
calibration data be from the higher frequency band. Additionally, if the
higher frequency band calibration starts at 65.0 GHz, the lower frequency band calibration must end at 65.0 GHz. This will prevent a
spike at the 65.0 GHz band switch point.
NOTE
Refer to Appendix A, Front Panel Menus, for descriptions
of menus MRG1, EXT_MRG1, MRG2, and MRG3 that relate to this application.

37xxxE OM

7-47/7-48

Chapter 8
Measurements
Table of Contents
8-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8-2

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8-3

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

8-4

GROUP DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

8-5

ACTIVE DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

8-6

MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Control Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

8-7

ADAPTER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

8-8

GAIN COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Power and VNAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Swept Power Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

8-9

RECEIVER MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Set-on Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Receiver Mode Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Receiver Mode Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Procedure, Receiver Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59

8-10

EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
Embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
De-embedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

8-11

OPTICAL APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Creating a Characterization (*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E Measurements . . . 8-74

Chapter 8
Measurements
8-1
8-2

INTRODUCTION

This section discusses typical measurements that can be made with
the Model 37xxxE Vector Network Analyzer.

TRANSMISSION AND
REFLECTION

This discussion provides information on general measurement considerations and transmission and reflection measurements using the
37xxxE.
Setup and Calibration
To get started, apply power to the system.
After turning on the power, allow the system to warm up for at least
60 minutes before operation.
In normal operation, the system comes on line in the state that it was
in when last turned off. If you want to return the system to its default
state, you can do so by pressing the Default Program key twice.
The default parameters provide a known starting point. For example,
they reset the start and stop frequencies for maximum sweep width,
the source control to 0 dB, and the display resolution to 401 data
points.
The Sweep Setup menu should now appear on the display (it also can
be displayed using the Setup Menu key). If you like, you can select a
new start frequency, stop frequency, or source power.
You can further reduce the power level at Ports 1 and 2 with the
built-in attenuators. Using the Reduced Test Signals option in the
Sweep Setup menu, you can change the setting of the Port 1 source attenuator over a range of from 0 to 70 dB. The Port 2 test attenuator
has a range of from 0 to 40 dB (in 10 dB steps) (if Option 6 is installed).

37xxxE OM

8-3

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

MEASUREMENTS

Install the calibration kit devices to the test ports as instructed by the
U3 menu. Both the capacitance coefficients for the Open and the offset
lengths for the Open and Short can be modified or defined.
Selecting the Begin Cal key starts the calibration process. The Calibration menus step you through the calibration process, as follows:
Select the type of calibration desired.
Select the frequency range of calibration. Using the Data Points key,
you can choose from 51 up to 1601 measurement data points.
When the calibration is completed, you can store the calibration data
on a disk. You are now ready to install the test device and proceed with
the measurement. At this point you have a number of measurement
options to consider such as displays, markers, limits, outputs, sweeps,
and enhancements.
You can select any of the available graph types and display them for
any calibrated parameter on any of the four channels (if a 12-term calibration was performed).

8-4

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

Up to six markers are available. Using the Marker Menu, you can set
the frequency of each one, you can set each one in the delta marker
mode, and you can set each marker’s level to maximum or minimum.
In some cases—such as in a production environment—limit lines are
desirable. Options within the menu called up using the Limits key, provide for one or two flat, sloped, or single-point-segmented limit lines
for each channel. These limit lines function with all of the graph types,
including Smith and admittance. The color of the limit lines (blue) differs from that of the measurement trace. This allows for easy analysis
of results.
The Hard Copy Menu key menu (Figure 8-1) gives you a choice between a printer and a colored-pen plotter. It also lets you select menus
from which you may chose from a variety of print or plot options.To
output the display, press the Start Print key. The default setting provides for a full display printout from the associated printer.

SELECT OUTPUT
DEVICE
PRINTER
PLOTTER
OUTPUT OPTIONS
SETUP OUTPUT
HEADERS
OPERATIONS
PRINT OPTIONS
PLOT OPTIONS
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Figure 8-1.

37xxxE OM

Output Menu

8-5

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

MEASUREMENTS

To label the output, select Setup Output Headers in the Output Menu
or press the Device ID key.
On the output to the printer, plotter, or storage drive. a menu then appears that lets you specify the device name/serial number, the date,
the operator’s name, and user comments (Figure 8-2).

DATA OUTPUT
HEADERS
MODEL
ON
FILTER
DEVICE ID
ON
870124
DATE
ON
28-_JUNE_87
Á OPERATOR
ON
MIKE
COMMENTS

SELECT NAME
FILTER_#2—ABCDEFGHIJKLM
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456788-_/#
DEL CLEAR DONE
TURN KNOB
TO INDICATE
CHARACTER
OR FUNCTION
PRESS 
TO SELECT
NUMBERS MAY
ALSO BE
SELECTED
USING KEYPAD

Figure 8-2.

Label Menus

Sweep frequencies can be changed with the calibration applied as long
as the frequencies are between the calibration start and stop frequencies.
Additionally, a marker sweep can be selected from the Setup Menu.
This allows you to sweep between any two active markers as long as
the frequency of each falls between the calibrated start and stop frequencies.
Using the Data Points key, you can select the number of data points for
optimal resolution-vs-speed.

8-6

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

Finally, you can enhance the measurement data by reducing the IF
bandwidth and using averaging and/or smoothing.
q Change the IF bandwidth by selecting the Video IF BW key
q Set the averaging and smoothing values by selecting the
Avg/Smooth Menu key
q Turn on the averaging and smoothing using the Trace Smooth
and Average keys, which have LED’s to let you know that the enhancement is being applied
Measurement Discussion
Before going any further, let us take a few moments to review some basic principles of network measurements. First, we apply incident energy to the input of a test device. If the device’s input impedance differs from the measurement system’s impedance, some of that energy is
reflected. The remainder is transmitted through the device. We call the
ratio of reflected-to-incident energy the reflection coefficient. The ratio
of transmitted-to-incident energy we call the transmission coefficient
(Figure 8-3).
B A S IC M E A S U R E M E N T P R IN C IP L E S
IN C ID E N T
E N E R G Y
R E F L E C T E D
E N E R G Y

R E F L E C T IO N C O E F F IC IE N T =

T R A N S M IS S IO N C O E F F IC IE N T =

Figure 8-3.

T R A N S M IT T E D
E N E R G Y

D U T

R E F L E C T E D E N E R G Y
IN C ID E N T E N E R G Y
T R A N S M IT T E D E N E R G Y
IN C ID E N T E N E R G Y

Basic Measurement Principles

These ratios are complex quantities that have magnitude and phase
components. Using vector representation, the vector magnitude is the
ratio of reflected-to-incident magnitude (or transmitted-to-incident
magnitude), while the vector phase is the difference in phase between
the incident energy and the reflected/transmitted energy (Figure 8-4).

37xxxE OM

8-7

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

MEASUREMENTS

IM A G IN A R Y
M A G N IT U D E

P H A S E
R E A L
R E F L E C T IO N C O E F F IC IE N T =
P H A S E =

Figure 8-4.

R E F L E C T IO N (M A G N IT U D E )
IN C ID E N T (M A G N IT U D E )

IN C ID E N T (P H A S E ) - R E F L E C T E D (P H A S E )

Magnitude/Phase Vector

The measurement reference for the incident energy is the point at
which the device connects to the measurement system. We call this
point the reference plane. The incident energy at the reference plane is
defined as having a magnitude of 1 and a phase of 0 degrees. We establish this during the calibration.
q The ratio of reflected and transmitted energy to the incident energy can be represented by a number of different measurements
and units, as shown below.
q The default display for reflection measurements is the Smith
chart. The default display for transmission measurements is the
Log Magnitude and Phase graph.
The Smith chart is a convenient way to display device impedance and
is a useful aid for the graphical design and analysis of microwave circuits (Figure 8-5).

SMITH CHART

INDUCTIVE
50 Ω

CAPACITIVE

Figure 8-5

8-8

Smith Chart Display 1

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

Let us assume both that our system is already calibrated and that we
have equalized the system for the test port in use. We would then
1. Connect the Short: A Short always appears as a dot at the left-most
edge of the Smith chart’s horizontal axis.
2. Connect a Termination: Now you will see another dot located at the
center (1+j0) of the chart (this assumes a 50-ohm load).
3. Connect the Open: An Open appears as an arc on the chart’s right
edge. This is due to the fringing capacitance of the Open standard
(Figure 8-6).

SMITH CHART

TERMINATION
SHORT

OPEN
ARC

Figure 8-6.

37xxxE OM

Smith Chart Display 2

8-9

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

MEASUREMENTS

Now let’s perform a reflection measurement on a 20 dB attenuator
over the 1 to 18 GHz range.
We need to determine the setup, calibration, and measurement requirements.
A known good starting point is to reset with Default Program parameters. Since our measurement lies between 1 and 18 GHz, set the Start
and Stop frequencies using the Sweep Setup menu that appears on the
display following system reset.
Let’s perform a simple Reflection Only calibration, which uses an open,
a short, and a broadband load. To do this, press the Begin Cal key and
follow the directions in the menu area.
When you complete the calibration, the “CHANNEL 1 WITH S11”
Smith chart appears on the display. Now:
1. Select the Log Magnitude display and install the attenuator.
2. Select Auto Scale to optimize the display data.
3. Use Markers 1 and 2 to find the maximum and minimum impedance.

8-10

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION

Now let us perform a transmission measurement on the same 20 dB
attenuator over the same frequency range. We will follow the same
steps as before, but this time we will use additional features.
Once again, reset the system using the Default Program key.
In this calibration we will select the N-Discrete Frequencies menu option and step all frequencies in increments of 50 MHz.
When the calibration is complete, Channel 1 will display “S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION WITH LOG MAGNITUDE AND PHASE.”
You can use Markers 1 and 2 to find the maximum and minimum values of the attenuators insertion loss.

37xxxE OM

8-11

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

8-3

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

MEASUREMENTS

This discussion provides methods and techniques for making gain and
low-signal-level measurements. It is divided into 37xxxE system considerations and test device considerations.
37xxxE System Considerations
The 37xxxE system is limited in its ability to test low-signal levels by
its dynamic range and signal-to-noise-power ratio. First we will discuss receiver dynamic range, which is the difference between the maximum and minimum acceptable signal levels (Receiver Dynamic Range
= Pmax – Pmin).
Receiver Dynamic Range
The dynamic range of the 37xxxE is limited by the 0.1 dB compression
level of the samplers at high signal levels. It is further limited at low
signal levels by leakage signals and noise.
Figure 8-7 shows the detected output signal as a function of the power
level at the sampler. The 0.1 dB compression level is on the order of
–10 dBm. The 37xxxE is designed such that all other conversions compress at a much greater level, which leaves the samplers as the main
source of nonlinearity.
C O M P R E S S IO N

L E V E L

-1 0
D E T E C T E D
P O W E R O U T P U T
(d B m )
0 .1 d B C O M P R E S S IO N

-1 0
P O W E R L E V E L A T IN P U T T O
(d B m )

Figure 8-7.

S A M P L E R

Compression at 0.1 dB

The small signal response is limited by errors due to noise and leakage
signals. The leakage signals are both from within the 37xxxE and at
the device-under-test (DUT) connectors.

8-12

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

The detected signal is the vector sum of the desired signals, the noise
signals, and the leakage signals. These signals introduce an error or
uncertainty (Figure 8-8).
D E T E C T E D O U T P U T S IG N A L
U N C E R T A IN T Y
RNAY
M G A II

N O IS E S IG N A L

L E A K A G E O R
F A L S E S IG N A L

M E A S U R E D
S IG N A L
A C T U A L S IG N A L
P H A S E E R R O R
R E A L

Figure 8-8.

Amplitude and Phase Uncertainty

Some of the possible leakage paths for the 37xxxE are the transfer
switch, the frequency conversion module, and the DUT. The system
limits these leakages to greater than 100 dB. The 12-term error correction can reduce this leakage to better than 110 dB at 18 GHz and
90 dB at 40 GHz.
NOTE
We recommend using an isolation cell to decrease leakage
signals for sensitive measurements. For best results, increase the default averaging value and decrease the default IF bandwidth setting during calibration and
measurement. Using higher enhancement during the measurement than the calibration will not result in any accuracy improvements.
The DUT connectors should have internally captivated center pins.
Those connectors which use external pins to captivate the center conductor should have silver loaded epoxy on the pins to reduce radiation
to better than 80 dB.
Signal-to-Noise-Power Ratio
The signal-to-noise-power ratio for each of the test or reference channels is as shown. The “signal power” is the power level of the 80 kHz
IF signal at the internal synchronous detectors, and the “noise power”
is the total power contained within the bandwidth of the bandpass filter at 80 kHz.
The uncertainty, or error, in a measurement is a function of the amplitude of leakage signals and of the noise level. The uncertainty in the
measurement of magnitude and phase of the S-parameters are calculable and shown in Figures 8-9 and 8-10.

37xxxE OM

8-13

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

MEASUREMENTS

M A X U N C E R T A IN T Y F O R M A G N IT U D E
A S A F U N C T IO N O F S /N R A T IO
1 0 0 .0
1 0 .0
M A X IM U M
U N C E R T A IN T Y
(d B m )

1 .0
.1
.0 1
.0 0 1
.0 0 0 1
0

Figure 8-9.

1 0

5 0
6 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
S IG N A L /N O IS E R A T IO
(d B )

The Effect of S/N Ratio On Magnitude Measurements (Noise
Only)

M A X U N C E R T A IN T Y F O R P H A S E
A S A F U N C T IO N O F S /N R A T IO

1 0 0 .0
1 0 .0
M A X IM U M
U N C E R T A IN T Y
(D E G R E E S ) 1 .0
.1

0

1 0

2 0

3 0

4 0

5 0

6 0

S IG N A L /N O IS E R A T IO
(d B )

Figure 8-10.

8-14

The Effect of S/N Ratio On Phase Measurements (Noise Only)

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

The most difficult types of measurements are those that exercise the
full dynamic range of the 37xxxE, such as filters (Figure 8-11. Filter
measurements are examples of where one must observe both low-insertion loss (in the passband) and high attenuation (in the stop band).

B A N D P A S S F IL T E R
S

2 1

d B

< 1 d B
P A S S B A N D

0 d B
> 5 0 d B
S T O P B A N D

F R E Q U E N C Y

Figure 8-11.

Filter Measurements

There are two techniques that you can use to optimize the signal-to-noise ratio. They are (1) maximizing the RF signal level and (2)
using signal enhancement.
To maximize the RF signal level, use the default settings of the
37xxxE.
The 37xxxE provides two enhancements for improving the signal-to-noise ratio: IF bandwidth reduction and averaging.
Reducing the IF bandwidth is a primary method for enhancing accuracy. The 37xxxE has a choice of four bandwidths available from the
front panel: Maximum (10 kHz), Normal (1 kHz), Reduced (100 Hz),
and Minimum (10 Hz). The noise level should decrease by a factor
equal to the square root of the IF bandwidth. Using IF Bandwidth reduction makes for faster measurements than with the use of an equivalent amount of averaging.

37xxxE OM

8-15

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

MEASUREMENTS

Averaging is another way to improve accuracy. The improvement is
proportional to the square root of the number of averages. Two types of
averaging are supported: Sweep-by-sweep and point-by-point.
Point-by-point averaging works by collecting multiple measurements
while at each frequency point and then averaging them together.
Sweep-by-sweep averaging works by performing multiple complete
sweeps and averaging the individual the individual frequency points
by taking data from the different sweeps. The primary difference is the
amount of time between samples at a given frequency point (short for
point-by-point, longer for sweep-by-sweep).
Sweep-by-sweep averaging may produce lower trace noise because the
averaging time is more likely to exceed the coherence time of the noise
source. The disadvantage is that any slow drift or transient response
of the device under test will be lost in the averaging process.
Sweep-by-sweep is hence less suitable for use during device tuning.
Conversely, point-by-point averaging will better preserve device tuning
response or device drift. It may, however, result in slightly elevated
trace noise (relative to sweep-by-sweep) since the measurement time
may be less than the coherence time of the noise source.
Figure 8-12 shows the measured reduction in noise due to bandwidth
and averaging.
M E A S U R E M E N T S O N A 7 0 d B A T T E N U A T O R
A L L D A T A N O R M A L IZ E D T O
A 1 k H z IF B A N D W ID T H A N D 1 A V E R A G E

1 0 K H z (IF B W )

7 .0
3 .5

1 K H z

R E L A T IV E 1 .4
N O IS E (d B )

1 0 0 H z

.7
.3 5
.1 4
1

2

5

1 0

2 0

5 0

1 0 0

2 0 0

5 0 0

N U M B E R O F A V E R A G E S

Figure 8-12.

Reduction in Noise Using Averaging

Example: Using 1 kHz BW reduction and 10 averages, you would increase the signal-to-noise ratio by 7.6 dB but would lengthen the time
required for the measurement by a factor of 4.3. This example assumes
a constant signal power.

8-16

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

Test Device (DUT) Considerations
In order to test a device, the required input RF level and the expected
device output RF level must be determined.
The RF level at Port 1 must be set for the device input RF power level
required. Attenuation can be added in steps of 10 dB up to 70 dB using
the built-in source attenuator. Amplification can be added by removing
the front panel loop and adding an external amplifier.
Before calibration, ensure that the test setup is correct by setting the
power level and adding attenuation as needed.

37xxxE OM

8-17

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

MEASUREMENTS

The 37xxxE uses enhancements in the calibration to ensure a wide dynamic range. It automatically selects 1 kHz IF bandwidth and varies
the number of averages with the calibration device. Terminations require the most averages.
If desired, the Video IF bandwidth and number of averages can be
specified for the calibration measurements. Using 100 averages (Avg =
100) appears to be sufficient for most measurements.
To obtain the maximum performance from the 37xxxE for measurements of attenuation, you can use the capability of the N discrete frequency calibration to spot check measurements in the frequency band
of interest.

8-18

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

LOW LEVEL AND GAIN

Wide Dynamic Range Device - Filter
Since you do both low-insertion-loss and high- attenuation measurements simultaneously, use the maximum RF signal level and no attenuation. Selecting the 1 kHz Video IF BW setting and 100 averages will
likely suffice for this kind of measurement (Figure 8-13).

B A N D P A S S F IL T E R
S

2 1

d B

< 1 d B
P A S S B A N D

0 d B
> 5 0 d B
S T O P B A N D

F R E Q U E N C Y

Figure 8-13.

Filter Measurements

High Gain Device - FET
This device has a typical 15 dB gain and requires an input level of
about –30 dBm. Set the Port 1 Source Attenuator to 30 dB. Since the
device RF output level is –15 dBm (–30 dBm + 15 dB[gain] = –15 dBm)
no attenuation is needed at Port 2.
Medium Power Device - Amplifier
Measure the small signal parameters of a 10 dB gain device that requires an input power level of 0 dBm. Here, Port 1 will have no attenuation. The device RF output level is 10 dBm. This level equals 10 dBm
(0 dBm + 10 dB[gain] = 10 dBm) into Port 2 and will cause compression in the measurement. At least 10 dB of test attenuation will be
needed at Port 2, which will reduce the Port 2 RF level to 0 dB.

37xxxE OM

8-19

GROUP DELAY

8-4

GROUP DELAY

MEASUREMENTS

Group delay is the measure of transit time through a device at a particular frequency. Ideally, we want to measure a constant—or relatively constant—transit time over frequency. The top waveform shown
in Figure 8-14 is measured at one frequency. The bottom waveform is
identical to the first, simply delayed in time.

M A G N IT U D E

t

Figure 8-14.

0

t

T IM E
1

Two Waveforms Delayed in Time

Referring to Figure 8-15, the first waveform shown is the original
waveform. It is made up of many frequency components. After traveling through a device the signal is delayed in time. Some frequencies
are delayed more than others and thus our waveform does not have exactly the same shape as before.

M A G N IT U D E
IN P U T

O U T P U T

T IM E

Figure 8-15.

Waveform with Frequency Differences

When delay is nonlinear, as shown above, distortion occurs. By measuring group delay with a network analyzer you can characterize the
distortion that occurs from a signal traveling through your test device.

8-20

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GROUP DELAY

When designing components it is important to measure group delay so
that you can compensate for any distortion caused by the component.
You may be able to tune the device so as to optimize the performance
of group delay over the frequency range of interest. Outside of the
specified frequency range, the group delay may or may not be linear.
So how is group delay measured? Signals travel too fast to enable
measuring the input and output times of each frequency component.
Consequently, we must use mathematical calculations to derive the
group delay from the phase slope.
Group delay is mathematically represented by the following equations:

t = -

- dq
-1 dq
-1 dq
1 Dq
=
=
=
dw
2p df
360 df
2p Df

What this equation shows is that group delay is a measure of the
change in phase with relation to the change in frequency.
The change in frequency is referred to as an aperture.
Df = Aperture
To measure group delay the frequency aperture must be selected. Depending on the size of aperture, different levels of precision can result
for the measurement of group delay.
Aperture =

Frequency Range
# Of Data Points

A wide aperture results in a loss of fine-grain variations but gives
more sensitivity in the measurement of time delay. A small aperture
gives better frequency resolution, but at the cost of lost sensitivity.
Thus, for any comparison of group delay data you must know the aperture used to make the measurement (Figure 8-16).
M A G N IT U D E
A P E R T U R E T O O

A P E R T U R E T O O

W ID E

N A R R O W

F R E Q U E N C Y

Figure 8-16.

37xxxE OM

Waveforms With Aperture Differences

8-21

GROUP DELAY

MEASUREMENTS

Let us take a look at a group delay measurement made on the Anritsu
37347E Vector Network Analyzer. Group delay, as a measurement option, can be found in the Graph Type menu. After selecting the option,
the VNA displays the data in a time-vs-frequency graph, or to be more
exact, a group-delay-vs-frequency graph (Figure 8-17).

S 2 1 F O R W A R D

G R O U P D E L A Y

3 .0 0 0 0

Figure 8-17.

T R A N S M IS S IO N
R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S

G H z

6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV

9 .0 0 0 0

Group Delay-vs-Frequency Graph

The 37xxxE automatically selects the frequency spacing between data
points—that is, the aperture. Notice that this value is displayed on the
screen with the measurement (Figure 8-18).

S 2 1 F O R W A R D
G R O U P D E L A Y

3 .0 0 0 0

Figure 8-18.

8-22

T R A N S M IS S IO N
R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S

G H z

6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV

9 .0 0 0 0

Group Delay Screen Showing Aperture

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GROUP DELAY

The aperture defaults to the smallest setting for the frequency range
and number of data points selected. This value is displayed in the Set
Scale key menu when measuring group delay (Figure 8-19).

S 2 1 F O R W A R D T R A N S M IS S IO N
G R O U P D E L A Y

R E F = 1 .0 0 0 n S

3 .0 0 0 0

Figure 8-19.

G H z

6 0 0 .0 0 0 p S /D IV

9 .0 0 0 0

37xxxE Aperture

Group delay applications are found throughout the microwave industry, although the majority of such measurements are made in the telecommunications area.
One occurrence of group delay that you may have experienced is with
a long-distance telephone call. Occasionally a phone call can be disturbing because of the delay in time from when you speak and when
the other person responds. If there is simply a delay, then time delay—or linear group delay—has occurred. But if the voices are also distorted, then non-linear group delay has occurred. It is this distortion
that we must avoid. We can avoid linear group delay by measuring
group delay both during the design and development stages and during recalibration in the field.
One final group-delay application is found in the development of components. In this application, group delay is measured for the transit
time of a signal through the device. When time is of the essence in a
fast switching system, as in a modern computer, the travel time
through a device is critical.

37xxxE OM

8-23

ACTIVE DEVICE

8-5

ACTIVE DEVICE

MEASUREMENTS

Active devices are key components in microwave systems.
The measurements that are made on active devices are similar to
those made on passive devices.
Active devices come in many shapes and sizes. In most cases we are
going to have to develop a fixture in which to mount the device.
Active devices require bias voltages, and in many cases they are easily
damaged. High gain amplifiers may saturate with input signals of
–50 dBm. With active devices, we have a new set of measurement requirements.
The 373xxE has been designed to help you make these types of measurements. It includes one 70 dB step attenuator (60 dB for 37397E)
used to adjust the Port 1 power level. A second 40 dB step attenuator
is also included (with Option 6) in the forward transmission path to allow measurement of high gain devices without sacrificing reverse
transmission and reflection measurements (S12, S22). Bias tees on each
port are used to bias the device via the test port center conductor. This
approach to bias is useful for testing transistors; however, MMIC’s
usually require bias injection at other points (Figure 8-20).

B ia s T e e s
V

R F
IN

Figure 8-20.

8-24

B IA S

T E S T
P O R T

Bias Tee

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

ACTIVE DEVICE

Test fixtures are necessary for mounting the device so that it can be
measured in our coaxial (or waveguide) measuring system
(Figure 8-21).

Figure 8-21.

Active Device Test Fixture

Now we have an interesting situation. While we can measure the performance at the connector—which is the calibration plane—what we
really want to know is how our device performs (Figure 8-22).

F E T

G P C -7

G P C -7
S
S

Figure 8-22.

1 1

1 1

M

View of a Test Device

You can consider the device embedded in the fixture and can measure
the S-parameters of the fixture with the device installed.
The most elementary situation is a system in which the test fixture is
electrically ideal or transparent. In this case, the solution is simple—merely move the reference plane out to the device (Figure 8-23).

37xxxE OM

8-25

ACTIVE DEVICE

MEASUREMENTS

5 0 O H M

L IN E

G P C -7

D U T
N O

Figure 8-23.

L O S S , R E F L E C T IO N L E S S

Simple Example of De-Embedding

In some cases—depending on the fixture or the device being measured—this is satisfactory. But when it is not, we need to employ other
techniques.
One of the reasons that moving the reference plane out to the device
does not always work, is that the test fixture includes a transition
from coax to a structure such as microstrip, coplanar waveguide, or
stripline (Figure 8-24).

A L U M IN A
C A R R IE R

F E T
G R O U N D
IN P U T
G R O U N D
C O P L A N A R
L A U N C H E R
Figure 8-24.

G R O U N D
IN P U T
G R O U N D
C O P L A N A R
L A U N C H E R

Coax-to-Substrate Transition

Engineers have come to grips with the general problem. However,
there is no established standard approach. Two of the more common
approaches are to calibrate the fixture as a part of the analyzer, and to
characterize the fixture and compute the desired result.

8-26

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

ACTIVE DEVICE

In the discussion on calibration we saw that the calibration components establish the reference plane and determine the quality of the
measurement. If we have a good Open, Short and Z0 load to place at
the end of a microstrip line, we can calibrate the system at the point of
measurement.
Figure 8-25 shows some of the special test-fixture calibration standards that are available.

Figure 8-25.

5 0 O H M

2 4 0 /5 2 - O C

T H R U L IN E

O P E N

1 8 0 /8 2 - S C

2 4 0 /5 2 - S C

O F F S E T S H O R T

O F F S E T S H O R T

Special Test Fixtures

These special calibration kits are far from perfect, but they are superior to our perfect transmission line assumption.
You may also have heard of the probe stations built to permit on-wafer
calibration measurements.
The Open, Short, termination approach provides three known standards that permit the analyzer to solve for three unknowns (Figure 8-26).
P R O B E

P R O B E
O P E N C IR C U IT
(IN A IR )

1 0 0 O H M
1 0 0 O H M

5 0 O H M
T E R M IN A T IO N
P R O B E

P R O B E

P R O B E

S H O R T
C IR C U IT

5 0 O H M
T H R O U G H L IN E

Figure 8-26.

37xxxE OM

Solving for Unknowns

8-27

ACTIVE DEVICE

MEASUREMENTS

CAUTION
You should turn off or disconnect the bias supplies during the calibration, since you are using a Short as the calibration standard.

It is also possible to use three known impedances. For instance, a varactor with three voltages applied (Figure 8-27).
S P E C IA L C A L IB R A T IO N

K IT S

C 1
C 2

C

IS V A R IE D
B Y C H A N G IN G
V O L T A G E

C 3
N O T P E R F E C T E IT H E R

Figure 8-27.

Three Known Impedances

The second approach is to model the fixture. Modeling is elegant but of
limited use due to the non-ideal characteristics of the fixture. Modeling
can be accomplished in a CAD system.
In summary, there are quite a variety of approaches—all with their
own characteristic pitfalls. Engineers try to choose the most appropriate technique for their application.

8-28

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

8-6

MULTIPLE SOURCE
CONTROL

MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL

The Multiple Source Control mode permits independent control of the
37xxxE source, receiver, and an external Anritsu synthesizer (67xxB,
68xxxB, MG369xx), without the need of an external controller (Figure 8-28).

1. Remove a1 loop on the front panel (Opt. 15 only).
2. Set up equipment as shown.
3. Normalize the data trace with the standard mixer installed.
4. Subsequent mixers can be tested for magnitude
or phase match with respect to the "Standard Mixer."

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

To
a1 In
(Opt.
15).
Power
Divider
RF
Phase-Lock
Mixer.

Mixer 2
LO

I.F.

I.F.

Mixer 1
LO

RF
Standard
Mixer.

Power
Divider

Figure 8-28.

Test Setup for Mixer Measurement Using Multiple Source Control Operation

Operation in this mode requires Option 15. Removing the reference
loop lets you isolate the receiver from the source. This permits testing
of frequency converters such as mixers.
The software lets the frequency ranges and output powers of the two
sources be specified. A frequency sweep can comprise up to five separate bands, each with independent source and receiver settings for
convenient testing of frequency translation devices such as mixers. Up
to five sub-bands (harmonics) can be tested in one sweep.
Control Formula

Multiple Source control is specified as a displayed frequency range
partitioned into from one-to-five consecutive bands. For each band
Source 1, Source 2, and receiver frequencies may be interdependently
specified per the formula:
Source 1 = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz)
Source 2 = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz)
Receiver = (1/1) * (F+0.000000000 GHz)
where, the multiplier, divisor and frequency offset can be entered specific to the DUT.

37xxxE OM

8-29

MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL

MENU U1
SELECT UTILITY
FUNCTION OPTIONS
GPIB ADDRESSES
DISPLAY
INSTRUMENT
STATE PARAMS

MEASUREMENTS

Multiple Source Control Pre-operational Setup
The two sources receive control information from the 37xxxE VNA.
The GPIB address assigned to the external source must be identical to
the address contained in the data directed to the source by the 37xxxE
VNA. Assure source/VNA address compatibility as follows:
Step 1.

Install Sources 1 and 2 on the Dedicated GPIB bus.

Step 2.

Press the Utility Menu key.

GENERAL DISK
UTILITIES
CAL COMPONENT
UTILITIES

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

AUTOCAL UTILITIES
COLOR
CONFIGURATION
DATA ON(OFF)
DRAWING
BLANKING
FREQUENCY
INFORMATION
Utility
Menu

SET DATA/TIME
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

MENU 7
GPIB ADDRESSES

Step 3.

Move cursor to GPIB ADDRESSES and press Enter,
when menu U1 (left) appears.

Step 4.

When menu GP7 (left) appears, observe that the address number is correct. If necessary, use the keypad
to enter a new address.

IEEE 488.2
GPIB INTERFACE
ADDRESS
6
DEDICATED
GPIB INTERFACE
EXTERNAL SOURCE 1
4
EXTERNAL SOURCE 2
5
PLOTTER
8
POWER METER
23
FREQUENCY COUNTER
7

8-30

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL

Multiple Source Control Operation
MENU OPTNS
OPTIONS

Step 5.

Press the Option Menu key.

TRIGGERS
REAR PANEL
OUTPUT

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

DIAGNOSTICS
MULTIPLE SOURCE
CONTROL
RECEIVER MODE
SOURCE CONFIG
RF
ON/OFF
DURING RETRACE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MENU OM1
MULTIPLE SOURCE
CONTROL

Option
Menu

Step 6.

When menu OPTIONS (left) appears, move cursor to
MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL and press the
Enter key.

Step 7.

When menu OM1(left) appears, move cursor to DEFINE BANDS and press the Enter key. This brings
menu OM 1 to the screen.

DEFINE BANDS
SOURCE CONFIG
MULTIPLE
SOURCE MODE
OFF
STANDBY
ON
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

8-31

MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL

Step 8.
MENU OM2
DEFINE BANDS
BAND 1
DISPLAYED
FREQ RANGE

Band 1 must start at the beginning of the frequency
range and end at either the user-specified stop frequency or the end of the frequency range.

BAND STOP F
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
BAND FUNCTIONS
EDIT SYSTEM
EQUATIONS

Band 2 must begin at the next point after band 1
ends and end at either the user-specified stop frequency or the end of the frequency range.

STORE BAND 1
BANDS STORED:
(1 2 3 4 5)

SET MULTIPLE
SOURCE MODE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Step 9.

Move cursor to BAND; select BAND 1 by entering
“1” using the keypad or rotary knob.

Step 10.

Move cursor to BAND START F, and use keypad or
rotary knob to enter the band 1 start frequency.

Step 11.

Move cursor to BAND STOP F, and enter the
band 1 stop frequency.

Step 12.

Move cursor to EDIT SYSTEM EQUATIONS and
press the Enter key.

Step 13.

When menu OM3 (left) appears, select SOURCE 1.

Step 14.

Move cursor to MULTIPLIER and use keypad or rotary knob to enter desired multiplier for Source 1.
This is the multiplier term in the following equation:

MENU OM3
EDIT SYSTEM
EQUATIONS
EQUATION
TO EDIT
SOURCE 1
SOURCE 2

Freq = (Multiplier/Divisor) X (F + Offset Frequency)

RECEIVER
EQUATION
SUMMARY
C.W.

DIVISOR
XX
OFFSET FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT

8-32

Step 15.

Move cursor to DIVISOR and use keypad or rotary
knob to enter desired DIVISOR for source 1. This is
the divisor term given in the above equation.

Step 16.

Move cursor to either OFFSET FREQUENCY, and
use keypad or rotary knob to enter desired offset frequency for Source 1; or C.W., and press Enter to toggle C.W. to OFF.

OFF

MULTIPLIER
XX

Coincident with menu OM2 (left), the data display
area of the screen presents a chart entitled
“RANGES OF BANDS STORED.” This chart shows
the band start and band stop frequencies that have
been stored for each of five bands.
Using menu OM2, the displayed frequency range can
be divided into one to five bands.

BAND START F
XXX.XXXXXX XXX GHz

CLEAR ALL
DEFINITIONS

MEASUREMENTS

The Offset Frequency choice is the offset frequency
given in the above equation. The C.W. choice removes
F from the equation and places Source 1 in the CW
mode.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

MULTIPLE SOURCE CONTROL

Step 17.

Move the cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and press
the Enter key. This returns you to menu OM2 (left).

Step 18.

Move cursor to STORE BAND 1 and press the Enter
key. This stores the band start frequency, the band
stop frequency and the Source 1, Source 2 and Receiver equations.

BAND START F
XX.XXXXXX GHz

Step 19.

Note that the BAND number has incremented to 2.

BAND STOP F
XX.XXXXXX GHz

Step 20.

Repeat the above steps to define the start and stop
frequencies for bands 2 through 5. Set up the system
equations for each band.

MENU OM2
DEFINE BANDS
BAND 2
DISPLAYED
FREQ RANGE

BAND FUNCTIONS
EDIT SYSTEM
EQUATIONS
STORE BAND 1
BANDS STORED:
( NONE )
CLEAR ALL
DEFINITIONS
SET MULTIPLE
SOURCE STATE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MENU OM1
MULTIPLE SOURCE
CONTROL
DEFINE BANDS
SOURCE CONFIG
MULTIPLE
SOURCE MODE
OFF
STANDBY
ON

NOTE
Except for band 1, the system software constrains all start
frequencies to follow the previous band’s stop frequency.
However, while frequency bands are being defined or the
system equations are being edited, the system is automatically placed in the standby mode. In this mode, frequencies
that may be entered are not supervised by the system software; any frequency can be entered and displayed. When
the mode is switched to ON (in menu OM1, left), the system software restricts the frequencies to band limits.
When the mode is switched to OFF, the frequencies are restricted to system limits.
Source Lock Polarity: Normal/Reverse
When making frequency translated devices measurements using the
Multiple Source Control mode, enter the RF (source 1) and LO (source
2) frequencies. If the LO frequency is lower than the RF frequency, no
phase inversion is expected by the VNA. The opposite is true if the LO
frequency is higher than the RF frequency. These determinations may
be wrong if the DUT is a cascaded multiple conversion device. In that
case, determine if the final phase polarity is inverse of what is assumed by the VNA, and set the Source Lock Polarity to Reverse. Failure to do so may cause the RF source to be erroneously locked at a
5 MHz offset.

MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

8-33

ADAPTER REMOVAL

8-7

ADAPTER REMOVAL

MEASUREMENTS

Using adapters in VNA measurement applications can introduce complex errors that add to measurement uncertainty. The VNA Adapter
Removal procedure provides for adapter compensation. This on-screen,
menu-driven procedure allows the use of a through-line device or
adapter with different connector types (non-insertables) on either end
to be used for measurement calibration. The electrical effects are subsequently compensated for. The Adapter Removal procedure is described below.
NOTE
For purposes of explanation, assume that the adapter to be
used is a length of rigid coax with a type N male connector
on one end and an SMA male connector on the other end.
Further assume that the Test Port 1 connector is a type N
female and that the Test Port 2 connector is an SMA female (below).

MENU APPL
APPLICATIONS
ADAPTER REMOVAL
SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

Type N Male
(X’)

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION

Electrical Length: 170 ps

SMA Male
(Y’)

Test Adapter

E/O MEASUREMENT
O/E MEASUREMENT
MERGE CAL FILES
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Procedure:
Step 1.

Press the Appl key (below) to display the APPLICATIONS menu (top left).

.

MENU CAR1

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

ADAPTER REMOVAL
12-TERM CALS FOR
X AND Y
MUST EXIST IN THE
CURRENT DIRECTORY
ELECTRICAL LENGTH
OF THE ADAPTER
+XXX.XXXXX ps
REMOVE ADAPTER

Appl

Step 2.

Move the cursor to ADAPTER REMOVAL and
press the Enter key.

Step 3.

Select HELP in the next menu (bottom left) to produce the step-by-step procedure shown in
Figure 8-29 (next page).

HELP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

8-34

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

ADAPTER REMOVAL

Step 4.

Figure 8-29.

37xxxE OM

Follow the on-line procedure and connect the
Adapter’s N male connector (X’) to the N female connector on the VNA’s Test Port 1.

Adapter Removal Help Screen

8-35

ADAPTER REMOVAL

MEASUREMENTS

Step 5.

Press the Begin Cal key (below).

MENU SR1
SAVE/RECALL
FRONT PANEL
AND CAL DATA

.

SAVE

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

RECALL
SET UP OUTPUT
HEADERS
PRESS 
TO SELECT
FUNCTION

Begin
Cal

Apply
Cal

Step 6.

Follow the menu prompts and choose to perform a
full 12-term calibration. Use the Adapter’s SMA
male connector (Y') as Test Port 1 and the VNA’s Test
Port 2 connector as Test Port Y.

Step 7.

Press the Save/Recall Menu key (below).

MENU SR2
SAVE
FRONT PANEL
SETUP IN
INTERNAL MEMORY

.

FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
ON SD CARD
FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
ON USB DRIVE

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Save/
Recall
Menu

PRESS 
TO SELECT

8-36

-

Channels

Step 8.

Choose SAVE from the displayed menu (top left).

Step 9.

Choose the appropriate SD Card or USB drive location, based on individual preference (Menu SR2, bottom left).

Step 10.

When prompted, select CREATE NEW FILE and enter a conventional DOS filename, such as YPRIME_Y.CAL. (Store this file in the current directory.)

Step 11.

Now connect the Adapter’s SMA male end to the
VNA’s Test Port 2 SMA female connector.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

MENU CAR1

ADAPTER REMOVAL

Step 12.

Press the Begin Cal key again.

Step 13.

Follow the menu prompts; again choose to perform a
full 12-term calibration. Now use the Adapter’s Type
N male connector (X’) as Test Port 2. Use the VNA’s
Test Port 1 connector as Test Port X.

Step 14.

Save the calibration as described in Steps 7 and 8,
above. Give this file a unique filename, such as
X_XPRIME.CAL. (Store this file in the current directory.)

Step 15.

Press the Appl key and chose ADAPTER REMOVAL to return to Menu CAR1 (top left).

Step 16.

Enter the electrical length of the Adapter (170 ps for
the test adapter) in the appropriate place in Menu
CAR1.

ADAPTER REMOVAL
12-TERM CALS FOR
X AND Y
MUST EXIST IN THE
CURRENT DIRECTORY
ELECTRICAL LENGTH
OF THE ADAPTER
+170.0000 ps
REMOVE ADAPTER
HELP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

NOTE
Electrical length does not have to be precise.
Plus or minus 5 ps is adequate for this procedure.

MENU CAR2
ADAPTER REMOVAL
READ CAL FILE OF
THE X TEST PORT
FROM SD CARD
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)
READ CAL FILE OF
THE X TEST PORT
FROM USB DRIVE
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

37xxxE OM

Step 17.

Move the cursor to REMOVE ADAPTER, and press
the Enter key.

Step 18.

Move the cursor to the appropriate READ CAL
FILE OF THE X TEST PORT . . . , depending on
where the calibration data is stored (SD Card or
USB drive). Press the Enter key.
NOTE
At this juncture, the “X” calibration file is
marked for reading, but not actually read.
Both the “X” and “Y” files will be read into
the VNA together in the next step.

8-37

ADAPTER REMOVAL

MEASUREMENTS

Step 19.

Move the cursor to the appropriate READ CAL
FILE OF THE Y TEST PORT. . . choice (top left)
and press the Enter key.

Step 20.

Observe that the text READING . . . FROM DISK
appears in the menu area.

Step 21.

When the file has finished reading, the procedure is
complete and the program returns to the SWEEP
SETUP menu (below).

MENU CAR3
ADAPTER REMOVAL
READ CAL FILE OF
THE Y TEST PORT
FROM SD CARD
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)
READ CAL FILE OF
THE Y TEST PORT
FROM USB DRIVE
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

If the adapter is still connected, the display will
show the S-parameters of the adapter. Any device to
be measured with that same connector configuration
will be measured in an absolute sense.
Also, you may wish to store the resulting Adapter
Removal calibration for later use.

MENU SU1
SWEEP SETUP
START
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
STOP
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
SET CENTER/SPAN
XXX DATA POINT(S)
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
STEP SIZE
C.W. MODE ON (OFF)
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
MARKER SWEEP
DISCRETE FILL
HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION
TEST SIGNALS
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN/OFF

8-38

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

8-8

GAIN COMPRESSION

GAIN COMPRESSION

There are a number of ways to measure Gain Compression. With a
VNA two approaches are possible: Swept Frequency Gain Compression
(SFGC) and Swept Power Gain Compression (SPGC). The 37xxxE offers a very straightforward approach to each of these measurements.
It is normally desirable to make S-parameter measurements in the
linear operating region of an amplifier and then observe Compression
or amplitude-modulation/phase-modulation (AM/PM) characteristics
by increasing the input power to drive the amplifier into it's nonlinear
region. The characteristics of the amplifier-under-test (AUT) dictate
the operating power levels required for the tests. Prior to making
measurements on a specific amplifier the user must determine the desired operating levels. A recommended level for linear region operation
is:
P = PG – Gain – 15dB (PGC=Nominal l dB compression of the AUT)
The actual level is constrained by the power available from the VNA
and the built in 70 dB step attenuator. (In the case of the 37xxxE,
available power is easily supplemented by the addition of an external
amplifier/attenuator combination.) Power input to Port 2 must also be
considered as the test should not drive the VNA into nonlinear operation. Typical specifications show 0.1dB compression at a VNA receiver
input level of –10 dBm. The receiver signal is derived through a 13 dB
coupler from the Port 2 signal. The 37xxxE also includes a 40 dB step
attenuator in this path that enables linear operation with input signals as high as 30 dBm (1 watt), the maximum signal level that should
be input to Port 2. Higher power levels can be measured by attenuating the signal prior to Port 2.
A typical power configuration example that will also be used throughout this section is included in Figure 8-28. A 10 dB pad has been used
at both Port 1 and Port 2 to minimize mismatch errors.

Power and VNAs

It is necessary to measure absolute power to determine Gain Compression. VNA receiver channels are
typically down-converters and do not measure
power directly. They are, however, linear so that an
accurate power calibration at one level will result in
a receiver channel that will accurately indicate
power in dBm.
The 37xxxE firmware supports calibration with the
following power meters: Anritsu ML2430A, HP437B,
HP438, and Gigatronics 8541C/8542C. These meters
differ in the way they handle sensor efficiency (consult the power meter manual), and the 37xxxE does
expect to receive corrected data from the power meter.

37xxxE OM

8-39

GAIN COMPRESSION

MEASUREMENTS

Gain Compression Power Configuration
Amplifier Specifications:
Frequency Range:

8 to 12 GHz

Gain

25 dB nominal

1 dB Gain Compression (GC)

12 dBm minimum

Gain Compression Formula: P = 12 – 25 – 15 = –28 dBm
37369E Setup
Default Power:

–7 dBm

Power Control:

–8 dB

Port 1 Attenuator:

0 dB

External Port 1 Attenuator:

10 dB

The above setting result in
Port 1 Power:

–25 dBm

Maximum Amplifier Output

Figure 8-28.

@15 dBm

Coupler Loss:

@13 dB

Port 2 Attenuator:

10 dB

Gain Compression Measurement Plan (Example)

Pstop

Input
Power

Phase

Output
Power

Pstart
Time

Figure 8-29.

8-40

Input Power

Input Power

Power In (Pi) versus Power Out (Po) Graphical Example

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

Errors can result if the proper correction factor is
not applied by the power meter, as shown below.
Correction Factor (%)

Error (dB)

1

0.043

3

0.128

5

0.212

10

0.414

It is desirable to set the power control at or near the
minimum (this varies from −20 to−30 dB, depending
upon model) when establishing P, as this provides
the full ALC range for a power sweep.
The vector error correction available in VNAs is dependent upon ratioed S-parameter measurements.
Power is measured using a single, unratioed channel; therefore, when power is being measured error
correction is turned off.
Swept Power Gain
Compression

A swept power test is done at a CW frequency. The
input power will be increased with a step sweep
starting at Pstart and ending at Pstop. The step increment is also user defined. This lets you observe
the conventional Po vs. Pi presentation or a display
of Phase vs. Pi. Figure 8-29 (previous page) illustrates this process. The SPGC process is implemented in the 37xxxE by following the procedure
that begins on page 8-43. The test setup required for
this procedure is shown in Figure 8-30 (page 8-42).

Swept Frequency Gain
Compression

This is a manual procedure that provides a normalized amplifier response as a function of frequency at
Pstart and manually increases the input power
while observing the decrease in gain as the amplifier goes into compression. This lets you easily observe the most critical compression frequency of a
broadband amplifier. The SFGC process is implemented in the 37xxxE by following the procedure
that begins on page 8-52. The test setup required for
this procedure is shown in Figure 8-30 (following
page).

37xxxE OM

8-41

GAIN COMPRESSION

Figure 8-30.

8-42

MEASUREMENTS

Test Setup for Gain Compression Measurements

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

Swept Power Gain Compression Measurement
The following procedures describes the Swept Power Gain Compression Measurement.
Step 1.

Press the Appl key.

MENU APPL
ADAPTER REMOVAL

.

SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
E/O MEASUREMENTS
O/E MEASUREMENTS
MERGE CAL FILES
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Appl

NOTE
A 12-Term S-parameter calibration is not
necessary for gain compression calibration
and measurement. If such a calibration is in
place, it will be disabled during the gain
compression operation.

MENU GC2
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
SET FREQUENCIES

Step 2.

Move cursor to SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION and press Enter, when menu Appl (top
left) appears.

Step 3.

When menu GC2 (bottom left) appears, follow the directions that appear adjacent to the menu, as described below:

P START
–25.00 dBm
P STOP
–5.00 dBm
STEP SIZE
1.00 dB
ATTENUATION
GAIN COMPRESSION
POINT (MAX REF)
1.00 dB
NOMINAL OFFSET
0.00 dB
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

Move cursor to SET FREQUENCIES, press Enter
and select from 1 to 10 frequencies.
Enter the frequency value, press a terminator key (e.g.
GHz/103/ms/m), then Enter to add the frequency to the
list.
NOTE
The number of frequencies and step size,
that is entered later, directly affect the time
required for Linear Power Calibration, in a
later step.

8-43

GAIN COMPRESSION

MENU GC_DF2
SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCIES
INPUT A FREQ,
PRESS 
TO INSERT
SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCY
12.000000000 GHz
CLEAR FREQ NUMBER
1
CLEAR ALL
FINISHED, RETURN TO
POWER SWEEP SETUP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MEASUREMENTS

Move cursor to FINISHED, RETURN TO POWER
SWEEP SETUP and press Enter.
Move cursor to P START (previous page), set per
power plan (Figure 8-28), and press Enter.
Move cursor to P STOP (previous page), set per
power plan, and press Enter.
Move cursor to STEP SIZE (previous page), enter a
value, and press Enter.
The 1 dB default value is reasonable. This value,
along with the number of frequencies entered in a
previous step, directly affect the time required for Linear Power Calibration, in a later step.
Move cursor to ATTENUATION (previous page) and
press Enter. Set power values (bottom left) per power
plan. Move cursor to PREVIOUS MENU and press
Enter when finished.

MENU GC_DF2
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
PORT 1 ATTN
0*10 dB (0 - 70)
PORT 2 ATTN
2*10 dB (0 - 40)
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Move cursor to GAIN COMPRESSION (previous
page), enter the desired value (1 dB is typical), and
press Enter.
Move cursor to NOMINAL OFFSET (previous
page), enter the value of any external device(s) connected between the front panel Input and Output connectors. Press Enter when done. In the example use
-10 dB.
A setting of 0.00 dB is normal when no external devices are connected.
Move cursor to MORE (previous page) and press Enter to proceed to the next menu (GC3) (next page).

8-44

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 4.
MENU GC3
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
CALIBRATE
FOR LINEARITY
([NO] CAL EXIST)

Move the cursor to CALIBRATE FOR LINEARITY,
press Enter, and follow the instructions that (1) appear adjacent to the follow-on menu and (2) are described below.
If a calibration already exists, the menu choice will indicate CAL EXIST in blue letters.

LINEARITY
ON [OFF]
CORRECTION

NOTE
This step is not required for a successful
gain compression measurement; however,
linearizing the power from Port 1 (which is
what this step does) provides increased accuracy.

CALIBRATE
RECEIVER
([NO] CAL EXISTS)
S21 OPTIONS
([NOT] STORED)
AUT TEST TYPES

Prepare the power meter as described in the
following instructions:

GAIN COMPRESSION
AM/PM
MULTIPLE FREQ
GAIN COMPRESSION

a. Preset, zero, and calibrate the power meter.

RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE

b. Set power meter offset, if required.

PREVIOUS MENU

c. Connect the power meter to the dedicated GPIB
interface and the power sensor to the test port.
d. Select .
Connect the power sensor to Test Port 1.
With START LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION
highlighted (bottom left), press Enter to begin the calibration.

MENU GC_SU8A
CALIBRATE FOR
LINEAR POWER
FORWARD
DIRECTION ONLY
START LINEAR
POWER CALIBRATION
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

Step 5.

Observe LINEARITY CORRECTION choice (top
left). If a linearity correction has been performed, it
will indicate ON in blue letters.

Step 6.

Move cursor to CALIBRATE RECEIVER and follow the instructions, as follows:
Connect a through line between Test Port 1 and Test
Port 2. Be sure to include all components that are
part of the measurement path.

8-45

GAIN COMPRESSION

MEASUREMENTS

Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then
press Enter to store the calibration.

MENU GC3
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION

LINEARITY
ON [OFF]
CORRECTION

NOTE
It is likely that the trace will be off screen at
the bottom of the display. If so, press Autoscale to obtain a discernable trace. If this
trace shows vertical instability, then do the
following:

CALIBRATE
RECEIVER
([NO] CAL EXISTS)

1. Press Video IF BW and select REDUCED
(100 Hz) from the menu.

CALIBRATE
FOR LINEARITY
([NO] CAL EXIST)

S21 OPTIONS
([NOT] STORED)

2. Press Avg/Smooth Menu and select AVERAGING 100 MEAS. PER POINT from the
menu.

AUT TEST TYPES
GAIN COMPRESSION
AM/PM
MULTIPLE FREQ
GAIN COMPRESSION

3. Press Average to turn averaging on.
Step 7.

Press Appl to return to the gain compression menu
set, and follow the prompts to return to Menu GC3.
Repeat Step 6.

Step 8.

Move the cursor to S21 OPTIONS (top left), select
NORMALIZE S21 in the next menu (not shown),
then NORMALIZE S21 again (bottom left); then
press Enter and follow the menu instructions:

RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE
PREVIOUS MENU

MENU GC_NORM
NORMALIZE S21

Remove the through line and connect the amplifier-under-test (AUT) between Port 1 and Port 2.

CONNECT AUT
AND APPLY BIAS .

Apply bias to the AUT.

WAIT FOR ONE
COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING

Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then
press Enter to store the normalization measurement.

PRESS 
TO STORE
PRESS 
TO ABORT

8-46

Step 9.

Move the cursor to the desired test and press Enter.
The steps that follow presume that gain compression
has been selected.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 10.

Observe that the SWEPT POWER SETUP menu and
the dual-trace display resembles that shown below.

Step 11.

Press Readout Marker (below) for a display of gain
compression at the marker frequency.

MENU SU3A
SWEPT POWER
SETUP
SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCY
9.000000000 GHz
P START
–25.00 dBm
P STOP
–5.00 dBm
STEP SIZE
1.00 dB
POWER SWEEP ON
HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION
MULTIPLE FREQ
GAIN COMPRESSION
RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

MENU M7
SEARCH
VALUE
–1.000dB
REFERENCE
MAXIMUM VALUE
DREF MARKER
0 dB

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

VALUE AT REFERENCE
–0.000 dB
SEARCH LEFT
SEARCH RIGHT
–9.56 dBm
SEARCH MRKR VALUES
CH1: 13.753dBm
CH2:
CH3: –1.000 dB
CH4:

Readout
Marker

TRACKING ON
MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

37xxxE OM

Step 12.

Observe the readout marker values from the displayed menu (left).

8-47

GAIN COMPRESSION

MEASUREMENTS

Step 13.
MENU SU3A

Press Setup Menu (below) to return to SWEPT
POWER SETUP menu.

SWEPT POWER
SETUP
SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCY
9.000000000 GHz

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

P START
–25.00 dBm
P STOP
–5.00 dBm
STEP SIZE
1.00 dB
Setup
Menu

POWER SWEEP ON
HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION

Step 14.

Move cursor to SWEPT POWER FREQUENCY
(top left), select the next frequency from the SET
FREQUENCY list, and press Enter.

RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE

Step 15.

Repeat Steps 11 through 13.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Step 16.

Repeat Steps 14 and 15 until all frequencies have
been observed.

Step 17.

To examine the phase performance for a swept input
power, AM/PM should be selected. This leads to the
two channel display (Channels 2 and 4) with Channel 4 active shown below. The sweep mode is continuous to facilitate tuning, Markers are set to the
DReference mode on the active channel.

MULTIPLE FREQ
GAIN COMPRESSION

MENU
CH2 - 21
REFERENCE PLANE
0.0000mm
MARKER 1
-25.00 dBm
MARKER TO MAX
MARKER TO MIN
D(1-2)
-15.44 dBm
4.17°
MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

8-48

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 18.

Repeat Steps 13 through 16 until all desired frequencies have been observed.

Step 19.

If desired, a multiple frequency gain compression
display can be obtained by selecting MULTIPLE
FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION (left) and
pressing Enter.

Step 20.

Move cursor to TEST AUT (top left) and press Enter.

Step 21.

Observe that the Multiple Frequency Gain Compression display resembles that shown below.

Step 22.

Make desired selection from menu to copy text and
data to SD Card or USB drive (top left).

Step 23.

The power linearity calibration, receiver calibration,
and DUT normalized data exists in volatile memory.
At this time, the data can be stored for subsequent
recall using the SAVE function.

MENU GC4
MULTIPLE FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION
TEST AUT
TEXT DATA
TO SD CARD
TEXT DATA
TO USB DRIVE
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

NOTE
It is prudent to save this calibration; otherwise, it will be destroyed if you move anywhere in the program except between this
calibration and the S-parameters menu.

37xxxE OM

8-49

GAIN COMPRESSION

MEASUREMENTS

Step 24.

Move cursor to RETURN TO SWEPT FREQUENCY MODE and press Enter to exit the gain
compression mode.

NOTE
When exiting the Swept Frequency Power Gain Compression mode, the DUT should be turned off, unless the user
has selected the proper attenuator settings for standard
swept frequency (S-parameter) operation.

8-50

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

Swept Frequency Gain Compression Measurement
The following procedure describes the Swept Frequency Gain Compression Measurement.

ADAPTER REMOVAL

Preliminary: Refer to Figure 8-28 and set the Power Control and Port
1 Attenuator for the values shown in the power plan for the example,
or in the power plan constructed for measurement of a test device.
These power plan values should also be used in the S-parameter calibration that may be performed using the Begin Cal key and menus.

SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 1.

MENU APPL

Press the Appl key.

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
E/O MEASUREMENTS

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

O/E MEASUREMENTS
MERGE CAL FILES
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Appl

MENU GC3

Step 2.

Move cursor to SWEPT FREQUENCY GAIN
COMPRESSION and press Enter, when menu
APPL (top left) appears.

Step 3.

When menu GC3 (bottom left) appears, follow the directions that appear adjacent to the menu, as described below:

SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION
NOMINAL OFFSET
0.00 dB
CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS
(N0 CAL EXISTS)
FLATNESS
OFF
CORRECTION
CALIBRATE
RECEIVER
[NO CAL EXISTS)
NORMALIZE S21
(NOT STORED)
GAIN COMPRESSION
POINT (0 dB REF)
1.00 dB
TEST AUT
EXIT APPLICATION

37xxxE OM

Move the cursor to NOMINAL OFFSET, enter the
value of any external device(s) connected between
the front panel Input and Output connectors. Press
the Enter key when done.
Optionally, move the cursor to CALIBRATE FOR
FLATNESS, press Enter and follow the instruction
menu as described on the following page.
If a calibration already exists, the menu choice will
indicate CAL EXIST in blue letters.

8-51

GAIN COMPRESSION

MEASUREMENTS

NOTE
This step is not required for a successful
gain compression measurement; however,
calibrating the power from Port 1 (which is
what this step does) provides increased accuracy.
Prepare the power meter as described in the following instructions:
a. Preset, zero, and calibrate the power meter.
b. Set power meter offset, if required.
c. Connect the power meter to the dedicated GPIB
interface and the power sensor to the test port.
d. Select .
Connect the power sensor to Port 1.
Set the number of power calibration points.

MENU GC_SU8A
CALIBRATE FOR
FLAT PORT POWER
FORWARD
DIRECTION ONLY
101 POINTS
MEASURE 1 PWR
POINT EVERY
1 POINT(S)
POWER TARGET
–25.00 dBm
START FLAT
POWER CALIBRATION
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT
TURN KNOW TO
CHANGE NUMBER
OF POINTS

8-52

If, in a previous menu, data points had been set to
401 points, entering 8 provides 50 power points
(every 8th point); entering 4 provides 100 power
point (every 4th point)s, and entering 1 provides 401
power points. The VNA interpolates between power
calibration frequencies.
Enter a POWER TARGET value.
Make this value the same as resulting Port 1 power
value shown in Figure 8-28 (page 8-40). –25 dBm for
the example.
With START FLAT POWER CALIBRATION highlighted (bottom left), press Enter to begin the calibration.
NOTE
When the above calibration finishes, the
source power will have been accurately calibrated. In the next step, this power calibration will be transferred via the through line
to the receiver.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 4.
MENU GC1
SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

Move cursor to CALIBRATE RECEIVER and follow the instructions, as follows:

NOMINAL OFFSET
-10.00 dB

Connect a through line between Test Port 1 and Test
Port 2. Be sure to include all components that are
part of the measurement path.

CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS
(]CAL EXISTS)

Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then
press Enter to store the calibration.

FLATNESS
CORRECTION
AT -25.00 dBm

NOTE
It is likely that the trace will be off screen at
the bottom of the display. If so, press
Autoscale to obtain a discernable trace. If
this trace shows vertical instability,

CALIBRATE
RECEIVER
(CAL EXISTS)
NORMALIZE S21
([NOT]STORED)

· Press Video IF BW and select REDUCED
(100 Hz) from the menu

GAIN COMPRESSION
POINT (0 dB REF)
1.00 dB

· Press Avg/Smooth Menu and select AVERAGING 100 MEAS. PER POINT
from the menu

TEST AUT
EXIT APPLICATION

· Press Average to turn averaging on
Step 5.

Press Appl to return to the gain compression menu,
and follow the prompts to return to Menu GC1. Repeat Step 4.

Step 6.

Move the cursor to NORMALIZE S21 (top left),
press Enter, and follow the menu instructions (bottom left):

MENU GC_SU8A
RECEIVER
CALIBRATION
CONNECT
THROUGHLINE
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS

Remove the through line and connect the amplifierunder-test (AUT) between Port 1 and Port 2.

INCLUDE ANY
COMPONENTS WHICH
ARE PART OF THE
MEASUREMENT PATH

Apply bias to the AUT.
Wait until one complete sweep has completed, then
press Enter to store the normalization measurement.

WAIT FOR ONE
COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING
PRESS 
TO STORE

Step 7.

Move the cursor to TEST AUT (top left) and press
Enter.

PRESS 
TO ABORT

37xxxE OM

8-53

GAIN COMPRESSION

8-54

MEASUREMENTS

Step 8.

Observe that the dual-trace display resembles that
shown below.

Step 9.

Note that the top display (Channel 1), shows the
power out from the AUT. For the example test device,
the nominal output power is about 0 dBm with the
input at –25 dBm. To better evaluate this device,
turn on markers and set the Channel 1 reference to
0 dB, as shown below.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Step 10.

Press the Ch1 key (top left) to make channel 1 active.

Step 11.

Press the Marker Menu key (middle left), turn on
marker 1, and position it to a desired point on the
trace (below). (Press the Readout Marker key for frequency and amplitude information.)

Step 12.

Press the Appl key to return to the TEST SIGNALS
menu (Menu SU2, next page).

Ch 1

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Marker
Menu

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Appl

37xxxE OM

8-55

GAIN COMPRESSION

MEASUREMENTS

Step 13.
.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Press the Setup Menu key (top left), select POWER
CONTROL (bottom left) and increase the value
while observing compression in channel 3 (S21).
NOTE
The rotary knob or the keypad can be used
to set the POWER CONTROL value. In using the rotary knob, the displayed value
does not change in real time with movement
of the control. Change occurs after the rotation of the knob is complete.

Setup
Menu

Step 14.

Press the Marker Menu key again, and observe the
displayed Ch 3 trace and the marker values from the
displayed menu (below).

MENU SU2

MENU SU2

TEST SIGNALS

MARKER 1
ALL DISPLAYED
CHANNELS

POWER CONTROL
5.47 dB
0 TO –20.00 dB

CH 1 - S11 USER
10.000000 GHz
12.06 dBm

PORT 1 ATTN
0 * 10 dB (0 – 70)

CH 2 - S12

PORT 1 POWER
–1.53 dBm

CH 3 - S21
10.000000 GHz
-0.992 dB

PORT 2 ATTN
0 * 10 dB (0 –40)
CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS
(CAL EXISTS)

CH 4 - S21

FLATNESS
CORRECTION
AT –11.53 dBm

MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

MARKER TO MAX
MARKER TO MIN

PRESS 
TO SELECT

PORT 2 POWER
0.00 dBm
EXIT APPLICATION
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Step 15.

The power linearity calibration, receiver calibration,
and DUT normalized data exists in volatile memory.
At this time, the data can be stored for subsequent
recall using the SAVE function.
NOTE
It is prudent to save this calibration; otherwise, it will be destroyed if you move anywhere in the program except between this
calibration and the S-parameters menu.

8-56

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

GAIN COMPRESSION

Step 16.

Move cursor to RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE and press Enter to exit the
gain compression mode.

Step 17.

Press the Appl key to return to the TEST SIGNALS
menu (left), highlight EXIT APPLICATION and
press Enter to exit the gain compression measurement area.

MENU SU2
TEST SIGNALS
POWER CONTROL
5.47 dB
0 TO –20.00 dB
PORT 1 ATTN
0 * 10 dB (0 – 70)
PORT 1 POWER
–1.53 dBm
PORT 2 ATTN
0 * 10 dB (0 –40)
CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS
(CAL EXISTS)

CAUTION
When exiting the Swept Frequency Power Gain Compression mode, the DUT should be turned off, unless the user
has selected the proper attenuator settings for standard
swept frequency (S-parameter) operation.

FLATNESS
CORRECTION
AT –11.53 dBm
PORT 2 POWER
0.00 dBm
EXIT APPLICATION
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

37xxxE OM

8-57

RECEIVER MODE

8-9

RECEIVER MODE

MEASUREMENTS

The Receiver Mode provides three distinct modes of operation:
q Sweep/Source Lock mode, phase locks the internal source
q Synthesizer/Tracking mode, lets the receiver track a 67XXB,
68XXXB, or 69XXXA synthesizer
q Set-On mode, lets the VNA operate as a tuned receiver

Source Lock Mode

The Source Lock mode enables the 37xxxE to phase lock to its internal
source.

Tracking Mode

In the Tracking Mode, the 37xxxE steers its second local oscillator frequency and phase signal so as to phase-lock itself to the reference signal. Typically the source is a synthesizer, since it must be accurate to
better than ±10 MHz for the 37xxxE to achieve lock. Due to the inherent resolution of the 37xxxE, frequency resolution is limited to 1 kHz
intervals. If Option 3 is installed frequency resolution is limited to 1
Hz.
For receive frequencies outside the indicated test set range, the use of
external mixers and a synthesizer is required. Dual Source Control is
required in this case.

Set-on Mode

In the Set-On mode, the source lock circuitry of the 37xxxE is completely by-passed. Reference signals are no longer necessary for system
operation. This allows all of the 37xxxE samplers to operate over their
full dynamic range. As a result, the source and the 37xxxE must be
locked to the same 10 MHz time base, otherwise coherent detection is
not possible. Only synthesized sources may be used in this mode. Dual
source control is required.
Due to the inherent resolution of the 37xxxE local oscillators, frequency resolution is limited to 1 kHz intervals over the frequency
range of the VNA. If Option 3 is installed, frequency resolution is limited to 1 Hz.

8-58

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

RECEIVER MODE

Receiver Mode Block
Diagram

The block diagram shown in Figure 8-31 shows how the system is configured for all of the possible modes of operation. With the switches set
as shown, the system operates in the Set-On mode. LO1 and LO2 are
pre-set to allow only a prescribed signal to be detected by the synchronous detector. With the switch in SOURCE LOCK position the system
is operating in the internal source-lock mode. With the switch in the
TRACKING position, the system is in the synthesizer tracking mode.

Receiver Mode Menus

The menus associated with the Receiver Mode are described in the alphabetical listing (Appendix A) under their call sign: RCV1, RCV2,
RCV3, etc.

Procedure, Receiver Mode
Operation

SOURCE LOCK

A detailed procedure for operation using the Receiver Mode option is
provided in the following pages.

ANALOG LOCK SIGNAL
2.5 MHz

TRACKING
SET ON
10 MHz

SAMPLER
RF MEASURE
CIRCUIT

SYNCHRONOUS
DETECTOR

10 MHz
(SYNTHESIZER)

TRACKING

1ST L.O.

2ND L.O.

3RD L.O.
2.42 MHz

SOURCE LOCK/
SET ON
10 MHz

Figure 8-31.

37xxxE OM

PLL

PLL

10 MHz

10 MHz

REAL

IMAGINARY

4TH L.O.
80 KHz

10 MHz

37xxxE Phase Lock Modes

8-59

RECEIVER MODE

MENU OPTNS

MEASUREMENTS

Operating Procedure, Receiver Mode
The three operational modes that comprise the Receiver Mode can be
set up as follows:

OPTIONS
TRIGGERS

Step 1.

Press the Option Menu key (below).

REAR PANEL
OUTPUT
DIAGNOSTICS

.

MULTIPLE
SOURCE
CONTROL

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

RECEIVER MODE
SOURCE CONFIG
RF
ON/OFF
DURING RETRACE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Option
Menu

Step 2.

When menu OPTNS (top left) appears, select RECEIVER MODE.

Step 3.

When menu RCV1 (middle left) appears, select either STANDARD (Step 4) or USER DEFINED
(Step 5). Your selection depends on the application.

Step 4.

The Standard mode uses the Source Lock mode for
operation with the internal source. The user has no
control over selections within the Standard Mode.

MENU RCV1
RECEIVER MODE
STANDARD
USER DEFINED
SOURCE CONFIG
SPUR REDUCTION
NORMAL/OFF
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MENU RCV3
STANDARD
RECEIVER MODE
WARNING:
CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS 
TO CONTINUE

Because entering the standard mode from the User
Defined Mode erases the current stored calibration
data, a warning menu (RCV3, bottom left) appears
when STANDARD is selected. Press Enter to enter
into the Standard mode or press Clear to abort.
NOTE
Spur Reduction: Normal/OFF: Spur Reduction Off may be
selected when making non-ratioed measurements or using
the Set-On Receiver mode. Under those measurement conditions, it may reduce high level noise. In normal
S-parameter measurement mode, Spur Reduction should
remain “Normal,” as the noise level is not affected.

PRESS 
TO ABORT

8-60

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

RECEIVER MODE

Step 5.
MENU RCV1
RECEIVER MODE
STANDARD

Selecting USER DEFINED RECEIVER MODE in
menu RCV1 brings menu RCV 2 to the screen. When
menu RCV 2 appears, the last mode selected is highlighted in red. The default selection is SOURCE
LOCK.

USER DEFINED
SOURCE CONFIG
SPUR REDUCTION
NORMAL/OFF
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Source Lock, Tracking or Set-On modes can be selected from this menu. When a mode is selected, information about that mode is displayed on the
screen. This information describes the mode and the
capabilities required of the RF source.

MENU RCV2
USER DEFINED
RECEIVER MODE
SOURCE LOCK
TRACKING
SET ON
PRESS ENTER
TO SELECT

MENU RCV4
USER DEFINED
RECEIVER MODE
WARNING:
CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS 
TO CONTINUE
PRESS 
TO ABORT

37xxxE OM

8-61

EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING

8-10

EMBEDDING/
DE-EMBEDDING

MEASUREMENTS

In many S-parameter measurements, the measurement of the DUT
may also include other set-up components that affect the overall measurement result. For example, there may be a test fixture required between the normal coaxial calibration planes and the DUT. It may be
useful to see the DUT performance with a certain matching network in
place or it may be desired to see what the subsystem performance
would be when the given DUT is inserted, etc. The classical purposes
of embedding and de-embedding are shown in Figure 8-32, below.

De-embed
DUT

Fixture

Fixture

Calibration Planes

DUT

Effective New Measurement Planes

Embed
DUT

Effective New Measurement Planes

Figure 8-32.

Matching
Network

Matching
Network

DUT

Calibration Planes

Classic Embedding and De-embedding

One way of handling these chores within the instrument itself is
through embedding and de-embedding: the process of mathematically
adding or subtracting networks to or from the measured result. This
feature is available in all 37xxxE VNAs as shown in the following
paragraphs.

8-62

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

Embedding
MENU DE8

EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING

Embedding of Matching Networks, or other components, can be done
as follows:
Step 1.

EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE

Press the APPL menu key on the instrument’s front
panel.

PORT 1/PORT 2
METHOD
EMBED/DE-EMBED
SWAP PORTS
OF S2P DATA

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

OFF

APPLY NETWORK
S2P FILE DATA TO
CAL FILE DATA
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

MENU DE9

Appl

EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE
ORIGINAL CAL FILE
TO APPLY NETWORK

Step 2.

Select the VNA test port where the network will be
embedded, then select the EMBED function under
the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu
DE8, top left).

Step 3.

Select APPLY NETWORK S2P FILE TO CAL
FILE DATA. This will take you to the
EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE9,
middle left).

Step 4.

Select where to read the calibration file from.

READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

The calibration file to be embedded can be stored on
either the USB drive or SD Card. Once the calibration file is recalled, the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P
FILE menu (menu DE9A, bottom left) is displayed.

MENU DE9A
EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE
S2P FILE DATA
OF THE NETWORK
READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

37xxxE OM

Step 5.

Menu DE9A allows you to choose the .S2P file to be
embedded from either the SD Card or USB drive. Select the .S2P file to read.
Once the .S2P file is selected, it is embedded with
the calibration file. To embed additional files, save
the calibration along with the embeded .S2P file onto
the SD Card or USB drive for later recall upon the
next embedding operation.

8-63

EMBEDDING/ DE-EMBEDDING

De-embedding
MENU DE8
EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE

MEASUREMENTS

De-embedding is a common technique for removing test fixture effects
from a calibration, generally of microstrip or on-wafer devices. This is
performed by the following:
Step 1.

Press the APPL key on the instrument’s front panel.

PORT 1/PORT 2
METHOD
EMBED/DE-EMBED
SWAP PORTS
OF S2P DATA

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

OFF

APPLY NETWORK
S2P FILE DATA TO
CAL FILE DATA
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

MENU DE9

Appl

EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE
ORIGINAL CAL FILE
TO APPLY NETWORK

Step 2.

Select the VNA test port where the network will be
embedded, then select the DE-EMBED function under the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu
DE8, top left).

Step 3.

Select APPLY NETWORK S2P FILE TO CAL
FILE DATA. This will take you to the
EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P FILE menu (menu DE9,
middle left).

Step 4.

Select where to read the calibration file from.

READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

The calibration file to be embedded can be stored on
either the SD Card or USB drive. Once the calibration file is recalled, the EMBED/DE-EMBED S2P
FILE menu (menu DE9A, bottom left) is displayed.

MENU DE9A
EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE
S2P FILE DATA
OF THE NETWORK
READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

8-64

Step 5.

Menu DE9A allows you to choose the .S2P file to be
de-embedded from either the SD Card or USB drive.
Select the .S2P file to read.
Once the .S2P file is selected, it is de-embedded with
the calibration file. To de-embed additional files, save
the calibration along with the de-embeded .S2P file
onto the SD Card or USB drive for later recall upon
the next de-embedding operation.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

8-11

OPTICAL
APPLICATION

OPTICAL APPLICATION

Optical applications are divided into two measurement categories,
electro-optical (E/O) and opto-electrical (O/E).
E/O measurements can be performed with the 372xxE/373xxE series
VNAs using the built-in E/O measurement application. On-screen
menu-driven procedures guide you through the set-up and calibration
required for E/O measurements of optical modulators such as bandwidth, flatness, and group delay.
O/E measurements of a photo-diode or photo-receiver can be performed with the 372xxE/373xxE series VNAs by using the built-in O/E
measurement application. On-screen-menu-driven procedures guide
you through the set-up and calibration required for O/E measurements
such as bandwidth, flatness, and group delay.

E/O Measurements

Optical modulators modulate digital data signals over a light wave
carrier and send it over fiber optic networks. Since a VNA is only capable of generating and measuring electrical signals, a laser source is required to provide optical input to the modulator DUT and a photo-diode/photo-receiver is required to convert the modulator output back to
an electrical signal that can be measured by the VNA. The MN4765A
(65 GHz characterized photo-diode) is used with the following procedure. The equipment set up for an E/O measurement is shown in Figure 8-33, below.
37xxxE
.

Port 1

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Port 2

RF In

RF Out

Fiber

Fiber
Laser
Source

-

Channels

Modulator

Photo-diode

Figure 8-33. E/O Measurement Setup

The E/O measurement application de-embeds the response of the
photo-diode/photo-receiver transfer standard from a 12-term calibration to enable measurements of a modulator DUT.

37xxxE OM

8-65

OPTICAL APPLICATION

MEASUREMENTS

E/O Measurement Procedure
The following procedure will explain ways of using the MN4765A
photo-diode to make an E/O measurement of a modulator DUT. The
same set up can be used for a user characterized photo-diode as well.

MENU APPL

Step 1.

Set-up the measurement as shown in Figure 8-33.

Step 2.

Perform a 12-term calibration on the VNA over the
frequency range of interest with reference planes at
the DUT input and the photo-diode output. (Refer to
section 7-4 for the 12-term calibration steps.)

Step 3.

Press Save/Recall to save the calibration and set-up
to the SD Card or USB drive.

Step 4.

Press the Appl key to display the applications menu
(left).

Step 5.

Move the cursor to E/O MEASUREMENT and
press Enter.

APPLICATIONS
ADAPTER REMOVAL
SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
E/O MEASUREMENT
O/E MEASUREMENT
MERGE CAL FILES
PRESS 
TO SELECT

This brings up menu DE1 (left) and the step-by-step
procedure, Figure 8-34, for making the measurement.

MENU DE1
E/O MEASUREMENT
MEASURE E/O DUT
MODULATOR
DE-EMBED TRANSFER
FUNCTION OF A
GENERIC NETWORK

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Figure 8-34.
Step 6.

8-66

E/O Measurement Menu

Select MEASURE E/O DUT (MODULATOR) and
press Enter.

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

OPTICAL APPLICATION

This brings up menu DE3 (top left).
MENU DE3
E/O MEASUREMENT

Step 7.

ORIGINAL CAL FILE
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

This bring up menu DSK2 (middle left).
Step 8.

Select the calibration file and press Enter.

Step 9.

Read the S2P file (characterization data file) for the
photo-diode transfer standard. This will de-embed
the photo-diode for an E/O measurement (menu
DE3A, bottom left).

PRESS 
TO ABORT

NOTE
If an S2P file is not available, it can be generated from the characterization data provided by the vendor. This is explained on
page 8-74.

MENU DSK2
SELECT FILE
TO READ
TESTCAL

Select READ CAL FILE FROM SD CARD or
READ CAL FILE FROM USB DRIVE depending
on where the 12-term calibration was saved in
Step 3.

CAL

The VNA now displays the measurement of the modulator DUT. An example measurement of a 40 Gb/s
NRZ modulator is shown in Figure 8-35 below.

PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE
PRESS <2> FOR
NEXT PAGE

MENU DE3A
E/O MEASUREMENT
TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDDED
(DETECTOR STD)
READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

37xxxE OM

Figure 8-35.

E/O Measurement of a 40 Gb/s NRZ Modulator

8-67

OPTICAL APPLICATION

MEASUREMENTS

Step 10.

Press Save/Recall and save this de-embedded calibration to the SD Card or USB drive.

NOTE
Observe that the S11 graph displays the electrical return
loss (port match) of the modulator and S21 represents the
transfer function of the modulator. The bandwidth of the
modulator can be calculated from the S21 data by setting
the delta markers or using the marker search function to
find the 3 dB change in magnitude. The 3 dB bandwidth of
the modulator measured in this example is 24 GHz.
O/E Measurements

Photo-diodes/photo-receivers convert an optical signal into an electrical signal. Bandwidth measurements can be made on a photo-diode/photo-receiver by stimulating its input with a modulated optical
source and measuring the output signal. A laser and a characterized
modulator are required, in addition to the VNA, to make O/E measurements. See Figure 8-36, below, for the equipment set-up.
37xxxE
.

Port 1

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Port 2

RF In

RF Out

Fiber

Fiber
Laser
Source

Figure 8-36.

-

Channels

Modulator

Photo-diode

O/E Measurement Set-up

The O/E measurement application de-embeds the response of the modulator transfer standard from a 12-term calibration to enable measurements of the photo-diode DUT.
O/E Measurement Procedure
The following procedure will explain ways of obtaining characterization data for a modulator and then how to use it to make an O/E measurement of a photo-receiver.

8-68

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

OPTICAL APPLICATION

Step 1.

Set-up the measurement as shown in Figure 8-36,
previous page.

Step 2.

Perform a 12-term calibration on the VNA over the
frequency range of interest with reference planes at
the modulator input and the photo-receiver DUT
output. (Refer to section 7-4 for the 12-term calibration steps.)

Step 3.

Press Save/Recall to save the calibration and set up
to the SD Card or USB drive.

Step 4.

Press the Appl key to display the applications menu
(left).

Step 5.

Move the cursor to O/E MEASUREMENT and
press Enter.

MENU APPL
APPLICATIONS
ADAPTER REMOVAL
SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

This brings up menu DE2 (bottom left) and the
step-by-step procedure for making the measurement
as shown in Figure 8-37, below.

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
E/O MEASUREMENT
O/E MEASUREMENT
MERGE CAL FILES
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MENU DE2
O/E MEASUREMENT
DE-EMBED O/E S2P
(DETECTOR STD)
GENERATE E/O S2P
CHARACTERIZATION
(MODULATOR)

MEASURE O/E DUT
(DETECTOR)
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

Figure 8-37.

37xxxE OM

O/E Measurement Menu

8-69

OPTICAL APPLICATION

MEASUREMENTS

The measurement of the photo-receiver DUT relies
on a characterized modulator standard. If a characterized modulator is not available, an S2P file can be
created by using a characterized photo-diode and
de-embedding it from the 12-term calibration performed in Step 2.

MENU DE5
DE-EMBED O/E S2P
ORIGINAL CAL FILE
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD

Step 6.

READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

With the measurement set-up as shown in Figure 8-36, select DE-EMBED O/E S2P (DETECTOR STD) (menu DE2, previous page).
This brings up menu DE5 (top left).

Step 7.

Select READ CAL FILE FROM SD CARD or
READ CAL FILE FROM USB DRIVE depending
on where the 12-term calibration was saved in Step
3.
This brings up menu DSK2 (middle left).

MENU DSK2
SELECT FILE
TO READ
TESTCAL

CAL

Step 8.

Select the calibration file and press Enter.

Step 9.

Select READ THE S2P FILE FROM SD CARD or
READ THE S2P FILE FROM USB DRIVE (menu
DE5A, bottom left). This is the characterization data
file for the photo-diode transfer standard. This will
de-embed the photo-diode for an O/E measurement.

Step 10.

Press the Appl key, select O/E MEASUREMENT.
Again, then press Enter. This recalls menu DE2 (left).

PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE
PRESS <2> FOR
NEXT PAGE

MENU DE5A
DE-EMBED E/O S2P
TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDDED
(DETECTOR STD)
READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

8-70

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

OPTICAL APPLICATION

Step 11.
MENU DE2
O/E MEASUREMENT
DE-EMBED O/E S2P
(DETECTOR STD)

Move the cursor to GENERATE E/O S2P CHARACTERIZATION (MODULATOR STD) (menu
DE2, left) and press Enter. This will generate an S2P
characterization file for the modulator.
Once the modulator characterization S2P file has
been generated, it can be used as a transfer standard
for the photo-receiver DUT measurement.

GENERATE E/O S2P
CHARACTERIZATION
(MODULATOR)

After the characterization file has been saved, the
VNA returns to the O/E measurement menu shown
in Figure 8-38, below.

MEASURE O/E DUT
(DETECTOR)
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

Figure 8-38.
Step 12.

37xxxE OM

O/E Measurement Menu

Press the Appl key, select O/E MEASUREMENT.
Again, then press Enter. This recalls menu DE2 (top
left).

8-71

OPTICAL APPLICATION

MEASUREMENTS

Step 13.

Move the cursor to MEASURE O/E DUT (DETECTOR) (menu DE2, top left) and press Enter.

MENU DE2

This brings up menu DE7 (middle left).

O/E MEASUREMENT
DE-EMBED O/E S2P
(DETECTOR STD)

Step 14.

GENERATE E/O S2P
CHARACTERIZATION
(MODULATOR)

Select READ CAL FILE FROM SD CARD or
READ CAL FILE FROM USB DRIVE depending
on where the original 12-term calibration was saved
in Step 3.

MEASURE O/E DUT
(DETECTOR)

This brings up menu DSK2 (bottom left).

PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

MENU DE7
O/E MEASUREMENT
ORIGINAL CAL FILE
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

MENU DSK2
SELECT FILE
TO READ
TESTCAL

CAL

PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE
PRESS <2> FOR
NEXT PAGE

8-72

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

OPTICAL APPLICATION

Step 15.
MENU DE7A
O/E MEASUREMENT
TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDDED
(MODULATOR)

NOTE
If an S2P file is not available, it can be generated from the characterization data provided by the vendor. This is explained on
page 8-74.

READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD
READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Read the S2P file for the modulator that was generated in Step 10 from the SD Card or USB drive
(menu DE7A, left). This will de-embed the modulator
response from the set-up for an O/E measurement.

An O/E measurement of a photo-receiver is shown in Figure 8-39 below. The S21 measurement represents the transfer function of the
photo-receiver and S22 represents the electrical return loss.

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Figure 8-39.

37xxxE OM

O/E Measurement of a Photo-receiver

8-73

OPTICAL APPLICATION

Creating a Characterization
(*.S2P) File for E/O and O/E
Measurements

MEASUREMENTS

This section guides you through the process of creating an S2P file
from vendor supplied characterization data. The S2P file can then be
read into the VNA for de-embedding the response of the transfer standard used for either a modulator or photo-diode.
Microsoft Excel is the recommended application for creating and storing the S2P file containing the characterization data. A sample S2P
file is available for reference (contact Anritsu MMD Customer Service
for a copy).
The file format is the standard S2P format that includes the four S-parameters (see the section below for details on the S2P format). The
transfer function data supplied by the vendor should be copied into the
columns designated for S21 data and the frequencies into the FREQ
column. Once the data has been entered, the file should be saved as an
S2P file (as shown in Figure 8-40 below).

Figure 8-40.

Saving the S2P File in Excel

S2P File Format
S2P data files are ASCII text files in which data appears line by line,
one line per data point, in increasing order of frequency. Each line of
data consists of a frequency value and one or more pairs of values for
the magnitude and phase of each S-parameter at that frequency.
Values are separated by one or more spaces, tabs, or commands. Comments are preceded by an exclamation mark (!). Comments can appear
on separate lines or after the data on any line.

8-74

37xxxE OM

MEASUREMENTS

OPTICAL APPLICATION

The standard S2P file format consists of:
q Option Lines
q Data Lines
q Comments
The option line contains the specifications of the data, for example, the
frequency units, the normalizing impedance, and the measured parameter (S, Y, Z, etc.).
The option line format is:
#    
where:
#
frequency unit

The delimiter that tells the program you are specifying these parameters
The set of units desired (GHz, MHz, KHz, Hz)

parameter

The parameter desired (S, Y or Z for S1P components; S, Y, Z, G, or
H for S2P components; S for S3P or S4P components)

format

The format desired (DB for dB-angle, MA for magnitude-angle, or RI
for real-imaginary)

Rn

The reference resistance in ohms, where n is a positive number of
ohms (the real impedance to which the parameters are normalized)

The default option line for a component data files is:
# GHZ S MA R 50
For Y-parameters with real imaginary data, the option line header will
change to:
# GHz Y RI R 50
The data lines contain the data of interest. Data for all four S-parameters will be listed on a single line for a particular frequency point. The
format is:

37xxxE OM

8-75

OPTICAL APPLICATION

MEASUREMENTS

Frequency S11 S21 S12 S22
Data Line Examples:
Frequency S11 (magnitude) S11 (angle)
0.040000000 1.426492E-04 18.642
0.139900000 2.840961E-03 22.262
Finally, the comment lines begin with an exclamation point “ ! .” They
can be inserted at any point in an S2P file and are ignored by the application program. An S2P file example appears in Figure 8-41 below.
! Anritsu Company
! DATE 04/11/2002 13:16 PAGE 1
! Photo-diode receiver characterization – NRZ-40G
# GHz S MA R 50.00
S11A

S21M

S21A

S12M

S12A

S22M

S22A

0.040000000 1.426492E-04

!FREQ

18.642

3.008963E-04

87.040

1.618370E-04

27.317

2.708149E-04

129.056

0.139900000 2.840961E-03

22.262

6.185992E-03

-114.026

2.539190E-03

125.940

5.977178E-03

-7.691

0.239800000 3.072268E-03

97.851

7.423908E-03

109.019

3.147963E-03

-88.205

7.634960E-03

-75.071

0.339700000 1.887820E-02

81.836

3.814256E-02

-135.753

1.632677E-02

-27.669

3.348942E-02

117.818

0.439600000 2.173782E-02

142.412

4.595363E-02

72.973

1.962434E-02

107.429

3.946349E-02

40.979

0.539500000 2.634556E-02

-62.971

5.206176E-02

31.589

2.257828E-02

-22.787

4.638838E-02

70.663

0.639400000 3.060178E-02

-103.325

6.416773E-02

120.463

2.732290E-02

5.656

5.685493E-02

-124.645

Figure 8-41.

8-76

S11M

S2P File Example

37xxxE OM

Chapter 9
Time Domain
Table of Contents
9-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-2

TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-3

OPERATING TIME DOMAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

9-4

WINDOWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

9-5

GATING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

9-6

ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9-7

EXAMPLES, GATING AND ANTI-GATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

9-8

TIME DOMAIN MENUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Chapter 9
Time Domain
9-1
9-2

INTRODUCTION

This chapter describes the optional Time Domain feature.

TIME DOMAIN
MEASUREMENTS

The Option 2, Time Domain feature provides a useful measurement
tool for determining the location of impedance discontinuities. Some
typical applications are identifying and analyzing circuit elements, isolating and analyzing a desired response, locating faults in cables, and
measuring antennas.
The relationship between the frequency-domain response and the
time-domain response of a network is described mathematically by the
Fourier transform.
The 37xxxE makes measurements in the frequency domain then calculates the inverse Fourier transform to give the time-domain response.
The time-domain response is displayed as a function of time (or distance). This computational technique benefits from the wide dynamic
range and the error correction of the frequency-domain data.
Let us examine the time-domain capabilities. Two measurement
modes are available: lowpass and bandpass.
We use the lowpass mode with devices that have a dc or low-frequency
response. In the lowpass mode two responses to the device-under-test
(DUT) are available: impulse or step response.
The frequencies used for the test must be harmonically related (integer multiples) to the start frequency. The simplest way to calculate
this relationship is to divide the highest frequency in the calibration
by 1600 (the default number-of-points available); this is the start frequency. For example, if the highest frequency is 40 GHz, the calculated
start frequency is 0.025 GHz (40/1600). If the highest frequency is 65
GHz, the calculated start frequency is 0.040625 GHz (65/1600).

37xxxE OM

9-3

TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS

TIME DOMAIN

The lowpass impulse response displays the location of discontinuities
as well as information useful in determining the impedance (R, L, or
C) of each discontinuity.
The impulse response is a peak that goes positive for R>Z0 and negative for R Z
R < Z

S

1 1

R E A L

O

R - Z0
R + Z0

The impulse response for a shunt capacitance is a negative-thenpositive peak and for a series inductance is a positive-then-negative
peak (Figure 9-1).
An example of using an impulse response is a circuit impedance analysis. With an impulse response we can observe the circuit response of a
passive device, such as a multi-element step attenuator (Figure 9-2),
and make final, realtime adjustments during the test.

O

S H U N T C
S E R IE S L

S T E P A T T E N U A T O R

Figure 9-1.

Lowpass Impulse
Response

0C 0 H . 0 1 0 0 - S p 1 s 1 d i y
L P

S 1 1 F O R W A R D R E F L E C T IO N
L IN E A R M A G .

R E F = 5 .0 0 0 m U

w /G

M 3 5A 6 1 R . 2 8 K . 9 2 E 0 9 R 1 m 1 p U s

7 .0 0 0 m U /D IV
MM AA RR KK EE RR

1

TT OO

MM IA N X

2 4 1 6 5 5 . 6 . 3 2 6 4 3 m p Us

6
3 3 1 7 5 5 . 0 . 4 2 1 0 9 m p Us

5

3

2

4 2 99 .3 5 . 92 3 9 6 m p U s

4

5 1 1 9 1 5 . 6 . 5 2 3 4 1 m p Us
6 1 2 5 7 2 . 5 . 5 3 1 4 4 m p Us

0 .0 0 0 p s

Figure 9-2.

7 0 0 .0 0 0 p s

Example of Lowpass Impulse Response

In the above example, the connectors at each end have been gated out
(page 9-12), which lets you better observe the internal circuit response.
Each displayed marker has been manually set to the peak of the response at each adjustable circuit element. In this way, the data display
lets you make the adjustment in realtime, while the marker menu
shows the magnitude of the response at each marker.

9-4

37xxxE OM

TIME DOMAIN

TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS

The lowpass step response displays the location of discontinuities as
well as information useful in determining the impedance (R, L, or C) of
each discontinuity. If you are familiar with time-domain reflectometry
(TDR) you may feel more comfortable with step response, as the displays are similar.
The lowpass step response for a resistive impedance is a positive level
shift for R>Z0 and a negative level shift for R Z
R < Z

S

1 1

R E A L

O

R - Z0
R + Z0

The step response for a shunt capacitance is a negative peak, and for a
series inductance it is a positive peak (Figure 9-3).
An example of using the lowpass step response is cable-fault location.
In the frequency domain a cable with a fault exhibits a much worse

O

S H U N T C

Figure 9-3.

O P E N

C A B L E

S E R IE S L

Lowpass Step
Response
3

1

2

0 .0 0 0 m m

Figure 9-4.

4 0 .0 0 0 c m

Example of Lowpass Step Response

match than a good cable. Using lowpass step response, both the location of the discontinuity and the information about its type are available (Figure 9-4).
In the above example, the dip in the display shows the shuntcapacitive response caused by a crimp in the cable. The response at the
end of the cable shows the step-up that is typical of an open (Figure
9-3, left).
The 37xxxE bandpass mode gives the response of the DUT to an
RF-burst stimulus. Two types of response are available: impulse and
phasor-impulse. An advantage of the bandpass mode is that any frequency range can be used. Use this mode with devices that do not have
a dc or low-frequency path.

37xxxE OM

9-5

TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS

TIME DOMAIN

Use the bandpass-impulse response to show the location of a discontinuity in time or distance, as indicated by changes in its magnitude.
Unlike the lowpass mode, no information as to the type of the discontinuity is available. A typical use for this mode is to measure devices—such as, filters, waveguide, high-pass networks, bandpass networks—where a low-frequency response is not available.
The bandpass-impulse response for various impedance discontinuities
is shown in Figure 9-5. As we can see, no information about the type of
discontinuity is available.

C IR C U IT E L E M E N T S
B a n d p a s s Im p u ls e R e s p o n s e
IM P E D A N C E

R > Z
R < Z

S

1 1

L O G

M A G N IT U D E

An example of using the bandpass-impulse response, is the pulse
height, ringing, and pulse envelope of a bandpass filter (Figure
9-6).Use the phasor-impulse response with bandpass response to determine the type of an isolated impedance discontinuity.
S 2 1 F O R W
L O G

A R D

M A G .

T R A N S M IS S IO N
R E F = 2 0 .0 0 0 d B

S 2 1 F O R W
2 0 .0 0 0 d B /D IV

L O G

M A G .

A R D

T R A N S M IS S IO N
R E F = 3 0 .0 0 0 d B

B P

w /G

1 0 .0 0 0 d B /D IV

O
O

S H U N T C
S E R IE S L

Figure 9-5.

Bandpass Impulse
Response

0 .5 0 0 0

Figure 9-6.

G H z

4 .0 0 0 0

0 .5 0 0 0

G H z

4 .0 0 0 0

Example of Bandpass-Impulse Response

After the bandpass-impulse response has been isolated, the phasor-impulse response for a resistive-impedance-level change is a peak that
goes positive (R>Z0) for the real part of S11 and negative for R Z
R < Z

R E A L S

1 1

IM A G IN A R Y S

O

5 0 9

2 0 9

5 0 9

1 1

Complex Impedances

Next, let us look at a complex circuit. A resistive impedance change
R
TO SELECT

Figure 9-11.

Reference Delay
Menu

NOTE
If you select distance, be sure to set the dielectric constant
in the Reference Delay menu (Figure 9-11).

DOMAIN
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
WITH TIME
GATE
TIME
LOWPASS MODE
TIME
BANDPASS
MODE
DISPLAY
TIME/DISTANCE
SET RANGE
SET GATE
GATE ON/OFF
HELP
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Figure 9-10.

9-8

DOMAIN
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
WITH TIME
GATE
TIME
LOWPASS MODE
TIME
BANDPASS
MODE
DISPLAY
TIME/DISTANCE
SET RANGE
SET GATE
GATE ON/OFF
HELP
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

DOMAIN
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
WITH TIME
GATE
TIME
LOWPASS MODE
TIME
BANDPASS MODE
DISPLAY
TIME/DISTANCE
SET RANGE
SET GATE
GATE ON/OFF
HELP
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Domain Menu

37xxxE OM

TIME DOMAIN

OPERATING TIME DOMAIN

Select SET RANGE and use the START/STOP or GATE/SPAN selections to set the range (Figure 9-12).

DOMAIN
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
WITH TIME
GATE
TIME
LOWPASS
MODE
TIME
BANDPASS
MODE
DISPLAY
TIME/DISTANCE
SET RANGE
SET GATE
GATE ON/OFF
HELP
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Figure 9-12.

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP
START
XXX.XXX ps
STOP
XXX.XXX ps
CENTER
XXX.XXX ps
SPAN
XXX.XXX ps
MARKER RANGE
RESPONSE
IMPULSE/STEP
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

BANDPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP
START
XXX.XXX ps
STOP
XXX.XXX ps
CENTER
XXX.XXX ps
SPAN
XXX.XXX ps
MARKER RANGE
PHASOR ON/OFF
IMPULSE
HELP - PHASOR
IMPULSE
MORE

Set Range Menu

For the lowpass mode select either IMPULSE or STEP Response and
set the DC term. The 37xxxE defaults to the IMPULSE Response and
the AUTO EXTRAPOLATE mode for the DC term (Figure 9-13).
NOTE
The bandpass mode displays Bandpass Impulse Response
unless we select Phasor Impulse Response.

37xxxE OM

9-9

OPERATING TIME DOMAIN

TIME DOMAIN

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP
START
XXX.XXX ps
STOP
XXX.XXX ps
CENTER
XXX.XXX ps
SPAN
XXX.XXX ps
MARKER RANGE
RESPONSE
IMPULSE/STEP
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Figure 9-13.

SET D.C. TERM
FOR LOWPASS
PROCESSING
AUTO
EXTRAPOLATE
LINE
IMPEDANCE
OPEN
SHORT
OTHER
–XXX.XXX #
ABOVE VALUE
REPRESENTS A
REFLECTION
COEFF. OF
XX.XXX mU
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT

BANDPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP
START
XXX.XXX ps
STOP
XXX.XXX ps
CENTER
XXX.XXX ps
SPAN
XXX.XXX ps
MARKER RANGE
PHASOR ON/OFF
IMPULSE
HELP-PHASOR
IMPULSE
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Response Menus

The Marker Range menu allows us to zoom in and display the range
between two selected markers (Figure 9-14).

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP
START
XXX.XXX ps
STOP
XXX.XXX ps
CENTER
XXX.XXX ps
SPAN
XXX.XXX ps
MARKER RANGE
RESPONSE
IMPULSE/STEP
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Figure 9-14.

9-10

TIME
MARKER SWEEP
START TIME
MARKER ( )
XXX.XXX nS
STOP TIME
MARKER ( )
XXX.XXX nS
RESTORE
ORIGINAL
RANGE
PREVIOUS MENU
USE KEYPAD
TO CHOOSE
MARKER (1 - 6)
OR
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Marker Range Menus

37xxxE OM

TIME DOMAIN

9-4

WINDOWING

Windowing is a frequency filter that we apply to the frequency-domain
data when we convert it to time-domain data. This filtering rolls off
the abrupt transition at F1 and F2. This effectively produces a timedomain response with lower sidelobes. Windowing allows a limited degree of control over the pulse shape, trading off ringing (sidelobes) for
pulse width (Figure 9-15).

WINDOWING

W IN D O W IN G
F R E Q U E N C Y D O M A IN
1 -T E R M

F 1

T IM E D O M A IN
W IN D O W

F 2

2 -T E R M

W IN D O W

We select windowing from the Time Domain Setup menu. Four different windows are available: RECTANGLE, NOMINAL, LOW
SIDELOBE, and MIN SIDELOBE. The RECTANGLE option provides
the narrowest pulse width, while the MIN SIDELOBE option provides
the least ringing (fewest sidelobes). The 37xxxE defaults to the NOMINAL option, which is acceptable for most measurements. Windowing
menus are shown in Figure 9-16.

N O T E : W id e r b u t n o r in g in g

Figure 9-15.

Windowing

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP
START
XXX.XXX ps
STOP
XXX.XXX ps
CENTER
XXX.XXX ps
SPAN
XXX.XXX ps
MARKER RANGE

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP
SET WINDOW
NOMINAL
SET GATE
SET D.C. TERM
XXX.XXX
PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT

SHAPE
RECTANGULAR
NOMINAL
LOW SIDELOBE
MIN SIDELOBE
HELP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

RESPONSE
IMPULSE/STEP
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Figure 9-16.

37xxxE OM

Window Shape Menus

9-11

GATING

9-5

TIME DOMAIN

GATING

G A T IN G
G A T E

D IS T A N C E

G A T E A P P L IE D

Figure 9-17.

Gating

Gating is a time filter that allows for removing unwanted time-domain
responses by gating the desired response. We can view the isolated response in both time domain—and in the frequency domain—using the
FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE selection (Figure 9-17).
There are four different gate shapes available: MINIMUM, NOMINAL, WIDE, and MAXIMUM (Figure 9-18). The 37xxxE defaults to
the NOMINAL gate. To specify a different shape simply enter the Gate
menu and select the desired gating shape. The MINIMUM has the
sharpest rolloff and some frequency domain ripple, while MAXIMUM
has the least rolloff and best residual ripple. Figures 9-18A through
9-18D, on the next page, show gating shapes.
The combinations of gate/window shapes will be restricted. For the
MINIMUM gate shape, the LOW and MIN SIDELOBE window shape
will not be allowed. For the NOMINAL gate shape, the MIN SIDELOBE window will not be allowed. If the user has set the window
shape to MIN or LOW SIDELOBE and changes the-gate shape to
MINIMUM, the window will be reset to NOMINAL. If the user has set
the window to MIN SIDELOBE and changes the gate shape to NOMINAL, the window will be reset to LOW SIDELOBE. Gate shapes will
be adjusted in a similar manner.

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP
START
XXX.XXX ps
STOP
XXX.XXX ps
CENTER
XXX.XXX ps
SPAN
XXX.XXX ps

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP

SELECT GATE
SHAPE

SET WINDOW
NOMINAL

MINIMUM
NOMINAL

SET GATE
WIDE

MARKER RANGE

SET DC TERM
XXX.XXX

MAXIMUM

RESPONSE
IMPULSE/STEP

PREVIOUS MENU

HELP

MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Figure 9-18.

9-12

PRESS 
TO SELECT

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Gating Menus

37xxxE OM

TIME DOMAIN

GATING

An informational message will be displayed in the data area when the
window or gate shape reset in this way. The message will last two
sweeps and will say:
“GATE SHAPE ADJUSTED” or “WINDOW SHAPE ADJUSTED”
depending on which was changed by the software.

Figure 9-18A. Minimum Gate Shape

Figure 9-18B. Nominal Gate Shape

Figure 9-18C. Wide Gate Shape

Figure 9-18D. Maximum Gate Shape

37xxxE OM

9-13

ANTI-GATING

9-6

9-7

TIME DOMAIN

ANTI-GATING

Anti-gating is the opposite of gating. Whereby, gating provides for removing all but the desired response, anti-gating displays all but the
desired response. To provide anti-gating, gate in the normal manner,
except use a minus value for the SPAN width.

EXAMPLES, GATING
AND ANTI-GATING

Examples of anti-gating are shown in Figures 9-19 through 9-24. The
figures, all captured from an actual VNA display, show a sequence of
measurements using gating and anti-gating to enhance measurement
technique and accuracy. The examples use a dented length of semirigid cable having a connector on one end and a connector-DUT on the
other end, as shown below. The DUT has a smoothly varying 15 dB return loss.

15 dB
DUT

Connector

Dent

9-8

9-14

TIME DOMAIN MENUS

A flow diagram of the menus associated with the Time Domain Option
is shown in foldout Figure 9-25. The menu choices are described in Appendix A. They appear in alphabetical order by their call letters: TD1,
TD2, TD2dl, etc.

37xxxE OM

TIME DOMAIN

TIME DOMAIN MENUS

37369A
37369A

MODEL:
DEVICE:

START:
STOP:
STEP:

DATE:
OPERATOR:

4.000000000
40.000000000
0.090000000

GHz
GHz
GHz

03/27/96

15:10

GATE START:
GATE STOP:
GATE:
WINDOW:

ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
AVERAGING:
1 PT
IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION
DOMAIN
LOG MAGNITUDE

REF= -40.000

dB

20.000

dB/DIV
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
WITH TIME GATE
TIME
LOWPASSMODE
TIME
BANDPASSMODE
SETUP
DISPLAY
TIME/ DISTANCE
SET RANGE
SET GATE
GATE

OFF

HELP

4.000000000

Figure 9-19.

37xxxE OM

GHz

40.000000000

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Frequency Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating Off

9-15

TIME DOMAIN MENUS

TIME DOMAIN

37369A

MODEL:
DEVICE:

START:
STOP:
STEP:

DATE:
OPERATOR:

4.000000000
40.000000000
0.090000000

GHz
GHz
GHz

03/27/96

GATE START:
GATE STOP:
GATE:
WINDOW:

15:12

315.0000
165.0000
NOMINAL
NOMINAL

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION

ps
ps

ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
AVERAGING:
1 PT
IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz

BP

LOG MAGNITUDE

REF= -40.000

dB

20.000

dB/DIV

MARKER3
240.0000 ps
-16.260 dB

Connector interface with
VNA

DUT Interface

Dent

3

MARKERTO MAX
MARKERTO MIN

2

1

-500.0000

Figure 9-20.

9-16

CH 1 - S11
REFERENCEPLANE
0.0000 mm

ps

1.5000

ns

1

0.0000 ps
-29.255 dB

2

705.0000 ps
-18.001 dB

MARKERREADOUT
FUNCTIONS

Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating Off

37xxxE OM

TIME DOMAIN

TIME DOMAIN MENUS

37369A

MODEL:
DEVICE:

START:
STOP:
STEP:

DATE:
OPERATOR:

4.000000000
40.000000000
0.090000000

GHz
GHz
GHz

GATE START:
GATE STOP:
GATE:
WINDOW:

03/27/96

15:14

642.5000
767.5000
NOMINAL
NOMINAL

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION

ps
ps

ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
AVERAGING:
1 PT
IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz

BP w/GATE

LOG MAGNITUDE

REF= -40.000

dB

20.000

dB/DIV
GATE

DUT Interface
gated for display
Dent removed
by gating

2

Connector interface with VNA
removed by gating

START
642.5000

ps

STOP
767.5000

ps

CENTER
705.0000

ps

SPAN
125.0000

ps

Flag

GATE SHAPE
NOMINAL

Flag

3
1

GATE
SET RANGE

Note that gating is turned on and span is set to cover the
discontinuity (125 ps down line from connection with VNA).
Further note that the gating flags point inward.

-500.0000

Figure 9-21.

37xxxE OM

ps

1.5000

ON

PRESS 
TO SELECT

ns

Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On and Positioned Over DUT Interface Discontinuity.

9-17

TIME DOMAIN MENUS

TIME DOMAIN

37369A

MODEL:
DEVICE:

START:
STOP:
STEP:

DATE:
OPERATOR:

4.000000000
40.000000000
0.090000000

GHz
GHz
GHz

GATE START:
GATE STOP:
GATE:
WINDOW:

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION
LOG MAGNITUDE

03/27/96

15:16

642.5000
767.5000
NOMINAL
NOMINAL

ps
ps

ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
AVERAGING:
1 PT
IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz

FGT
REF= 0.000

dB

10.000

dB/DIV

SET SCALING
OR PRESS

-LOG MAGRESOLUTION
10.000 dB/DIV

DUT Interface
enlarged for evaluation

REFERENCEVALUE
0.000 dB
12 3

REFERENCELINE
4

Note that the reference value is 0 dB and the resolution is
10 db per division. These values are optimum for viewing
the smoothly varying return loss characteristics of the DUT
interface - approximately 15 dB
4.000000000

Figure 9-22.

9-18

GHz

40.000000000

Frequency Domain Trace of DUT

37xxxE OM

TIME DOMAIN

TIME DOMAIN MENUS

37369A

MODEL:
DEVICE:

START:
STOP:
STEP:

DATE:
OPERATOR:

4.000000000
40.000000000
0.090000000

GHz
GHz
GHz

GATE START:
GATE STOP:
GATE:
WINDOW:

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION

03/27/96

15:19

315.0000
165.0000
NOMINAL
NOMINAL

ps
ps

ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
AVERAGING:
1 PT
IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz

BP w/GATE
REF= -87.348

LOG MAGNITUDE

dB

20.000

dB/DIV
GATE

Dent removed
by anti-gating

2

Flag

1Flag

START
315.0000

ps

STOP
165.0000

ps

CENTER
240.0000

ps

SPAN
-150.0000

ps

3

GATE SHAPE
NOMINAL

Note that anti-gating is turned on by changing the polarity of
the SPAN to negative and changing its value to cover the dent.
Also, note that the flags point outward.

GATE

O

SET RANGE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

-500.0000

Figure 9-23.

37xxxE OM

ps

1.5000

ns

Time Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On and Positioned Over Dent (Cable Fault)
Interface Discontinuity.

9-19

TIME DOMAIN MENUS

TIME DOMAIN

37369A

MODEL:
DEVICE:

START:
STOP:
STEP:

DATE:
OPERATOR:

4.000000000
40.000000000
0.090000000

GHz
GHz
GHz

GATE START:
GATE STOP:
GATE:
WINDOW:

03/27/96

340.0000
140.0000
NOMINAL
NOMINAL

S11 FORWARDREFLECTION
LOG MAGNITUDE

15:23

ps
ps

ERROR CORR: REFL PORT1
AVERAGING:
1 PT
IF BNDWDTH: 1 KHz

FGT
REF= 0.000

dB

10.000

dB/DIV

SET SCALING
OR PRESS

-LOG MAGRESOLUTION
10.000 dB/DIV
REFERENCEVALUE
0.000 dB
12 3
REFERENCELINE
4

4.000000000

Figure 9-24.

9-20

GHz

40.000000000

Frequency Domain Trace of Test Cable—Gating On

37xxxE OM

TIME DOMAIN

MENU FLOWCHART

Figure 9-25.

37xxxE OM

Time Domain Menu Flow

9-21/9-22

Chapter 10
AutoCal
Table of Contents
10-1

INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10-2

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

10-3

CALIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10-4

DEFINITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10-5

PHYSICAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

10-6

CHARACTERIZATION FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

10-7

USING AUTOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

10-8

PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

10-9

AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

AU
LE
FT

TO
C

AL
40

MO

MH

z-

DU

20

GH

36

RIG

Op

era

te

Figure 10-1.

LE

z

Po
we
r

AutoCal Module, Power Supply, and Calibration Coefficients USB Drive

58

HT

1K

KF

Chapter 10
AutoCal
10-1

10-2

INTRODUCTION

DESCRIPTION

This chapter provides a general description of the AutoCal calibrators,
including specifications, setup, and the use of the associated software
and on-line documentation. This series has three models, as shown below. Throughout this manual, the term AutoCal will refer to the series.
Individual models will be referred to by model number. Figure 10-1
shows the AutoCal module and all of its attaching parts.
Model

Switch

Freq. Range

Connector

36581NNF

Electronic

40MHz-18 GHz

N (Male)-N(Fem)

36581KKF

Electronic

40MHz-20 GHz

K(Male)-K(Fem)

36582KKF

Mechanical

40MHz-40 GHz

K(Male)-K(Fem)

The AutoCal module provides an automatic system for fast, repeatable
high-quality calibrations of a Vector Network Analyzer (VNA). The
AutoCal module is connected between the VNA's test ports 1 and 2 to
perform the calibration. Refer to Figure 10-2 for a diagram of the
AutoCal connections.
The electronic AutoCal modules use solid state electronic switches to
exchange the internal calibration standards. Note that these units
have a lower frequency limit (18 and 20 GHz). The mechanical module
uses electro-mechanical actuators to exchange the standards and has
the highest frequency limit, but has a small non-repeatability error.
The mechanical module contains internal standards used to measure
port isolation; the electronic module does NOT contain isolation standards and requires a manual operation to perform this measurement.
A standard serial RS-232 interface cable is used to connect the
AutoCal module to the 37xxxE. Power is supplied by a connecting cable from a universal power supply (+5V, +15V, –15V for the electronic
modules; +5V, +24V for the mechanical modules). A power on-off
switch is not provided.
Test Port Cable Converters (Anritsu series 36583) are used during and
after the calibration process to establish the desired test port connector type and sex.

37xxxE OM

10-3

CALIBRATIONS

10-3

CALIBRATIONS

AUTOCAL

Four types of calibration can be performed using AutoCal:
One-Port: S11 1-Port and S22 1-Port are 1-port calibrations performed on the indicated port of the VNA and are equivalent to the traditional Open-Short-Load calibrations.
Full 2-Port: This type is equivalent to the traditional
Open-Short-Load-Thru (OSLT) calibration.
Thru Update: This type is a new form of calibration which is used to
update an existing 12-term calibration in the VNA. This calibration
could have been performed using any method of calibration which
yields 12 terms (LRL, LRM, AutoCal, or OSLT). Due to cable movement and aging, the calibration may have degraded over time. The
Thru Update refreshes the calibration by measuring a Thru connection and updating the Transmission Tracking and Load Match calibration coefficients.
Adapter Removal: This calibration measures the characteristics of
male-male or female-female test port cables for subsequent measurement of non-insertable devices. An adapter is required for this calibration. Adapter Removal requires two calibration procedures in order to
calculate the parameters and electrical length of the adapter.

10-4

DEFINITIONS

The following terms are used in explaining the calibration procedure
using the AutoCal module:
Thru: A thru is a connection of the two test ports. Two kinds of thru
connections are defined for the AutoCal calibration: (1) a Calibrator
thru is an internal path through the calibrator. (2) a True thru is a direct cable connection between the test ports, with no intervening connectors. The calibrator thru is not as accurate as a true thru, so the
you have the option during a calibration to use the more accurate
method, if necessary.
Switch Averaging: The mechanical AutoCal module uses electro-mechanical switches to select calibration standards. These switches have
a small amount of non-repeatability (typically less than –55 dB). For
most calibrations, this is more than adequate because it is below connector repeatability error. If desired, you can choose to reduce the effect of this non-repeatability in the mechanical module by using
Switch Averaging, which causes additional calibration measurements.
By setting a Switch Averaging factor larger than 1, switch repeatability error will be reduced. The tradeoff is that calibration time will be
proportionally increased.

10-4

37xxxE OM

AUTOCAL

DEFINITIONS

Isolation: For certain measurements which require accurate S21 or
S12 readings for very small values of those parameters, an isolation
step is required to characterize the leakage of the VNA and test setup.
The isolation step can be performed automatically as part of a “Full
2-Port” calibration when using the mechanical module. The isolation
step requires a manual operation for the electronic module. In order to
achieve high accuracy for the characterization of the leakage, a high
averaging factor is needed.
VNA Measurement Averaging Factor: This is the number of
measurements taken at a given data point (frequency) and may be
adjusted to meet the measurement requirements. The average of all
the measurements will become the measured data. For example, if 256
averages is selected, each data point is measured 256 times and the
average of these measurements is displayed, then the VNA moves to
the next data point.
VNA Video IF Bandwidth: The bandwidth of the receiver may be
changed to enhance the measurement accuracy or, conversely, to increase the measurement speed. Selecting the minimum IF bandwidth
results in the greatest accuracy for low-signal-level measurements and
the slowest measurement speed. Selecting the maximum IF bandwidth results in the greatest measurement speed and reduced accuracy on low-signal-level measurements.This can be set by using the
Video IF BW key and selecting the desired IFBW.
Characterization File: Each calibrator module has a file containing
data which characterizes each standard in the calibrator. This file also
contains information (identification number, start and stop frequencies) concerning the capabilities of the calibrator. Each characterization file has the extension “.acd.” When modules are changed, you
must install the appropriate new characterization file. This file can be
installed using the Util key (AutoCal Utilities) to recall the characterization file from a USB drive. In addition, each AutoCal module can be
re-characterized using the VNA. A valid 12-term calibration must be
active, which is used to characterize the standards within the module.

37xxxE OM

10-5

PHYSICAL SETUP

10-5

PHYSICAL SETUP

AUTOCAL

See Figure 10-2 for an illustration of the connections necessary to perform an automatic calibration using the AutoCal module. Note that
the connection is very simple. Different power cable connectors are
used with the mechanical modules and the electronic modules to prevent connecting the wrong power supply in error.
There is no on-off switch. When power is connected to the AutoCal
module, the LED labeled POWER should come on immediately. The
second LED, labeled OPERATE, should come on in about five minutes,
after the internal temperature control oven has stabilized. The
internal temperature is held within a 5 oC window.

37xxxE

.

AUTOCAL
POWER
SUPPLY

SERIAL
PORT

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

SERIAL
CABLE

AUTOCAL MODULE 36581KKF
40 MHz - 20 GHz

LEFT

RIGHT

Power

Operate

AUTOCAL

Figure 10-2.

10-6

AutoCal Equipment Setup

37xxxE OM

AUTOCAL

10-6

CHARACTERIZATION FILES

CHARACTERIZATION
FILES

.

Before performing an AutoCal on a 37xxxE, the Characterization File
for the AutoCal Module has to be loaded. This file may be recalled
from the USB drive accompanying the Module. It may also be recalled
from one generated using the user's specialized manual calibration.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Insert the AutoCal Module Characterization USB drive into the USB
port. Press the Utility Menu key (left), then select the following menu
options, in turn: AUTOCAL UTILITIES, RECALL FROM USB
DRIVE. Select the file "Lxxxxxx.ACD".
If a copy of the Characterization File is in the SD Card, you can recall
it by choosing RECALL FROM SD CARD instead. Select the same
file "Lxxxxxx.ACD".

Utility
Menu

NOTE
The “xxxxxx” in the above paragraphs correspond to the
serial number of the AutoCal module.
MENU UTIL
SELECT UTILITY
FUNCTION OPTIONS
GPIB ADDRESSES

Should you desire to re-characterize the module, which is recommended every six months of usage, perform the following procedure:
Step 1.

DISPLAY
INSTRUMENT
STATE PARAMS
GENERAL DISK
UTILITIES

NOTE
Any calibration method may be used (Standard, Offset Short, LRL/LRM, or TRM)
along with either the Coaxial or Waveguide
line types.

CAL COMPONENT
UTILITIES
AUTOCAL
UTILITIES
COLOR
CONFIGURATION

Using a 365x or 375x Calibration Kit, perform a
12-Term calibration over the desired frequency range
of characterization, but within the range of the
AutoCal module and the VNA.

Step 2.

Upon completion of the calibration, press the Utility
Menu key.

DATA ON (OFF)
DRAWING
BLANKING
FREQUENCY
INFORMATION
SET DATE/TIME
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

37xxxE OM

10-7

CHARACTERIZATION FILES

Step 3.

AUTOCAL

Select AUTOCAL UTILITIES then AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION, from the next menu to appear.

AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION
AUTOCAL
UTILITIES

SWITCH AVERAGING
XXXX

AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION

PORT CONFIG
L=1, R=2
R=1, L=2

SAVE
TO SD CARD

NUMBER OF
AVERAGES

SAVE
TO USB DRIVE

REFLECTION
XXXX

RECALL
FROM SD CARD

LOAD
XXXX

RECALL
FROM USB DRIVE

THRU
XXXX

PRESS 
TO SELECT

ISOLATION
XXXX
START AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION

Step 4.

Select an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVERAGING (recommend 4 for the electronic modules,
and 16 for the electro-mechanical modules).

Step 5.

Ensure the Module Configuration is correct (L=1,
R=2 or R=1, L=2).

Step 6.

If desired, you may change the amount of averaging
during characterization of each standard, by entering the NUMBER OF AVERAGES.

Step 7.

Ensure the Autocal Module is connected between the
Test Ports, power is applied, and the serial cable is
connected to the VNA. Verify that both the “Power”
and “Operate” LED’s are ON.

Step 8.

Select START AUTOCAL CHARACTERIZATION.
The VNA will proceed through a characterization of
the attached Autocal Module.

Step 9.

When the calibration is complete, press the Save/Recall key.

Step 10.

Select SAVE then FRONT PANEL SETUP AND
CAL DATA TO SD CARD (middle and bottom left).

Step 11.

Select a file or CREATE NEW FILE and press Enter.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

10-8

37xxxE OM

AUTOCAL

USING AUTOCAL

If you are creating a new file, enter the filename and
select DONE when finished.

10-7

USING AUTOCAL

.

Begin
Cal

An example procedure for using the AutoCal module is given below.
This example assumes a frequency range of 40 MHz to 40 GHz, a
power level of -7 dBm, and use of a Series 36582 AutoCal module.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Step 1.

Press the Begin Cal key (top left).

Step 2.

Select AUTOCAL from the displayed menu (C11,
left).

Apply
Cal

MENU C11
BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA
REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL
AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD
XXXXXXXXX
TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXXX
CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

37xxxE OM

10-9

USING AUTOCAL

AUTOCAL

Step 3.
MENU ACAL
AUTOCAL
AUTOCAL TYPE:
XXXXXXXX
CHANGE
AUTOCAL SETUP
START AUTOCAL
THRU UPDATE
CONNECT THROUGH
LINE BETWEEN
PORTS 1 AND 2
NUMBER OF AVGS
XXX
START THRU UPDATE

The selections in the next menu to appear, MENU
ACAL, will depend on current instrument conditions,
as follows:
a. THRU UPDATE lets you update the Thru calibration of an active 12-term Calibration. This
updates the transmission frequency response
and load match coefficients.
b. START AUTOCAL lets you start a calibration
using the current setup.
c. CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP lets you set up a
new calibration, which is what we will do for
this example. This example also assumes that
you have selected the transmission medium and,
if waveguide, identified the cutoff frequency.

USE PREVIOUS
AUTOCAL SETUP
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

10-10

37xxxE OM

AUTOCAL

MENU ACAL_SETUP

USING AUTOCAL

Step 4.

Select CHANGE AUTOCAL SETUP. This causes
MENU ACAL_SETUP (left) to appear.

Step 5.

Enter a SWITCH AVERAGING value of 8.

AUTOCAL SETUP
LINE TYPE
COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE

To improve the effect of switch repeatability error
with the 36582 series (mechanical switch), you can
change the switch averaging. Note, however, that
switch averaging will have no affect on the 36581 series (electronic switch).

WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF
XX.XXXXXX GHz
SWITCH AVERAGING
8
NUMBER OF AVGS
REFLECTION
XXXX

Step 6.

LOAD
XXXX

You could have also selected S11 1-PORT, S22
1-PORT, or ADAPTER REMOVAL. The last of
these lets you remove the effects of an adapter used
in the calibration.

THRU
XXXX
ISOLATION
XXXX
AUTOCAL TYPE

Step 7.

SII 1 PORT
S22 1 PORT
FULL 2 PORT
ADAPTER REMOVAL

MENU ACAL_FULL
AUTOCAL
FULL 2-PORT

OMIT

Step 9.

AVERAGING
FACTOR
XXXX

PORT CONFIG
L=1, R=2
R=1, L=2

37xxxE OM

Observe that OMIT is shown for the ISOLATION
AVERAGING.
Isolation may be omitted (default). You may also select DEFAULT to use the default value during the
isolation step. You may also use your own AVERAGING FACTOR. Including isolation involves a
manual step for the 36581 models.

THRU TYPE
CALIBRATOR/TRUE

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Select the THRU TYPE to be either CALIBRATOR
or TRUE.
By default, the CALIBRATOR (internal) thru standard is used for the Thru Calibration. The transmission response of the calibration may be improved by
selecting the TRUE thru standard. This will result
in an added manual step.

ISOLATION
AVERAGING

START AUTOCAL

Select the PORT CONFIG setting that matches the
physical setup (R-1, L=2 or L=1, R=2).
It is critical to ensure the correct module orientation
is established. Each side (left) and right) of the module is labeled.

Step 8.

DEFAULT

Select FULL 2 PORT. This displays a menu (MENU
ACAL_FULL) that lets you set up the calibration
(bottom left).

Step 10.

Ensure the AutoCal module is properly connected
between Ports 1 and 2, then select START
AUTOCAL.

10-11

USING AUTOCAL

AUTOCAL

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Save/
Recall
Menu

MENU SR1

Follow the on-screen instructions and do not disturb
the setup during the calibration. Please note that
you should not start a calibration until both LED's
on the AutoCal module are lit. This will ensure accurate calibration of the VNA.
Step 11.

When the calibration is complete, press the Save/Recall key.

Step 12.

Select SAVE then FRONT PANEL SETUP AND
CAL DATA TO SD CARD (middle and bottom left).

Step 13.

Select a file or CREATE NEW FILE and press Enter.
If you are creating a new file, enter the filename and
select DONE when finished.

SAVE/RECALL
FRONT PANEL
AND CAL DATA
SAVE
RECALL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
FUNCTION

MENU SR2
SAVE
FRONT PANEL
SETUP IN
INTERNAL MEMORY
FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
TO SD CARD
FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
TO USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

10-12

37xxxE OM

AUTOCAL

10-8

PIN DEPTH SPECIFICATIONS

PIN DEPTH
SPECIFICATIONS

Table 10-1.

The depth of the center pin on connectors is a critical specification,
which if not met, can cause damage to mating connectors. Table 10-1
provides pin depth examples and Table 10-2 provides pin-depth specifications for associated AutoCal connectors.

Checking Connector Pin Depth (Example)

Example 1:
FEMALE MASTER GAUGE BLOCK (protrusion)
Desired nominal value:
Case1
Actual value of master gauge
Gauge should be set to indicate:
Case2
Actual value of master gauge
Gauge should be set to indicate:

0.2070
0.2071 (protrusions 0.0001 more than desired)
+0.0001
0.2069 (protrusions 0.0001 less than desired)
-0.0001

Example 2:
MALE MASTER GAUGE BLOCK (cavity)
Desired nominal value:
Case1
Actual value of master gauge
Gauge should be set to indicate:
Case2
Actual value of master gauge
Gauge should be set to indicate:

0.2070
0.2071 (cavity 0.0001 deeper than desired)
-0.0001
0.2069 (cavity 0.0001 shallower than desired)
+0.0001

Table 10-2.

AutoCal Module Connector Pin Depth Specifications
Device

Connector

Pin Depth (inches)

3658XXX

K-Female

+0.0000 to -0.005

3658XXX

K-Male

+0.0000 to -0.005

3658XXX

N-Female

*[0.207](+0.000, -0.005)

3658XXX

K-Female

*[0.207](+0.000, -0.005)

32K50
32KF50

K-Male (cable side)

**Negative Indication

K-Female

+0.0000 to -0.0005

K-Male (DUT side)

+0.0000 to -0.0005

K-Male (cable side)

**Negative Indication

3.5mm-Female (DUT side)

+0.006 to -0.008

3.5mm-Male (DUT side)

+0.006 to -0.008

K-Male (cable side)

**Negative Indication

SMA-Female (DUT side)

+0.0005 to -0.0015

SMA-Male (DUT side)

+0.0005 to -0.0015

32L50
32LF50

32S50
32SF50

*Gauging Type N Connectors: The actual value of a Type N master gauge block will always vary to some degree from the desired nominal value. The recorded measured value of the master gauge must be observed when calibrating the Pin Depth Gauge to the desired
nominal value. Although the AutoCal Module Pin Depths are not critical, this information may be helpful in the measurement of Type N
mating components. Examples are shown in Table 10-1, on the preceding page.

37xxxE OM

10-13

AUTOCAL MENUS FLOW DIAGRAM

10-9

AUTOCAL MENUS
FLOW DIAGRAM

AUTOCAL

A flow diagram for the AutoCal menus is provided in Figure 10-3.

Menu ACAL_S11
AUTOCAL
S11 1 PORT

Menu C11

Begin
Cal

BEGIN CALIBRATION
KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA
REPEAT PREVIOUS
CAL
AUTOCAL
CAL METHOD
XXXXXXXX

Menu ACAL
AUTOCAL
AUTOCAL TYPE
XXXXXXXX
CHANGE
AUTOCAL SETUP
START AUTOCAL

TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX

CONNECT THROUGH
LINE BETWEEN
PORTS 1 AND 2

CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP

NUMBER OF AVGS
XXX

PRESS 
TO SELECT

PORT 1
CONNECTION
LEFT/RIGHT

Menu ACAL_SETUP

TEST SIGNALS

AUTOCAL SETUP

START AUTOCAL

LINE TYPE
COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF
XX.XXXXXX GHz
SWITCH AVERAGING
XXXX

Menu ACAL_S22
AUTOCAL
S22 1 PORT

NUMBER OF AVGS
REFLECTION
XXXX

START THRU UPDATE

PORT 1
CONNECTION
LEFT/RIGHT

LOAD
XXXX

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

TEST SIGNALS
START AUTOCAL

THRU
XXXX

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

ISOLATION
XXXX
Cal Sequence
Menus,
Page 4-18

AUTOCAL TYPE
S11 1 PORT
S22 1 PORT

Menu ACAL_FULL
AUTOCAL
FULL 2 PORT

FULL 2 PORT
ADAPTER REMOVAL

ISOLATION
AVERAGING
OMIT
DEFAULT
AVERAGING
FACTOR
XXXX
THRU TYPE
CALIBRATOR/TRUE
PORT CONFIG
L=1, R=2
R=1, L=2
TEST SIGNALS
START AUTOCAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL_AR
Menu U1

Utility
Menu

UTILITY
GPIB ADDRESSES
DISPLAY
INSTRUMENT
PARAMETERS
GENERAL
DISK UTILITIES
CAL COMPONENT
UTILITIES
AUTOCAL
UTILITIES
COLOR
CONFIGURATION
DATA
ON(OFF)
DRAWING
BLANK(ING)
FREQUENCY
INFORMATION
SET DATE/TIME

AUTOCAL
ADAPTER REMOVAL
ISOLATION
AVERAGING
OMIT
DEFAULT

Menu ACAL_UTIL
AUTOCAL
UTILITIES
AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION
SAVE
TO SD CARD
SAVE
TO USB DRIVE
RECALL
FROM SD CARD
RECALL
FROM USB DRIVE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu ACAL_CHAR

AVERAGING
FACTOR
XXXX

AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION

PORT CONFIG
ADAPT&L=1, R=2
L=1, ADAPT&R=2
ADAPT&R=1, L=2
R=1, ADAPT&L=2

SWITCH AVERAGING
XXXX
PORT CONFIG
L=1, R=2
R=1, L=2K
NUMBER OF AVGS
REFLECTION
XXXX

TEST SIGNALS
START AUTOCAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

LOAD
XXXX
THRU
XXXX
ISOLATION
XXXX
START AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION

Cal Sequence
Menus,
Page 4-18

Cal Sequence
Menus,
Page 4-18

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Figure 10-3.

10-14

AutoCal Menus Flow Diagram

37xxxE OM

Chapter 11
Operational Checkout
Procedures
Table of Contents
11-1

INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-2

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-3

INITIAL SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-4

SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11-5

NON-RATIO POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

11-6

HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

WARNING

Repair

This equipment can not be repaired by the operator. DO NOT attempt to
remove the equipment covers or to disassemble internal components.
Only qualified service technicians with a knowledge of electrical fire
and shock hazards should service this equipment. There are
high-voltage parts in this equipment presenting a risk of severe injury
or fatal electric shock to untrained personnel. In addition, there is a risk
of damage to precision components.

Chapter 11
Operational Checkout
Procedures
11-1

11-2

INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides quick operational checkout procedures that may
be used by incoming inspectors to ensure that the Model 37xxxE Vector Network Analyzer is operational. This is a quick-check procedure.
For the full performance verification procedure, refer to the Series
37xxxE Maintenance Manual, Anritsu Part Number 10410-00303.

REQUIRED
EQUIPMENT

The following equipment is required for the procedures in this chapter:
q Flexible microwave cable (through line)
q Short

11-3

Before starting the performance tests, press the Power key (left) to On.

INITIAL SETUP

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

NOTE
Allow the system to warm up for at least 60 minutes to ensure operation to performance specifications.

Power

11-4

SELF TEST

37xxxE OM

Perform an instrument self test to ensure that the VNA is operating
properly. To start a self test, Press the Option Menu key and make the
menu choices shown in Figure 11-1.

11-3

NON-RATIO POWER

OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

OPTIONS
TRIGGERS
REAR PANEL
OUTPUT

DIAGNOSTICS

DIAGNOSTICS

START SELF TEST

MULTIPLE SOURCE
CONTROL

READ SERVICE LOG
INSTALLED OPTIONS

RECEIVER MODE

PERIPHERAL TESTS

SOURCE CONFIG

TROUBLESHOOTING
(FOR SERVICE
USE ONLY)

PRESS < ENTER>
TO SELECT

H/W CALIBRATIONS
(FOR SERVICE
USE ONLY)
PRESS < Enter>

Figure 11-1.

11-5

NON-RATIO POWER

Performing a Self Test

This test verifies that each individual receiver channel operates properly. Measurement calibration of the system is not required for this
test.
This test requires that you press specified front panel keys and make
choices from the displayed menu(s). The keys used in this test are
shown below.

.

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Channels

Channel Menu

Channel
Menu

Measurement

Ch 1

Ch 2

Setup
Menu

Ch 3

Ch 4

Hold

Display

Graph Type
S Params

11-4

Data
Points

Domain

Setup
Menu

Appl

Enhancement

Graph
Type

Set
Scale

Auto
Scale

Option
Menu

S
Params

Ref
Plane

Trace
Memory

Avg/
Smooth
Menu

Video
IF BW

Trace
Smooth

Graph
Type

Average

37xxxE OM

OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

Test Procedure
Menu Choice

Options
Menu

Non-Ratioed Parameters,
see Figure 11-2

Setup
Menu

START: 1 GHz
STOP: High-End Frequency

Channel
Menu

FOUR CHANNELS

Graph
Type

LOG MAGNITUDE
(All channels)

S-PARAMS

SET
SCALE

Perform test as described below.
Step 1.

Key

NON-RATIO POWER

Connect Test Ports 1 and 2 together using a
high-quality through line (below).

PORT 1

TEST PORT 2

USER 1: (Channel 3)
Parameter: Ra/1
Phase Lock: Ra
USER 2: (Channel 1)
Parameter: Ta/1
Phase Lock: Ra
USER 3: (Channel 2)
Parameter: Tb/1
Phase Lock: Ra
USER 4: (Channel 4)
Parameter: Rb/1
Phase Lock: Rb
RESOLUTION:
20 dB/DIV
REF VALUE:
0 dB
(All four channels)

Step 2.

Reset the VNA using the Default Program key.

Step 3.

Set up the VNA as shown in table at left.

Step 4.

Observe the sweep indicators and allow at least one
complete sweep to occur on all four channels.

Step 5.

Verify that the minimum amplitude meets the specifications shown below.
Model
37247E

.

Marker
Menu

37xxxE OM

PORT 2

TEST PORT 1

-

Channels

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

Test Channel
>-26 dB

Reference Channel
>-35 dB

37347E

>-31 dB

>-33 dB

37269E

>-40 dB

>-40 dB

37369E

>-34 dB

>-34 dB

37297E

>-60 dB

>-55 dB

37397E

>-60 dB

>-55 dB

NOTE
Use the Marker Menu and Readout Marker keys ( left) and
menus to obtain precise frequency and amplitude values.

Readout
Marker

11-5

HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST

11-6

HIGH LEVEL NOISE
TEST

OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

The following test verifies that the high-level signal noise in the VNA
will not significantly affect the accuracy of subsequent measurements.
Calibration of the system is not required for this test.
This test requires that you press specified front panel keys and make
choices from the displayed menu(s). The keys used in this test are
highlighted below.

.

Key

Menu Choice

Setup
Menu

START: 40 MHz
STOP: High-end frequency

Channel
Menu

Measurement

Display

Enhancement

DUAL CHANNELS 1-3

Graph
Type

LOG MAGNITUDE
(Both channels)

Set
Scale

RESOLUTION:
0.020 dB/DIV
REF VALUE:
0.0 dB
(Both channels)

S-Params

-

Channels

Channel 1 – S12
Channel 3 – S21

Data
Points

201

Video
IF BW

NORMAL (1 kHz)

Limits

UPPER LIMIT ON
0.015 if less than 40 GHz
0.04 if 40 GHz
0.14 if above 40 GHz

Channels

Channel Menu

Channel
Menu

Set Scale
Graph Type
S Params

Ch 1

Ch 2

Setup
Menu

Ch 3

Ch 4

Hold

Auto
Scale

Option
Menu

Trace
Memory

Avg/
Smooth
Menu

Display

Graph
Type

S
Params

Set
Scale

Ref
Plane

Setup Menu

Measurement

Data
Points

Domain

Data Points

Appl

Enhancement

Video
IF BW

Trace
Smooth

Average

Video IF BW
Average

Avg/Smooth Menu

Setup the VNA as described in the table at the left.

LOWER LIMIT ON
-0.015 if less than 40 GHz
-0.04 if 40 GHz
-0.14 if above 40 GHz
DISPLAY LIMITS ON

11-6

37xxxE OM

OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST

Perform the test as described below:

PORT 1

PORT 2

Step 1.

Reset the VNA using the Default Program key.

Step 2.

Connect Test Port 1 and Test Port 2 (top left) together.

Step 3.

Press the Ch 1 key.

Step 4.

Press the Trace Memory key.

Step 5.

Choose VIEW DATA from the menu and press the
Enter key.

Step 6.

While observing the sweep indicators, allow at least
two complete sweeps to occur.

Step 7.

Choose STORE DATA TO MEMORY from the
menu and press the Enter key.

Step 8.

Choose VIEW DATA / MEMORY from the menu
and press the Enter key.

Step 9.

While observing the sweep indicators, allow at least
two complete sweeps to occur.

Step 10.

Verify that the peak-to-peak High Level Noise falls
within the area between the two limit lines (Figure 11-2, following page).

Step 11.

Press the Ch 3 key.

Step 12.

Repeat Steps 4 through 9 for channel 3.

Step 13.

Press the S Params key; set Ch 1 for S11 and Ch 3 for
S22.

Step 14.

Connect a Short to Test Port 1 and an Open to Test
Port 2 (left).

Step 15.

Repeat Steps 2 through 9.

TEST PORT 1

TEST PORT 2

PORT 1

TEST
PORT 1

SHORT

TEST
PORT 2

OPEN

37xxxE OM

PORT 2

11-7

HIGH LEVEL NOISE TEST

OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT

S12 REVERSE TRANSMISSION
LOG MAG.

REF=

0.040000000

0.000 dB

GHz

0.020 dB/DIV

20.000000000

S21 FORWARD TRANSMISSION
LOG MAG.

0.040000000

Figure 11-2.

11-8

REF=

0.000 dB

GHz

0.020 dB/DIV

20.000000000

High Level Noise Test Waveform

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

CONTENTS

Appendix A
Front Panel Menus,
Alphabetical Listing
Contents
Menu ACAL, AutoCal Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Menu ACAL_SETUP, AutoCal Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Menu ACAL_S11 1 PORT, AutoCal S11 1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Menu ACAL_S22 1 PORT, AutoCal S22 1 Port Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Menu ACAL_FULL, AutoCal Full Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Menu ACAL_AR, AutoCal Adapter Removal Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Menu ACAL_UTILS, AutoCal Utilities Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Menu ACAL_CHAR, AutoCal Characterization Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Menu APPL, Applications Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Menu BB2, Broadband Select Menu1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Menu BB3, Broadband Select Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Menu BB4, Broadband Select Menu3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Menu BW1 or CAL_BW1, Select Video Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Menu C1, Select Calibration Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Menu C2, Frequency Range of Calibration (Start/Stop) . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Menu C2_CENTER, Frequency Range of Calibration (Center/Span) . . . . . A-27
Menu C2A, Insert Individual Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Menu C2C, Calibration Range—Harmonic Cal for Time Domain . . . . . . . A-29
Menu C2B, Single Point Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Menu C2D, Fill Frequency Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Menu C3, Confirm Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Menu C3A, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Menu C3B, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
Menu C3C, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34

37xxxE OM

A-1

CONTENTS

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu C3D, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Menu C3E, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
Menu C3F, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
Menu C3G, Confirm Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
Menu C3H, Confirm Calibration Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
Menu C3I, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
Menu C3J, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
Menu C4_P1/C4_P2, Select Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
Menu C4A_P1/C4A_P2, Select Connector Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
Menu C4B, Select Open and Short Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
Menu C5, Select Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
Menu C5A, Select 1 Path 2 Port Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
Menu C5B, Select Transmission Freq Response Calibration Type . . . . . . A-46
Menu C5C, Select Reflection Only Calibration Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
Menu C5D, Select Use of Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
Menu C6, Select Load Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
Menu C6A, Enter Broadband Load Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
Menu C6B, Enter Broadband Load Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
Menu C7-Series, Begin Calibration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
Menu C8, Slide Load to Position X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
Menu C9A, Connect Device 1, Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
Menu C9, Connect Throughline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
Menu C9C, Connect Device 2, Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
Menu C9B, Connect Device 2, Line/Lowband. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
Menu C11, Begin Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
Menu C11A, Select Calibration Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
Menu C12_P1/C12_P2, Enter the Capacitance Coefficients for Open Devices A-54
Menu C12A_P1/C12A_P2, Enter the Offset Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
Menu C13, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56
Menu C13A, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Menu C13B, Set Reflection Pairing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
Menu C14, Select Port X Offset Short Connecotr Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
Menu C14A, Select Port X Offset Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58

A-2

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

CONTENTS

Menu C15, Select Waveguide Kit to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
Menu C15A, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
Menu C15B, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
Menu C15C, Select Waveguide Kit to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
Menu C15D, Enter Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-62
Menu C16A, Enter Microstrip Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
Menu C16, Select Microstrip Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
Menu C17, Enter Line Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
Menu C18, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
Menu C18A, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
Menu C18B, Change LRL/LRM Parameters—Two Band Calibration . . . . . A-66
Menu C19, Change LRL/LRM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
Menu C20, Change Through Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
Menu C21A, Port X Offset Short 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
Menu C21B, Port X Offset Short 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
Menu C21C, Port X Offset Short 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71
Menu Cal_Completed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
Menu Cal_Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
Menu Cal_EM, Enhancement Menu for Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
Menu CAR1, Adapter Removal 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Menu CAR2, Adapter Removal 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
Menu EXT_CAR, Adapter Removal Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
Menu CAR3, Adapter Removal 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
Menu CAR4, Adapter Removal 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
Menu CM, Select Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
Menu DE1, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
Menu EXT_DE1, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
Menu DE2, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
Menu EXT_DE2, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
Menu DE3, E/O Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Menu DE3A, E/O Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
Menu DE4, De-embed Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82
Menu DE4A, De-embed Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82

37xxxE OM

A-3

CONTENTS

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu DE5, De-embed O/E S2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
Menu DE5A, De-embed O/E S2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
Menu DE6, Generate E/O S2P Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
Menu DE7, O/E Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
Menu DE7A, O/E Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
Menu DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86

Menu EXT_DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
Menu DE9, Embed/De-embed S2P File

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88

Menu DE9A, Embed/De-embed S2P File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
Menu DF1, Discrete Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
Menu DF2, Insert Individual Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
Menu DFLT, Default Program Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
Menu DG1, Diagnostics 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
Menu DG3, Diagnostics 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
Menu DG2, Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
Menu DSK_FD, USB Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
Menu DSK_HD, SD Card Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96
Menu DSK2, Select File to Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97
Menu DSK3, Select File to Overwrite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
Menu DSK6, Type of Files to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
Menu DSK7, Select File to Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
Menu DSK8, Type of Files to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
Menu DSK9, Select File to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
Menu DSK10, Capture Tabular Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
Menu EM, Enhancement Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
Menu GC1, Swept Frequency Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
Menu EXT_GC1, Gain Compression Help Menu 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106
Menu GC2, Swept Power Gain Compression 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-107
Menu EXT_GC2, Gain Compression Help Menu 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-108
Menu GC3, Swept Power Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-109
Menu EXT_GC3, Gain Compression Help Menu 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-110
Menu GC4, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . A-111
Menu GC4_ABORT, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . A-111

A-4

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

CONTENTS

Menu EXT_GC4, Gain Compression Help Menu 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-112
Menu GC_DF2, Swept Power Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-113
Menu EXT_GC_DF2, Gain Compression Help Menu

. . . . . . . . . . . . A-114

Menu GC_NORM, Normalize S21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-114
Menu GC_RCVR, Receiver Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-115
Menu GC_SU2, Swept Power Gain Compression 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-116
Menu GC_SU8A, Calibrate for Linear Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-117
Menu GC_SU8A-ABORT, Abort Calibrate for Linear Power . . . . . . . . . A-118
Menu EXT_GC_SU8A, Gain Compression Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . A-118
Menu GC_S21OPT, S21 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-119
Menu GP5, Select Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-120
Menu GP7, Display GPIB Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-121
Menu GP8, Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-122
Menu GT1/CAL_GT1, Select Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-123
Menu GT2/CAL_GT2, Select Graph Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-124
Menu L1, Set Limits—Magnitude and Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-125
Menu L2, Set Limits—Linear Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-126
Menu L3, Set Limits—Linear Polar/Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-127
Menu L4, Set Limits—Log Magnitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-128
Menu L5, Set Limits—Phase. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-129
Menu L6, Set Limits—Log Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-130
Menu L7, Set Limits—Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-131
Menu L8, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-132
Menu L9, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude and Phase

. . . . . . . . . . . . A-133

Menu L10, Set Limits—Real Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-134
Menu L11, Set Limits—Imaginary Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-135
Menu L12, Set Limits—Real and Imaginary Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-136
Menu L13, Set Limits—SWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-137
Menu L14, Set Limits—Power Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-138
Menu LD1, Define Upper Limit Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-139
Menu LD2, Define Lower Limit Segmen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-140
Menu LF1, Set Limit Frequencies—Log Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-141
Menu LF2, Set Limit Frequencies—Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-142

37xxxE OM

A-5

CONTENTS

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu LF3, Set Limit Frequencies—Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-143
Menu LF4, Set Limit Frequencies—Linear Mag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-144
Menu LF5, Set Limit Frequencies—SWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-145
Menu LF6, Set Limit Frequencies—Real . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-146
Menu LF7, Set Limit Frequencies—Imaginary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-147
Menu LF8, Set Limit Frequencies—Power Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-148
Menu LSX, Segmented Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-149
Menu LTST, Test Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-150
Menu M1, Set Markers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-151

Menu M2, Select DREF Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-152
Menu M3, Select Readout Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-153
Menu M4, Readout Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-154
Menu M5, Set DREF Marker Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-155
Menu M6, Marker X All Displayed Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-156
Menu M7, Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-157
Menu M8, Filter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-158
Menu M8A, Filter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-159
Menu M9, Marker Readout Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-160
Menu MMW1, Millimeter Wave Test Set Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-161
Menu MMW2, Millimeter Wave Test Set Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-162
Menu MMW3, Millimeter Wave Test Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-163
Menu MMW4, mm Wave Band. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-164
Menu EXT_MMW4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-165
Menu MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-166
Menu EXT_MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-166
Menu MRG2, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-167
Menu MRG3, Merge Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-167
Menu NO1, Trace Memory Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-168
Menu NO2, Select Trace Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169
Menu NO3, Trace Memory Disk Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-169
Menu NXN, NxN Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-170
Menu EXT_NXN, NxN Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-171
Menu OM1, Multiple Source Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-172

A-6

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

CONTENTS

Menu OM1A, Source Lock Polarity Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-173
Menu OM2, Define Bands Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-174
Menu OM3, Edit System Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-175
Menu OPTNS, Select Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-176
Menu ORP1, Rear Panel Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-177
Menu ORP2, Select Output Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-178
Menu OTS1, Test Set Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-178
Menu OTS2, Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-179
Menu PC1, Select Polar Chart Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-180
Menu PD1, Parameter Definition 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-181
Menu PD2, Parameter Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-182
Menu PD3, Parameter Definition 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-183
Menu PL1, Plot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-184
Menu PL2, Select Plot Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-185
Menu PL3, Select Pen Colors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-186
Menu PM1, Select Data Output Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-187
Menu PM2, Data Output Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-188
Menu PM2A, Data Output Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-189
Menu PM3, Tabular Printer Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-190
Menu PM3A, Graphical Printer Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-191
Menu PM4, Disk Output Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-192
Menu PM4A, Disk File Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-193
Menu PM5, Printer Type, Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-194
Menu RCV1, Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-195
Menu RCV1_WARN, Standard Receiver Mode Warning . . . . . . . . . . . A-195
Menu RCV2, User Defined Receiver Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-196
Menu RCV2_WARN, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning . . . . . . . . . A-197
Menu RCV3, Standard Receiver Mode Warning Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . A-198
Menu RCV4, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning Menu . . . . . . . . . . A-199
Menu RD1, Set Reference Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-200
Menu RD2, Set Dielectric Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-201
Menu SC, Source Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-202
Menu SP, Select S Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-203

37xxxE OM

A-7

CONTENTS

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu SR1, Save/Recall Front Panel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-204
Menu SR2, Recall or Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-205
Menu SR3, Save to Internal memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-206
Menu SS1 or CAL_SS1, Set Scaling 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-207
Menu SS2 or CAL_SS2, Set Scaling 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-208
Menu SS3Z/SS3Y or CAL_SS3Z/CALSS3Y, Set Scaling 3 . . . . . . . . . . A-209
Menu SS4 or CAL_SS4, Set Scaling 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-210
Menu SS5 or CAL_SS5, Set Scaling 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-211
Menu SS6 or CAL_SS6, Set Scaling 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-212
Menu SS7 or CAL_SS7, Set Scaling 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-213
Menu SS8 or CAL_SS8, Set Scaling 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-214
Menu SS9 or CAL_SS9, Set Scaling 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-215
Menu SS10 or CAL_SS10, Set Scaling 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-216
Menu SS11 or CAL_SS11, Set Scaling 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-217
Menu SS12 or CAL_SS12, Set Scaling 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-218
Menu SS13 or CAL_SS13, Set Scaling 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-219
Menu SS14, Set Scaling 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-220
Menu SU1, Sweep Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-221
Menu SU1_CENTER, Sweep Setup 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-222
Menu SU2 or CAL_SU2, Sweep Setup 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-223
Menu SU2A or CAL_SU2A, Sweep Setup 2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-224
Menu SU3, Single-Point Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-225
Menu SU3A, Swept-Power Measurement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-226
Menu SU4, Select Function for Hold Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-227
Menu SU5, Frequency Marker Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-228
Menu SU6, Frequency Marker C.W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-229
Menu SU8 or CAL_SU8, Calibrate For Flat Test Port Power. . . . . . . . . A-230
Menu EXT_SU8 Flat Power Calibration Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . A-231
Menu SU9, Number of Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-232
Menu SU9A, Number of Data Points 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-233
Menu TD1, Domain (Frequency/Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-234
Menu TD2_LP_TIME, Lowpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . A-235
Menu TD2_LP_DIST, Lowpass Distance Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . A-236

A-8

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

CONTENTS

Menu TD2_BP_TIME, Bandpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . A-237
Menu TD2_BP_DIST, Bandpass Distance Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . A-238
Menu TD3_BP, Bandpass Time Domain Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-239
Menu TD3_LP, Lowpass Time Domain Setup

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-239

Menu TD4_TIME & TD4_DIST, Gate (Distance/Time)

. . . . . . . . . . . A-240

Menu TD5_WINDOW, Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-241
Menu TD5_GATE, Shape. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-241
Menu TD6, Set D.C. Term for Low Pass Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-242
Menu TD7_TIME, Time Marker Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-243
Menu TD7_DIST, Distance Marker Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-244
Menu TRIG, Triggers Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-245
Menu U1, Utility Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-246
Menu U2, Display Instrument State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-247
Menu U3, Calibration Component Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-249
Menu EXT_U3, SSLT and SSST Waveguide Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . A-249
Menu U4, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 1 . . . . A-250
Menu EXT_U4, SOLT Calibration Kit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-251
Menu U4A, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 2 . . . A-252
Menu U4B, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 3. . . . A-253
Menu EXT_U4B, SSLT and SSST Calibration Kit Information . . . . . . . A-254
Menu U5, Color Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-255
Menu U5, Color Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-256
Menu U6, Set Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-257
37xxxE Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Pinout Diagram, GPIB and Dedicated GPIB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Pinout Diagram, Printer Connector (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Pinout Diagram, VGA IN/OUT Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Pinout Diagram, Serial Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Pinout Diagram, Test Set Control Out Connector (Option 12) . . . . . . . . B-12

37xxxE OM

A-9

Appendix A
Front Panel Menus,
Alphabetical Listing
A-1

INTRODUCTION

This appendix provides descriptions for all menu choices. Menus are
arranged in alphabetical order by their name (C1, SU2, DSK, etc.).

A-2

MENUS

A listing of all of the menus contained in this appendix is provided in
the contents section at the beginning of this appendix. This listing
gives the menu's call sign, name, and page number.

37xxxE OM

A-11

A

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

AUTOCAL

GPIB COMMAND
None

AUTOCAL TYPE
XXXXXXXX

Indicates the current type of AutoCal setup.

ACF2P?

CHANGE
AUTOCAL SETUP

Calls menu ACAL_SETUP, which lets you change the
AutoCal setup.

None

START AUTOCAL

Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal
calibration sequencing immediately using the current
AutoCal setup.

None

THRU UPDATE

None

CONNECT THROUGH
LINE BETWEEN
PORTS 1 AND 2

Instruction for connecting the AutoCal to the VNA for Thru None
Update.

NUMBER OF AVGS
XXX

Enter the number of averages to be used during the Thru ACTUAVG;
Update process (default 4 averages).
ACTUAVG?

START THRU UPDATE

Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the Thru calibration
update.

BEGTU

Press the Enter key to select or switch.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu ACAL, AutoCal Menu

A-12

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

A

MENU

DESCRIPTION

AUTOCAL SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

LINE TYPE
COAXIAL/WAVEGUIDE

Switch between the line type used with the AutoCal
module.

LTC; LTW; LTX?

WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF
XX.XXXXXX GHz

Enter the Waveguide Cutoff frequency if the Waveguide
Line Type is selected.

WCO; WCO?

SWITCH AVERAGING
XXXX

Enter an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVERAGING
(recommend 4 for the electronic modules, and 16 for the
electromechanical modules).

ACSW; ACSW?

NUMBER OF AVGS

None

REFLECTION
XXXX

Enter the number of averages to be used with the reflection ACRFL; ACRFL?
standards in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages).

LOAD
XXXX

Enter the number of averages to be used with the load
standard in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages).

ACLO; ACLO?

THRU
XXXX

Enter the number of averages to be used with the thru
standard (default 4 averages).

ACTU; ACTU?

ISOLATION
XXXX

Enter the number of averages to be used with the isolation ACISO; ACISO?;
standard in the AutoCal module (default 32 averages).
ACIAF?; ACIAX?

AUTOCAL TYPES

Select the type of AutoCal calibration to perform.

S11 1 PORT
S22 1 PORT
FULL 2 PORT
ADAPTER REMOVAL

Calls
Calls
Calls
Calls

menu
menu
menu
menu

ACAL_S11, for more setup.
ACAL_S22, for more setup.
ACAL_FULL, for more setup.
ACAL_AR, for more setup.

ACS11; ACX?
ACS22; ACX?
ACSF2P; ACX?
ACADR; ACX?

Menu ACAL_SETUP, AutoCal Setup Menu

37xxxE OM

A-13

A

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

AUTOCAL
S11 1 PORT

GPIB COMMAND
None

PORT 1
CONNECTION
LEFT/RIGHT

Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is
connected to Port 1 (default LEFT).

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START AUTOCAL

Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None
sequencing.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Press the Enter key to select or switch.

ACL1R2; ACR1L2

None

Menu ACAL_S11 1 PORT, AutoCal S11 1 Port Menu

A-14

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

A

DESCRIPTION

AUTOCAL
S22 1 PORT

GPIB COMMAND
None

PORT 2
CONNECTION
LEFT/RIGHT

Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is
connected to Port 2 (default RIGHT).

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START AUTOCAL

Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None
sequencing.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Press the Enter key to select or switch.

ACR1L2; ACL1R2

None

Menu ACAL_S22 1 PORT, AutoCal S22 1 Port Menu

37xxxE OM

A-15

A

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

AUTOCAL
FULL 2 PORTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

ISOLATION
AVERAGING

None

OMIT

Select to omit the isolation step.

ACOMIT

DEFAULT

Select to use the Default value during the isolation step.

ACDEF

AVERAGING
FACTOR
XXXX

Select for user defined averaging factor during the isolation ACIAF; ACIAF?
step.

THRU TYPE
CALIBRATION/TRUE

Switch between the Thru in the AutoCal module
ACF2TT;
(CALIBRATOR) and your own port-to-port Thru (TRUE) to ACF2TC;
be use in the Thru Update (default CALIBRATOR).
ACF2TX?

PORT CONFIG
L=1, R=2
R=1, L=2

Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is
ACL1R2; ACRIL2
connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default LEFT connected to
Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2).

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START AUTOCAL

Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None
sequencing.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Press the Enter key to select or switch.

None

Menu ACAL_FULL, AutoCal Full Menu

A-16

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

A

DESCRIPTION

AUTOCAL
ADAPTER REMOVAL

GPIB COMMAND
None

ISOLATION
AVERAGING

None

OMIT

Select to omit the isolation step.

ACOMIT

DEFAULT

Select to use the Default value during the isolation step.

ACDEF

AVERAGING
FACTOR
XXXX

Select for user defined averaging factor during the isolation ACIAF
step.

PORT CONFIG
ADAPT & L=1, R=2
L=1, ADAPT&R=2
ADAPT&R=1, L=2
R=1, ADAPT & L=2

Switch between the side of the AutoCal module and
adapter which is connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default
LEFT connected to Adapter which is then connected to
Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2).

ACAL1R2;
ACL1AR2;
ACAR1L2;
ACR1AL2;
ACARP?

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START AUTOCAL

Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal calibration None
sequencing.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Press the Enter key to select or switch.

None

Menu ACAL_AR, AutoCal Adapter Removal Menu

37xxxE OM

A-17

A

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

AUTOCAL
UTILITIES

GPIB COMMAND
None

AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION

Calls menu ACAL_CHAR, which lets you set
characterization values.

None

SAVE
TO SD CARD

Saves file to the SD Card.

SAVE

SAVE
TO USB DRIVE

Saves file to the USB drive.

SAVE

RECALL
FROM SD CARD

Recalls a file from the SD Card.

RECALL

RECALL
FROM USB DRIVE

Recalls a file from the USB drive.

RECALL

Press the Enter key to select.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu ACAL_UTILS, AutoCal Utilities Menu

A-18

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

A

DESCRIPTION

AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

SWITCH AVERAGING
XXXX

Enter an appropriate amount of SWITCH AVERAGING
(recommend 4 for the electronic modules, and 16 for the
electromechanical modules).

PORT CONFIG
L=1, R=2
R=1, L=2

Switch between the side of the AutoCal module which is
ACL1R2;
connected to Port 1 and Port 2 (default LEFT connected to ACR1L2;
Port 1, RIGHT connected to Port 2).
ACARP?

NUMBER OF AVGS

ACSW; ACSW?

None

REFLECTION
XXXX

Enter the number of averages to be used with the reflection ACRFL; ACRFL?
standards in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages).

LOAD
XXXX

Enter the number of averages to be used with the load
standard in the AutoCal module (default 10 averages).

ACLO; ACLO?

THRU
XXXX

Enter the number of averages to be used with the thru
standard (default 4 averages).

ACTUAVG;
ACTUAVG?

ISOLATION
XXXX

Enter the number of averages to be used with the isolation ACISO; ACISO?
standard in the AutoCal module (default 32 averages).

START AUTOCAL
CHARACTERIZATION
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Calls menu CAL_SEQ, which starts the AutoCal
characterization sequencing.

None

Press the Enter key to select or switch.

None

Menu ACAL_CHAR, AutoCal Characterization Menu

37xxxE OM

A-19

A

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

APPLICATIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

ADAPTER REMOVAL

Calls menu CAR1, which provides options for removing an None
adapter.

SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

Calls menu GC1, which provides options for gain
compression.

None

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION

Calls menu GC2, which provides options for gain
compression.

None

NxN SOLUTION

Calls menu NXN, which lets users select between three
None
pairs of devices. They can then solve for the characteristics
of one of the pairs using the NxN simultaneous equation
technique.

E/O MEASUREMENT

Calls menu DE1 and EXT_DE1, which provide information
and options for the E/O measurement application.

None

O/E MEASUREMENT

Calls menu DE2 and EXT_DE2, which provide information
and options for the O/E measurement application.

None

EMBED/DE-EMBED

Calls menu DE8, which lets users select files to embed.

None

MERGE CAL FILES

Calls menu MRG1.

None

Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu APPL, Applications Menu

A-20

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

B

DESCRIPTION

BROADBAND
TEST SET MODULES

GPIB COMMAND
BDMM

PORT 1 MODULE
3740/41/42/NONE

Switch selection for port 1 module. The 3742 is standard
for Broadband systems.

P1MMT; P1MMR;
P1MMA;P1MMN;
P1MMX?

PORT 2 MODULE
3740/41/42/NONE

Switch selection for port 2 module. The 3742 is standard
for Broadband systems.

P2MMT; P2MMR;
P2MMA;P2MMN;
P2MMX?

ACCEPT CONFIG

Calls menu BB3.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Press the Enter key to select or switch.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Press the Clear key to abort the selection.

None

Menu BB2, Broadband Select Menu1

37xxxE OM

A-21

B

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

BROADBAND
TEST SET
BROADBAND BAND 2
WR10 EXTENDED

GPIB COMMAND
SELBB

Provides information for selections made in menu BB2
(previous menu).

None

PORT 1 MODULE
3742

P1MMT; P1MMR;
P1MMA;P1MMN;
P1MMX?

PORT 2 MODULE
3742

P2MMT; P2MMR;
P2MMA;P2MMN;
P2MMX?

WARNING
CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

None

PRESS 
TO CONTINUE

Implements your broadband selection and calls menu SU1 None
or SU3.

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts your broadband system
selection and calls menu OST1.

None

Menu BB3, Broadband Select Menu 2

A-22

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

B

DESCRIPTION

BROADBAND BAND 2

GPIB COMMAND
None

BAND 2 START FREQ
65.000000000 GHz

Displays the band 2 start frequency (fixed value).

BST?

BAND 2 STOP FREQ
110.000000000 GHz

Displays the band 2 stop frequency.

BSP; BSP?

DEFAULT RANGE

Restores the broadband band 2 frequency range to default. None

ACCEPT RANGE

Accepts the new broadband band 2 frequency range.

SVBMM

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Implements your broadband selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Aborts your broadband selection and calls menu SU1 or
SU3.

None

Menu BB4, Broadband Select Menu3

37xxxE OM

A-23

B

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT VIDEO
BANDWIDTH

GPIB COMMAND
None

MAXIMUM
(10 kHz)

Selects video bandwidth to be 10 kHz.

IF4; IFX?

NORMAL
(1 kHz)

Selects video bandwidth to be 1 kHz.

IF3; IFN; IFX?

REDUCED
(100 Hz)

Selects video bandwidth to be 100 Hz.

IF2; IFR; IFX?

MINIMUM
(10 Hz)

Selects video bandwidth to be 10 Hz.

IF1; IFM; IFX?

PRESS 
TO SELECT
AND RESUME CAL

Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection. The
None
“AND RESUME CAL” text appears when menu is accessed
during calibration.

Menu BW1 or CAL_BW1, Select Video Bandwidth

A-24

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
CALIBRATION
DATA POINTS
NORMAL
(1601 POINTS
MAXIMUM)

GPIB COMMAND
None

Selects the standard calibration from a start to a stop
frequency that provides for up to 1601 equally spaced
(except the last) points of data for the defined frequency
range.

NOC

C.W.
(1 POINT)

Selects the single frequency (C.W.) calibration sequence
that provides for 1 data point at a selected frequency.

CWC

N-DISCRETE
FREQUENCIES
(2 TO 1601
POINTS)

Selects the discrete frequency calibration mode that lets
you input a list of 2 to 1601 individual data point
frequencies.

DFC

TIME DOMAIN
(HARMONIC)

Selects the calibration mode for low-pass time-domain
processing.

TDC

Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C1, Select Calibration Data Points

37xxxE OM

A-25

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

FREQUENCY RANGE
OF CALIBRATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

START
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

Enter the sweep-start frequency for calibration. If you
desire, you can change this frequency for your
measurement when you reach menu SU1, which follows
the final calibration menu. The only restriction is that your
start measurement frequency be greater than or equal to
your start calibration frequency.

SRT; SRT?

STOP
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the sweep-stop frequency for calibration. Like the
start frequency, this too can be changed for your
measurement. The stop frequency must be lower than or
equal to your stop calibration frequency. In other words,
your measurement frequency span must be equal to or
smaller than your calibration frequency span.

STP; STP?

SET CENTER/SPAN

Calls menu C2_CENTER, which lets you enter a center
frequency and span range.

CNTR; SPAN

XXX DATA POINTS
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz
STEPSIZE

The program automatically sets the step size, based on the ONP
selected start and stop frequencies. The step size will be
the smallest possible (largest number of points up to a
maximum of 1601), based on the chosen frequency span.

MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINT(S)
1601 MAX PTS
801 MAX PTS
401 MAX PTS
201 MAX PTS
101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

NP1601
NP801
NP401
NP201
NP101
NP51
Displays the next menu in the calibration sequence.

None

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None

Menu C2, Frequency Range of Calibration (Start/Stop)

A-26

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

CAL FREQ RANGE

GPIB COMMAND
None

CENTER
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

Enter the center frequency for calibration. If you desire, you CNTR; CNTR?
can change this frequency for your measurement when you
reach menu SU1_CENTER, which follows the final
calibration menu.

SPAN
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the span width for calibration. Like the start
SPAN; SPAN?
frequency, this too can be changed for your measurement.

SET START/STOP

Calls menu C2, which lets you enter a start and stop
frequency.

XXX DATA POINTS
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz
STEPSIZE

The program automatically sets the step size, based on the ONP
selected center and span frequencies. The step size will be
the smallest possible (largest number of points up to a
maximum of 1601), based on the chosen frequency span.

SRT; STP

MAXIMUM NUMBER
OF DATA POINT(S)
1601 MAX PTS
801 MAX PTS
401 MAX PTS
201 MAX PTS
101 MAX PTS
51 MAX PTS
NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

NP1601
NP801
NP401
NP201
NP101
NP51
Displays the next menu in the calibration sequence.

None

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None

Menu C2_CENTER, Frequency Range of Calibration (Center/Span)

37xxxE OM

A-27

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

INSERT
INDIVIDUAL
FREQUENCIES

GPIB COMMAND
None

INPUT A FREQ,
PRESS 
TO INSERT

DFQ

NEXT FREQ.
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

Move the cursor here and enter the next frequency for
which you wish calibration data taken. If the AUTO INCR
option is ON, pressing Enter automatically increments the
calibration frequency by the interval in GHz that appears
below the option.

None

XXXX FREQS.
ENTERED,
LAST FREQ WAS
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

Shows the number of frequencies that you have entered
and reports the value of the last frequency entered.

None

AUTO INCR ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

Move the cursor here and press ENTER to switch the
Auto-Increment mode on or off. If AUTO INCR is on, you
may enter the frequency spacing.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Calls menu C2D.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing Enter will cause actions as described above.

None

Menu C2A, Insert Individual Frequencies

A-28

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE POINT
C.W. CALIBRATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

C.W. FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

Move cursor here and enter the frequency for which
calibration is to be done.

CWF; CWF?

NEXT CAL STEP

Move cursor here and press ENTER when finished.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C2B, Single Point Calibration

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION
RANGE

None

HARMONIC CAL
FOR TIME DOMAIN

None

START (STEP)
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

Move cursor here to enter the desired start frequency. This SRT; SRT?
frequency also will be used as the frequency increment.

APPROXIMATE STOP
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Move the cursor here to enter the approximate desired stop APRXSTP?
frequency. The frequency will be adjusted to the nearest
harmonic multiple of the start frequency.

USING ABOVE
START AND STOP
WILL RESULT IN
XXX DATA POINTS
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
TRUE STOP FREQ

The program automatically indicates the number of data
points and the true (harmonic) stop frequency.

ONP; STP?

Move the cursor here and press Enter when finished.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

NEXT CAL STEP
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C2C, Calibration Range—Harmonic Cal for Time Domain

37xxxE OM

A-29

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND
None

DISCRETE FILL
INPUT START,
INCR, POINTS,
THEN SELECT
“FILL RANGE”

This menu is used to create one or more ranges of discrete None
equally spaced frequency points for calibration.

START FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the first frequency of the range.

INCREMENT
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the increment (step size) between one frequency and FRI; FRI
the next.

NUMBER OF PTS
XXXX POINT(S)

Enter the number of frequency points in the range.

FRP; FRP?

STOP FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the stop frequency, in GHz.

None

FILL RANGE
( XXXX ENTERED)

Moving the cursor here and pressing ENTER fills the range FIL
and shows the number of frequencies selected (in
NUMBER OF PTS above).

INDIVIDUAL
FREQ INSERT

Calls menu C2A, which allows you to set the individual
frequencies.

DFQ

CLEAR ALL

Clears all entries displayed above.

FRC

FINISHED
NEXT CAL STEP

Calls menu C3, the next menu in the calibration sequence. None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

FRS; FRS?

None

Menu C2D, Fill Frequency Ranges

A-30

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

C

DESCRIPTION
Used for SOST method and coaxial line type.

GPIB COMMAND
None

PORT 1 CONN
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C4_P1 or C4A_P1, which displays the Port 1
None
test port connector type to be used during OSL calibration.
This should agree with the connector type that both your
calibration components and the test device mate with.
Move cursor here and press Enter to display menu used to
change connector type.

PORT 2 CONN
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C4_P2 or C4A_P2, which displays the Port 2
None
test port connector type to be used during OSL calibration.
This should agree with the connector type that both your
calibration components and the test device mate with.
Move cursor here and press Enter to display menu used to
change connector type.

REFLECTION
PAIRING
XXXXXX

Calls menu C13, which lets you select the pairing (mixed or None
matched) for the types of reflection devices (open/short)
that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for calibration.

LOAD TYPE
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C6, which displays type of load selected for
calibration—broadband fixed or sliding. Move cursor here
and press ENTER to display menu used to change load
type.

None

THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS

Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline
parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

None

REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE

Calls menu C17, which lets you choose the reference
None
impedance value (1 mW to 1 kW) for the devices connected
to Ports 1 and 2 for calibration. Default value is 50W.

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the standard (OSL) calibration sequence using
coaxial standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-31

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used for Offset-Short method and coaxial line type.

None

PORT 1 CONN
W1-CONN (M)

Calls menu C14 to select a connector offset short kit for
Port1.

None

PORT 2 CONN
W1-CONN (M)

Calls menu C14 to select a connector offset short kit for
Port2.

None

REFLECTION
PAIRING
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C13A for a SSLT calibration or calls
menu C13B for a SSST calibration, which lets you select
the pairing (mixed or matched) for the types of reflection
devices (open/short) that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for
calibration.

None

LOAD TYPE
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C6, which displays type of load selected for
calibration—broadband, fixed, or sliding. Move cursor here
and press Enter to display the menu used to change the
load type.

None

THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS

Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline
parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

None

REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE

Calls menu C15, which lets you choose the reference
None
impedance value (1 mW to 1 MW) for the devices connected
to Ports 1 and 2 for calibration. Default value is 50W.

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the offset-short calibration sequence using coaxial
standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3A, Confirm Calibration Parameters

A-32

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

C

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used for Offset-Short method and waveguide line type.

None

WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS
XXXXXX

Calls menu C15, which lets you enter waveguide
parameters.

None

REFLECTION
PAIRING
XXXXXX

Calls menu C13A for a SSLT calibration or calls
menu C13B for a SSST calibration, which lets you select
the pairing (mixed or matched) for the types of reflection
devices (open/short) that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for
calibration.

None

LOAD TYPE
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C6, which displays type of load selected for
None
calibration—broadband fixed or sliding. Load type does not
appear for the SSST method.

THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS

Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline
parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

None

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you calibrate Flat Test
Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

None

START CAL

Starts the offset-short calibration sequence using
waveguide standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3B, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-33

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used for Offset-Short method and microstrip line type.

None

PORT 1 SHORTS
USER DEFINED

Calls menu C14A to select an offset short kit for Port 1.

None

PORT 2 SHORTS
USER DEFINED

Calls menu C14A to select an offset short kit for Port 2.

None

REFLECTION
PAIRING
XXXXXX

Calls menu C13A for a SSLT calibration or calls
menu C13B for a SSST calibration, which lets you select
the pairing (mixed or matched) for the types of reflection
devices (open/short) that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for
calibration.

None

LOAD
IMPEDANCES

Calls menu C6A, which lets you select an impedance type
and/or enter an impedance value.

None

THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS

Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline
parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

None

MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
XXXXXXXXXXX

Calls menu C16, which lets you change microstrip
parameters.

None

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the offset-short calibration sequence using microstrip BEG
standards.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C3C, Confirm Calibration Parameters

A-34

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

C

DESCRIPTION
Used for SOLT method and microstrip line type.

GPIB COMMAND
None

PORT 1 OPEN/SHORT
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C4B, which is used to select an offset short kit None
for Port 1.

PORT 2 OPEN/SHORT
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C4B, which is used to select an offset short kit None
for Port 2.

REFLECTION
PAIRING
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C13A for a SSLT calibration or calls
menu C13B for a SSST calibration, which lets you select
the pairing (mixed or matched) for the types of reflection
devices (open/short) that you will use on Ports 1 and 2 for
calibration.

None

LOAD
IMPEDANCE
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C6A, which lets you select an impedance type
and/or enter an impedance value.

None

THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C20, which lets you enter throughline
parameters—including offset length and loss equation
coefficients.

None

MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
XXXXXXXX

Calls menu C16, which lets you change microstrip
parameters.

None

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the standard calibration sequence using microstrip
standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3D, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-35

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used for LRL/LRM method, coaxial line type.

None

LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS

Calls menu C18, which lets you change LRL/LRM
parameters.

None

REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE

Calls menu C17, which lets you change the reference
impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50
ohms (default).

None

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the LRL/LRM calibration sequence using coaxial
standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3E, Confirm Calibration Parameters

A-36

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

C

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used for LRL/LRM method, waveguide line type.

None

LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS

Calls menu C18, which lets you change LRL/LRM
parameters.

None

WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ

Calls menu 15B, which lets you enter a waveguide cutoff
frequency.

None

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the LRL/LRM calibration sequence using waveguide
standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3F, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-37

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used for LRL/LRM method, microstrip line type.

None

LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS

Calls menu C18, which lets you change LRL/LRM
parameters.

None

MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
USER DEFINED

Calls menu C16, which lets you change microstrip
parameters.

None

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the LRL/LRM calibration sequence using microstrip
standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3G, Confirm Calibration Parameters

A-38

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
TRM REFLECT
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXX mmX

GPIB COMMAND
None

Enter the offset length of the TRM reflection.

TRM REFLECT TYPE

TOL; TOL?; ROL;
ROL?
None

GREATER THAN Zo

Specifies the reflection to have an impedance value greater RGZ; RXZ?
than the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically an open
device.

LESS THAN Zo

Selects the reflection to have an impedance value less than RLZ; RXZ?
the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically a short
device.

TRM MATCH
IMPEDANCE

Calls menu C6B, which lets you change the match
impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50 W
(default).

None

REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE

Calls menu C17, which lets you change the reference
impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50 W
(default).

None

TEST SIGNALS

None
Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the standard calibration sequence using microstrip
standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3H, Confirm Calibration Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-39

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

TRM REFLECT
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXX mmX

Enter the offset length of the TRM reflection.

TOL; TOL?; ROL;
ROL?

TRM MATCH
IMPEDANCE

Calls menu C6B, which lets you change the match
impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50 W
(default).

None

WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ

Calls menu 15B, which lets you enter a waveguide cutoff
frequency.

None

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
None
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the standard calibration sequence using microstrip
standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3I, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 2

A-40

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

CONFIRM
CALIBRATION
PARAMETERS
TRM REFLECT
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXX mmX

GPIB COMMAND
None

Enter the offset length of the TRM reflection.

TRM REFLECT TYPE

TOL; TOL?; ROL;
ROL?
None

GREATER THN Zo

Specifies the reflection to have an impedance value greater RGZ; RXZ?
than the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically an open
device.

LESS THAN Zo

Selects the reflection to have an impedance value less than RLZ; RXZ?
the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically a short
device.

TRM MATCH
IMPEDANCE

Calls menu C6B, which lets you change the match
impedance of the coaxial line standard to other than 50 W
(default).

None

MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS
XXXXXXX

Calls menu C16 or 16A, which lets you change microstrip
parameters.

None

TEST SIGNALS

None
Calls menu CAL_SU2, which lets you enter calibrate Flat
Test Port Power or change source power(s) and attenuator
settings.

START CAL

Starts the standard calibration sequence using microstrip
standards.

BEG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Menu C3J, ConfirmCalibration Parameter 3

37xxxE OM

A-41

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
SELECT PORT X
CONNECTOR TYPE

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Applies the four capacitance-coefficient values to the Open None
and offset length to the Short. The data appears in the
display area of the screen.

K-CONN (M)

Select for K-CONN (M) connector on Port X.

CMK; P1C?;P2C?

K-CONN (F)

Select for K-CONN (F) connector on Port X.

CFK; P1C?;P2C?

V-CONN (M)

Select for V-CONN (M) connector on Port X.

CMV; P1C?;P2C?

V-CONN (F)

Select for V-CONN (F) connector on Port X.

CFV; P1C?;P2C?

W1-CONN (M)

Select for W1-CONN (M) connector on Port X.

CM1; P1C?;P2C?

W1-CONN (F)

Select for W1-CONN (F) connector on Port X.

CF1; P1C?;P2C?

SMA (M)

Select for SMA (M) connector on Port X.

CMS; P1C?;P2C?

SMA (F)

Select for SMA (F) connector on Port X.

CFS; P1C?;P2C?

GPC-3.5 (M)

Select for GPC-3.5 (M) connector on Port X.

CM3; P1C?;P2C?

GPC-3.5 (F)

Select for GPC-3.5 (F) connector on Port X.

CF3; P1C?;P2C?

GPC-7

Select for GPC-7 connector on Port X.

CNG; P1C?;P2C?

USER DEFINED

Calls menu C12, which lets you specify the connector
coefficients.

None

MORE

Calls menu C4A for additional connector types.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C4_P1/C4_P2, Select Connector Type

A-42

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
SELECT PORT X
CONNECTOR TYPE

C

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Applies the four capacitance-coefficient values to the Open None
and offset length to the Short. The data appears in the
display area of the screen.

TYPE N (M)

Select for TYPE N (M) connector on Port X.

CMN; P1C?;P2C?

TYPE N (F)

Select for TYPE N (F) connector on Port X.

CFN; P1C?;P2C?

TYPE N (M) 75W

Select for Type N (M) 75W connector on Port X.

CMN75; P1C?;
P2C?

TYPE N (F) 75W

Select for Type N (F) 75W connector on Port X.

CFN75;
P1C?;P2C?

7/16 (M)

Select for 7/16 (M) connector on Port X.

CM7; P1C?;P2C?

7/16 (F)

Select for 7/16 (F) connector on Port X.

CF7; P1C?;P2C?

TNC (M)

Select for TNC (M) connector on Port X.

CMC; P1C?;P2C?

TNC (F)

Select for TNC (F) connector on Port X.

CFC; P1C?;P2C?

2.4 mm (M)

Select for 2.4 mm (M) connector on Port X.

CM2; P1C?;P2C?

2.4 mm(F)

Select for 2.5 mm (F) connector on Port X.

CF2; P1C?;P2C?

SPECIAL (M)

Select for Special (M) connector on Port X.

CMSP;
P1C?;P2C?

SPECIAL (F)

Select for Special (F) connector on Port X.
CFSP;
P1C?;P2C?

USER DEFINED

Calls menu C12, which lets you specify the connector
coefficients.

None

MORE

Calls additional connector types to screen.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C4A_P1/C4A_P2, Select Connector Type

37xxxE OM

A-43

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT PORT X
OPEN & SHORT

None

SPECIAL (M)
SPECIAL (F)
USER DEFINED
PRESS 
TO SELECT

GPIB COMMAND

C12
Calls menu C12, which lets you specify the connector
coefficients.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C4B, Select Open and Short Type

A-44

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
CALIBRATION TYPE

GPIB COMMAND
None

FULL 12-TERM

Select calibration using all 12 error terms EDF, ESF, ERF,
ETF, ELF, (EXF), EDR, ESR, ERR, ETR, FLR, (EXR).

1 PATH
2 PORT

Calls menu C5A, which lets select a correction for forward- None
or reverse-direction error terms.

TRANSMISSION
FREQUENCY
RESPONSE

Calls menu C5B, which lets select a correction for
frequency response error terms.

None

REFLECTION
ONLY

Calls menu C5C, which lets select a correction for
reflection-only error terms.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

C12

Menu C5, Select Calibration Type

37xxxE OM

A-45

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
1 PATH 2 PORT
CALIBRATION TYPE

GPIB COMMAND
None

FORWARD PATH
(S11, S21)

For the calibration-correction of the forward transmission
and reflection error term, ETF, EDF, ESF, ERF, (EXF).

C8T

REVERSE PATH
(S12, S22)

For the calibration-correction of the reverse transmission
and reflection error term, EDR, ESR, ERR, ETR, (EXR).

C8R

Pressing the Enter key implements your selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C5A, Select 1 Path 2 Port Calibration Type

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
TRANSMISSION
FREQ RESPONSE
CALIBRATION TYPE

GPIB COMMAND
None

FORWARD PATH
(S21)

For the calibration-correction of the forward transmission
frequency-response error term, ETF. (EXF).

CFT; CXX?

REVERSE PATH
(S12)

For the calibration-correction of the reverse
transmission-frequency-response error term, ETR, (EXR).

CRT; CXX?

BOTH PATHS
(S21, S12)

For the calibration-correction of the forward and reverse
transmission-frequency-response error terms ETF, ETR,
(EXF, EXR).

CBT; CXX?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C5B, Select Transmission Freq Response Calibration Type

A-46

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
REFLECTION ONLY
CALIBRATION TYPE

GPIB COMMAND
None

PORT 1 ONLY
(S11)

For the calibration-correction of the forward reflection-only
error terms EDF, ESF, ERF.

CRF; CXX?

PORT 2 ONLY
(S22)

For the calibration-correction of the reverse reflection-only
error terms EDR, ESR, ERR.

CRR; CXX?

BOTH PORTS
(S11, S22)

For the calibration-correction of the forward and reverse
reflection-only error terms EDF, ESF, ERF, EDR, ESR,
ERR.

CRB; CXX?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C5C, Select Reflection Only Calibration Type

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT USE
OF ISOLATION
IN CALIBRATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

INCLUDE
ISOLATION
(STANDARD)

Includes isolation term(s).

ISN; ISX?

EXCLUDE
ISOLATION

Excludes isolation term(s).

ISF; ISX?

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the ENTER key implements your selection.

Menu C5D, Select Use of Isolation

37xxxE OM

A-47

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
TYPE OF LOAD

GPIB COMMAND
None

BROADBAND
FIXED LOAD

Selects calibration based on the broadband load being
used, then calls menu C6A.

BBL; BBX?

SLIDING LOAD
(MAY ALSO
REQUIRE
BROADBAND
FIXED LOAD)

Selects calibration based on the sliding load being used. If
your low-end frequency is below 2 GHz (4 GHz for V
Connector), a fixed broadband load is also required.

SLD; BBX?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
Menu C6, Select Load Type

MENU

DESCRIPTION

BROADBAND LOAD
PARAMETERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

IMPEDANCE
XX.XXX W

Enter the impedance of the load.

BBZ; BBZ?

INDUCTANCE
XX.XXX pH

Enter the inductance of the load.

BBZL; BBZL?

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C6A, Enter Broadband Load Impedance

MENU

DESCRIPTION

TRM MATCH
PARAMETERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

IMPEDANCE
XX.XXX W

Allows entry of the impedance (defaults to 50.000 W).

BBZ; BBZ?

INDUCTANCE
XX.XXX pH

Allows entry of the inductance (defaults to 0.00 pH).

BBZL; BBZL?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C6B, Enter Broadband Load Impedance

A-48

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE

None

CONNECT
CALIBRATION
DEVICE(S)

None

PORT 1:
XXXXXXXXXXXX

Connect the required component to Port 1.

None

PORT 2:
XXXXXXXXXXXX

Connect the required component to Port 2.

None

Pressing the Enter key sequentially measures the devices
connected to Ports 1 and 2, beginning with Port 1.

None

PRESS <1> FOR
PORT 1 DEVICE

Pressing the 1 key, on the keypad, measures the device
connected to Port 1.

None

PRESS <2> FOR
PORT 2 DEVICE

Pressing the 2 key, on the keypad, measures the device
connected to Port 2.

None

PRESS 
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

Menu C7-Series, Begin Calibration Sequence

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
SLIDE LOAD
TO POSITION X

PRESS 
TO MEASURE
DEVICE (S)

GPIB COMMAND
None

Slide the load to the next position, then press the Enter
key. Moving the slide to six different positions provides
sufficient data for the program to accurately calculate the
effective directivity of the system.

None

Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement.

None

Menu C8, Slide Load to Position X

37xxxE OM

A-49

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
CONNECT
THROUGHLINE
XXXXX
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS
PRESS 
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

GPIB COMMAND
None

Connect Ports 1 and 2 together using the Throughline
standard (zero or non-zero length).

None

Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement.

None

Menu C9, Connect Throughline

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
CONNECT
DEVICE 1
LINE 1 (REF)
XXXXX
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS
PRESS 
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

GPIB COMMAND
None

Prompts you to connect reference line 1 between test
ports.

None

Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement.

None

Menu C9A, Connect Device 1, Line

A-50

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
CONNECT
DEVICE 2
LINE/
LOWBAND
MATCHES
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS
PRESS 
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

GPIB COMMAND
None

Connect device 2 between the test ports. This will be a
LINE for LRL measurements or LOWBAND MATCHES for
LRM measurements.

None

Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement.

None

Menu C9B, Connect Device 2, Line/Lowband

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
CONNECT
DEVICE 2
LINE
XXXXX
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS
PRESS 
TO MEASURE
DEVICE(S)

GPIB COMMAND
None

Prompts you to connect the second line standard between
the test ports.

None

Pressing the Enter key begins the measurement.

None

Menu C9C, Connect Device 2, Line

37xxxE OM

A-51

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

BEGIN CALIBRATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

KEEP EXISTING
CAL DATA

Keep existing calibration data.

KEC

REPEAT
PREVIOUS CAL

Repeats the previous calibration.

RPC

AUTOCAL

Calls menu ACAL, which lets you choose AutoCal settings. None

CAL METHOD
XXXXXXX

Displays the calibration method that you have
selected—standard,
offset short or LRL/LRM.

CMX?

TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE:
XXXXXXXX

Indicates type of transmission line currently selected, e. g.
coaxial,
waveguide, microstrip.

LTX?

CHANGE CAL
METHOD AND
LINE TYPE

Calls menu C11A, which allows you to change calibration
method and transmission line type.

None

NEXT CAL STEP

Selects the next calibration step.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C11, Begin Calibration

A-52

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

CHANGE CAL METHOD
AND LINE TYPE
NEXT CAL STEP

GPIB COMMAND
None

Select next calibration step. Must move cursor to here after None
making below selections. Pressing the Enter key then
moves you to the next step.

CAL METHOD

None

(SOLT) STANDARD

This option and the ones below allow you to select the
SCM; CMX?
method (procedure) to be used to calibrate. This method is
independent of the calibration type, which may be 12-term,
reflection only, etc.

SSLT (DOUBLE
OFFSET SHORT
WITH LOAD)

Selects the double offset short calibration method.

OCM; CMX?

SSST (TRIPLE
OFFSET SHORT)

Selects the triple offset short calibration method.

OC3M; CMX?

LRL/LRM

Selects LRL or LRM method.

LCM; CMX?

TRM

Selects TRM method.

TCM; CMX?

TRANSMISSION
LINE TYPE

None

COAXIAL

Selects coaxial cable as the transmission line type.

LTC; LTX?

WAVEGUIDE

Selects waveguide as the transmission line type.

LTW; LTX?

MICROSTRIP

Selects microstrip as the transmission line type.

LTU; LTX?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C11A, Select Calibration Method

37xxxE OM

A-53

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

PORT X
OPEN DEVICE

Enter the capacitance-coefficient values needed to correct None
for your Open device. The capacitive phase shift of the
Open is characterized by the equation: COpen = CO + (C1 x
f) + (C2 x f2) + (C3 x f3)

ENTER THE
CAPACITANCE
COEFFICIENTS

None

TERM 1-C0
± XX.XXe- 15

Enter the term 1 coefficient value (x 10–15 F).

CC0; CC0?

TERM 2-C1
±XXX.XX e - 27

Enter the term 2 coefficient value (x 10–27 F/Hz).

CC1; CC1?

TERM 3-C2
±XXX.XX e - 36

Enter the term 3 coefficient value (x 10–36 F/Hz2).

CC2; CC2?

TERM 4-C3
±XXX.XX e - 45

Enter the term 4 coefficient value (x 10–45 F/Hz3).

CC3; CC3?

ENTER THE
OFFSET LENGTH

Enter the length of the offset.

COO

OFFSET LENGTH
±XX.XXXX mm

Select to enter and display offset length of Open.

COO?

Pressing the Enter key calls C12A_P1/C12A_P2.

None

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C12_P1/C12_P2, Enter the Capacitance Coefficients for Open Devices

A-54

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

PORT X
SHORT DEVICE

GPIB COMMAND
None

ENTER THE
INDUCTANCE
COEFFICIENTS

None
Provide inductance term entries for the short device such
that the frequency dependent inductance is L(w) = L0 + (L1
* f) + (L2 * f^2) + (L3 * f^3). These values default to zero.
They are used in the standard calibration method in
combination with the coaxial and microstrip line types.
They are not used in the offset short and LRL/LRM
calibration methods. The calibration kits provided by
ANRITSU are not to support these terms.

TERM 1 - L0
- XXXX.XX e-12

Enter the term 1 value.

CL0; CL0?

TERM 2 - L1
- XXXX.XX e-24

Enter the term 2 value.

CL1; CL1?

TERM 3 - L2
- XXXX.XX e-33

Enter the term 3 value.

CL2; CL2?

TERM 4 - L3
- XXXX.XX e-42

Enter the term 4 value.

CL3; CL3?

ENTER THE
OFFSET LENGTH

Enter the length of the offset device.

COS

OFFSET LENGTH
-XXX.XXXX mm

Displays the offset length value.

COS?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C12A_P1/C12A_P2, Enter the Offset Length

37xxxE OM

A-55

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SET
REFLECTION
PAIRING

GPIB COMMAND
None

MIXED
(OPEN–SHORT
SHORT–OPEN)

Selects different reflection devices (open/short or
short/open) to be connected to Ports 1 and 2 for the
calibration sequencing.

MIX, MIX?

MATCHED
(OPEN–OPEN
SHORT–SHORT)

Selects the same type of reflection device (open/open or
short/short) to be connected to Ports 1 and 2 for the
calibration sequencing.

MAT, MIX?

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C13, Set Reflection Pairing Menu

A-56

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
REFLECTION
PAIRING

GPIB COMMAND
None

MIXED
(SHORT1-SHORT2,
SHORT2-SHORT1)

Selects mixed reflection pairing.

MIX

MATCHED
(SHORT1-SHORT1,
SHORT2-SHORT2)

Selects matched reflection pairing.

MAT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C13A, Set Reflection Pairing Menu

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
REFLECTION
PAIRING

GPIB COMMAND
None

MIXED
(SHORT1-SHORT2,
SHORT2-SHORT3,
SHORT3-SHORT1)

Selects mixed reflection pairing.

MIX

MATCHED
(SHORT1-SHORT1,
SHORT2-SHORT2,
SHORT3-SHORT3)

Selects matched reflection pairing.

MAT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C13B, Set Reflection Pairing Menu

37xxxE OM

A-57

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
SELECT PORT X
OFFSET SHORT
CONNECOTR TYPE

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used with the coaxial line type.

None

W1-CONN (M)
W1-CONN (F)

Selects W1(M) connector (kit) type on Port X.
Selects W1 (F) connector (kit) type on Port X.

CM1
CF1
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL A (M)
SPECIAL A (F)

Selects Special A (M) connector (kit) type on Port X.
Selects Special A (F) connector (kit) type on Port X.

CMSPA
CFSPA
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL B (M)
SPECIAL B (F)

Selects Special B (M) connector (kit) type on Port X.
Selects Special B (F) connector (kit) type on Port X.

CMSPB
CFSPB
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL C (M)
SPECIAL C (F)

Selects Special C (M) connector (kit) type on Port X.
Selects Special C (F) connector (kit) type on Port X.

CMSPC
CFSPC
P1C?; P2C?

USER DEFINED

Calls menu C21A, C21B, then C21C, which allows you to
define the inductance coefficients and offset length values.

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C14, Select Port X Offset Short Connecotr Type

MENU
SELECT PORT X
OFFSET SHORT

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used with the microstrip line type.

None

SPECIAL A (M)
SPECIAL A (F)

Selects Special A (M) connector (kit) type on Port X.
Selects Special A (F) connector (kit) type on Port X.

CMSPA
CFSPA
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL B (M)
SPECIAL B (F)

Selects Special B (M) connector (kit) type on Port X.
Selects Special B (F) connector (kit) type on Port X.

CMSPB
CFSPB
P1C?; P2C?

SPECIAL C (M)
SPECIAL C (F)

Selects Special C (M) connector (kit) type on Port X.
Selects Special C (F) connector (kit) type on Port X.

CMSPC
CFSPC
P1C?; P2C?

USER DEFINED

Calls menus C21A, C21B, then C21C, which allows you to
define the inductance coefficients and offset length values.

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C14A, Select Port X Offset Short

A-58

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
WAVEGUIDE
KIT TO USE
-INSTALLED KIT-

GPIB COMMAND
None

The lines below indicate the characteristics of the installed
waveguide calibration kit, if applicable.

None

Displays the type of waveguide used.

WGSER?

Displays the cutoff frequency of the waveguide.

WGCUTOFF?

SHORT 1
XX.XXXXmm

Displays the offset length of the first calibration short.

WGSHOFF1?

SHORT 2
XX.XXXXmm

Displays the offset length of the second calibration short.

WGSHOFF2?

USE INSTALLED
WAVEGUIDE KIT

Move the cursor to this line and press Enter to use the
displayed kit.

WK1; WKX?

USER DEFINED

Calls menu C15A, which lets you modify the parameters.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

IDENTIFIER
XXXX
CUTOFF FREQ:
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Menu C15, Select Waveguide Kit to Use

37xxxE OM

A-59

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

ENTER WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Calls menu C15B that allows you to enter waveguide cutoff None
frequency.

OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 1
X.XXXX mm

Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of
Short 1.

WSH1; WSH1?

OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 2
X.XXXX mm

Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of
Short 2.

WSH2; WSH2?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C15A, Enter Waveguide Parameters

MENU

DESCRIPTION

ENTER
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF
FREQUENCY
WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

GPIB COMMAND
None

Enter waveguide cutoff frequency.

WCO; WCO?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C15B, Enter Waveguide Parameters

A-60

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
SELECT
WAVEGUIDE
KIT TO USE

C

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Used for the SSST calibration method.

None

INSTALLED KIT

The lines below indicate the characteristics of the installed
waveguide calibration kit, if applicable.

None

IDENTIFIER:
XXXXXXXX

Displays the type of waveguide used.

WGSER?

CUTOFF FREQ:
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Displays the cutoff frequency of the waveguide.

WGCUTOFF?

SHORT 1:
+XX.XXXX mm

Displays the offset length of the first calibration short.

WGSHOFF1?

SHORT 2:
+XX.XXXX mm

Displays the offset length of the second calibration short.

WGSHOFF2?

SHORT 3:
+XX.XXXX mm

Displays the offset length of the third calibration short.

WGSHOFF3?

USE INSTALLED
WAVEGUIDE KIT

Move the cursor to this line and press Enter to use the
displayed kit.

WK1; WKX?

USER DEFINED

Calls menu C15C, which lets you modify the parameters.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C15C, Select Waveguide Kit to Use

37xxxE OM

A-61

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
ENTER
WAVEGUIDE
PARAMETERS

DESCRIPTION
Used for the SSST calibration method.

GPIB COMMAND
None

WAVEGUIDE
CUTOFF FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Calls menu C15B that allows you to enter waveguide cutoff None
frequency.

OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 1
+XXX.XXXX mm

Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of
Short 1.

WSH1; WSH1?

OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 2
+XXX.XXXX mm

Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of
Short 2.

WSH2; WSH2?

OFFSET LENGTH
OF SHORT 3
+XXX.XXXX mm

Move the cursor to this line and enter the offset length of
Short 3.

WSH3; WSH3?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C15D, Enter Waveguide Parameters

A-62

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
MICROSTRIP
KIT TO USE

GPIB COMMAND
None

10 MIL KIT

Selects parameters for 10 mil UTF kit.

U10; UTFX?

15 MIL KIT

Selects parameters for 15 mil UTF kit.

U15; UTFX?

25 MIL KIT

Selects parameters for 25 mil UTF kit.

U25; UTFX?

USER DEFINED

Calls menu C16A, which lets you modify the parameters.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C16, Select Microstrip Parameters

MENU

DESCRIPTION

ENTER
MICROSTRIP
PARAMETERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

WIDTH OF
STRIP
XX.XXXX mm

Move the cursor to this line and enter the width of the
microstrip you are using.

USW; USW?

THICKNESS OF
SUBSTRATE
XXXX.XXXX mm

Move the cursor to this line and enter the thickness of the
substrate
you are using.

SBT; SBT?

Zc
XXX.XXX W

Move the cursor to this line and enter the characteristic
impedance of the microstrip.

USZ; USZ?

SUBSTRATE
DIELECTRIC
XX.XX

Move the cursor to this line and enter the relative dielectric SBD; SBD?
constant of the substrate you are using.

EFFECTIVE
DIELECTRIC
XX.XX
(RECOMMENDED
1.00)

Move the cursor to this line and enter the effective
USE; USE?
dielectric constant of the microstrip. A recommended value
will also be displayed.

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C16A, Enter Microstrip Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-63

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

ENTER
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
XXX.XXXW
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

GPIB COMMAND
None

Enter the reference impedance (Z0) of the coaxial reference LLZ; LLZ?
line standard.
Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C17, Enter Line Impedance

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
NEXT CAL STEP

GPIB COMMAND
None

Selects next calibration step. Must move cursor to here
None
after making below selections. Pressing the Enter key then
moves you to the next step. Calls menu C18A for one band
or C18B for two bands.

NUMBER OF
BANDS USED

None

ONE BAND

Selects a one-band LRL or LRM calibration.

TWO BANDS

Selects a two-band LRL or LRM calibration (that is, a
LR3; LRX?
three-line LRL or concatenated LRL and LRM calibrations).

LOCATION OF
REFERENCE
PLANES

LR2; LRX?

None

MIDDLE OF
LINE 1 (REF)

Select reference planes to be at middle of line 1.

RM1; RMX?

ENDS OF
LINE 1 (REF)

Select reference planes to be at end of line 1.

RRP; RMX?

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C18, Change LRL/LRM Parameters

A-64

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
NEXT CAL STEP

GPIB COMMAND
None

Selects next calibration step. Must move cursor to here
None
after making below selections. Pressing the Enter key then
moves you to the next step. Calls menu C19.

CHARACTERIZE
CAL DEVICES

None

DEVICE 1
LINE 1 (REF)
X.XXXX mm

Enter length of line 1.

LL1; LL1?

DEVICE 2
LINE /MATCH
X.XXXX mm/FULLBAND

Select device 2—LINE or MATCH; if line is selected, enter
length.

LL2; LM2;
LX2?

Press Enter to select. If DEVICE 2 is chosen, pressing the
Enter key toggles between LINE and MATCH.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu C18A, Change LRL/LRM Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-65

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

NEXT CAL STEP

Selects next calibration step. Must move cursor to here
None
after making below selections. Pressing the Enter key then
moves you to the next step. Calls menu C19.

CHARACTERIZE
CAL DEVICES

None

DEVICE 1
LINE 1 (REF)
XX.XXXX

Enter length of line 1.

DEVICE 2
LINE/MATCH
XX.XXXX/LOWBAND

Press Enter to toggle between LINE and MATCH. If LINE is LL2; LL2?; LM2;
selected, enter line length. If match is selected, LOWBAND LX2?
is displayed. This indicates that device 2 is the lowband
match.

DEVICE 3
LINE/MATCH
XX.XXXX/HIGHBAND

Press Enter to toggle between LINE and MATCH. If LINE is LL3; LL3?; LM3;
selected, enter line length. If match is selected, HIGHBAND LX3?
is displayed. This indicates that device 3 is the high band
match.

FREQ AFTER
WHICH THE USE
OF DEVICE 2
AND DEVICE 3
IS EXCHANGED
BREAKPOINT
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHZ
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

LL1; LL1?

None

Enter breakpoint frequency: end of band 1, beginning of
band 2.

BPF; BPF?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu C18B, Change LRL/LRM Parameters—Two Band Calibration

A-66

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

CHANGE LRL/LRM
PARAMETERS
NEXT CAL STEP

REFLECTION
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXXX mm

GPIB COMMAND
None

Moves to the next calibration step. Must move cursor to
None
here after making below selections. Pressing the Enter key
then moves you to the next step.
Enter the offset length of the reflective device.

None

REFLECTION TYPE

ROL; ROL?

GREATER THAN Zo

Specifies the reflection to have an impedance value greater RGZ; RXZ?
than the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically an open
device.

LESS THAN Zo

Selects the reflection to have an impedance value less than RLZ; RXZ
the reference impedance (Z0). This is typically a short
device.

MATCH PARAMETERS
MATCH IMPEDANCE
+XXX.XXX W

Allows entry of the impedance (defaults to 50.000 W).

LMZ; LMZ?

MATCH INDUCTANCE
+XXXX.XXXX pH

Allows entry of the inductance (defaults to 0.00 e-12).

LMZL; LMZL?

Pressing the Enter key implements the selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu C19, Change LRL/LRM Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-67

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

ENTER
THROUGH LINE
PARAMETERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

OFFSET LENGTH
X.XXXX mm

Enter offset length of through-line device.

TOL; TOL?

THROUGHLINE
IMPEDANCE
X.XXXX W

Enter the impedance of the through-line device.

TLZ; TLZ?

Pressing the Enter key brings the next calibration menu.

None

PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C20, Change Through Parameters

A-68

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

PORT X
OFFSET SHORT 1

GPIB COMMAND
None

ENTER THE
INDUCTANCE
COEFFICIENTS
L0 [e-12 H]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L1 [e-24 H/Hz]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L2 [e-33 H/Hz2]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L3 [e-42 H/Hz3]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

Enter the offset length of the offset short.

None

Pressing the Enter key calls menu C21B.

None

ENTER THE
OFFSET LENGTH
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXXX mm
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C21A, Port X Offset Short 1

37xxxE OM

A-69

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

PORT X
OFFSET SHORT 2

GPIB COMMAND
None

ENTER THE
INDUCTANCE
COEFFICIENTS
L0 [e-12 H]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L1 [e-24 H/Hz]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L2 [e-33 H/Hz2]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L3 [e-42 H/Hz3]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

Enter the offset length of the offset short.

None

Pressing the Enter key calls menu C3X, for a SSLT
calibration method, or menu C21B, for a SSST calibration
method.

None

ENTER THE
OFFSET LENGTH
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXXX mm
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C21B, Port X Offset Short 2

A-70

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

PORT X
OFFSET SHORT 3

GPIB COMMAND
None

ENTER THE
INDUCTANCE
COEFFICIENTS
L0 [e-12 H]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L1 [e-24 H/Hz]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L2 [e-33 H/Hz2]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

L3 [e-42 H/Hz3]
+XXXX.XXXX

Enter the inductance coeficients of the offset short.

None

Enter the offset length of the offset short.

None

Pressing the Enter key calls menu C3X.

None

ENTER THE
OFFSET LENGTH
OFFSET LENGTH
+XXX.XXXX mm
PRESS 
WHEN COMPLETE

Menu C21C, Port X Offset Short 3

37xxxE OM

A-71

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CALIBRATION
SEQUENCE
COMPLETED
PRESS

TO STORE CAL
DATA ON DISK
OR
PRESS 
TO PROCEED

GPIB COMMAND
None

Pressing the SAVE/RECALL MENU Key displays menu SR, None
which lets you save your calibration data onto a disk or
recall previously saved calibration data from a disk. While
this menu provides a convenient point at which to save the
calibration data, it is not the only point allowed. You can
use the SAVE/RECALL MENU key at any point in the
measurement program.
Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu Cal_Completed

A-72

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

APPLY
CALIBRATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

FULL 12-TERM
(S11, S21
S22, S12)

Reflects the type of calibration presently stored in internal
memory.

APPLY ON (OFF)
CALIBRATION

Turns calibration on or off.

CON; COF;
CON?

For applied Full 12-Term calibration only. When turned off,
the ratio of forward to reverse sweeps is set to the normal
1:1.When turned on, you can set the ratio of forward
sweeps to reverse sweep from 1:1 to 10,000:1 (below).

None

Lets you enter a value for the number of forward (or
reverse) sweeps. Alternatively, this option displays the
number of forward sweep (or reverse) remaining before a
reverse sweep will occur.

None

Press the Apply Cal key to apply the stored calibration.

None

Press the Enter key to turn selected mode on/off.

None

TUNE MODE ON (OFF)

NO. OF FWD (REV)
SWEEPS BETWEEN
REV (FWD) SWEEPS
XXXXX SWEEPS
(XXXXX REMAINING)
PRESS 
TO TURN ON/OFF
PRESS 
TO TURN ON/OFF

Menu Cal_Applied

37xxxE OM

A-73

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DATA ENHANCEMENT
AVERAGING
XXXX MEAS.

GPIB COMMAND
None

Averages the measured data over time, as follows:
AVG; AVG?
1. The sweep stops at the first frequency point and takes a
number of readings, based on the selected number of
points.
2. The program averages the readings and writes the
average value for that frequency point in the displayed
graph.
3. The sweep then advances to the next sequential
frequency point and repeats the process.

AVERAGING TYPE
POINT-BY-POINT

Averages the point-by-point up to the number of averages. PTAVG; SWAVG?

SWEEP-BY-SWEEP

Averages the sweep-by-sweep up to the number of
averages.

SWAVG;
SWAVG?

RESET AVG COUNT
XXXX SWEEP(S)

Zeroes the counter used for sweep averaging.

RSTAVG

SAMPLERS USED
PER SWEEP
X SAMPLERS

In the normal mode of operation, three samplers are used
per forward or reverse sweep; two test samplers and a
reference sampler. This results in both transmission and
reflection parameters simultaneously.

SAMP2; SAMP3;
SAMP?

When a device such as a filter with a deep reject-band is
measured, having both test samplers on reduces the
measurement dynamic range. A higher noise floor in the
reject band of the filter is observed. Selecting two samplers
per sweep turns off one of the test samplers. This
eliminates channel interaction and thereby improves the
dynamic range.
The drawbacks of using two sampler per sweep are a
doubling of measurement time, as two complete
one-direction sweeps are needed for both transmission and
reflection parameters.
RESUME CAL
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection
and returns you to the calibration setup or sequence.

None

PRESS

TO RESET AVG COUNT

Menu Cal_EM, Enhancement Menu for Calibration

A-74

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

ADAPTER REMOVAL

GPIB COMMAND
None

12-TERM CALS FOR
X AND Y MUST
EXIST IN THE
CURRENT DIRECTORY

None

ELECTRICAL LENGTH
OF THE ADAPTER
+XXX.XXXX ps

Displays the electrical length of the adapter. The value of
ADPL; ADPL?
the electrical length is used when the two calibrations are
merged. It has the same range as the time delay for
reference plane extension and a default value of 0.0000 ps.

REMOVE ADAPTER

Calls menu CAR2, which leads you through the reading of
the Y’-Y and X-X’ calibration files and the computation of
the new 12-term error coefficients.

None

HELP

Calls menu EXT_CAR, which provides help text for using
this feature.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements the selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
Menu CAR1, Adapter Removal 1

MENU

DESCRIPTION

ADAPTER REMOVAL

GPIB COMMAND
None

READ CAL FILE OF
X TEST PORT
FROM SD CARD
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)

Calls menu DSK2, which provides instructions.

None

READ CAL FILE OF
X TEST PORT
FROM USB DRIVE
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 2)

Calls menu DSK2, which provides instructions.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements the selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts the selection.

None

Menu CAR2, Adapter Removal 2

37xxxE OM

A-75

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Menu EXT_CAR, Adapter Removal Help Menu

A-76

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

C

DESCRIPTION

ADAPTER REMOVAL

GPIB COMMAND
None

READ CAL FILE OF
THE Y TEST PORT
FROM SD CARD
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 1)

Calls menu DSK2, which provides instructions.

None

READ CAL FILE OF
THE Y TEST PORT
FROM USB DRIVE
(ADAPTER ON
PORT 1)

Calls menu DSK2, which provides instructions.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements the selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts the selection.

None

Menu CAR3, Adapter Removal 3

MENU

DESCRIPTION

ADAPTER REMOVAL
COMPUTING NEW
12-TERM ERROR
COEFFICIENTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

Information text.

None

Menu CAR4, Adapter Removal 4

37xxxE OM

A-77

C

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
DISPLAY MODE

GPIB COMMAND
None

SINGLE
CHANNEL

Selects a single channel for display. You select the type of
display in menu GT1 or GT2.

DUAL
CHANNELS 1 & 3

Selects Channels 1 and 3 for display. You select the type of D13
display in menu GT1 or GT2.

OVERLAY DUAL
CHANNELS 1 & 3

Lets you simultaneously view the Channel 1 data
T13
superimposed over the Channel 3 data on a single display.
Channel 1 trace displays in red and Channel 3 in yellow.

DUAL
CHANNELS 2 & 4

Selects Channels 2 and 4 for display. You select the type of D24
display in menu GT1 or GT2.

OVERLAY DUAL
CHANNELS 2 & 4

Lets you simultaneously view the Channel 2 data
T24
superimposed over the Channel 4 data on a single display.
Channel 2 trace displays in red and Channel 4 in yellow.

ALL FOUR
CHANNELS

Selects all four channels for display. You select the type of
display in menu GT1 or GT2.

D14

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.
The menu remains on the screen until another menu is
selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is
pressed.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

DSP; DSP?

Menu CM, Select Display Mode

A-78

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

E/O MEASUREMENT

GPIB COMMAND
None

MEASURE E/O DUT
(MODULATOR)

This menu selection calls menu DE3, then DE3A.

IODF or LDODF

DE-EMBED TRANSFER
FUNCTION OF A
GENERIC NETWORK

This menu selection calls menu DE4, then DE4A.

IODF or LDODF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
Menu DE1, E/O Measurement

Menu EXT_DE1, E/O Measurement

37xxxE OM

A-79

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

O/E MEASUREMENT

GPIB COMMAND
None

DE-EMBED O/E S2P
(DETECTOR STD)

This menu selection calls menu DE5, then DE5A.

IODF or LDODF

GENERATE E/O S2P
CHARACTERIZATION
(MODULATOR)

This menu selection calls menu DE6.

None

MEASURE O/E DUT
(DETECTOR)

This menu selection calls menu DE7, then DE7A.

IODF or LDODF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
Menu DE2, O/E Measurement

Menu EXT_DE2, O/E Measurement

A-80

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

E/O MEASUREMENT

GPIB COMMAND
None

ORIGINAL CAL FILE
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on
the SD Card.

None

READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on
the USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts your this menu selection
and calls menu DE1.

None

Menu DE3, E/O Measurement

MENU

DESCRIPTION

E/O MEASUREMENT

GPIB COMMAND
None

TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDED
(DETECTOR STD)
READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on
the SD Card.

None

READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on
the USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
calls menu DE1.

None

Menu DE3A, E/O Measurement

37xxxE OM

A-81

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DE-EMBED NETWORK

GPIB COMMAND
None

ORIGINAL CAL FILE
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on
the SD Card.

None

READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on
the USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
calls menu DE1.

None

Menu DE4, De-embed Network

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DE-EMBED NETWORK

GPIB COMMAND
None

TRANSFER FUNCTION
TO BE DE-EMBEDED
(GENERIC NETWORK)
READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on
the SD Card.

None

READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on
the USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
calls menu DE1.

None

Menu DE4A, De-embed Network

A-82

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

DE-EMBED O/E S2P

GPIB COMMAND
None

ORIGINAL CAL FILE
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on
the SD Card.

None

READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on
the USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
calls menu DE2.

None

Menu DE5, De-embed O/E S2P

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DE-EMBED O/E S2P

GPIB COMMAND
None

TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDED
(DETECTOR STANDARD)
READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on
the SD Card.

None

READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on
the USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
calls menu DE2.

None

Menu DE5A, De-embed O/E S2P

37xxxE OM

A-83

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GENERATE E/O S2P
CHARACTERIZATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

CONNECT TRANSFER
STANDARD DETECTOR
AND DE-EMBED ITS
CHARACTERIZATION
CONNECT E/O DEVICE
(MODULATOR) AND
APPLY BIAS
INCLUDE ANY OTHER
COMPONENTS WHICH
ARE PART OF THE
MEASUREMENT PATH
WAIT FOR A
COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING
SAVE S2P DATA
TO SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK3 for *.S2P files on
the SD Card.

SAVE

SAVE S2P DATA
TO USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK3 for *.S2P files on
the USB drive.

SAVE

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
calls menu DE2.

None

Menu DE6, Generate E/O S2P Characterization

A-84

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

O/E MEASUREMENT

GPIB COMMAND
None

ORIGINAL CAL FILE
WITH FWD TRANS
CORRECTION
READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on
the SD Card.

None

READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.CAL files on
the USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
calls menu DE2.

None

Menu DE7, O/E Measurement

MENU

DESCRIPTION

O/E MEASUREMENT

GPIB COMMAND
None

TRANSFER STANDARD
TO BE DE-EMBEDED
(MODULATOR)
READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on
the SD Card.

None

READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

This menu selection calls menu DSK2 for *.S2P files on
the USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
calls menu DE2.

None

Menu DE7A, O/E Measurement

37xxxE OM

A-85

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE

Users can perform any type of calibration. Normally,
embedding/de-embedding Is applied to a 12-term
calibration. However, user’s can apply lesser types of
embedding/de-embedding depending on the calibration
type: 1-path 2-port (forward, reverse) reflection only (port 1,

None

,

port 2, both ports), and frequency response (forward, reverse,
both)
Circular interpolation is used. If the calibration has a frequency
range beyond the S2P file data frequency range, then either the
first or last S2P data are used — ‘flat’ extrapolation. The user is
warned that this extension of the S2P data has occurred.
Diabolical configurations will also be detected. For instance,
attaching a network to a port not supported in a calibration,
corrupt cal file, corrupt s2p data, no calibration in cal file, and
other messages may have to be displayed.

PORT 1/PORT 2

Selects between Port 1 or Port 2; Port 1 is the default
setting.

EDEPORT1;
EDEPORT2;
EDEPORT?

METHOD
EMBED/DE-EMBED

Selects the method to be used. De-embed is the default
setting.

EDED; EDEE;
EDENORM
EDEED?

SWAP PORTS
OF S2P DATA

Lets users choose to swap ports for the S2P data. OFF is
the default setting.

EDESWAP;
EDESWAP?

OFF (ON)

APPLY NETWORK
S2P FILE DATA TO
CAL FILE DATA
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR CHANGE

Calls menus DE9 then DE9A. These menus let users read IEDEF; LDEDEF
CAL data or S2P data to the SD Card or the USB drive.
Press the ENTER key to implement the menu selection.

None

Menu DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File

A-86

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

D

- EMBEDDING & DE-EMBEDDING S2P FILES THE CALIBRATED ERROR REFERENCE PLANE(S) CAN BE MOVED
TO A DIFFERENT POSITION BY EITHER MATHEMATICALLY ADDING
(EMBEDDING) OR REMOVING (DE-EMBEDDING) A NETWORK (S2P
FILE) TO OR FROM A CALIBRATION (CAL FILE).
- REQUIREMENTS

-

- PERFORM AN RF CALIBRATION, ANY TYPE. STORE THE CAL
-

AND FRONT PANEL SETUP TO DISK (e.g. ORIGINAL.CAL).

- THE CHARACTERIZATION OF THE NETWORK TO EMBED/DE-EMBED
-

SHOULD BE IN A FILE USING THE S2P FORMAT (e.g.
NETWORK.S2P). USE AS MANY POINTS AS POSSIBLE TO
IMPROVE INTERPOLATION ACCURACY. MAKE SURE ITS FREQ
RANGE INCLUDES THE FREQ RANGE OF THE CAL FILE.
- CAL FILES AND S2P CHARACTERIZATION FILES MUST BE PLACED IN THE CURRENT
DIRECTORY OF THE DISK.

-

INSTRUCTIONS

-

1. SELECT PORT AND METHOD. EMBEDDING MATHEMATICALLY
ADDS (e.g. MATCHING NETWORK) TO THE SELECTED PORT.
DR-EMBEDDING MATHEMATICALLY REMOVES (e.g. TEST
FIXTURE) FROM THE SELECTED PORT.
2. SWAPPING THE PORTS OF THE S2P DATA EXCHANGES THE
S11 S22 AND S21 S12 WHILE APPLYING.
3. TO EMBED/DE-EMBED THE NETWORK, APPLY A NETWORK
S2P FILE TO A CAL FILE. IF DESIRED, SAVE RESULTS.

Menu EXT_DE8, Embed/De-embed S2P File

37xxxE OM

A-87

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE
ORIGINAL CAL FILE
TO APPLY NETWORK

GPIB COMMAND
None

Lets users select a cal file from the SD Card or USB drive. None

READ CAL FILE
FROM SD CARD

Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select a file from the
SD Card.

None

READ CAL FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select a file from the
USB Drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Press the ENTER key to implement the menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Press the CLEAR key to abprt the menu selection.

None

Menu DE9, Embed/De-embed S2P File

A-88

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

EMBED/DE-EMBED
S2P FILE
S2P FILE DATA
OF THE NETWORK

GPIB COMMAND
None

Lets users select an S2P file from the SD Card or USB
drive.

None

READ S2P FILE
FROM SD CARD

Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select a file from the
SD Card.

None

READ S2P FILE
FROM USB DRIVE

Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select a file from the
USB drive.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Press the ENTER key to implement the menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Press the CLEAR key to abprt the menu selection.

None

Menu DE9A, Embed/De-embed S2P File

37xxxE OM

A-89

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND
None

DISCRETE FILL
INPUT START,
INCR, POINTS,
THEN SELECT
“FILL RANGE”

This menu is used to create one or more ranges of
discrete equally spaced frequency points.

None

START FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the first frequency of the range.

None

INCREMENT
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the increment (step size) between one frequency
and the next.

None

NUMBER OF PTS
XXXX POINT(S)

Enter the number of frequency points in the range.

None

STOP FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the stop frequency, in GHz.

None

FILL RANGE
( XXXX ENTERED)

Moving the cursor here and pressing Enter fills the range None
and shows the number of frequencies selected (in NUM
OF PTS above).

INDIVIDUAL
FREQ INSERT

Calls menu DF2, which allows you to set the individual
frequencies.

None

CLEAR ALL

Clears all entries displayed above.

None

FINISHED
RETURN TO SWP

Closes this menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
Menu DF1, Discrete Fill

A-90

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

INSERT
INDIVIDUAL
FREQUENCIES

GPIB COMMAND
None

INPUT A FREQ,
PRESS 
TO INSERT

Enter the start frequency, increment frequency, and number None
of points; then select the FILL RANGE menu option, below.

NEXT FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the sweep start frequency, in GHz.

None

XXXX FREQS
ENTERED
LAST FREQ WAS
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the frequency, in GHz, by which you want to
increment the start frequency.

None

AUTO INCR ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the number of points.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

Press the Enter key to implements your menu selection or
to turn a selection on or off.

None

PRESS 
THEN SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu DF2, Insert Individual Frequencies

37xxxE OM

A-91

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

WARNING

GPIB COMMAND
None

DEFAULT
PROGRAM
SELECTED
CONTINUING
WILL ERASE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS

TO CONFIRM

Pressing the DEFAULT PROGRAM key a second time
resets the 37xxxE VNA to its default settings. Press the
DEFAULT PROGRAM key, the “0” key, then the DEFAULT
PROGRAM key again clears all internal memories. This
keying method can be used to clear memories of data used
for classified operations.

OR
PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the CLEAR key implements your menu selection.

Menu DFLT, Default Program Selected

A-92

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

DIAGNOSTICS

GPIB COMMAND
None

START SELF TEST

Starts a self test of the 37xxxE.

TST; *TST?

INSTALLED OPTIONS

Displays the fitted options.

*OPT?

PERIPHERAL TESTS

Calls menu DG3, which provides tests for peripherals such None
as the LCD, front panel, external keyboard, printer and
GPIB interfaces.

SERVICE FUNCTIONS
READ SERVICE LOG
(FOR SERVICE
USE ONLY)

Calls menu DG2, which gives you options for using the
Service Log.

None

TROUBLESHOOTING
(FOR SERVICE
USE ONLY)

Calls menu DG4, which provides options for
troubleshooting the 37xxxE hardware. This menu is
intended for use by a qualified service technician. Refer to
the Model 37xxxE Maintenance Manual for additional
information.

None

H/W CALIBRATIONS
(FOR SERVICE
USE ONLY)

Calls menu DG5, which provides for invoking calibration
routines for use by a qualified service technician. Refer to
the Model 37xxxE Maintenance Manual for additional
information.

None

AUTOCAL ASSURANCE

Calls Menu ACAL_ASSUR, which provides for performing
AutoCal assurance routines.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu DG1, Diagnostics 1

37xxxE OM

A-93

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

WARNING

GPIB COMMAND
None

DEFAULT
PROGRAM
SELECTED
CONTINUING
WILL ERASE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS

TO CONFIRM

Pressing the DEFAULT PROGRAM key a second time
resets the VNA to its default settings. Press the DEFAULT
PROGRAM key, the “0” key, then the DEFAULT
PROGRAM key again clears all internal memories. This
keying method can be used to clear memories of data used
for classified operations.

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the CLEAR key implements your menu selection.

Menu DG2, Troubleshooting

MENU

DESCRIPTION

PERIPHERAL TESTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

DISPLAY

Provides a graphic display for evaluating screen colors and
linearity.

FRONT PANEL

Provides for testing the front panel keys.

EXTERNAL
KEYBOARD

Provides for testing the external keyboard connected to the
Keyboard connector on the rear panel.

PRINTER INTERFACE

Provides for testing the printer interface.

GPIB INTERFACE

Provides for testing the GPIB interface.

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to menu DG1.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
Menu DG3, Diagnostics 3

A-94

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

USB
UTILITIES

GPIB COMMAND
None

DISPLAY
DIRECTORY

Directory displays in the screen’s data area. Press <1> for
previous page, <2> for next page, <0> for first page, and
<3> for last page.

DIR

DELETE FILES

Calls DSK6, which lets you delete data files.

None

COPY FILES
TO SD CARD

Calls DSK8, which lets you copy files to the SD Card.

None

COMMAND LINE

Prompts a one-line dialog box that allows you to enter a
command. The dialog box remains open only for the user
interface.

None

SD CARD
UTILITIES

Calls DSK-HD, which provides SD Card utilities.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing Enter implements your menu selection. You will be None
returned to the previous menu when your selection is made.

Menu DSK_FD, USB Utilities

37xxxE OM

A-95

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SD CARD
UTILITIES

GPIB COMMAND
None

DISPLAY
DIRECTORY

Directory displays in the screen’s data area. Press <1> for
previous page, <2> for next page, <0> for first page, and
<3> for last page.

DELETE FILES

Calls DSK6, which lets you delete data files.

COPY FILES
TO USB

Calls DSK8, which lets you copy files to the USB.

None

COMMAND LINE

Prompts a one-line dialog box that allows you to enter a
command. The dialog box remains open only for the user
interface.

None

USB
UTILITIES

Calls DSK-FD, which provides USB utilities.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

DIR

None

Menu DSK_HD, SD Card Utilities

A-96

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

SELECT FILE
TO READ

GPIB COMMAND
None

FILE 1

Displays the data stored in file number 1.

FILE 2

Displays the data stored in file number 2.

FILE 3

Displays the data stored in file number 3.

FILE 4

Displays the data stored in file number 4.

FILE 5

Displays the data stored in file number 5.

FILE 6

Displays the data stored in file number 6.

FILE 7

Displays the data stored in file number 7.

FILE 8

Displays the data stored in file number 8.

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE

Pressing the “1" key on the keypad returns to the previous
page.

PRESS <2>
FOR NEXT PAGE

Pressing the “2" key on the keypad produces the next
page.

None

Menu DSK2, Select File to Read

37xxxE OM

A-97

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT FILE
TO OVERWRITE

GPIB COMMAND
None

CREATE NEW FILE
FILE 1

Select file number 1 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 2

Select file number 2 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 3

Select file number 3 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 4

Select file number 4 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 5

Select file number 5 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 6

Select file number 6 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 7

Select file number 7 to be overwritten with new data.

FILE 8

Select file number 8 to be overwritten with new data.

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE

Pressing the “1" key on the keypad returns to the previous
page.

PRESS <2>
FOR NEXT PAGE

Pressing the “2" key on the keypad produces the next
page.

None

Menu DSK3, Select File to Overwrite

A-98

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

TYPE OF FILES
TO DELETE

GPIB COMMAND
None

FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA

Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of front panel and
calibration data file.

None

TRACE DATA

Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of trace data files
to delete.

None

TABULAR DATA

Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of tabular data files None
to delete.

TEXT DATA

Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of text files to
delete.

S2P DATA

Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of S2P data files to None
delete.

BITMAP DATA

Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of bitmap files to
delete.

None

HPGL DATA

Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of HPGL files to
delete.

None

ALL TYPES (*.*)

Calls menu DSK7, which provides a list of all file types.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

None

Menu DSK6, Type of Files to Delete

37xxxE OM

A-99

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT FILE
TO DELETE

GPIB COMMAND
None

FILE 1

Selects file number 1 data to be deleted.

FILE 2

Selects file number 2 data to be deleted.

FILE 3

Selects file number 3 data to be deleted.

FILE 4

Selects file number 4 data to be deleted.

FILE 5

Selects file number 5 data to be deleted.

FILE 6

Selects file number 6 data to be deleted.

FILE 7

Selects file number 7 data to be deleted.

FILE 8

Selects file number 8 data to be deleted.

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE

Pressing the “1" key on the keypad returns to the previous
page.

PRESS <2>
FOR NEXT PAGE

Pressing the “2" key on the keypad produces the next
page.

None

Menu DSK7, Select File to Delete

A-100

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

D

DESCRIPTION

TYPE OF FILES
TO COPY

GPIB COMMAND
None

FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA

Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of front panel and
calibration data file.

None

TRACE DATA

Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of trace data files
to copy.

None

TABULAR DATA

Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of tabular data files None
to copy.

TEXT DATA

Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of text files to copy. None

S2P DATA

Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of S2P files to
copy.

None

BITMAP DATA

Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of bitmap files to
copy.

None

HPGL DATA

Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of HPGL files to
copy.

None

ALL TYPES (*.*)

Calls menu DSK9, which provides a list of all file types.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu DSK8, Type of Files to Copy

37xxxE OM

A-101

D

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT FILE
TO COPY

GPIB COMMAND
None

FILE 1

Selects file number 1 data to be copied.

COPY

FILE 2

Selects file number 2 data to be copied.

COPY

FILE 3

Selects file number 3 data to be copied.

COPY

FILE 4

Selects file number 4 data to be copied.

COPY

FILE 5

Selects file number 5 data to be copied.

COPY

FILE 6

Selects file number 6 data to be copied.

COPY

FILE 7

Selects file number 7 data to be copied.

COPY

FILE 8

Selects file number 8 data to be copied.

COPY

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS <1> FOR
PREVIOUS PAGE

Pressing the “1" key on the keypad returns to the previous
page.

PRESS <2>
FOR NEXT PAGE

Pressing the “2" key on the keypad produces the next
page.

None

Menu DSK9, Select File to Copy

A-102

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CAPTURE
TABULAR DATA
PRESS 
TO CONTINUE

D

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Captures the tabular data to a file when the Enter key is
pressed.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu DSK10, Capture Tabular Data

37xxxE OM

A-103

E

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DATA ENHANCEMENT
AVERAGING
XXXX MEAS.

GPIB COMMAND
None

Averages the measured data over time, as follows:
AVG; AVG?
1. The sweep stops at the first frequency point and takes a
number of readings, based on the selected number of
points.
2. The program averages the readings and writes the
average value for that frequency point in the displayed
graph.
3. The sweep then advances to the next sequential
frequency point and repeats the process.

AVERAGING TYPE
POINT-BY-POINT

Averages the point-by-point up to the number of averages. PTAVG; SWAVG?

SWEEP-BY-SWEEP

Averages the sweep-by-sweep up to the number of
sweeps.

SWAVG;
SWAVG?

RESET AVG COUNT
XXXX SWEEP(S)

Zeros the counter used for sweep averaging

RSTAVG

SMOOTHING
XX.XX PERCENT
OF SWEEP
XXX POINT(S)

Smooths the measured data over frequency, as follows:
SON; SON?;
1. The program divides the overall sweep into smaller
SOF; SOF?
segments, based on the selected percent-of-span. (Refer to
Section 4-4 and Figure 4-23 for a description and example
of smoothing.)
2. It takes a data reading at each frequency point within
that percent-of-span segment.
3. It averages the readings with a raised Hamming window
and writes that magnitude value at the mid-frequency point
of the segment in the displayed graph or Smith chart.
4. It then advances the percent-of-span segment to
encompass the next sequential group of frequency points
and repeats the process.
The displayed number of points represents the number of
points for a given percent of sweep and is based on the
max data points, and the sweep start and stop.

SAMPLERS USED
PER SWEEP
X SAMPLERS

Sets the number of samplers used per sweep.

SAMP2; SAMP3;
SAMP?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS

TO RESET AVG COUNT
Menu EM, Enhancement Menu

A-104

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

G

DESCRIPTION

SWEPT FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

GPIB COMMAND
None

NOMINAL OFFSET
-XX.XX dB

Shows gain of nominal offset. This value is the approximate NOFST?
gain (or loss) of the external devices preceding the AUT
(amplifier under test). Specifically, the gain of the amplifier
and attenuator combination. This value is used whenever
flat test port power is turned OFF (while still existing) to
prevent an unexpected jump in the power to the AUT.

CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS
(NO CAL EXISTS)

Calls menu GC_SU8, which provides calibration options.

None

FLATNESS
CORRECTION
AT -XX.XX dBm

Shows value of the flatness correction.

FPX?

CALIBRATE
RECEIVER
(NO CAL EXISTS)

Calls menu GC_RCVR, which provides calibration options. None

NORMALIZE S21
(NOT STORED)

Calls menu GC_NORM.

None

GAIN COMPRESSION
POINT (0 dB REF)
XX.XX dB

This option is used with marker search functions. Value
has a range from 0.05 to 9.99 dB and a default value of
1.00 dB. The search value is [negative] the gain
compression point value. The reference is based on
(maximum) with tracking ON.

GCMP; GCMP?

TEST AUT

Closes the extended menu and displays the dual channels None
1 & 3, with channel 3 active.

EXIT APPLICATION

Exits the gain compression application and returns to
S-parameter measurements. It restores the measurement
setup.

None

Menu GC1, Swept Frequency Gain Compression

37xxxE OM

A-105

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- SWEPTFREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSIONPORT1

PORT2
AMP

ATTN

TEST PORTS
1

ATTN

2

NOMINAL OFFSET

- CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS 1. TEST PORT 1 POWER SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY=
AUT(x dB compression spec) - AUT(gain) - 15 dB
2. PORT 2 INPUT POWER SHOULD BE LESS THAN 0 dBm
(UNLESS OPTION 6 IS INSTALLED).
.
3 NOMINAL OFFSET = APPROXIMATE GAIN (OR LOSS)
OF EXTERNALDEVICES PRECEDINGTHE AUT.
4. DEFAULT DISPLAY IS DUAL CHANNEL1-3 IN WHICH
CHANNEL1 = b2/1 [dBm] AND CHANNEL3 = S21.
- MEASUREMENT INSTRUCTIONS 1. AFTER THE AUT IS CONNECTED,NORMALIZE S21.
2. INDICATE THE GAIN COMPRESSION POINT VALUE (x dB )
AND SELECT .
3. INCREASE TEST PORT 1 POWER UNTIL A 1 dB (or
DECREASE IN S21 IS OBSERVED.

x dB)

Menu EXT_GC1, Gain Compression Help Menu 1

A-106

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

G

DESCRIPTION

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION

GPIB COMMAND
None

SET FREQUENCIES

Calls menu GC_DF2, with it extended menu
EXT_GC_DF2. There the you may enter from 1 to 10
discrete frequencies to be used by the application.

None

P START
-XX.XX dBm

Defines the power sweep. The start and stop are limited
by the actual power control range of the internal source.
The stepsize resolution is limited to 0.05 dB.

PSTRT; PSTRT?

P STOP
-XX.XX dBm

PSTOP; PSTOP?

STEPSIZE
X.XX dB

PSTEP; PSTEP?

ATTENUATION

Calls menu GC_SU2, which lets you set attenuation values. None

GAIN COMPRESSION
POINT (MAX REF)
XX.XX dB

This option is used with marker search functions. Value
has a range from 0.05 to 9.99 dB and a default value of
1.00 dB. The search value is [negative] the gain
compression point value. The reference is based on
(maximum) with tracking ON.

NOMINAL OFFSET
-XX.XX dB

This value is the approximate gain (or loss) of the external NOFST; NOFST?
devices preceding the AUT. Specifically, the gain of the
amplifier and attenuator combination. This value is used
whenever power linearity is turned OFF (while still existing)
to prevent an unexpected jump in the power to the AUT.

MORE

Calls menu GC3, with is companion menu EXT_CG3.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

GCMP

Menu GC2, Swept Power Gain Compression 1

37xxxE OM

A-107

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION PORT1

PORT2
AMP

ATTN

TEST PORTS
1

ATTN

2

NOMINAL OFFSET

- CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS 1.

SET FREQUENCIES (FROM 1 TO 10 FREQS ALLOWED).

2.

P START POWER SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY =
AUT (x dB compression spec) - AUT (gain) - 15 dB.

3.

P STOP SHOULD BE 20 dB HIGHER THAN P START.

4.

PORT 2 INPUT POWER SHOULD BE LESS THAN 0 dB
(UNLESS OPTION 6 IS INSTALLED).

5.

INDICATE THE GAIN COMPRESSION POINT VALUE (x dB).

6.

NOMINAL OFFSET = APPROXIMATE GAIN (OR LOSS)
OF EXTERNAL DEVICES PRECEDING THE AUT.

Menu EXT_GC2, Gain Compression Help Menu 2

A-108

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

G

DESCRIPTION

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION

GPIB COMMAND
None

CALIBRATE
FOR LINEARITY
(NO CAL EXISTS)

Calls menu GC_SU8A with extended menu EXT_GC_SU8A None
and menu GC_SU8A_ABORT. Upon a successful power
linearity calibration, menu GC2 reappears with (CAL
EXISTS) and linearity correction ON.

LINEARITY ON (OFF)
CORRECTION

Toggles the linearity correction on and off.

PSWC0;
PSWC1;PSWCX?

CALIBRATE
RECEIVER
(NO CAL EXISTS)

Calls menu GC_RCVR.

None

S21 OPTIONS
(NOT STORED)

Calls menu GC_S21OPT.

None

AUT TEST TYPES

None

GAIN COMPRESSION

Closes the extended menu and displays the dual channels CALR
1 & 3, with channel 3 active. Up to this point, the system is
sweeping frequencies. Once  is pressed, the
power sweep mode is turned ON and the system goes into
single sweep and hold. One power sweep at the current
power freq is done and the system goes into hold with Bias
and RF ON. Pressing the Hold key will restart the sweep.

AM/PM

Closes the extended menuand displays dual channel 2 & 4, SPAMPMT
with Channel 4 becoming active.The power sweep mode is
activated and the VNA goes into continuous sweep. The
power sweeps at the current power frequency; the marker
function is turned off, but markers remain. Channel 2
displays S21 on a Phase graph and Channel 4 displays
S21 on a Log Magnitude graph.

MULTIPLE FREQ
GAIN COMPRESSION

Calls menu GC4.

RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE

Returns program to the swept frequency operational mode. None

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to previous menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu GC3, Swept Power Gain Compression 2

37xxxE OM

A-109

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- SWEPT POWER GAIN COMPRESSION PORT1

PORT2
AMP

ATTN

TEST PORTS
1

ATTN

2

NOMINAL OFFSET

- CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS 7.

LINEARITY CALIBRATION IMPROVES ACCURACY.

8.

RECEIVER CALIBRATION IS DONE AT P STOP.
NORMALIZE S21 AND DISPLAY S21 ARE IS DONE AT P START.

9.

DEFAULT DISPLAY IS DUAL CHANNEL 1-3 IN WHICH
CHANNEL 1 = b2/1 [dBm] AND CHANNEL 3 = S21
-MEASUREMENT INSTRUCTIONS-

1.

SELECT THE DESIRED S21 OPTION.

2.

SELECT  OR  AUT TEST.

3.

MARKERS CAN BE USED TO LOCATE THE 1 dB (or x dB)
COMPRESSION POINT. CHANGE THE POWER FREQUENCY TO
MEASURE EACH OF THE OTHER POWER SWEEPS.

4.

SELECT  TO TEST
THE AUT AT ALL THE SWEPT POWER FREQUENCIES. THE
RESULTS ARE COMPUTED UNDER THE ASSUMPTION THAT
P OUTPUT AT P START IS IN THE AUT’S LINEAR REGION.

Menu EXT_GC3, Gain Compression Help Menu 3

A-110

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

G

DESCRIPTION

MULTIPLE FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

GPIB COMMAND
None

TEST AUT

Calls menu GC4_ABORT; and it turns on the power sweep None
mode and conducts a power sweep at each of the swept
power frequencies. The gain compression points are
computed under the assumption that P Output at P Start is
in the AUT's linear region. The frequency, power in, and
power out values are listed in a table. The power out
versus frequency number is displayed in on a graph..

TEXT DATA
TO SD CARD

When either Text Data to SD Card or Text Data to USB
drive is selected, the appropriate save file menu DSKx is
displayed and the table is captured and recorded in a text
file.

None

Calls menu CG3, which let you perform a Swept Power
Gain Compression measurement.

None

TEXT DATA
TO USB DRIVE
SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION
RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

None
Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu GC4, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 1

MENU

DESCRIPTION

MULTIPLE FREQUENCY
GAIN COMPRESSION

None

TESTING AUT
PRESS 
TO ABORT

GPIB COMMAND

None
Pressing the Clear key aborts the Multiple Frequency Gain None
Compression.

Menu GC4_ABORT, Multiple Frequency Gain Compression 2

37xxxE OM

A-111

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- MULTIPLE FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION POINT SWEPT POWER FREQUENCIES

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

POWER IN

-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX

POWER OUT [dBm]

POWER OUT

dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm

-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX
-XX.XX

dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm
dBm

1.00 dB GAIN COMPRESSION POINT

-XX.XX

-XX.XX
1

2

3

4
5
6
FREQUENCY NUMBER

7

8

9

10

Menu EXT_GC4, Gain Compression Help Menu 4

A-112

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

G

DESCRIPTION

SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCIES

GPIB COMMAND
None

INPUT A FREQ,
PRESS 
TO INSERT

This menu performs in a similar manner to the menu DF2, None
Insert Individual Frequencies. The list is updated and kept
in ascending order. Any frequencies which are added or
deleted force a resorting of the list. The user can enter
from 1 to 10 swept power frequencies.

SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCY
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the swept power frequencies using the keypad or
knob. Press  to insert into the swept power
frequency list

CLEAR FREQ NUMBER
XX

Enter the number of the frequency to remove from the list
using the keypad or knob. Press  to remove the
selection from the list.

CLEAR ALL

Press  to remove all the frequencies from the
swept power frequency list.

FINISHED,
RETURN TO POWER
SWEEP SETUP

After the swept power frequency list is entered, this returns None
to menu GC2.

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu GC_DF2, Swept Power Frequencies

37xxxE OM

A-113

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

- MULTIPLE FREQUENCY GAIN COMPRESSION SWEPT POWER FREQUENCIES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu EXT_GC_DF2, Gain Compression Help Menu

MENU
NORMALIZE S21

DESCRIPTION
This menu lets you see if you have a good
connection of the throughline before capturing the
data by pressing . The calibration may be
aborted by pressing . In both cases, menu
GC1 or GC3 is displayed.

GPIB COMMAND
NRMS21
SPS21?

CONNECT AUT
AND APPLY BIAS
WAIT FOR ONE
COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING
PRESS 
TO STORE

Pressing the Enter key stores the Normalized S21
calibration.

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts the Normalized S21
calibation.

Menu GC_NORM, Normalize S21

A-114

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
RECEIVER
CALIBRATION

G

DESCRIPTION
This menu lets you see if you have a good connection of
the throughline before capturing the data by pressing
. The calibration may be aborted by pressing
. In both cases, menu GC1 or GC2 is displayed.

GPIB COMMAND
None

CONNECT
THROUGHLINE
BETWEEN
TEST PORTS

None

INCLUDE ANY
COMPONENTS WHICH
ARE PART OF THE
MEASUREMENT PATH

None

WAIT FOR ONE
COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING

CALR

PRESS 
TO STORE

Pressing the Enter key stores the receiver calibration.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts the Receiver calibation.

None

Menu GC_RCVR, Receiver Calibration

37xxxE OM

A-115

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION

GPIB COMMAND
None

PORT 1 ATTN
0*10 dB (0 - 70)

Attenuates the microwave source power at port 1 from 0 to SA1; SA1?
70 dB, in 10 dB steps. The power is attenuated before
being applied to Port 1 for a forward transmission or
reflection test (S21 or S11, respectively).

PORT 2 ATTN
0*10 dB (0 - 40)

Attenuates from 0 to 40 dB (10 dB steps) the microwave
power being input to Port 2 from the device-under-test
(DUT).

TA; TA2?

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu GC_SU2, Swept Power Gain Compression 2

A-116

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
CALIBRATE FOR
LINEAR POWER

G

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

The power linearity calibration is done for each of the
swept power frequencies across the power sweep range.
The resolution of the calibration points is 0.25 dB. The
maximum will be equal to the power sweep step size.

None

FORWARD
DIRECTION ONLY

The Linear Power Calibration is only done in the forward
direction.

None

START LINEAR
POWER CALIBRATION

Starts the linear power calibration.

PSWC

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu GC_SU8A, Calibrate for Linear Power

37xxxE OM

A-117

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

LINEAR POWER
CALIBRATION

None

CALIBRATING FOR
LINEAR POWER . . .
PRESS 
TO ABORT

GPIB COMMAND

None
Pressing the Clear key aborts the Linear Power Calibration. None

Menu GC_SU8A-ABORT, Abort Calibrate for Linear Power

- LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION - CALIBRATION INSTRUCTIONS LINEAR POWER CALIBRATION ADJUSTS THE SOURCE OUTPUT
POWER FOR EACH POWER FREQUENCY POINT ACROSS THE POWER
SWEEP RANGE TO PROVIDE A LINEAR POWER LEVEL AT THE
TEST PORT (FORWARD DIRECTION ONLY).
- INSTRUCTIONS 1.

PRESET, ZERO, AND CALIBRATE THE POWER METER.

2.

CREATE AND ACTIVATE THE POWER METER'S CAL
FACTOR LIST FOR THE POWER SENSOR BEING USED.

3.

CONNECT THE POWER METER TO THE DEDICATED GPIB
INTERFACE AND THE POWER SENSOR TO THE TEST PORT.

4.

SELECT .

Menu EXT_GC_SU8A, Gain Compression Help Menu

A-118

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
NORMALIZE S21

G

DESCRIPTION
This menu lets you see if you have a good connection of
the throughline before capturing the data by pressing
. The calibration may be aborted by pressing
. In both cases, menu GC1 or GC3 is displayed.

GPIB COMMAND
NRMS21
DSPS21?

CONNECT AUT
AND APPLY BIAS

None

RESULTS IN A
DISPLAY THAT IS
NORMALIZED TO THE
AUT PERFORMANCE
AT P START.
NORMALIZATION IS
AUTOMATIC FOR
EACH POWER SWEEP

None

DISPLAY S21

DSPS21
DSPS21?

CONNECT THROUGH

None

RESULTS IN A
DISPLAY SHOWING
THE VALUE OF
S21 FOR EACH
POWER SWEEP

None

WAIT FOR ONE
COMPLETE SWEEP
BEFORE STORING

NRMS

CONNECT AUT
AND APPLY BIAS

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts the Normalized S21
calibation.

None

Menu GC_S21OPT, S21 Options

37xxxE OM

A-119

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
SELECT LABEL
--------ABCDEFGHIJKLM
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123456789()!#$%&'@^_'{}~
* ? : \ . SP
BKSP CLR DONE

TURN KNOB
TO INDICATE
CHARACTER OR
FUNCTION
PRESS 
TO SELECT

NUMBERS MAY
ALSO BE
SELECTED
USING KEYPAD

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Name your file using the rotary knob to select letters,
numbers, or both. A letter or number turns red to indicate
that the letter/number has been chosen for selection.
Pressing the Enter key selects the letter or number. the
name you spell out displays in the area below “SELECT
NAME.” You are allowed up to eight characters for a file
name and twelve characters for a label.

None

For keyboard command line entry.

None

Selecting “BKSP” deletes the last letter in the name
None
displayed above.
Selecting “CLR” deletes the entire name.
Selecting “DONE” signals that you have finished writing the
name.
Use the rotary knob to indicate the letter or number you
wish to select.
You can use the up-arrow and down-arrow keys to move
between rows.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.
The menu remains on the screen until another menu is
selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is
pressed.

None

You may also select numbers and decimals using the
keypad.

None

Menu GP5, Select Name

A-120

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

G

DESCRIPTION

GPIB ADDRESSES

None

IEEE 488.2
GPIB INTERFACE
ADDRESS:
6

GPIB COMMAND

None
Selects the GPIB address for the 37xxxE analyzer. The
default address is 6.

DEDICATED
GPIB INTERFACE

ADDGP;
ADDGP?
None

EXTERNAL SOURCE 1
4

Selects the address for external source 1. The default
address is 4.

SRC1ADD;
SRC1ADD?

EXTERNAL SOURCE 2
5

Selects the address for external source 2. The default
address is 5.

SRC2ADD;
SRC2ADD?

PLOTTER
8

Selects the address for a compatible plotter. The default
address is 8.

ADDPLT;
ADDPLT?

POWER METER
13

Selects the address for a compatible power meter. The
default address is 13.

ADDPM;
ADDPM?

FREQUENCY COUNTER
7

Selects the address for an external frequency counter. The ADDFC; ADDFC?
default address is 7.

Menu GP7, Display GPIB Status

37xxxE OM

A-121

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

NETWORK SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

ETHERNET ADDRESS
0123456789ABC

Displays the ethernet address. This address can be found
on the A9 PCB. It is programmed by Motorola in the
MVME162.

ADDHW?

IP ADDRESS
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Displays the Internet Protocol address. User can set this
address of four numbers. Address numbers range from 0
to 255 separated by periods.

ADDIP; ADDIP?

INTERNAL IP
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Displays the Internal Internet Protocol address. User can
set this address of four numbers. Although the user can
change this address, it is highly recommended that you
allow the unit to update this field automatically.

None

SUBNET MASK
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Displays the address of the subnet mask. User can set this SUBMSK;
address of four numbers. Address numbers range from 0 SUBMSK?
to 255 separated by periods.

ATTENTION:
INTERNAL IP
AUTOMATICALLY
UPDATES WITH
IP ADDR. CHANGES

WARNING
DO NOT CHANGE
DEFAULT GATEWAY
FROM 0.0.0.0
UNLESS ONE EXISTS
DEFAULT GATEWAY
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX

Displays the Internet Protocol address. User can set this
address of four numbers. Address numbers range from 0
to 255 separated by periods.

DEFGT; DEFGT?

Menu GP8, Network Setup

A-122

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

G

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
GRAPH TYPE

GPIB COMMAND
None

LOG MAGNITUDE

Selects a log magnitude graph for display on the active
channel's selected S-parameter. The active channel is
indicated by its key (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4) being lit.

MAG

PHASE

Selects a phase graph for display on the active channel.

PHA

LOG MAGNITUDE
AND PHASE

Selects log magnitude and phase graphs for display on the MPH
active channel.

SMITH CHART
(IMPEDANCE)

Selects a Smith chart for display on the active channel.

SMI; SME; SMC

SWR

Selects an SWR display for the active channel.

SWR

GROUP DELAY

Selects a Group Delay display for the active channel.

DLA

POWER OUT

Provides for measuring output power. The measurement of POW
output power is accomplished by using the b2 (or Tb)
measured value normalized to the power supplied to the
AUT at Test Port 1. While the b2 parameter is the most
meaningful for this graph type, you may use any other
parameter.

MORE

Calls additional graph type selections on menu GT2.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection
(and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
calibration mode).

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
AND RESUME CAL

Menu GT1/CAL_GT1, Select Graph Type

37xxxE OM

A-123

G

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
GRAPH TYPE

GPIB COMMAND
None

SMITH CHART
(ADMITTANCE)

Selects an Admittance Smith chart for display on the active ISM; ISE; ISC
channel's
S-parameter.

LINEAR POLAR

Selects a Linear Polar graph for display on the active
channel's
S-parameter.

PLR

LOG POLAR

Selects a Log Polar graph for display on the active
channel's
S-parameter.

PLG

LINEAR MAG

Selects a Linear Magnitude graph for display on the active
channel's
S-parameter.

LIN

LINEAR MAG
AND PHASE

Selects Linear Magnitude and Phase graphs for display on LPH
the active channel's S-parameter.

REAL

Selects Real data for display on the active channel's
s-parameter.

REL

IMAGINARY

Selects Imaginary data for display on the active channel's
s-parameter.

IMG

REAL AND
IMAGINARY

Selects both Real and Imaginary data for display on the
active channel's S-parameter.

RIM

MORE

Calls additional graph type selections.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection
(and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
calibration mode).

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
AND RESUME CAL

Menu GT2/CAL_GT2, Select Graph Type

A-124

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

—LOG MAG—

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Log Mag display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Log Mag display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

–PHASE–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX°

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Phase display.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX °

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Phase display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF2, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both limit lines for the active channel on both the
LogMag and Phase graphs.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L1, Set Limits—Magnitude and Phase

37xxxE OM

A-125

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–LINEAR POLAR–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX mU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Linear Polar
display beyond which the measured values are
unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX mU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Linear Polar display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your polar display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L2, Set Limits—Linear Polar

A-126

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–SMITH CHART–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX mU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Smith Chart
display beyond which the measured values are
unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX mU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Smith Chart.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Smith Chart.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L3, Set Limits—Linear Polar/Smith Chart

37xxxE OM

A-127

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–LOG MAG–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Log Mag display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Log Mag display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Log Mag display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L4, Set Limits—Log Magnitude

A-128

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–PHASE–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX °

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Phase display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX °

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Phase display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both limit lines for the active channel on a phase
graph.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L5, Set Limits—Phase

37xxxE OM

A-129

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–LOG POLAR–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Log Polar display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dB

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Log Polar display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Log Polar display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L6, Set Limits—Log Polar

A-130

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–GROUP DELAY–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX fs

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Group Delay
display beyond which the measured values are
unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX fs

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Group Delay display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Group Delay display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L7, Set Limits—Group Delay

37xxxE OM

A-131

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–LINEAR MAG–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Linear Mag display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Linear Mag display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF1, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Linear Mag display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L8, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude

A-132

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–LINEAR MAG–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Linear Mag display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Linear Mag display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF4, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

-PHASE-

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX °

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your polar display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX °

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Phase display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF2, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Phase display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L9, Set Limits—Linear Magnitude and Phase

37xxxE OM

A-133

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–REAL–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Real display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Real display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF6, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Real values display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L10, Set Limits—Real Values

A-134

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–IMAGINARY–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Imaginary display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Imaginary display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF7, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Imaginary values display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L11, Set Limits—Imaginary Values

37xxxE OM

A-135

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–REAL–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Real display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Real display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF6, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

–IMAGINARY–

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel. UPL0; UPL1;
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
UPLX?
you to delineate a go/no go line on your Imaginary display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your Imaginary display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Displays menu LF7, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel on your Imaginary values display.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L12, Set Limits—Real and Imaginary Values

A-136

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–SWR—

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your SWR display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX pU

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your SWR display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF5, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L13, Set Limits—SWR

37xxxE OM

A-137

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–POWER OUT—

None

UPPER LIMIT ON (OFF)
XXX.XXX dBm

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.
For your convenience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow
you to delineate a go/no go line on your power display
beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.

UPL0; UPL1;
UPLX?

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)
XXX.XXX dBm

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel
on your power display.

LOL0; LOL1;
LOLX?

READOUT LIMIT

Calls menu LF5, which shows points where the current
S-parameter intercepts the lower limit.

None

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the
active
channel.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which provides choices for testing the
limits.

None

SEGMENTED LIMITS

Calls a menu in the LS series (LSX), which lets you set
segmented limit lines.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu L14, Set Limits—Power Out

A-138

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
DEFINE UPPER SEGS
SEGMENT ON (OFF)
X

L

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Define the upper limit segment.

None

Enter the segment number that you want to define, and turn
it on or off.

US1 - US10;
USX?

START POSITION

None

HORIZONTAL
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
GHz

Enter the start horizontal value in GHz, seconds, meter, or
points (domain dependent).

STH; STH?

VERTICAL
XX.XXXXX dB

Enter the start vertical value in dB, degrees, units, or
seconds (graph-type dependent).

STV; STV?

STOP POSITION

None

HORIZONTAL
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
GHz

Enter the stop horizontal value in GHz, seconds, meter, or
points (domain dependent).

STH; STH?

VERTICAL
XX.XXXXX dB

Enter the stop vertical value in dB, degrees, units, or
seconds (graph-type dependent).

STV; STV?

BEGIN NEXT

Turns the next segment on and sets its start and stop
postions to the previous segment’s stop position.

BEGN

ATTACH NEXT

Turns the next segment on and sets its start postions to the
previous segment’s stop position.

ATTN

CLEAR SEGMENT

Turns the current segment-to-define off and sets its start
equal to its stop.

CAS

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu LD1, Define Upper Limit Segment

37xxxE OM

A-139

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
DEFINE LOWER SEGS
SEGMENT ON (OFF)
X

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Define the upper limit segment.

None

Enter the segment number that you want to define, and
turn it on or off.

LS1 - LS10; LSX?

START POSITION

None

HORIZONTAL
Enter the start horizontal value in GHz, seconds, meter, or
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz points (domain dependent).

STH; STH?

VERTICAL
XX.XXXXX dB

STV; STV?

Enter the start vertical value in dB, degrees, units, or
seconds (graph-type dependent).

STOP POSITION

None

HORIZONTAL
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
GHz

Enter the stop horizontal value in GHz, seconds, meter, or
points (domain dependent).

STH; STH?

VERTICAL
XX.XXXXX dB

Enter the stop vertical value in dB, degrees, units, or
seconds (graph-type dependent).

STV; STV?

BEGIN NEXT

Turns the next segment on and sets its start and stop
postions to the previous segment’s stop position.

ATTACH NEXT

Turns the next segment on and sets its start postions to the
previous segment’s stop position.

CLEAR SEGMENT

Turns the current segment-to-define off and sets its start
equal to its stop.

CAS

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu LD2, Define Lower Limit Segmen

A-140

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

READOUT LIMIT
INTERCEPTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–LOG MAG—

None

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX dB

Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing
this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMITdB
XXX.XXX dB

Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount
LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE
(UPPER-LOWER)
XXX.XXX dB

Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing
LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
LUP2?

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu LF1, Set Limit Frequencies—Log Mag

37xxxE OM

A-141

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

READOUT LIMIT
INTERCEPTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–PHASE—

None

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX °

Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing
this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMITdB
XXX.XXX °

Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount
LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE
(UPPER-LOWER)

Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing
LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
LUP2?

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu LF2, Set Limit Frequencies—Phase

A-142

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

READOUT LIMIT
INTERCEPTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–GROUP DELAY—

None

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX fs

Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing
this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT
XXX.XXX fs

Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount
LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE
(UPPER-LOWER)

Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing
LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
LUP2?

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu LF3, Set Limit Frequencies—Group Delay

37xxxE OM

A-143

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

READOUT LIMIT
INTERCEPTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–LINEAR MAG—

None

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing
this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
LLO2?
value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE
(UPPER-LOWER)
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing
LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
LUP2?

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu LF4, Set Limit Frequencies—Linear Mag

A-144

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SET LIMIT
FREQUENCIES

GPIB COMMAND
None

–SWR—

None

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing
this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount
LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE
(UPPER-LOWER)
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing
LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
LUP2?

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu LF5, Set Limit Frequencies—SWR

37xxxE OM

A-145

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

SET LIMIT
FREQUENCIES

None

–REAL—

None

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing
this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount
LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE
(UPPER-LOWER)

Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing
LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
LUP2?

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu LF6, Set Limit Frequencies—Real

A-146

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

SET LIMIT
FREQUENCIES

None

–IMAGINARY—

None

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing
this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT
XXX.XXX pU

Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
LLO2?
value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE
(UPPER-LOWER)

Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing
LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
LUP2?

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu LF7, Set Limit Frequencies—Imaginary

37xxxE OM

A-147

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

READOUT LIMIT
INTERCEPTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

–POWER OUT—

None

UPPER LIMIT (REF)
XXX.XXX dBm

Lets you set the UPPER LIMIT (REF) limit line. Changing
this value also moves the lower limit line by the LIMIT
DIFFERENCE amount.

LOWER LIMIT
XXX.XXX dBm

Lets you set the LOWER LIMIT dB limit line. Changing this LLO; LLO?; LLO2;
value also changes the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount
LLO2?
relative to the UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

LIMIT DIFFERENCE
(UPPER-LOWER)
XXX.XXX dBm

Lets you set the LIMIT DIFFERENCE amount. Changing
LFD; LFD?; LFD2;
this value also changes the lower limit value relative to the LFD2?
UPPER LIMIT (REF) value.

INTERCEPTS AT
LOWER LIMIT

Displays at which frequencies the data intercepts the lower None
limit. May be interpolated.

XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX
XXX.XXXXXXXXX

LUP; LUP?; LUP2;
LUP2?

GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz
GHz

Menu LF8, Set Limit Frequencies—Power Out

A-148

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

L

DESCRIPTION

SEGMENTED LIMITS
–XXXXXXX—

GPIB COMMAND
None

Displays the currently active channel’s graph type.

None

UPPER LIMIT ON(OFF)

Turns the Upper Limit line on or off for the active channel.

SLU1; SLU0;
SLUX?

DEFINE UPPER

Calls menu LD1, which lets you define an upper segment
value.

None

LOWER LIMIT ON(OFF)

Turns the Lower Limit line on or off for the active channel.

SLL1; SLL0;
SLLX?

DEFINE LOWER

Calls menu LD2, which lets you define a lower segment
value.

None

SEGMENTED OFFSETS

None

HORIZONTAL
XXXX GHz

Enter the horizontal offset to be applied to all of the
channel’s segmented limits, in GHz, seconds, meters, or
points (domain dependent).

VERTICAL
XXXX dB

Enter the vertical offset to be applied to all of the channel’s SLV; SLV?
segmented limits, in dB, degrees, units, or seconds
(graph-type dependent).

CLEAR ALL

Clears all segments.

SLC

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
LIMITS

Toggle between on and off to display the active channel’s
limits.

LON; LOF; LON?

TEST LIMITS

Calls menu LTST, which lets test for limits.

None

SINGLE LIMITS

Returns to the appropriate single limits menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

SLH; SLH?

Menu LSX, Segmented Limits

37xxxE OM

A-149

L

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

TEST LIMITS

GPIB COMMAND
None

LIMIT ON (OFF)
TESTING

Turns limit testing for all displayed channels on or off.

LON; LOF; LON?

BEEP FOR ON (OFF)
TEST FAILURE

Turns beeper on or off when limit test fails.

LB0; LB1; LBX?

LIMIT TEST TTL
FAIL CONDITION
TTL LOW/TTL HIGH

Selects between a TTL high or TTL low to indicate that the LVH; LVL; LVX?
limit test has failed.

CHANNEL 1 TEST
PASS (FAIL)

Displays result of Channel 1 limit test.

CHANNEL 2 TEST
PASS (FAIL)

Displays result of Channel 2 limit test.

CHANNEL 3 TEST
PASS (FAIL)

Displays result of Channel 3 limit test.

CHANNEL 4 TEST
PASS (FAIL)

Displays result of Channel 4 limit test.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu LTST, Test Limits

A-150

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

M

DESCRIPTION

SET MARKERS
MARKER 1 ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

GPIB COMMAND
None

Turns Marker 1 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on MR1; MR1?; MK1
MK1?; OM1; MO1
(active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set using
the keypad or
rotary knob.
NOTE: In this text, markers are referred to as being active
and as being selected. Any marker that has been turned on
and assigned a frequency is considered to be selected. The
marker to which the cursor presently points is considered to
be active. The active marker is the only one for which you
can change the frequency.

MARKER 2 DREF ON (OFF) Turns Marker 2 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on MR2; MR2?; MK2
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
(active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set using
MK2?; OM2; MO2
the keypad or rotary knob.
MARKER 3 ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Turns Marker 3 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on MR31; MR3?;
(active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set using
MK3 MK3?; OM3;
the keypad or rotary knob.
MO3

MARKER 4 ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Turns Marker 4 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on MR4; MR4?; MK4
(active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set using
MK4?; OM4; MO4
the keypad or rotary knob.

MARKER 5 ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Turns Marker 5 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on MR5; MR5?; MK5
(active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set using
MK5?; OM5; MO5
the keypad or rotary knob.

MARKER 6 ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXX GHz

Turns Marker 6 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on MR6; MR6?; MK6
(active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set using
MK6?; OM6; MO6
the keypad or
rotary knob.

DISPLAY ON (OFF)
MARKERS

Displays selected markers.

MON; MON?;
MOF

DREF MODE ON (OFF)

Selects the DREF Mode to be on or off.

DRF; DRO; DRO?

SELECT
DREF MARKER

Calls menu M2, which lets you select the DREF Marker.

None

READOUT MARKER
FUNCTIONS

Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker
parameters.

None

Menu M1, Set Markers

37xxxE OM

A-151

M

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
DREF MARKER

GPIB COMMAND
None

MARKER 1
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Marker 1 only appears if it has been activated in menu M1. DR1; DRX?
Placing the cursor on Marker 1 and pressing the Enter key
here selects it as the DREF marker. The DREF marker is
the one from which the other active markers are compared
and their difference frequency measured and displayed in
menu M3. The marker frequency may be set using the
keypad or rotary knob.

MARKER 3
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Same as above, but for Marker 3. This display is
DR3; DRX?
representative if Markers 1, 3, and 4 are selected. Markers
2, 5, and 6 would also show, if they had been selected.

MARKER 4
XXX.XXXXXXXXXGHz

Same as above, but for Marker 4

DR4; DRX?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu M2, Select DREF Marker

A-152

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

M

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
READOUT MARKER

GPIB COMMAND
None

MARKER 1
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

DR1; DRX?
Displays the frequency and S-Parameter value(s) of
Marker 1 on all displayed graphs and Smith Charts. The
frequency of Marker 1 also displays here. If Marker 1
was activated in menu M2 as the REF marker, REF
appears as shown for Marker M5 below.

MARKER 2
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Same as above, but for Marker 2.

DR2; DRX?

MARKER 5
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Same as above, but for Marker 5 This display is
representative if Markers 1, 2, and 5 are selected.
Markers 3, 4, and 6 would also show, if they had been
selected.

DR5; DRX?

DREF MODE IS ON (OFF)

Indicates the status of the DREF mode.

DRO; DRO?

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None

Menu M3, Select Readout Marker

37xxxE OM

A-153

M

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
C H 1 — S 1 1, USER

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Selects channel for readout

None

+XXX.XXXX mm REF
+XXX.XXX dB OFFSET
+XXX.XX °
OFFSET

The constant offset for the channel is displayed.

None

MARKER X
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX °

The selected marker—that is, the one to which the
MR1; MR1? MK1;
cursor points in menu M1—and its frequency, time, or MK1? OM1
distance display here. This could be any one of the six
available markers: Marker 1 through Marker 6.

MARKER TO MAX

Causes the active marker to go to the frequency with
the greatest
S-Parameter value on the active channel.

MMX

MARKER TO MIN

Causes the selected marker to go to the frequency
with the smallest
S-Parameter value on the active channel.

MMN

2 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX °

Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the
active
S-Parameter at marker 2, if the marker is enabled.

MR2; MR2? MK2;
MK2? OM2

3 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX °

Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the
active
S-Parameter at marker 3, if the marker is enabled.

MR3; MR3? MK3;
MK3? OM3

4 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX °

Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the
active
S-Parameter at marker 4, if the marker is enabled.

MR4; MR4? MK4;
MK4? OM4

5 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX °

Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the
active
S-Parameter at marker 5, if the marker is enabled.

MR5; MR5? MK5;
MK5? OM5

6 XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX °

Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the
active
S-Parameter at marker 6, if the marker is enabled.

MR6; MR6? MK6;
MK6? OM6

MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker
parameters.

None

Menu M4, Readout Marker

A-154

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

M

DESCRIPTION

C H 1 — S 1 1, USER

GPIB COMMAND
None

+XXX.XXXX mm REF
+XXX.XXX dB OFFSET
+XXX.XX °
OFFSET

The constant offset for the channel is displayed.

MARKER X
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
MARKER TO MAX
MARKER TO MIN

The selected marker—that is, the one to which the cursor
points in menu M1—and its frequency, time, or distance
display here. This could be any one of the six available
markers: Marker 1 through Marker 6.

D(1 - 2)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

The marker numbers of the REF marker and the next
lowest-numbered selected marker appear between the
parentheses. This example assumes Marker 1 as the Ref
marker and Marker 2 as the next lowest-numbered selected
marker. The lines below display the difference frequency,
(or time/distance ) and trace value(s) between these two
markers on the active channel.

D(1 - 3)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

Same as above, except Marker 3 is the next
lowest-numbered selected marker.

D(1 - 4)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

Same as above, except Marker 4 is the next
lowest-numbered selected marker.

D(1 - 5)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

Same as above, except Marker 5 is the next
lowest-numbered selected marker.

D(1 - 6)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
XX.XXX dB
XXX.XXX°

Same as above, except Marker 6 is the next
lowest-numbered selected marker.

MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker
parameters.

MK1? - MK6?

None

Menu M5, Set DREF Marker Readout

37xxxE OM

A-155

M

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
MARKER X
ALL DISPLAYED
CHANNELS

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Displays the active marker number. For each channel None
being displayed, the channel, S-Parameter, frequency,
time, distance or point number, and the current
readout value for the marker is shown (below). No
marker information is provided for channels that arer
not displayed .

CH 1 — S11
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
–XXX.XXX dB
–XXX.XX °

Displays the measured value for the active marker on OAM1
all channels currently being displayed. You can set the
marker on the active channel in this menu. The active
channel is displayed in GREEN; when not active it is
displayed in BLUE.

CH 2

See above.

OAM2

CH 3 — S12
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
–XXX.XXX dB
–XXX.XX °

See above.

OAM3

CH 4

See above.

OAM4

MARKER TO MAX

Causes the active marker to go to the frequency with
the greatest
S-Parameter value on the active channel.

MMX

MARKER TO MIN

Causes the selected marker to go to the frequency
with the smallest
S-Parameter value on the active channel.

MMN

MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker
parameters.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements menu selection.

None

—

—

S21

S22

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu M6, Marker X All Displayed Channels

A-156

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

M

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

SEARCH

This menu provides control and readout for the marker
search function. When this function is selected, the
graph type for the active channel is automatically set to
LOG MAGNITUDE (other graph types are not allowed),
and taken out of time domain low pass or band pass
display. Frequency with time gate display is allowed.

SRCH

VALUE
–XXX.XXX dB

Target search value. A value from -999.999 to 999.999
dB may be entered.

SRCH

REFERENCE

These menu choices let you enter the reference value
None
for the search. The reference may be:
-Graticule “0 dB”
-Position of Delta Ref. Marker (Marker 1 is used as the
D Ref Marker)
-Maximum value in Passband (default selection). Marker
1 is used to
indicate maximum.

MAXIMUM VALUE

Selects maximum value as the reference.

MMX

D REF MARKER

Selects D Ref Marker (Marker 1) as the reference.

DR1-DR6; DRX?

0 dB

Selects 0 dB as the reference.

MSR0; MSRX?

VALUE AT REFERENCE
–XXX.XXX dB
SEARCH LEFT
SEARCH RIGHT
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Displays the difference between the reference value and OM1
0 dB.
Goes to the next data point that is left (or right) of the
MKSL
search marker (Marker 2) and whose value is equal to
MKSR
VALUE plus the reference. If “TRACKING” is ON,
Marker 2 will search both left and right, and go to the
closest point whose value is equal to VALUE plus
reference. If there is no such point, the message
“VALUE NOT FOUND” is displayed in the data area.
Otherwise the marker goes to that coordinate and the
readout (under the search direction) is updated to reflect
that frequency.

SEARCH MRKR VALUES CH1:
XX.XXX dB
CH2: XX.XXX dB
CH3: XX.XXX dB
CH4: XX.XXX dB
TRACKING

ON (OFF)

MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

None

When ON the active marker will change its frequency
value after every sweep to maintain the user entered
loss value. When OFF the marker stays at the same
frequency and reads out the magnitude value at that
frequency, except when a search is triggered.
Calls Menu M9, which lets you select readout marker
parameters.

Menu M7, Search

37xxxE OM

A-157

M

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
FILTER
PARAMETERS

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Provides the readouts for the filter measurement functions, as None
well as some selections. When this function is selected, the
graph type for the active channel is automatically set to LOG
MAGNITUDE, and taken out of time domain low pass or band
pass display. Frequency with time gate display is allowed.

CENTER FREQ
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Displays the value of Marker 2. Marker 1 displays the
reference value (maximum filter response, or its set value if
delta ref).

FLTC

BANDWIDTH
XXX.XXX dB
D REF MARKER
XX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Displays the difference between Markers 3 and 4.

FLTBW?

LOSS AT REF
–XXX.XXX dB

Displays the difference between the reference value and 0
dB.

FLTL?

Q
XX.XXX

Displays the Q value.

FLTQ?

SHAPE FACTOR
X.XXX

Displays the Shape Factor value.

TRACKING

NOTE: “Q” and “SHAPE FACTOR” are not displayed if they
are toggled OFF in menu M8A.
FLTS?

ON (OFF) When ON the active marker will change its frequency value
MKT1; MKT0;
after every sweep to maintain the user entered loss value.
MKTX?
When OFF the marker stays at the same frequency and reads
out the magnitude value at that frequency, except when a
search is triggered.

FILTER SETUP

Calls menu M8A, which lets you set filter parameters.

None

MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

Calls menu M9, which lets you select readout marker
parameters.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements menu selection, or toggles None
selected option on or off.

Menu M8, Filter Parameters

A-158

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

M

DESCRIPTION

FILTER SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

BANDWIDTH
LOSS VALUE
XXX.XXX dB

A “loss” is a positive number. A value of 0 to 999.999 dB
may be entered. The search value for bandwidth will be
REF minus (-) LOSS. By default, the loss value is set to 3
dB.

BWLS; BWL3;
BWLS?

REFERENCE

These menu choices let you enter the reference value for
None
the search. The reference may be:
-Graticule “0 dB”.
-Position of Delta Ref. Marker. (Marker 1 is used as the D
Ref Marker).
-Maximum value in Passband (default selection). Marker 1 is
used to
indicate maximum.

MAXIMUM VALUE

Selects maximum value as the reference.

MMX

D REF MARKER

Selects D Ref Marker (Marker 1) as the reference.

MMN

0 dB

Selects 0 dB as the reference.

MSR0; MSRX?

Enter high and low values for the Shape Factor. The LOW
entry must be less than the HIGH entry. A value of 0 to
999.999 dB may be entered. The defaults are +6 dB for the
HIGH, and +60 dB for the LOW value.

MSFH; MSFH?

SHAPE FACTOR
HIGH
XXX.XXX dB
LOW
XXX.XXX dB
READOUTS
Q

MSFL; MSFL?
None

ON (OFF)

Toggles Q on or off.
NOTE: “Q” is not displayed in menu M8, if it is toggled OFF.

SHAPE ON (OFF) Toggles the Shape Factor on or off.
FACTOR
NOTE: “SHAPE FACTOR” is not displayed in menu M8, if it
is toggled OFF.
PREVIOUS MENU

DSQ1; DSQ0;
DSQX?
DSF1; DSF0;
DSFX?

Returns to the M8 menu.

Menu M8A, Filter Setup

37xxxE OM

A-159

M

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

MARKER READOUT
FUNCTIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

MARKERS ON
ACTIVE CHANNEL

Calls menu M3 directly — or causes it to be displayed when None
the Readout Marker key is pressed — if there is no active
marker. Or to it calls or causes menu M4 to be displayed if
there is an active marker. If in delta reference mod, menu M5
is displayed.

ACTIVE MARKERS
ON ALL CHANNELS

Calls menu M6 directly —or causes it to be displayed when
the Readout Marker key is pressed.

None

SEARCH

Calls menu M7 directly —or causes it to be displayed when
the Readout Marker key is pressed.

None

FILTER
PARAMETERS

Calls menu M8 directly —or causes it to be displayed when
the Readout Marker key is pressed.

None

MARKER MODE

None

CONTINUOUS

Marker values are interpolated between data points,
MKRC; MKRX?
Interpolated markers are allowed only when the horizontal
axis of the display is FREQUENCY. Interpolated markers are
not allowed in CW, Time Domain, or Power Sweep. If a
channel has been set to interpolated markers and the sweep
is changed to CW or Power Sweep, the markers will
automatically revert to normal mode (DISCRETE). Time
Domain will ignore CONTINUOUS mode. Interpolated markers
are allowed in any graph type, as long as the sweep is by
frequency.

DISCRETE

Markers are displayed only at actual measured data point
values.

MKRD; MKRX?

SET MARKERS

Calls menu M1, which lets you set marker parameters.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu M9, Marker Readout Functions

A-160

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

M

DESCRIPTION

MILLIMETER WAVE
TEST SET BAND

GPIB COMMAND
None

WR-22
(33 - 50 GHz)

Selects WR-22 (33 - 50 GHz) waveguide for use with
millimeter wave system.

Q22

WR-15
(50 - 75 GHz)

Selects WR-15 (50 - 75 GHz) waveguide for use with
millimeter wave system.

V15

WR-12
(60 - 90 GHz)

Selects WR-12 (60 - 90 GHz) waveguide for use with
millimeter wave system.

E12

WR-12 EXTENDED
(56 - 94 GHz)

Selects WR-12 Extended band (56 - 94 GHz) waveguide
for use with millimeter wave system.

E12E

WR-10
(75 - 110 GHz)

Selects WR-10 (75 - 110 GHz) waveguide for use with
millimeter wave system.

W10

WR-10 EXTENDED
(65 - 110 GHz)

Selects WR-10 Extended band (65 - 110 GHz) waveguide
for use with millimeter wave system.

W10E

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection
and takes you to menu MMW2.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts your millimeter wave system None
selection and calls menu OST1.

Menu MMW1, Millimeter Wave Test Set Band

37xxxE OM

A-161

M

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

MILLIMETER WAVE
TEST SET MODULES

GPIB COMMAND
None

PORT 1 MODULE
3740/3741/None

Switch selection for Port 1 Module.

P1MMN; P1MMR;
P1MMNT;
P1MMX?

PORT 2 MODULE
3740/3741/None

Switch selection for Port 2 Module.

P2MMN; P2MMR;
P2MMNT;
P2MMX?

ACCEPT CONFIG

Accepts the selected configuration and calls menu MMW3. None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection,

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts your millimeter wave system None
selection and calls menu OST1.

Menu MMW2, Millimeter Wave Test Set Modules

A-162

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

M

DESCRIPTION

MILLIMETER WAVE
TEST SET
mm WAVE BAND:
XXXXXXXXXXX

GPIB COMMAND
None

Provides information for selections made in menu MMW2
(previous menu).

None

PORT 1 MODULE
XXXXXXXXXXX

P1MMX?

PORT 2 MODULE
XXXXXXXXXXX

P2MMX?

WARNING:
CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your millimeter wave
selection and calls menu SU1 or SU3.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts your millimeter wave system None
selection and calls menu OST1.

Menu MMW3, Millimeter Wave Test Set

37xxxE OM

A-163

M

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

mm WAVE BAND

GPIB COMMAND
None

BAND START FREQ
XXXXXXXXXXX

Displays the start frequency of the millimeter wave band.

BAND STOP FREQ
XXXXXXXXXXX

Displays the stopfrequency of the millimeter wave band.

EQUATION TO EDIT
SOURCE 1

Selects source 1 frequency equation for change.

SOURCE 2

Selects source 2 frequency equation for change.

RECEIVER

Selects receiver frequency equation for change.

EQUATION SUMMARY
C.W.

ON/OFF

Toggles frequency term (F) in equation ON or OFF.

MULTIPLIER
XXX

Enables changing multiplier term of frequency equation
via key pad or rotary knob.

DIVISOR
XXX

Enables changing divisor term frequency equation via
key pad or rotary knob.

OFFSET FREQ
XXXXXXXX

Enables changing offset frequency term frequency
equation via key pad or rotary knob.

DEFAULT EQUATIONS

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None

ACCEPT EQUATIONS

Pressing the Clear key aborts your millimeter wave
selection and calls menu SU1 or SU3.

None

Menu MMW4, mm Wave Band

A-164

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

M

- MILLIMETER WAVE BAND DEFINITION SUMMARY BAND FREQUENCY RANGE
BAND START FBAND STOP F
XXX.XXXXXX XXXXXX.XXXXXX XXX

FREQUENCY = (MULTIPLIER/DIVISOR) * F + OFFSET FREQ)
SOURCE 1 = (1/ 6) * (F – 0.270000 GHz)
SOURCE 2 = (1/ 8) * (F+ 0.000000 GHz)
RECEIVER = (1/ 1) * (0.270000 GHz C.W.)
- NOTES 1. SELECT  TO OVERWRITE DEFINITION
WITH VALUES SUITABLE FOR THE MILLIMETER WAVE BAND.
2. SELECT  TO CONFIRM ANY CHANGES.
3. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ARE VALID ONLY WHILE
USING THE DEFAULT EQUATIONS OVER THE DEFAULT BAND
FREQUENCY RANGE.
4.

DEVIATING FROM THE DEFAULT MAY CAUSE LOCK FAILURES.

PRESS  TO SELECT, PRESS  TO ABORT

Menu EXT_MMW4

37xxxE OM

A-165

M

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

MERGE CAL FILES

None

CAL FILES MUST
EXIST IN THE
CURRENT DIRECTORY
MERGE CAL FILES
PRESS 
TO SELECT

GPIB COMMAND

None

Calls menu MRG2, then menu MRG3 to select the
calibration files.

LDMCF, IMCF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu

- MERGE CALIBRATION FILES RF CALIBRATIONS USING DIFFERENT METHODS AND AT
DIFFERENT FREQUENCIES CAN BE MERGED USING CAL FILES.
- REQUIREMENTS - PERFORM TWO RF CALIBRATIONS USING THE SAME CAL TYPE
AND STORE EACH CAL AND FRONT PANEL SETUP TO DISK
(e.g. CALFILE1.CAL AND CALFILE2.CAL).
- CAL FIES MUST BE PLACED IN THE CURRENT DIRECTORY
OF THE SD CARD OR USB DRIVE.
- THE COMBINED FREQ LIST CANNOT EXCEED 1601 POINTS.
- INSTRUCTIONS 1. SELECT  TO READ THE FIRST AND
SECOND CAL FILES FROM DISK (E.G. CALFILE1.CAL AND
CALFILE2.CAL, REPECTIVELY).
2. THE FREQUENCY LISTS AND MATCHING CORRECTIONTERMS
ARE COMBINED. FOR FREQUENCIES WHICH COINCIDE,
THE TERMS FROM THE FIRST CAL FILE ARE USED. THE
FRONT PANEL SETUP FROM THE FIRST CAL FILE IS USED,
EXCEPT THAT THE START AND STOP FREQS ARE ADJUSTED
TO INCLUDETHE ENTIRE RANGE. THE DATA POINT TYPE
IS CHANGED TO MATCH THE RESULTING FREQUENCY LIST
(I.E. NORMAL, N-DISCRETE, TIME DOMAIN HARMINIC).
IF DESIRED, SAVE RESULTS.

Menu EXT_MRG1, Merge Calibration Menu

A-166

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

M

DESCRIPTION

MERGE CAL FILES

GPIB COMMAND
LDMCF, IMCF

READ CAL FILE 1
FROM SD CARD

Calls menu DSK2 to read the CAL file 1 in the current
None
directory of the SD Card. Completion of the file read takes
the user to menu MRG3.

READ CAL FILE 1
FROM USB DRIVE

Calls menu DSK2 to read the CAL file 1 in the current
directory of the USB drive. Completion of the file read
takes the user to menu MRG3.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
returns to menu MRG1.

None

Menu MRG2, Merge Calibration Menu

MENU

DESCRIPTION

MERGE CAL FILES

GPIB COMMAND
LDMCF, IMCF

READ CAL FILE 2
FROM SD CARD

Calls menu DSK2 to read the CAL file 2 in the current
directory of the SD Card. Completion of the file read
starts the merge of the calibration terms. Finishing the
merge recalls the front panel setup of the CAL file 1 and
displays the setup menu.

None

READ CAL FILE 2
FROM USB DRIVE

Calls menu DSK2 to read the CAL file 2 in the current
directory of the USB drive. Completion of the file read
starts the merge of the calibration terms. Finishing the
merge recalls the front panel setup of the CAL file 1 and
displays the setup menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts this menu selection and
returns to menu MRG1.

None

Menu MRG3, Merge Calibration Menu

37xxxE OM

A-167

N

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

TRACE MEMORY
FUNCTIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

VIEW DATA

Displays measured data; that is, the data presently being
taken.

VIEW MEMORY

Displays stored data; that is, data that was previously taken MEM
and stored in memory.

VIEW DATA
AND MEMORY

Displays measured data superimposed over stored data.

DTM

VIEW DATA (/)
MEMORY

Displays measured data combined with stored data using
selected math.

DNM

SELECT
TRACE MATH

Calls menu NO2 for selection of the type of math operation None
to be performed.

STORE DATA
TO MEMORY
(STORED)
(NOT STORED)

Stores the measured data to internal memory.

STD

DISK
OPERATIONS

Brings up menu NO3, which allows data to be stored to or
recalled from the disk.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

DAT; DAT?

Menu NO1, Trace Memory Functions

A-168

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

N

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
TRACE MATH

GPIB COMMAND
None

ADD (+ )

Selects DATA + MEMORY as the math function.

ADD

SUBTRACT (–)

Selects DATA – MEMORY as the math function.

MIN

MULTIPLY (*)

Selects DATA X MEMORY as the math function.

MUL

DIVIDE (/)

Selects DATA MEMORY as the math function.

DIV

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.
The menu returns to the NO1 menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu NO2, Select Trace Math

MENU

DESCRIPTION

TRACE MEMORY
DISK OPERATIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

CHANNEL X

Indicates the channel to be used (active channel).

CH1-CH4; CHX?

SAVE MEMORY
TO SD CARD

Calls menu DSK3, which lets you save memory to the SD
Card.

None

SAVE MEMORY
TO USB DRIVE

Calls menu DSK3, which lets you save memory to the USB None
drive.

RECALL MEMORY
FROM SD CARD

Calls menu DSK2, which lets you recall memory from the
SD Card.

None

RECALL MEMORY
FROM USB DRIVE

Calls menu DSK2, which lets you recall memory from the
USB drive.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu NO3, Trace Memory Disk Functions

37xxxE OM

A-169

N

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

NxN SOLUTION

GPIB COMMAND
None

LOCATION OF
CURRENT DIRECTORY
SD CARD/USB DRIVE

Select where current S2P file is located: SD Card or USB
drive.

None

DEVICE PAIR (1+2)
PAIR_1_2.S2P

Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select the file to read
inito memory.

None

DEVICE PAIR (1+3)
PAIR_1_3.S2P

Calls menu DSK2, which lets users select the file to read
inito memory.

None

DEVICE 1 LENGTH
XXX.XXX mm
XXX.XXX ps

NXNL1; NXNL1?

DEVICE 2 LENGTH
XXX.XXX mm
XXX.XXX ps

NXNL2; NXNL2?

DEVICE 3 LENGTH
XXX.XXX mm
XXX.XXX ps

NXNL3; NXNL3?

SOLVE DEVICE 1

Finds a solution for applicable device and calls menu
DSK3. DSK3 lets users overright or create S2P file.

INXNO1;
INXNSV1;
LDNXNO1;
LDNXNSV1

SOLVE DEVICE 2

INXNO2;
INXNSV2;
LDNXNO2;
LDNXNSV2

SOLVE DEVICE 3

INXNO3;
INXNSV3;
LDNXNO3;
LDNXNSV3

Menu NXN, NxN Solution

A-170

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

N

-

NxN SOLUTION USING S2P FILES

-

MEASUREMENTS OF THREE DEVICE PAIRINGS CAN BE COMBINED
TO DEDUCE THE BEHAVIOR OF EACH INDIVIDUAL DEVICE.
PROVIDING THREE S2P FILES CONTAINING THE RESPONSE
MEASUREMENTS OF THE DEVICE PAIRS, THE USER CAN SOLVE
FOR A DEVICE’S RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS (S2P FILE).

- REQUIREMENTS

-

- THE

CURRENT DIRECTORY OF THE SELECTED DISK IS USED
FOR THE INPUT AND OUTPUT S2P CHARACTERIZATION FILES.

-

THE CHARACTERIZATION OF THE DEVICE PAIRS SHOULD BE
IN 3 FILES USING THE S2P FORMAT (e.g. PAIR 1 2.S2P,
PAIR 1 3.S2P, AND PAIR 2 3.S2P) . USE AS MANY POINTS
AS POSSIBLE TO IMPROVE INTERPOLATION ACCURACY. MAKE
SURE THEIR FREQ RANGES COINCIDE.

-

-

-

-

IF THE DEVICE PAIRS TRANSLATE FREQUENCY (MIXERS),
DEVICE 2 MUST BE RECIPROCAL. ALSO, DE-EMBED ANY
FILTER AND I.F. INTERCONNECT NETWORK OR THRU LINES
BEFORE CAPTURING THE DEVICE PAIRS’ S2P FILES.
IF CONCERNED WITH PHASE WRAPPING, ESTIMATE THE LENGTH
(DELAY) FOR EACH OF THE DEVICES. IF NOT, USE ZERO.
-

INSTRUCTIONS

-

1. SELECT DISK WHERE THE CURRENT DIRECTORY IS LOCATED.
2. SELECT THE FILENAMES OF THE INPUT DEVICE PAIRS.
3. INPUT THE ESTIMATED LENGTH (DELAY) FOR EACH DEVICE.
4. SOLVE FOR THE DESIRED DEVICE, SAVING AS AN S2P FILE.

Menu EXT_NXN, NxN Solution

37xxxE OM

A-171

O

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

MULTIPLE
SOURCE CONTROL

GPIB COMMAND
None

DEFINE BANDS

Calls menu OM1, which lets you define a frequency band.

None

SOURCE CONFIG

Calls menu SC, which lets you configure the frequency
source.

None

MULTIPLE
SOURCE MODE
OFF

None
Turns multiple source operating mode off placing 37xxxE
VNA in normal operating mode.

DEFINE
ON
MORE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

MS0
None

Sets multiple source mode to ON.

MS1

Calls menu OM1A, which lets you select source-lock
polarity.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu OM1, Multiple Source Control Menu

A-172

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

O

DESCRIPTION

SOURCE LOCK
POLARITY
NORMAL
REVERSE

GPIB COMMAND

None
Calls menu OM1, which lets you define a frequency band.

None

SELECT 
SOURCE LOCK
POLARITY IF

None

THE DUT CONTAINS
MULTI-CONVERSION
STAGES, AND

None

THE PHASE OF THE
FINAL OUTPUT I.F.
IS OPPOSITE OF
NORMAL

None

NORMAL POLARITY
IS DEFINED BY THE
SOURCE 1 AND 2
EQUATIONS

None

IF SOURCE 1 FREQ
IS GREATER THAN
SOURCE 2 FREQ
THEN THE I.F.
IS ASSUMED TO BE
POSITIVE POLARITY
AND VICE VERSA

None

Menu OM1A, Source Lock Polarity Menu

37xxxE OM

A-173

O

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DEFINE BANDS
BAND 1

GPIB COMMAND
None

Displays the band number being defined.

DISPLAYED
FREQ RANGE

BD1-BD5
None

BAND START FREQ
XX.XXXXXX GHz

Displays the start frequency for the band.

BST; BST?

BAND STOP FREQ
XX.XXXXXX GHz

Displays the stop frequency for the band.

BSP; BSP?

BAND FUNCTIONS

None

EDIT SYSTEM
EQUATIONS

Calls menu OM3, which lets you edit system equations.

None

STORE BAND 1
BANDS STORED:
(1 2 3 4 5)

Indicates the band that will be stored and, within the
parenthesis, indicates the bands that have been stored.

SVBMM

CLEAR ALL
DEFINITIONS

Clears all the band definitions that may have been
previously stored.

CLB; CLBMM

SET MULTIPLE
SOURCE STATE

Selects Multiple Source Control menu OM0.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu OM2, Define Bands Menu

A-174

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

O

DESCRIPTION

EDIT SYSTEM
EQUATIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

EQUATION
TO EDIT

None

SOURCE 1

Selects source 1 frequency equation for change.

ED1

SOURCE 2

Selects source 2 frequency equation for change.

ED2

RECEIVER

Selects receiver frequency equation for change.

EDR

EQUATION
SUMMARY
C.W.

ON (OFF)

None
Toggles frequency term (F) in equation ON or OFF.

ESW; ECW;
EXW?

MULTIPLIER
XX

Enables changing multiplier term of frequency equation via EML
key pad or rotary knob.

DIVISOR
XX

Enables changing divisor term frequency equation via key
pad or rotary knob.

OFFSET FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enables changing offset frequency term frequency equation EOS; EOS?
via key pad or rotary knob.

PREVIOUS MENU

Recalls menu OM1.

PRESS 
TO SELECT

EDV

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

Menu OM3, Edit System Equations

37xxxE OM

A-175

O

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

OPTIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

TRIGGERS

Calls menu TRIG, which lets you define trigger source.

None

REAR PANEL
OUTPUT

Calls menu ORP1, which lets you select an output for the
rear panel AUX I/O connector.

None

DIAGNOSTICS

Calls menu DG1, which lets you implement system
diagonistics.

None

MULTIPLE SOURCE
CONTROL

Calls menu OM1, which lets you use and define multiple
sources.

None

BROADBAND
DEFINITION

If the Broadband Test Is selected, this option appears in
place of Multiple Source Control. It calls menu BB4.

BDMM

MILLIMETER WAVE
BAND DEFINITION

Calls menu MMW4.

None

RECEIVER MODE

Calls menu RCV1, which gives you Receiver Mode control None
options.

SOURCE CONFIG

Calls menu SC, which lets you configure the frequency
source.

RF
ON/OFF
DURING RETRACE

Turns RF during retrace and switch points ON or OFF. The RT0; RT1; RTX?
user must keep the sweep range small, preferably below 2
GHz. Avoid including any switch points where RF would be
blanked for delays due to hardware settling.

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

None

Menu OPTNS, Select Options

A-176

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

O

DESCRIPTION

REAR PANEL
OUTPUT CONTROL
OUTPUT

ON (OFF)

SELECT MODE
XXXXXXXXXX

GPIB COMMAND
None

Turns the rear panel ANALOG OUT output on or off.

RV1; RV0; RV1?

Calls menu ORP2, which lets you select an output mode.

None

HORIZONTAL
OR PHASE LOCK
SCALING

None

START/LOCK
X.XXXX V

a1

Lets you enter a voltage for the start/lock frequency. Value VST; VST?
will be a frequency start voltage if SELECT MODE choice
is HORIZONTAL. It will be a phase-lock voltage if SELECT
MODE choice is PHASELOCK.

STOP/LOCK
X.XXXX V

a2

Lets you enter a voltage for the start/lock frequency. Value VSP; VSP?
will be a frequency stop voltage if SELECT MODE choice
is HORIZONTAL. It will be a phase-lock voltage if SELECT
MODE choice is PHASELOCK.

VERTICAL SCALING

None

RESOLUTION
1.000 V/DIV

Shows fixed value for VERTICAL mode.

SCL; SCL?; SCL2;
SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE
0.000 V/DIV

Shows fixed value for VERTICAL mode.

OFF; OFF?; OFF2;
OFF2?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu ORP1, Rear Panel Output Control

37xxxE OM

A-177

O

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT MODE
FOR OUTPUT

GPIB COMMAND
None

HORIZONTAL

Pressing Enter key selects horizontal drive for external
chart recorder connected to ANALOG OUT connector.

RVH; RVX?

VERTICAL

Pressing Enter key selects vertical drive for external chart
recorder connected to ANALOG OUT connector.

RVV; RVX?

PHASE LOCK

Pressing Enter key selects phase-lock for external chart
recorder connected to ANALOG OUT connector.

RVL; RVX?

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu ORP2, Select Output Mode

MENU

DESCRIPTION

TEST SET
CONFIGURATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

INTERNAL

Calls menu OTS2.

SELINT; SELXX?

S-PARAMETER

Calls menu OTS3.

SELSP; SELXX?

MILLIMETER WAVE

Calls menu MMW1.

SELMM; SELXX?

BROADBAND

Calls menu BB2.

SELBB; SELXX?

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

Menu OTS1, Test Set Configuration

A-178

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

O

DESCRIPTION

INTERNAL
TEST SET

GPIB COMMAND
None

WARNING:
CONTINUING
WILL INVALIDATE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements internal test set
configuration.

None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the Clear key aborts internal test set
configuration.

None

Menu OTS2, Warning

37xxxE OM

A-179

P

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT POLAR
CHART MODE

GPIB COMMAND
None

MAGNITUDE,
PHASE

Selects Polar Chart Display to show magnitude and phase PCP
for the full frequency range—from start frequency to stop
frequency.

MAGNITUDE,
SWP POSITION

Selects Polar Chart Display to show magnitude information PCS
only for the phase data that falls between the start and stop
angles selected below.

SET SWEEP
POSITION
BOUNDARIES

Sets the start and stop angles for the data display.

AST; ASP

START ANGLE
X.XX°

AST; AST?

STOP ANGLE
X.XX°

ASP; ASP?

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu PC1, Select Polar Chart Mode

A-180

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

P

DESCRIPTION

PARAMETER
DEFINITION

GPIB COMMAND
None

S21/USER 1

Lets you choose between displaying a pre-defined
S-Parameter or a user-defined parameter.

USR1-USR4

RATIO
b2 / a1

Displays the parameters chosen as numerator and
denominator.

DA1; DA2; DB1;
DB2; DR1

PHASE LOCK
a1

Displays the phase-lock parameter.

NA1; NA2; NB1;
NB2; NU1

USER LABEL:
MY S11

Displays the name of the user-defined parameter.

USL; USL?

CHANGE RATIO

Calls menu PD2, which lets you change the ratio.

None

CHANGE
PHASE LOCK

None

CHANGE LABEL

Calls menu GP5, which lets you name your newly defined
parameter. The label appears at the top of the graph-type
display and under the word “LABEL” in the menu.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu, SP.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None

Menu PD1, Parameter Definition 1

37xxxE OM

A-181

P

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

PARAMETER RATIO

GPIB COMMAND
None

NUMERATOR

None

a1

Selects a1 as the numerator.

NA1

a2

Selects a2 as the numerator.

NA2

b1

Selects b1 as the numerator.

NB1

b2

Selects b2 as the numerator.

NB2

1 (UNITY)

Selects the numerator to be 1 (unity).

NU1

DENOMINATOR

None

a1

Selects a1 as the demoniator.

DA1

a2

Selects a2 as the demoniator.

DA2

b1

Selects b1 as the demoniator.

DB1

b2

Selects b2 as the demoniator.

DB2

1 (UNITY)

Selects the numerator to be 1 (unity).

DE1

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to menu PD1.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None

Menu PD2, Parameter Ratio

A-182

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

P

DESCRIPTION

PARAMETER
DEFINITION

GPIB COMMAND
None

PHASE LOCK

None

a1 (Ra)

Selects a1.

None

a2 (Rb)

Selects a2.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to menu PD1.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None

Menu PD3, Parameter Definition 2

37xxxE OM

A-183

P

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

PLOT OPTIONS
FULL PLOT

GPIB COMMAND
None

The plotter will plot everything displayed on the screen PFS
(data traces, graticule, menu text) when START PRINT
is pressed.

OPTIONS TO PLOT

None

HEADER ON (OFF)

The plot will include an information header if this option PLH; PLD
is on and START PRINT is pressed.

MENU ON (OFF)

The plot will include the menu text if this option is on
and START PRINT is pressed.

PMN

LIMITS ON (OFF)

The plot will include any limit lines if this option is on
and START PRINT is pressed.

PLM; PLD

GRATICULE ON (OFF)

The plot will include the graticule and annotation if this PGT; PLD
option is on and START PRINT is pressed. The plotter
plots the graticule.

DATA TRACE(S) ON(OFF)
AND MARKERS

The plot will include the data and any marker that are
present if this option is on and START PRINT is
pressed. The plotter plots the graticule.

PLOT FORMAT

PLT; PLD

None

PLOT SIZE

Calls menu PL2, which lets you select the size and
location of
the plot.

PEN COLORS

Calls menu PL3, which lets you select pen colors for
None
the various elements of the plot: graticule, data traces,
menu text and header. Also lets you select the relative
pen speed.

PLOT ORIENTATION
PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE

Select the orientation for your plot, either portrait or
landscape.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu
selection.

None

PORT; PLO?
LAND; PLO?
None

Menu PL1, Plot Options

A-184

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

P

DESCRIPTION

PLOT SIZE
FULL SIZE

GPIB COMMAND
None

Selects a full size (page) plot.

–QUARTER
SIZE PLOTS–

PFL
None

UPPER LEFT

Selects a quarter-size plot, upper-left quadrant.

PTL

UPPER RIGHT

Selects a quarter-size plot, upper-right quadrant.

PTR

LOWER LEFT

Selects a quarter-size plot, lower-left quadrant.

PBL

LOWER RIGHT

Selects a quarter-size plot, lower-right quadrant.

PBR

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu PL2, Select Plot Size

37xxxE OM

A-185

P

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
PEN COLORS

GPIB COMMAND
None

DATA PEN
n

Selects the color in which the data will be plotted. The
number of the pen displays where the “n” is shown.

DATA TRACE
OVERLAY PEN
n

Selects the color in which the 2nd trace in a dual trace
TPN
overlay plot will be plotted. The number of the pen displays
where the “n” is shown.

GRATICULE PEN
n

Selects the color in which the graticule will be plotted. The
number of the pen displays where the “n” is shown.

GPN; GPN?

MARKERS AND
LIMITS PEN
n

Selects the color in which the markers and limits will be
plotted. The number of the pen displays where the “n” is
shown.

MPN; MPN?

HEADER PEN
n

Selects the color in which the header information will be
plotted. The number of the pen displays where the “n” is
shown.

HPN; HPN?

PEN SPEED
100 PERCENT
OF MAXIMUM

Selects the pen’s speed as a percentage of the plotter’s
SPD; SPD?
maximum speed. (Used to optimize plots on transparencies
or with worn pens.)

PREVIOUS MENU

Recalls menu PL1.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

DPN

Menu PL3, Select Pen Colors

A-186

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

P

DESCRIPTION

HARD COPY

GPIB COMMAND
None

OUTPUT DEVICE

Allows hard copy output to be directed to the SD Card or
None
USB, in addition to the printer and plotter. In addition to text
(*.txt), S2P (*.s2p), and tabular (*.dat) files, bitmaps (*.bmp)
and HPGL (*.hgl) files are offered to satisfy desktop
publishing requirements. Specifically, color bitmaps and
graphic language files can be imported into Windows
applications, such as Cap3700.

PRINTER

Selects the printer as your output device.

None

PLOTTER

Selects the plotter as your output device.

None

DISK FILE

Selects a disk file as your output device.

None

SETUP & OPERATIONS

None

SETUP HEADERS

Calls menu PM2, which lets you define the output header
information.

None

DISK OPERATIONS

Calls menu PM4, which lets you store/recall tabular data
to/from disk.

None

OUTPUT OPTIONS

None

PRINT OPTIONS

Calls menu PM5.

None

PLOT OPTIONS

Calls menu PL1.

None

DISK FILE OPTIONS

Calls menu PM4A.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None
The menu remains on the screen until another menu is
selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is
pressed.

Menu PM1, Select Data Output Type

37xxxE OM

A-187

P

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DATA OUTPUT
HEADERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

MODEL
ON (OFF)
XXXXXXXXXXXX

Selecting <1> displays menu GP5, which lets you select
the letters and/or numbers in your model identifier.

LMS; LMS?

DEVICE ID ON (OFF)
XXXXXXXXXXXX

Selecting <1> displays menu GP5, which lets you select
the letters and/or numbers in your Device I.D. identifier.

LID; LID?

OPERATOR ON (OFF)
XXXXXXXXXXXX

Selecting <1> displays menu GP5, which lets you select
the letters
identifying the operator.

LNM; LNM?

COMMENT ON (OFF)
XXXXXXXXXXXX

Selecting <1> displays menu GP5, which lets you enter a
comment.

LOC; LOC?

DATE

Displays system date and time. Can be set in menu U6.

LDT1; LDT0

Selecting <1> displays menu PM2A which lets you select
any of three logo options.

None

Pressing the Enter key selects between menu selections.
Pressing the CLEAR/RET LOC key lets you change the
between ON and OFF states.

None

ON (OFF)

SETUP LOGO
PRESS 
TO TURN ON/OFF
PRESS < 1 >
TO CHANGE

Pressing <1> lets you enter the desired label in menu GP5.

Menu PM2, Data Output Headers

A-188

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
LOGO SETUP

P

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Lets you turn off the Anritsu logo and select a user-define
logo.

None

LOGO ON (OFF)

Turns the logo on and off.

LOGO1; LOGO0;
LOGOX?

LOGO TYPE

Lets you define the logo type.

None

STANDARD

Causes the standard logo to be displayed.

LOGOS

USER LOGO

Lets users display their own log.

LOGOU

INSTALL USER LOGO FROM
USB DRIVE

None

FOR PRINTER

Lets you define logo for printing.

None

FOR PLOTTER

Lets you define logo for plotting.

None

Returns to previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key selects between menu selections.

None

PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu PM2A, Data Output Headers

37xxxE OM

A-189

P

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

TABULAR PRINTER
OUTPUT FORMAT

GPIB COMMAND
None

MARKER DATA ON (OFF)

Provides for printing marker data.

SWEEP DATA ON (OFF)

Provides for printing sweep data. If you choose to print PTB; PMT
the sweep data, you can then choose how may points
of the total sweep to print.

HEADER AND ON (OFF)
PAGE BREAKS

Provides for printing header and page-break data.

PRINT DENSITY
XXX PRINT PT(S)
OUTPUT PRINTS
1 POINT EVERY
XXX POINT(S)
PREVIOUS MENU

PMK; PMT

HD0; HD1; HDX?
None

Outputs one point every X points. Use the rotary knob
to select total number of points to output. Skipping
points will reduce the total number of printed points.

PT0-PT9

Returns to menu PM5.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key selects between menu
None
selections. Pressing the CLEAR/RET LOC key lets you
change the between ON and OFF states.

TURN KNOB TO
CHANGE NUMBER
OF POINTS

None

Menu PM3, Tabular Printer Output Format

A-190

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

P

DESCRIPTION

GRAPHICAL PRINTER
OUTPUT FORMAT
HEADER

ON (OFF)

GPIB COMMAND
None

Provides for printing header data.

SCREEN AREA
TO OUTPUT

HD1; HD0; HDX?
None

FULL SCREEN

Prints the full-screen data, including the menus.

PFS

GRAPH ONLY

Prints only the graph or Smith chart.

PGR

BITMAP FILE
OUTPUT OPTIONS

None

TRUE COLOR

Configures the bitmap disk-file format as true color.

BMPT

COLOR ON
WHITE BACKGROUND

Configures the bitmap disk-file format to be color on a
white background.

BMPC

BLACK ON
WHITE BACKGROUND

Configures the bitmap disk-file format to be black on a
white background.

BMPB

Returns to menu PM5.

None

PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key selects between menu selections. None
Pressing the  key lets you change the between
ON and OFF states.

Menu PM3A, Graphical Printer Output Format

37xxxE OM

A-191

P

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

OUTPUT
DISK OPERATIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

TABULAR DATA
FROM SD CARD
TO PRINTER

Calls DSK2 for selection of a measurement data file to be
output to the printer.

None

TABULAR DATA
FROM USB DRIVE
TO PRINTER

Calls DSK2 for selection of a measurement data file to be
output to the printer.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu PM4, Disk Output Operations

A-192

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

P

DESCRIPTION

DISK FILE OPTIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

DESTINATION

None

SD CARD

Selects the output drive destination for the disk file to the
SD Card (C:).

None

USB DRIVE

Selects the output drive destination for the disk file to the
USB drive (A:).

None

FORMAT

None

TEXT

Text format, predefined.

SAVE “*.TXT”

S2P

S2P format, predefined.

SAVE “*.SP2”

TABULAR DATA

Tabular data format is configured via the Print Options
(Menu PM5) or Tabular Data (Menu PM3).

SAVE “*.DAT”

BITMAP

Bitmap format is configured via the Print Options (Menu
PM5), Options (Menu PM5, or Graphical Data (Menu
PM3A).

SAVE “*.BMP”

HPGL

HPGL format is configured via the Plot Options (Menu
PL1).

SAVE “*.HGL”

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Press the Start Print key at the moment data is to be
captured. This calls menu DSK3 to create a new file or
overwrite an existing file in the current directory.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
USE 
TO CAPTURE DATA

Menu PM4A, Disk File Options

37xxxE OM

A-193

P

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

PRINT OPTIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

PRINTER TYPE

None

THINKJET

Select when HP QuietJet or HP ThinkJet is connected to
37xxxE VNA.

None

DESKJET

Select when HP DeskJet (B/W) or HP LaserJet II and III
series is connected to 37xxxE VNA.

None

EPSON

Select when Epson FX, Epson MX, or Epson 9-pin
compatible is connected to 37xxxE VNA.

None

FORMAT OF
PRINTER OUTPUT

None

GRAPHICAL DATA

Prints only the graph or Smith chart, including any and all
data it contains.

None

TABULAR DATA

Prints a tabulation of the measured data

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu PM5, Printer Type, Options

A-194

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

R

DESCRIPTION

RECEIVER MODE

GPIB COMMAND
None

STANDARD

Selects STANDARD mode (RECEIVER mode is not
activated).

SDR; SDR?

USER DEFINED

Calls menu RCV2, which lets you define rEceiver Mode
parameters.

None

SOURCE CONFIG

Calls menu SC, which lets you configure the frequency
source.

None

SPUR REDUCTION
NORMAL/OFF

Switches between NORMAL and OFF for hardware spur
reduction. Hardware control may not be available.

SPR1; SPR0;
SPRX?

Pressing the ENTER key implements or switches your
menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu RCV1, Receiver Mode

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

STANDARD
RECEIVER MODE

None

WARNING:

None

CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT SETUP
AND CALIBRATION
PRESS 
TO CONTINUE
PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection.
Pressing the CLEAR key aborts the Receiver Mode.

None

Menu RCV1_WARN, Standard Receiver Mode Warning

37xxxE OM

A-195

R

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

USER DEFINED
RECEIVER MODE

GPIB COMMAND
None

SOURCE LOCK

Phase locks sources having phase control reference inputs. SL1

TRACKING

Phase locks 37xxxE receivers to a known frequency
source.

TK1

SET ON

Disables source lock circuitry, local oscillators are phase
locked to the 37xxxE internal crystal reference oscillator.

ST1

PRESS ENTER
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection or None
turns GPIB control on or off.

Menu RCV2, User Defined Receiver Mode Menu

A-196

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

R

DESCRIPTION

USER DEFINED
RECEIVER MODE
SET ON
WITH
GPIB CONTROL

GPIB COMMAND
None

(Warning could also read “SOURCE LOCK,” “TRACKING,”
or “WITHOUT” instead of “SET ON”).

WARNING:

None

None

CONTINUING
MAY INVALIDATE
CURRENT SETUP
AND CALIBRATION
PRESS 
TO CONTINUE

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None

PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the CLEAR key aborts the Receiver Mode.

None

Menu RCV2_WARN, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning

37xxxE OM

A-197

R

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
STANDARD
RECEIVER MODE
WARNING:

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Indicates that Standard Receiver mode has been selected. None
Indicates that continuing (by pressing the Enter key) will
erase current setup and calibration stored in the VNA.

None

CONTINUING
WILL ERASE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION

Menu RCV3, Standard Receiver Mode Warning Menu

A-198

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

R

DESCRIPTION

USER DEFINED
RECEIVER MODE

GPIB COMMAND
None

XXXXXXXX

Indicates selected mode

WARNING:

Indicates that continuing (by pressing the Enter key) will
erase current setup and calibration stored in theVNA.

None

Pressing Enter key implements selected mode.

None

CONTINUING
WILL ERASE
CURRENT
SETUP AND
CALIBRATION
PRESS 
TO CONTINUE
OR
PRESS 
TO ABORT

Pressing the CLEAR key aborts the selected mode; current
setup and calibration data stored in the VNA is preserved.

Menu RCV4, User Defined Receiver Mode Warning Menu

37xxxE OM

A-199

R

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

REFERENCE
PLANE

GPIB COMMAND
None

AUTO

Automatically sets the reference delay so that the
cumulative phase shift is zero. This selection unwinds the
phase in a Smith chart display or reduces the phase
revolutions in a rectilinear display to less than one.

DISTANCE
XXX.XXXX mm

Electrically repositions the measurement reference plane, as RDD; RDD?
displayed on the active channel, by a distance value entered
in millimeters. This selection lets you compensate for the
phase reversals inherent in a length of transmission line
connected between the test set’s Port 1 connector and the
device-under-test (DUT).

TIME
XXX.XXXX ms

Electrically repositions the measurement reference plane by RDT; RDT?
a distance value that corresponds to the time in
milliseconds.

SET DIELECTRIC
XXX

Displays menu RD2, which lets you enter a value for the
dielectric constant of your transmission line.

CONSTANT OFFSET

Lets the user apply a constant offset vector to the channel
data. A constant magnitude and phase can be applied to the
data just after the reference plane is applied. The constant
offset is independent of frequency and media dispersion.

MAGNITUDE
+XXX.XXX dB

The magnitude is entered in dB and the phase in degrees.
MOSET;
These values are combined into a vector where the magnitude MOSET?
is converted from Log to Linear. The channel data is then
POSET;
vector multiplied by this vector.
POSET?

PHASE
+XXX.XXX°
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

RDA

DIE

None

Menu RD1, Set Reference Delay

A-200

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

R

DESCRIPTION

SET
DIELECTRIC
CONSTANT

GPIB COMMAND
None

AIR
(1.000649)

Calculates reference delay based on dielectric constant of DIA
air (1.000649).

POLYETHYLENE
(2.26)

Calculates reference delay based on the dielectric constant DIP
of polyethylene (2.26).

TEFLON
(2.10)

Calculates reference delay based on the dielectric constant DIT
of
teflon (2.1).

MICROPOROUS
TEFLON
(1.69)

Calculates reference delay based on the dielectric constant DIM
of microporous teflon (1.69).

OTHER
XXXX.XX

Calculates reference delay based on the value you enter.
Terminate your entry using any terminator and select with
the Enter key.

DIE

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection
and returns you to the RD1 menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu RD2, Set Dielectric Constant

37xxxE OM

A-201

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SOURCE CONFIG

GPIB COMMAND
None

SOURCE 1

None

ACTIVE/ INACTIVE

Enables and disables the internal source.

SRC1AC;
SRC1AC?

SOURCE LOCATION
INTERNAL / EXTERNAL

Changes location of source 1 from internal to external
(NOT CURRENTLY SUPPORTED).

None

GPIB ADDRESS
4

Changes GPIB address of external source 1.

SRC1ADD;
SRC1ADD?

GPIB CONTROL ON (OFF)

Disables GPIB control of external source 1.

SRC1G1;
SRC1G0;
SRC1GX?

Enables and disables the external source 2.

SRC2AC;
SRC2AC?

SOURCE 2
ACTIVE/ INACTIVE
SOURCE LOCATION
EXTERNAL

None

GPIB ADDRESS
5

4 Changes GPIB address of external source 2.

SRC2ADD;
SRC2ADD?

GPIB CONTROL ON (OFF)

Disables GPIB control of external source 2.

SRC2G1;
SRC2G0;
SRC2GX?

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

Menu SC, Source Configure

A-202

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
PARAMETER

GPIB COMMAND
None

S21, FWD TRANS
b2 / a1

Selects the S21 parameter to be displayed on the active S21
channel
The parameter can be displayed in any of the available
formats.

S11, USER 2
b2 / 1

Selects the S11 parameter to be displayed on the active S11
channel.
The parameter can be displayed in any of the available
formats.

S12, REV TRANS
b1 / a2

Selects the S12 parameter to be displayed on the active S12
channel.
The parameter can be displayed in any of the available
formats.

S22, REV REFL
b2 / a2

Selects the S22 parameter to be displayed on the active S22
channel.
The parameter can be displayed in any of the available
formats.

EXT ANALOG IN

Switches from a S-parameter or user-defined parameter EANAIN
to an external analog input. This is measured from the
rear panel Ext Anlg In connector input. The values may
be seen on the Real graph type where 1 Unit = 1 Volt.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
PRESS <1>
TO REDEFINE
SELECTED PARAMETER

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None
Calls menu PD1, which lets you redefine the selected
parameter.

None

Menu SP, Select S Parameter

37xxxE OM

A-203

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SAVE/RECALL
FRONT PANEL
AND CAL DATA
SAVE
RECALL
PRESS 
TO SELECT
FUNCTION

GPIB COMMAND
None

Calls menu SR2, which asks you to select a storage
location—SD Card or USB drive.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your selection.

None

Menu SR1, Save/Recall Front Panel Information

A-204

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

RECALL
(OR SAVE)

None

FRONT PANEL
SETUP IN
INTERNAL MEMORY

Calls menu SR3, which lets you save the front panel setup None
into or recall it from internal memory.

FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
ON SD CARD

Calls menu DKS2 or DSK3, which let you recall or save to None
SD Card memory.

FRONT PANEL
SETUP AND
CAL DATA
ON USB DRIVE

Calls menu DKS2 or DSK3, which let you recall or save to None
USB drive memory.

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your selection. The
None
menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected
for display or until the Clear/Ret Loc key is pressed.

Menu SR2, Recall or Save

37xxxE OM

A-205

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SAVE FRONT
PANEL SETUP TO
(RECALL FRONT
PANEL SETUP FROM)
INTERNAL MEMORY

GPIB COMMAND
None

MEMORY 1*

Causes the current front panel setup to be saved to
memory location 1. If an asterisk appears beside the
selection, the memory is full. Select a different memory
location.

SV1; RC1

MEMORY 2

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 2.

SV2; RC2

MEMORY 3

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 3.

SV3; RC3

MEMORY 4*

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 4.

SV4; RC4

MEMORY 5*

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 5.

SV5; RC5

MEMORY 6

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 6.

SV6; RC6

MEMORY 7

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 7.

SV7; RC7

MEMORY 8

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 8.

SV8; RC8

MEMORY 9

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 9.

SV9; RC9

MEMORY 10

Same as above, except the setup saves to memory
location 10.

SV10; RC10

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR
USE KEYPAD

Menu SR3, Save to Internal memory

A-206

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–LOG MAG–

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX dB/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX dB

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel
amplitude measurement on the log-magnitude graph. The
value can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the
keypad or rotary knob.

OFF; OFF?
OFF2; OFF2?

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement on the log-magnitude graph. This is the line REF2; REF2?
about which the amplitude expands with different resolution
values. The reference line can be set to any vertical
division using the rotary knob.

–PHASE–

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XX ° /DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed phase graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using
the keypad or rotary knob.

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XX °

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel
amplitude measurement on the phase graph. The value
can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the keypad or
rotary knob.

OFF; OFF?
OFF2; OFF2?

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s phase
measurement on the phase graph. This is the line about
which the phase expands with different resolution values.
The reference line can be set to any vertical division using
the rotary knob.

REF; REF?;
REF2; REF2?

PHASE SHIFT
X.XX °

Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase
PHO; PHO?
measurement is shifted on the phase graph. The shift can
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob. This is useful when phase data is near the 180
degree rollover value.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS1 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS1 or CAL_SS1, Set Scaling 1

37xxxE OM

A-207

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–LINEAR POLAR–

None
SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX U/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob. The center
is fixed at 0 units; therefore, changing the resolution also
changes the reference value and vice versa

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX U

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

FIXED
REFERENCE LINE

REF; REF?;
Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF2; REF2?
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

SELECT POLAR
CHART MODE
MAGNITUDE
PHASE

Calls menu PC1, which lets you define the phase angles
between which your polar chart will display data.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection
and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
calibration mode.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
AND RESUME CAL

Menu SS2 or CAL_SS2, Set Scaling 2

A-208

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

IMPEDANCE
(ADMITTANCE)
SMITH CHART

Scales an Impedance Smith chart for display in the active
channel.

SMI; ISM

NORMAL SMITH
(REFL = 1.0000000
FULL SCALE)

Selects a normal Smith chart for display in the active
channel.

SMI; ISM

EXPAND 10 dB
(REFL = 0.3162278
FULL SCALE)

Selects a 10 dB expansion of the Smith chart being
displayed for the active channel.

SME10DB;
ISM10DB

EXPAND 20 dB
(REFL = 0.1000000
FULL SCALE)

Selects a 20 dB expansion of the Smith chart being
displayed for the active channel.

SME20DB;
ISM20DB

EXPAND 30 dB
(REFL = 0.0316228
FULL SCALE)

Selects a 30 dB expansion of the Smith chart being
displayed for the active channel.

SME30DB;
ISM30DB

COMPRESS 3 dB
(REFL =1.425375
FULL SCALE)

Selects a 3 dB compression of the Smith chart being
displayed for the active channel.

SMC3DB;
ISM3DB

PRESS 
TO SELECT
AND RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS3Z or Y menu, pressing the Enter key
returns you to the calibration setup or sequence.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection
and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
calibration mode.. The menu remains on the screen until
another menu is selected for display or until the
CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.

None

Menu SS3Z/SS3Y or CAL_SS3Z/CALSS3Y, Set Scaling 3

37xxxE OM

A-209

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–LOG MAG–

None
SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX dB/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX dB

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement on the log-magnitude graph. This is the line REF2; REF2?
about which the amplitude expands with different resolution
values. The reference line can be set to any vertical
division using the rotary knob.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS4 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS4 or CAL_SS4, Set Scaling 4

A-210

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–PHASE–

None
SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX °/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX °

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.01 o using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PHASE SHIFT
X.XX °

Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase
PHO; PHO?
measurement is shifted on the phase graph. The shift can
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob. This is useful when phase data is near the 180
degree rollover value.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS5 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you v
to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS5 or CAL_SS5, Set Scaling 5

37xxxE OM

A-211

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–LOG POLAR–

None
SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX dB/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX dB

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the keypad or
rotary knob.

FIXED
REFERENCE LINE

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

SELECT POLAR
CHART MODE
MAGNITUDE
PHASE

Calls menu PC1, which lets you define the phase angles
between which your polar chart will display data.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection
and resumes the calibration from where it left off, if in the
calibration mode.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
AND RESUME CAL

Menu SS6 or CAL_SS6, Set Scaling 6

A-212

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–GROUP DELAY–

None
SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX fs/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REF VALUE
XXX.XXX fs

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.0001 s using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

APERTURE
X.X PERCENT
OF SWEEP

Sets and displays the percent of frequency span over
which group delay is calculated.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS7 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
to the calibration setup or sequence.

APR; APR?

Menu SS7 or CAL_SS7, Set Scaling 7

37xxxE OM

A-213

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–LINEAR MAG–

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX U/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX pU

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS8 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS8 or CAL_SS8, Set Scaling 8

A-214

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–LINEAR MAG–

None
SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX U/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX pU

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

–PHASE–

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XX °/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed phase graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

REF VALUE
XXX.XX °

Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase
measurement is offset on the phase graph. The offset can
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob.

OFF; OFF?
OFF2; OFF2?

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s phase
REF; REF?;
measurement
REF2; REF2?
on the phase graph. This is the line about which the phase
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PHASE SHIFT
X.XX °

Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase
PHO; PHO?
measurement is shifted on the phase graph. The shift can
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob. This is useful when phase data is near the 180
degree rollover value.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS9 menu, pressing the Enter key returns you None
to the calibration setup or sequence.

Menu SS9 or CAL_SS9, Set Scaling 9

37xxxE OM

A-215

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–REAL–

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX U/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX pU

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS10 menu, pressing the Enter key returns
you to the calibration setup or sequence.

None

Menu SS10 or CAL_SS10, Set Scaling 10

A-216

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–IMAGINARY–

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX U/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX pU

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS11 menu, pressing the Enter key returns
you to the calibration setup or sequence.

None

Menu SS11 or CAL_SS11, Set Scaling 11

37xxxE OM

A-217

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–REAL–

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX U/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX pU

OFF; OFF?
Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

–IMAGINARY–

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XX °/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XX °

Sets the value by which the active channel’s phase
measurement is offset on the phase graph. The offset can
be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or
rotary knob.

OFF; OFF?
OFF2; OFF2?

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s phase
measurement on the phase graph. This is the line about
which the phase expands with different resolution values.
The reference line can be set to any vertical division using
the rotary knob.

REF; REF?;
REF2; REF2?

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS12 menu, pressing the Enter key returns
you to the calibration setup or sequence.

None

Menu SS12 or CAL_SS12, Set Scaling 12

A-218

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–SWR–

None
SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX U /DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX U

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel OFF; OFF?
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph. The value OFF2; OFF2?
can be set in increments of 0.001 U using the keypad or
rotary knob.

REFERENCE LINE
X

Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF; REF?;
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
REF2; REF2?
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

PRESS 
TO RESUME CAL

On the CAL_SS13 menu, pressing the Enter key returns
you to the calibration setup or sequence.

None

Menu SS13 or CAL_SS13, Set Scaling 13

37xxxE OM

A-219

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SET SCALING
OR PRESS


GPIB COMMAND
None

–POWER OUT–

None

RESOLUTION
XX.XXX dB/DIV

Sets the resolution for the vertical axis of the active
channel’s displayed graph. Resolution can by set
incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.

SCL; SCL?;
SCL2; SCL2?

REFERENCE VALUE
XXX.XXX dBm

Sets the value at the reference line for the active channel
amplitude measurement on the displayed graph.

OFF; OFF?
OFF2; OFF2?

REFERENCE LINE
X

REF; REF?;
Sets the reference line for the active channel’s amplitude
REF2; REF2?
measurement. This is the line about which the amplitude
expands with different resolution values. The reference line
can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.

Menu SS14, Set Scaling 14

A-220

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SWEEP SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

START
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the sweep-start frequency in GHz. The start
frequency must be lower than the stop frequency.

SRT

STOP
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the sweep-stop frequency in GHz. The stop
frequency must be higher than the start frequency.

STP

SET CENTER/SPAN

Calls menu SU1_CENTER, which lets you set values for None
center frequency and span width.

XXX DATA POINTS
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
STEPSIZE

Displays the number of frequency points and the spacing None
between points for the start and stop frequencies
selected above. The number of points shown provides
the finest frequency resolution possible, based on your
Data Points key menu selection.

C.W. MODE ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHZ

Move cursor here and press Enter to enable the CW
mode. Enter CW frequency for measurements.

CWF; CWON;
CWON?; SWP;
SWP?

MARKER SWEEP

Move cursor here and press Enter to set the start and
stop frequencies (menu SU5) of the CW frequency
(menu SU6) to the values of any marker.

None

DISCRETE FILL

Calls the Discrete Fill menu (menu DF1).

None

HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION

Calls menu SU4, which lets you set the action of the
HOLD key.

None

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu SU2, which lets you set the source power
and the values for the attenuators in the 37xxxE. It also
provides entry into the Flat Test Port Power calibration.

None

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu
selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu SU1, Sweep Setup 1

37xxxE OM

A-221

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SWEEP SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

CENTER
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the center frequency in GHz.

CNTR; CNTR?

SPAN
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the span frequency in GHz.

SPAN; SPAN?

SET START/STOP

Calls menu SU1, which lets you set values for start and
stop frequencies.

None

XXX DATA POINT(S)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz
STEPSIZE

Displays the number of frequency points and the spacing
between points for the center and span frequencies
selected above. The number of points shown provides the
finest frequency resolution possible, based on your Data
Points key menu selection.

None

C.W. MODE ON (OFF)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHZ

Move cursor here and press Enter to enable the CW mode. CWF; CWON;
Enter CW frequency for measurements.
SWP; CWON?

MARKER SWEEP

Move cursor here and press Enter to set the start and stop None
frequencies (menu SU5) of the CW frequency (menu SU6)
to the values of any marker.

DISCRETE FILL

Calls the Discrete Fill menu (menu DF1).

HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION

Calls menu SU4, which lets you set the action of the HOLD None
key.

TEST SIGNALS

Calls menu SU2, which lets you set the source power and
the values for the attenuators in the 37xxxE. It also
provides entry into the Flat Test Port Power calibration.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

None

None

Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. None

Menu SU1_CENTER, Sweep Setup 1

A-222

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

TEST SIGNALS

GPIB COMMAND
None

POWER CONTROL
+XX.X dB
0 TO -15.0 dB)

Enter the delta-power level for the Port 1 output in dB.

PORT 1 ATTN
XX10 dB (0 - 70)

Attenuates the microwave source power at port 1 from 0 to SA1; SA1?
70 dB, in 10 dB steps. The power is attenuated before
being applied to Port 1 for a forward transmission or
reflection test (S21 or S11, respectively).

PORT 1 POWER
-XX.XX dBM

Displays the Port 1 power, in dBm.

PIP?

PORT 2 ATTN
XX10 dB (0-X0)

Attenuates from 0 to 40 dB (10 dB steps) the microwave
power being input to Port 2 from the device-under-test
(DUT).

TA2; TA2?

CALIBRATE
FOR FLATNESS
(CAL EXISTS)

PWR; PWR?

None

FLATNESS ON(OFF)
CORRECTION
AT XX.X dBm

Calls menu SU8 or CAL_SU8, depending on whether valid FP0; FP1; FPX?
Flat Test Port Power calibration data exists. Both of these
menus provide selection control for the Flat Test Port
Power feature.

EXT SOURCE 1 PWR
-XX.XX dBm

Enter the power level, in dBm, of the 1st, external
frequency source.

PWR1; PWR1?

EXT SOURCE 2 PWR
-XX.XX dBm

Enter the power level, in dBm, of the 2nd, external
frequency source.

PW2; PW2?

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns to the previous menu.

None

Menu SU2 or CAL_SU2, Sweep Setup 2

37xxxE OM

A-223

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

TEST SIGNALS

GPIB COMMAND
None

EXT SOURCE 1 PWR
+XX.XX dBm

Enter and display the power level, in dBm, of the 1st
external frequency source.

PWR1; PWR1?

EXT SOURCE 2 PWR
+XX.XX dBm

Enter and display the power level, in dBm, of the 2nd,
external frequency source.

PW2; PW2?

PORT 1 ATTN
0 * 10 dB (0 - 70)

Attenuates the microwave source power at port 1 from 0 to SA1; SA1?
70 dB, in 10 dB steps. The power is attenuated before
being applied to Port 1 for a forward transmission or
reflection test (S21 or S11, respectively).
(NO STEP ATTENUATOR IN MODEL 372xxE)

PORT 2 ATTN
0 * 10 dB (0 - 00)

Attenuates from 0 to 40 dB (10 dB steps) the microwave
power being input to Port 2 from the device-under-test
(DUT).

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to the previous menu. (RESUME CAL may be None
used instead of PREVIOUS MENU, when accessed during
a calibration.)

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

TA2; TA2?

None

Menu SU2A or CAL_SU2A, Sweep Setup 2A

A-224

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SINGLE POINT
MEASUREMENT
SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

C.W. FREQ
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the measurement frequency in GHz for continuous
wave (CW) operation.

HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION

Calls menu SU4, which lets you set the action of the HOLD None
key.

TEST
SIGNALS

Calls menu SU2, which lets you set values for the source
power and attenuators. It also provides entry into the Flat
Test Port Power calibration.

None

RETURN TO
SWEEP MODE

Move cursor here and press Enter to return to the F1-F2
sweep mode (Menu SU1).

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

CWF; CWF?

Menu SU3, Single-Point Measurement Setup

37xxxE OM

A-225

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SWEPT POWER
SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

SWEPT POWER
FREQUENCY
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Enter the swept-power frequency in GHz.

None

P START
-XX.XX dBm

Displays the start power value in dBm.

PSTRT; PSTRT?

P STOP
-XX.XX dBm

Displays the stop power value in dBm.

PSTOP; PSTOP?

STEPSIZE
-XX.XX dB

Displays the power step size value in dB.

PSTEP; PSTEP?

POWER SWEEP ON(OFF)
-XX.XX dBm

Turns power sweep on or off.

PSWP1; PSWP0;
PSWPX?

HOLD BUTTON
FUNCTION

Calls menu SU4.

None

SWEPT POWER
GAIN COMPRESSION

Calls menu GC3 and extended menu EXT_GC3.

None

RETURN TO SWEPT
FREQUENCY MODE

Calls menu SU1.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection. None

Menu SU3A, Swept-Power Measurement Setup

A-226

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
FUNCTION FOR
HOLD BUTTON

GPIB COMMAND
None

HOLD/CONTINUE

Causes the hold key (button) to stop and start the sweep.

HLD/CTN; HLD?

HOLD/RESTART

Causes the hold key to stop and restart the sweep.

None

SINGLE SWEEP
AND HOLD

Causes the hold key to trigger a single sweep and hold
when finished. (Two sweeps, one from Port 1 to 2 and
another from Port 2 to 1, are accomplished for a 12-Term
measurement.)

HLD; TRS

BIAS/RF HOLD
CONDITIONS
BIAS

ON (OFF)

Select bias to be on or off (test sets having bias input only) BH1; BH0; BHX?
while system is in hold.

RF

ON (OFF)

Selects RF to be on or off while system is in hold.

DUT/AUT ON (OFF)
PROTECTION
DEFAULT RESET
TURNS ON HOLD
WITH BIAS/RF
TURNED OFF
PRESS 
TO SELECT

RH1; RH0; RHX?

When on, a default reset places the system in hold with RF
and bias turned off. This choice is initialized to OFF when
the software version changes or after a Default Program
key press, so that the system comes up in the sweep
mode.
Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu SU4, Select Function for Hold Button

37xxxE OM

A-227

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

FREQUENCY
MARKER SWEEP

GPIB COMMAND
None

START SWEEP
MARKER (X)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Pressing a number on the keypad causes the associated
marker to be the start frequency of the sweep.

M1S-M6S

STOP SWEEP
MARKER (X)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Pressing a number on the keypad causes the associated
marker to be the stop frequency of the sweep.

M1E-M6E

USE KEYPAD
TO SELECT
MARKER (1-6)

Use the keypad to select markers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

None

Menu SU5, Frequency Marker Sweep

A-228

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

FREQUENCY
MARKER C.W.

GPIB COMMAND
None

C.W FREQ
MARKER (X)
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz

Pressing a number on the keypad causes the associated
marker to be the C.W. frequency.

M1C-M6C

USE KEYPAD
TO SELECT
MARKER (1-6)

Use the keypad to select markers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.

None

Menu SU6, Frequency Marker C.W.

37xxxE OM

A-229

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

CALIBRATE FOR
FLAT PORT POWER

GPIB COMMAND
None

FORWARD
DIRECTION ONLY

None

XXX POINTS
MEASURE 1 PWR
POINT EVERY
XX POINT(S)

Displays the number of power points (0 – 50) to be skipped PTS; PTS?
during the power sweep. The points not measured are
interpolated to provide a flat sweep.

POWER TARGET
-XXX.X dBm

Lets users set a flat output-power value (power target). The PTP; PTP?
VNA defaults to Port 1 power.

START FLAT
POWER CALIBRATION

Begins the calibration. If calibration is successful, you are
returned to menu SU8. If the calibration unsuccessful due
to a fatal error (Source or power meter inoperable or not
connected), this menus remains displayed. At any time,
you can abort the calibration by pressing the DEFAULT
PROGRAM or CLEAR/RET LOC keys. All other keys are
locked out.

PRESS 
TO SELECT

SFC

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection or None
turns the function on/off.

TURN KNOB TO
CHANGE NUMBER
OF POINTS
Menu SU8 or CAL_SU8, Calibrate For Flat Test Port Power

A-230

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

S

- FLAT POWERCALIBRATION FLAT POWERCALIBRATION ADJUSTS THE SOURCE
OUTPUTPOWERAT EACH MEASUREMENT
POINT ACROSS
A FREQUENCYSPAN TO PROVIDE A CONSTANTPOWER
LEVEL AT THE TEST PORT (FORWARDDIRECTION ONLY).

- INSTRUCTIONS 1. PRESET, ZERO, AND CALIBRATE THE POWERMETER.
2. CREATE AND ACTIVATE THE POWERMETER'S CAL
FACTOR LIST FOR THE POWERSENSORBEING USED.
3. CONNECTTHE POWERMETERTO THE DEDICATED GPIB
INTERFACE AND THE POWERSENSORTO THE TEST PORT.
4. SELECT .

000.0

%

Menu EXT_SU8 Flat Power Calibration Instructions

37xxxE OM

A-231

S

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

NUMBER OF
DATA POINTS

GPIB COMMAND
None

1601 MAX PTS

Selects measurement data points to be 1601.

NP1601; FHI;
ONP

801 MAX PTS

Selects measurement data points to be 801.

NP801; ONP

401 MAX PTS

Selects measurement data points to be 401.

NP401; ONP;
FME

201 MAX PTS

Selects measurement data points to be 201.

NP101; ONP

101 MAX PTS

Selects measurement data points to be 101.

NP101; ONP

51 MAX PTS

Selects measurement data points to be 51.

NP51; ONP

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements you selection.

None

Menu SU9, Number of Data Points

A-232

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

S

DESCRIPTION

NUMBER OF
DATA POINTS
POINTS DRAWN
IN C.W.
XXXX POINT(S)

GPIB COMMAND
None

Displays the number of data point, when in the CW mode.
This number can be between 1 and 1601.

CWP; CWP?

Menu SU9A, Number of Data Points 2

37xxxE OM

A-233

T

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DOMAIN

GPIB COMMAND
None

FREQUENCY

Displays the data in normal frequency domain format.

FREQUENCY
WITH TIME GATE

Displays the data in the frequency domain after a specific
time range has been sampled by the gate function.

FGT

TIME
LOWPASS MODE

Displays the data in the time (distance) domain, using true
lowpass processing. Data must be taken using a harmonic
series calibration and sweep in order to use this mode.

TLP

TIME
BANDPASS MODE

Displays the data in the time (distance) domain using
TBP; TDX?
bandpass processing. Any data sweep range using normal
calibration can be used.

–SETUP–

None

DISPLAY
TIME/DISTANCE

Switches the mode of display between time and distance. TDDIST; TDTIME
This does not affect the actual displayed data, but only the
annotation.

SET RANGE

Calls a menu that lets you set the range and other display
parameters.

None

SET GATE

Calls a menu that lets you set the gate parameters.

None

GATE ON/OFF/DISP

Switches the gate on or off each time Enter is pressed.

GON/GOF/GDS;
GOF?

HELP

Displays an informational help menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR SWITCH

Menu TD1, Domain (Frequency/Display)

A-234

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

T

DESCRIPTION

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

START
XXX.XXX ps

Sets the start time of the display.

GST; GST?

STOP
XXX.XXX ps

Sets the stop time of the display..

GSP; GSP?

CENTER
XXX.XXX ps

Sets the center time of the display.

GCT; GCT?

SPAN
XXX.XXX ps

Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display.

GSN; GSN?

MARKER RANGE

Calls a menu that lets you set the display to a range
determined by two of the markers.

None

RESPONSE
IMPULSE/STEP

Switches between Impulse and Step response each time
Enter is pressed.

LPI/LPS; LPSX?

MORE

Calls a menu that contains additional selections for display None
setup.

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu TD2_LP_TIME, Lowpass Time Domain Setup

37xxxE OM

A-235

T

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

LOWPASS
DISTANCE
DISPLAY SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

START
XXX.XXX mm

Sets the start time of the display.

GST; GST?

STOP
XXX.XXX mm

Sets the stop time of the display.

GSP; GSP?

CENTER
XXX.XXX mm

Sets the center time of the display.

GCT; GCT?

SPAN
XXX.XXX mm

Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display.

GSN; GSN?

Calls a menu that lets you set the display to a range
determined by two of the markers.

None

RESPONSE
IMPULSE/STEP

Switches between Impulse and Step response each time
Enter is pressed.

LPI/LPS; LPSX?

MORE

Calls a menu that contains additional selections for display None
setup.

RELATIVE VELOCITY
X.X

Indicates the relative velocity of light, as set by the
dielectric constant in menu RD2.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

MARKER RANGE

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu TD2_LP_DIST, Lowpass Distance Display Setup

A-236

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

T

DESCRIPTION

BANDPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

START
XXX.XXX ps

Sets the start time of the display.

ZST; ZST?

STOP
XXX.XXX ps

Sets the stop time of the display.

ZSP; ZSP?

CENTER
XXX.XXX ps

Sets the center time of the display.

ZCT; ZCT?

SPAN
XXX.XXX ps

Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display.

ZSN; ZSN?

MARKER RANGE

Calls a menu that lets you set the display to a range
determined by two of the markers.

None

PHASOR ON/OFF
IMPULSE

Switches Phasor Impulse processing on or off each time
Enter is pressed.

TDPI1; TDPI0;
TDPIX?

HELP – PHASOR
IMPULSE

Displays an informational help menu.

None

MORE

Calls a menu that contains additional selections for display None
setup.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu TD2_BP_TIME, Bandpass Time Domain Setup

37xxxE OM

A-237

T

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

BANDPASS DISTANCE
DISPLAY SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

START
XXX.XXX mm

Sets the start time of the display.

ZST; ZST?

STOP
XXX.XXX mm

Sets the stop time of the display.

ZSP; ZSP?

CENTER
XXX.XXX mm

Sets the center time of the display.

ZCT; ZCT?

SPAN
XXX.XXX mm

Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display.

ZSN; ZSN?

Calls a menu that lets you set the display to a range
determined by two of the markers.

None

PHASOR ON/OFF
IMPULSE

Switches Phasor Impulse processing on or off each time
Enter is pressed.

TDPI1; TDPI0;
TDPIX?

HELP – PHASOR
IMPULSE

Displays an informational help menu.

None

MORE

Calls a menu that contains additional selections for display None
setup.

RELATIVE VELOCITY
X.X

Indicates the relative velocity of light, as set by the
dielectric constant in menu RD2.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

MARKER RANGE

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu TD2_BP_DIST, Bandpass Distance Display Setup

A-238

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

T

DESCRIPTION

BANDPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

WINDOW SHAPE
NOMINAL

Calls a menu that lets you change the window type.

None

SET GATE

Calls a menu that lets you set the gate parameters.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to the previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu TD3_BP, Bandpass Time Domain Setup

MENU

DESCRIPTION

LOWPASS TIME
DOMAIN SETUP

GPIB COMMAND
None

WINDOW SHAPE
NOMINAL

Calls a menu that lets you change the window type.

None

SET GATE

Calls a menu that lets you set the gate.

None

D.C. TERM
XXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX

Calls a menu that lets you set the D.C. term for lowpass
processing.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to the previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu TD3_LP, Lowpass Time Domain Setup

37xxxE OM

A-239

T

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

GATE

GPIB COMMAND
None

START
XXX.XXX xx

Sets the start time of the gate.

GST; GST?

STOP
XXX.XXX xx

Sets the stop time of the gate.

GSP; GSP?

CENTER
XXX.XXX xx

Sets the center time of the gate.

GCT; GCT?

SPAN
XXX.XXX xx

Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the gate. Also, provides for GSN; GSN?
an anti-gate if a negative value is entered. Refer to Chapter
9, paragraphs 9-6 and 9-7 for additional information.

SET SHAPE
XXXXXXXXX

Calls a menu that lets you set the shape of the gate.

None

GATE

Switches the gate on or off each time Enter is pressed.

GON/GOF/GDS;
GOF?

SET RANGE

Takes you back to menu TD2_XX_XXXX (LP_TIME,
LP_DIST, BP_TIME, BP_DIST), depending on the type of
measurement you selected in menu TD1.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

ON/OFF/DISP

Menu TD4_TIME & TD4_DIST, Gate (Distance/Time)

A-240

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

T

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
WINDOW SHAPE

GPIB COMMAND
None

RECTANGULAR

Selects a Rectangular (one-term) shape.

WRT

NOMINAL

Selects a two-term Hamming shape.

WNM

LOW SIDELOBE

Selects a three-term Blackman-Harris shape.

WLS

MIN SIDELOBE

Selects a four-term Blackman-Harris shape.

WMS

HELP

Displays an informational help menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu TD5_WINDOW, Shape

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT
GATE SHAPE

GPIB COMMAND
None

MINIMUM

Selects minimum shape. Sharpest rolloff, some frequency
domain ripple. Not allowed with low or minimum sidelobe
window.

GRT

NOMINAL

Selects a nomimal shape. Good results in most
applications. Not allowed with minimum sidelobe window.

GNM

WIDE

Selects wide shape. Gradual rolloff and better residual
ripple.

MAXIMUM

Selects a maximum shape. Least rolloff and best residual
ripple.

HELP

Displays an informational help menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu TD5_GATE, Shape

37xxxE OM

A-241

T

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
SET D.C. TERM FOR
LOWPASS PROCESSING

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

Since it is impossible to measure the true D.C. term
None
required for lowpass processing, a value must be
estimated. This menu allows a choice between five different
selections for this value.

AUTO
EXTRAPOLATE

Sets the D.C. term to a value determined by extrapolating
the data points near the zero frequency.

DCA; DCX?

LINE
IMPEDANCE

Sets the D.C. term to the characteristic impedance of the
transmission medium (Z0).

DCZ

OPEN

Sets the D.C. term to correspond to an open circuit.

DCO

SHORT

Sets the D.C. term to correspond to a short circuit.

DCS

OTHER
XXX.XXX
(REFLECTION
COEFFICIENT
X.XXX pU)

Sets the D.C. term to the value entered.

DCV; DCV?
DCX?

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to the previous menu.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu TD6, Set D.C. Term for Low Pass Processing

A-242

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

T

DESCRIPTION

TIME
MARKER SWEEP

GPIB COMMAND
None

START TIME
MARKER ( )
XXX.XXX ns

Sets the start time to the value of the selected marker.

M1S-M6S

STOP TIME
MARKER ( )
XXX.XXX ns

Sets the stop time to the value of the selected marker.

M1E-M6E

RESTORE
ORIGINAL RANGE

Returns the display to the original time range that was in
effect before the marker range was selected.

MRR

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to the previous menu.

None

Select marker number from keypad.

None

USE KEYPAD
TO CHOOSE
MARKER (1 - 6)
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

Menu TD7_TIME, Time Marker Sweep.

37xxxE OM

A-243

T

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

DISTANCE
MARKER SWEEP

GPIB COMMAND
None

START DIST
MARKER ( )
XX.XXXX cm

Sets the start time to the value of the selected marker.

M1S-M6S

STOP DIST
MARKER ( )
X.XXXX m

Sets the stop time to the value of the selected marker.

M1E-M6E

RESTORE
ORIGINAL RANGE

Returns the display to the original time range that was in
effect before the marker range was selected.

MRR

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to the previous menu.

None

Select marker number from keypad.

None

USE KEYPAD
TO CHOOSE
MARKER (1 - 6)
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

Menu TD7_DIST, Distance Marker Range

A-244

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

T

DESCRIPTION

TRIGGERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

MEASUREMENT
INTERNAL

Internally triggers a point-by-point measurement. Choosing TIN; TXX?
this option always turns AUTOMATIC I.F. CALIBRATION
off.

EXTERNAL

Provides for externally triggering a point-by-point
TEX; TXX?
measurement via the rear panel External Trigger connector.
Choosing this option always turns AUTOMATIC I.F.
CALIBRATION off.

MEASUREMENT ON (OFF)
DELAY
XX.XXX sec

Toggles a measurement delay on or off. If toggled on, the MEASDLY0;
delay time is displayed for user entry. Allowed values range MEASDLY1;
from positive 0.1 to 99999.9 ms.
MEASDLYX?;
MEASDLY;
MEASDLY?

I.F. CALIBRATION

None

AUTOMATIC ON (OFF)
I.F. CAL

Turns on or off the timer for I.F. calibration. The timer
automatically triggers an I.F. calibration at regular intervals
for internal hardware calibrations. If can be set on or off
when in either INTERNAL or EXTERNAL trigger
measuement mode.

TRIGGER
I.F. CAL

Immediately triggers an I.F. calibration, which calibrates the HCT
internal hardware. A “CALIBRATING IF...” message is
displayed.

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

HC1; HC0; HCX?

None

Menu TRIG, Triggers Measurement

37xxxE OM

A-245

U

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

SELECT UTILITY
FUNCTION OPTIONS

GPIB COMMAND
None

GPIB ADDRESSES

Calls menu GP7, which displays the current GPIB
addresses of the various dedicated instruments.

None

NETWORK SETUP

Calls menu GP8, which lets you select a network protocol.
You can use FTP, National Instruments NI-VISA,
WINSOCK, and TCP/IP-capable CAPVNA, VNAFTP, and
other VNAUTILS.

None

DISPLAY
INSTRUMENT
STATE PARAMS

Calls menu U2, which lets you display the various
instrument state parameters.

None

USB
UTILITIES

Calls menu DSK-FD, which lets you select between several None
USB utilities.

CAL COMPONENT
UTILITIES

Calls menu U3, which lets you select between several
calibration-component utilities.

None

AUTOCAL
UTILITIES

Calls menu ACAL_UTIL, which lets you select various
AutoCal utilities.

None

COLOR
CONFIGURATION

Calls menu U5, which lets you configure the screen colors. None

DATA ON (OFF)
DRAWING

Turns data drawing on or off for all channels.

DD1; DD0; DD1?

BLANKING
FREQUENCY
INFORMATION

Blanks all frequency-identifier information from the 37xxxE
displays, if such information is presently being displayed.
Hides the frequency value with X’s, such as
XXX.XXXXXXXXX GHz.

FOF; FON; FOX?

SET DATE/TIME

Lets users set the date and time.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT
OR TURN ON/OFF

Menu U1, Utility Menu

A-246

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

U

DESCRIPTION

DISPLAY INSTRUMENT
STATE PARAMETERS

GPIB COMMAND
None

SYSTEM

Displays all of the system parameters (Readout Text for
U2, on the following pages).

DGS

CALIBRATION

Displays the calibration parameters.

DCP

OPERATING

Displays the global operating parameters.

DFP

CHANNEL 1 & 2

Displays the Channel 1-2 operating parameters.

DC1

CHANNEL 3 & 4

Displays the Channel 3-4 operating parameters.

DC3

NEXT PARAM PAGE
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Alternately displays Readout Text U3 a through e.
Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu U2, Display Instrument State

37xxxE OM

A-247

U

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

Readout Text U2, Global Operating Parameters

Parameter

Display Format

Number of Points
Power Control
Port 1 Attenuation
Porft 2 Attenuation
Source 2 Power

xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x

dB
dB
dB
dB

Reference Impedance
Averaging
Smoothing

xx.xxx W
xxx Meas. per point
Off/On
x.x percent of sweep
Off/On

Readout Text U2, Channel Parameters

Parameter

Display Format

Number of Points
Power Control
Port 1 Attenuation
Porft 2 Attenuation
Source 2 Power

xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x

dB
dB
dB
dB

Reference Impedance
Averaging
Smoothing

xx.xxx W
xxx Meas. per point
Off/On
x.x percent of sweep
Off/On

Readout Text U2, System Parameters

Parameter

Display Format
xxxxxxxx
xxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx

Model
Serial Number
Software Version
Options
IEEE 488.2 GPIB Interface
Address
Enable Registers
Service Request
Standard Event Status
Parallel Poll
Extended Event Status
Limits Testing Status

xx
xx
xx

Dedicated GPIB Interface
External Source 1 Address
External Source 2 Address
Plotter Address
Power Meter Address
Frequency Counter

xxxxx
xxxxx
xxxxx
xxxxx
xxxxx

Measurement Trigger
Automatic I.F. Calibration

xxxxxx
xxxxxxx

Diagnostic Mode
Troubleshooting
Receiver Mode
Search for Lock

xxx
xxxxxxxxxxxx
xxx

Readout Text U2, Calibration Parameters

Parameter

A-248

Display Format

Cal Method
Line Type Medium
Cal Type

xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx

Number of Points
Start Freq
Stop Freq

xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx

Power Control
Port 1 Attenuator
Port 2 Attenuator
Source 2 Power

xx.x
xx.x
xx.x
xx.x

Load Type
Through Offset

xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx

dB
dB
dB
dB

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

U

DESCRIPTION

CALIBRATION
COMPONENT
UTILITIES

GPIB COMMAND
None

INSTALL KIT
INFORMATION
FROM USB

Reads into memory the coefficient data from the
calibration-components USB supplied with the calibration
kits.

LKT

DISPLAY COAXIAL
OPEN & SHORT
INFORMATION

Calls menu U4 and U4A, which lets you display the
connector information for the various coaxial connectors
supported.

None

DISPLAY COAXIAL
OFFSET SHORT
INFORMATION

Calls menu U4B, which lets you display the connector
information for the various coaxial connectors supported.

None

DISPLAY
WAVEGUIDE
INFORMATION

Displays the waveguide information loaded from the USB
drive.

DWG

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu U3, Calibration Component Utilities

SSLT AND SSST WAVEGUIDE PARAMETERS

IDENTIFIER
CUTOFF FREQUENCY
OFFSET LENGTH OF SHORT 1
OFFSET LENGTH OF SHORT 2
OFFSET LENGTH OF SHORT 3

NOT INSTALLED
XXX.XXXXXX GHz
+XXX.XXXX mm
+XXX.XXXX mm
+XXX.XXXX mm

Menu EXT_U3, SSLT and SSST Waveguide Parameters

37xxxE OM

A-249

U

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
DISPLAY INSTALLED
OPEN & SHORT
TEST PORT
CONNECTOR INFO

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

This menu lets you view coefficient data on components.
The data appears in the display area of the screen (See
readout text on next page).

None

K – CONN (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the K Connector male
components.

DMK

K – CONN (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the K Connector
female male components.

DFK

V-CONN (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the V Connector male
components.

DMV

V-CONN (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the V Connector
female components.

DFV

W1-CONN (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the W1 Connector
male components.

DM1

W1-CONN (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the W1 Connector
female components.

DF1

SMA (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the SMA male
components.

DMS

SMA (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the SMA female
components.

DFS

GPC - 3.5 (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the GPC-3.5 male
components.

DM3

GPC - 3.5 (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the GPC-3.5 female
components.

DF3

GPC - 7

Select to display coefficient data for the sexless GPC-7
components.

DG7

NEXT CONNECTOR

Cycles through selections SMA (M) to GPC 7.

None

MORE CONNECTORS

Calls up menu U4A and lets you select more connectors.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Displays menu U3.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu U4, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 1

A-250

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

U

SOLT CALIBRATION KIT
TEST PORT:
CALIBRATION COMPONENTS:

W1-CONN (MALE)
W1-CONN (FEMALE)

OPEN DEVICE
C0 [e-15 F]
C1 [e-27 F/Hz]
C2 [e-36 F/Hz2]
C3 [e-45 F/Hz3]
OFFSET LENGTH
SERIAL NUMBER

+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXX.XXXX mm
“NNNNNN”

SHORT DEVICE
L0 [e-12 H]
L1 [e-24 H/Hz]
L2 [e-33 H/Hz2]
L3 [e-42 H/Hz3]
OFFSET LENGTH
SERIAL NUMBER

+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXX.XXXX mm
“NNNNNN”

Menu EXT_U4, SOLT Calibration Kit Information

37xxxE OM

A-251

U

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
DISPLAY
INSTALLED
OPEN & SHORT
TEST PORT
CONNECTOR INFO

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

This menu lets you view coefficient data for connectors.
The data appears in the display area of the screen.

None

TYPE N (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the Type N male
components.

DMN

TYPE N (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the Type N female
components.

DFN

TYPE N (M) 75W

Select to display coefficient data for the Type N male 75W
components.

DMN75

TYPE N (F) 75W

Select to display coefficient data for the Type N female 75W DFN75
components.

7/16 (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the 7/16 male
components.

DM7

7/16 (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the 7/16 female male
components.

DF7

TNC (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the TNC male
components.

DMT

TNC (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the TNC female male
components.

DFT

2.4 mm (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the 2.4 mm male
components.

DM2

2.4 mm (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the 2.4 mm female
components.

DF2

NEXT CONNECTOR

Cycles through selections V Connector to SPECIAL.

None

MORE CONNECTORS

Calls up menu U4A and lets you select more connectors.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to menu U3.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu U4A, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 2

A-252

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU
DISPLAY INSTALLED
OFFSET SHORT
TEST PORT
CONNECTOR INFO

U

DESCRIPTION

GPIB COMMAND

This menu lets you view coefficient data for connectors.
The data appears in the display area of the screen.

None

W1-CONN (M)

Select to display coefficient data for the W1 Connector–
male components.

DOM1

W1-CONN (F)

Select to display coefficient data for the W1 Connector
female components.

DOF1

SPECIAL A (M)

Select to display coefficient data for special A male
components.

DOASM

SPECIAL A (F)

Select to display coefficient data for special A female
components.

DOASF

SPECIAL B (M)

Select to display coefficient data for special B male
components.

DOBSM

SPECIAL B (F)

Select to display coefficient data for special B female
components.

DOBSF

SPECIAL C (M)

Select to display coefficient data for special C male
components.

DOCSM

SPECIAL C (F)

Select to display coefficient data for special C female
components.

DOCSF

NEXT CONNECTOR

Cycles through selections W Connector to SPECIAL.

None

PREVIOUS MENU

Returns you to menu U3.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu U4B, Display Installed Calibration Components Information 3

37xxxE OM

A-253

U

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

SSLT AND SSST CALIBRATION KIT
TEST PORT:
CALIBRATION COMPONENTS:

W1-CONN (MALE)
W1-CONN (FEMALE)

OFFSET SHORT 1 DEVICE
L0 [e-12 H]
L1 [e-24 H/Hz]
L2 [e-33 H/Hz2]
L3 [e-42 H/Hz3]
OFFSET LENGTH
SERIAL NUMBER

+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXX.XXXX mm
“NNNNNN”

OFFSET SHORT 2 DEVICE
L0 [e-12 H]
L1 [e-24 H/Hz]
L2 [e-33 H/Hz2]
L3 [e-42 H/Hz3]
OFFSET LENGTH
SERIAL NUMBER

+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXX.XXXX mm
“NNNNNN”

OFFSET SHORT 3 DEVICE
L0 [e-12 H]
L1 [e-24 H/Hz]
L2 [e-33 H/Hz2]
L3 [e-42 H/Hz3]
OFFSET LENGTH
SERIAL NUMBER

+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXXX.XXXX
+XXX.XXXX mm
“NNNNNN”

Menu EXT_U4B, SSLT and SSST Calibration Kit Information

A-254

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

U

DESCRIPTION

COLOR
CONFIGURATION

GPIB COMMAND
None

DATA
10 RED

Sets the color for the data drawn on the display. Use rotary DATCOL;
knob to cycle between the available colors. Default color is DATCOL?
shown.

OVERLAY DATA
15 YELLOW

Sets the color for the overlay data drawn on the display.
Use rotary knob to cycle between the available colors.
Default color is shown.

LAYCOL;
LAYCOL?

MEMORY DATA
24 GREEN

Sets the color for the memory data drawn on the display.
Use rotary knob to cycle between the available colors.
Default color is shown.

TRCCOL;
TRCCOL?

MARKERS
AND LIMITS
32 CYAN

Sets the color for the markers and limits drawn on the
display. Use rotary knob to cycle between the available
colors. Default color is shown.

MKRCOL;
MKRCOL?

GRATICULE
24 GREEN

Sets the color for the display graticule. Use rotary knob to
cycle between the available colors. Default color is shown.

GRTCOL;
GRTCOL?

ANNOTATION
AND MENU TEXT
24 GREEN

Sets the color for the annotation and menu text. Use rotary ANNCOL;
knob to cycle between the available colors. Default color is ANNCOL?
shown.

MENU HEADERS
(TITLES & INFO)
32 CYAN

Sets the color for the menu headers and information. Use
rotary knob to cycle between the available colors. Default
color is shown.

BACKGROUND
0 BLANK

Sets the color for the background. Use rotary knob to cycle BCKCOL;
between the available colors. Default color is shown.
BCKCOL?

RESET COLORS

Resets colors to the default values.

RSTCOL

COLOR SCHEMES

Calls menu U5A

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

MNUCOL;
MNUCOL?

Menu U5, Color Configuration

37xxxE OM

A-255

U

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

DESCRIPTION

COLOR SCHEMES

The user can select various color configurations by choosing between
predetermined schemes

GPIB COMMAND

RESET COLORS

Loads the current color configuration with the reset (default) colors

RSTCOL

NEW COLORS

Loads the color configuration with the new colors for the "C" models.

NEWCO

CLASSIC COLORS

Loads the color configuration with the classic colors used in past models.

CLASS

INVERSE COLORS

Loads the color configuration with the colors pre-defined for a white
background.

INVER

BRILLIANT COLORS

Loads the color configuration with a pre-defined color set.

BRILL

SOFT COLORS

Loads the color configuration with a pre-defined color set.

SOFTCO

TO CUSTOMIZE,
SELECT A COLOR
SCHEME AND/OR
MODIFY THE COLOR
CONFIG, THEN
STORE AS RESET

The user may also store the current color configuration as the reset
colors used in . Only  will restore the colors to the
CLASSIC or NEW (“C” Models) setup.

None

STORE COLOR
CONFIG AS RESET
(DEFAULT) COLORS

Stores the current color configuration as the reset colors used in  and as the reset color scheme.

STOCO

PREVIOUS MENU
PRESS 
TO SELECT

Returns you to menu U3.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

Menu U5, Color Configuration

A-256

37xxxE OM

ALPHABETICAL LISTING

MENU

U

DESCRIPTION

SET DATE/TIME

GPIB COMMAND
None

YEAR
XXXX

Sets the year.

DATE; DATE?

MONTH
XX

Sets the month.

DATE; DATE?

DAY
XX

Sets the day.

DATE; DATE?

HOUR
XX

Sets the hour.

TIME; TIME?

MINUTE
XX

Sets the minute.

TIME; TIME?

DONE,
(SET DATE/TIME)

Prompts to set a new time.

None

PREVIOUS MENU
(DATE/TIME
NOT SET)

Returns to the previous menu.

None

Pressing the Enter key implements your menu selection.

None

PRESS 
TO SELECT

Menu U6, Set Date/Time

37xxxE OM

A-257/A-258

Appendix B
Rear Panel Connectors

Table of Contents
B-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-2 REAR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-3 CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Appendix B
Rear Panel Connectors
B-1

INTRODUCTION

This appendix provides descriptions and pinout diagrams for the
37xxxE rear panel connectors .

B-2

REAR PANEL

The 37xxxE rear panel connectors are described if Figures B-1 and B-2
on page B-2 and B-3.

CONNECTOR PINOUT
DIAGRAMS

Figures B-3 through B-10 provide pinout diagrams for the rear panel
connectors.

B-3

37xxxE OM

B-3

REAP PANEL DRAWINGS

25

IEEE 488.2 GPIB

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

24

22

23

18
Test Set
Control Out

E2

DC1

DT1

C0

SR1

RL1

PP1

AH1

L4

SH1

T6

Refer to manual
for GPIB Address
CAUTION
+20dBM MAX, 0VDC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE

In ±5 dBm 50Ω Out ±5 dBm 50Ω

a1

IF Inputs <270 MHz
b1
a2

Terminate Unused
Inputs

b2

Dedicated GPIB
Ext
Anlg In

Ext
Trigger

Ext
Anlg Out

17
Peripherals

21 20 19
16
CAUTION
FOR CONTINUED FIRE
PROTECTION REPLACE
ONLY WITH SPECIFIED
TYPE AND RATED FUSE.

15

- LINE INPUT
400 VA MAX
85-264VAC 48-63 Hz
REPLACE FUSE ONLY WITH
SAME TYPE AND RATING

Communications

External I/O

14

CAUTION

>18 Kg

Bias Fuses
Port 2

Port 1

SE

FUSE

FUSE

FU
SE
FU

HEAVYWEIGHT

FU
S

SE

WARNING
NO OPERATOR SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

E

FU

1

F .5A 250V

5
2
Figure B-1.

B-4

3

4

13

10

6
7

8

9

12
11

37xxxE Rear Panel

37xxxE OM

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

CONNECTOR DESCRIPTIONS

1. Printer Out: 25-pin connector that provides a parallel in-

14. (Option 12) a1: IF input from 3738A Broadband Test Set.

terface to the companion printer. Figure B-3 describes the
signal lines and shows the connector pinout.

SMA connector that should be terminated (on chain) when
not in use.

2. Serial: 9-pin connector provides provides control for

15. (Option 12) b1: IF input from 3738A Broadband Test Set.

AutoCal module. Figure B-5 provides a pinout diagram.

SMA connector that should be terminated (on chain) when
not in use.

3. VGA OUT: 15-pin connector provides VGA output of
37xxxE video display. Figure B-4 provides a pinout diagram.

4. Fan: Used for instrument cooling.

16. (Option 12) a2: IF input from 3738A Broadband Test Set.
SMA connector that should be terminated (on chain) when
not in use.

5. External I/O: Provide I/O access for Channel 1 through 4

17. (Option 12) b2: IF input from 3738A Broadband Test Set.

limit and Port 1 and 2 bias voltages. Figure B-3 provides a
pinout diagram.

SMA connector that should be terminated (on chain) when
not in use.

6. Mini-USB Port: Not accessable. For Anritsu service use

18. (Option 12) Test Set Control Out: Provides control for

only.

3738A Broadband Test Set. Figure B-6 provides a pinout diagram. TTL levels.

7. SD Card Slot: SD Card slot used for replacing the internal
storage device (SD Card).

8. Bias Fuses, Port 1: Fuse, 0.5A, 3AG, 250V, provides pro-

19. External Trigger: Allows an external TTL signal to sync
the 37xxxE measurements; 10 kW input impedance, BNC
female.

tection for external bias being applied to the active device
connected to test port 1 without disturbing the accuracy of
the 37xxxE measurement.

20. External Anlg Out: Provides up to a ±10V signal for use in

9. Bias Fuses, Port 2: Fuse, 0.5A, 3AG, 250V, provides pro-

21. Ext Anlg In: Provides input to the A5 A/D Converter PCB.

tection for external bias being applied to the active device
connected to test port 2 without disturbing the accuracy of
the 37xxxE measurement.

BNC connector allows an external dc voltage to be measured by the internal analog-to-digital converter circuit.

driving an external plotter or antenna (CW draw).

22. 10 MHz Ref OUT 0dBm 50W: BNC connector that allows
10. Line Voltage Input: Three-prong ac plug that provides input for the input-line power. The line voltage must be between 85 and 264 Vac rms, 43 to 63 Hz.

11. Power On/Off: Turns the line power on or off.
12. Ethernet Port: RJ45 jack allows connection to a Local
Area Network (LAN) for remote programming and data extraction.

the internal 10 MHz reference to be used to phase lock an
external counter or other measuring instrument. Level is
typically 0 dBm into 50W impedance.

23. 10 MHz Ref IN 0dBm 50W: BNC connector that allows an
external 10 MHz signal (–5 to +5 dBm) to be used as the frequency reference for phase locking the source frequency.
50W impedance.

24. Dedicated GPIB: IEEE 488 standard 24-pin connector
13. External PS2 Keyboard Port: Provides for connecting
any external keyboard with a standard PS2 connector. All
alphanumeric field entries can be input from this keyboard.
These inputs include Device ID, Model, Date, Operator
Identification, frequencies, filenames, as well as comment-type entries. The analog knob and keypad input for
these entries remains active. The F1 through F12 function
keys can be used to access certain key and menu functions.
A template is provided. Two versions of an actual-size template are provided in a foldout page at the end of Chapter 4
in the event a replacement is needed.

37xxxE OM

that allows the 37xxxE to remotely control a 2nd frequency
source, an external plotter, analyzer, or other peripheral.
Figure B-2 provides a pinout diagram.

25. IEEE 488.2 GPIB: IEEE 488 standard 24-pin connector
that provides for remotely controlling the 37xxxE from an
external computer/controller via the IEEE-488 bus (GPIB).
Figure B-2 provides a pinout diagram.

B-5

CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13

12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Pinout Diagram

PIN

NAME

DESCRIPTION

1-4

DIO 1 through DIO 4

Data Input/Output. Bits are HIGH with the data is logical 0 and LOW when the data is
logical 1.

5

EOI

End Or Identify. A low-true state indicates that the last byte of a multibyte message
has been placed on the line.

6

DAV

Data Valid. A low-true state indicates that the talker has (1) sensed that NRFD is
LOW, (2) placed a byte of data on the bus, and (3) waited an appropriate length of
time for the data to settle.

7

NRFD

Not Ready For Data. A high-true state indicates that valid data has not yet been accepted by a listener.

8

NDAC

Not Data Accepted. A high-false state indicates that the current data byte has been
accepted for internal processing by a listener.

9

IFC

Interface Clear. A low-true state places all bus instruments in a known state—such
as, unaddressed to talk, unaddressed to listen, and service request idle.

10

SRQ

Service Request. A low-true state indicates that a bus instrument needs service from
the controller.

11

ATN

Attention. A low-true state enables the controller to respond to both it’s own listen/talk address and to appropriate interface messages — such as, device clear and
serial poll.

12

Shield

13-16

DIO 5 through DIO 8

Data Input/Output. Bits are high with the data is logical 0 and LOW when the data is
logical 1.

17

REN

Remote Enable. A low-true state enables bus instruments to be operated remotely,
when addressed.

GND

Logic ground.

Chassis ground.

1824

Figure B-2.

B-6

Pinout Diagram, GPIB and Dedicated GPIB Connectors

37xxxE OM

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

13

1
14

25

Pinout Diagram

PIN

NAME

DESCRIPTION

1

STROBE

Printer Strobe. A low-true pulse that tells the printer valid data has been placed onthe
bus.

2-9

DATA 1 thru DATA 8

Data Lines. Bits are HIGH when the data is logical 1 and LOW when the data is alogical 0.

10

ACK NLG

Printer Acknowledgment. A low-true (it varies from printer to printer) pulse sent back
by the printer to acknowledge that the data has been accepted and the printer is
ready to accept more data.

11

BUSY

Printer Busy. High-true level sent by the printer to indicate that it is not available. This
line is HIGH at the following times: (1) During data entry. (2) While printing. (3) When
off-line. (4) When a printer-error has been signaled.

12

PE

13

SLCT

14

AUTO FEED XT

15

ERR

Printer Error. A low-true signal that indicates the printer is (1) out of paper,
(2) off-line, or (3) in an error state.

16

INIT

Printer Initial State. A low-true pulse that tells the printer to assume its initial state
and clear its print buffer.

17

SLCT IN

18-25

DATA RTN

Figure B-3.

Printer Error. High-true level sent by the printer to indicate that it is out of paper.
Select. A high-true logic level.
Automatic Paper Feed. A low-true level that tells the printer to feed the paper
automatically.

Printer Select Input. A low-true level that permits the printer to accept data.
Return lines for DATA 1 thru DATA 8 lines.

Pinout Diagram, Printer Connector (1 of 2)

37xxxE OM

B-7

CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

External I/O

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

Pinout Diagram
PIN

NAME

DESCRIPTION

1

Channel 1 Limit

Signal indicating results of Channel 1 limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail or
TTL-low = Fail.

2

Limit 1 Rtn

3

Channel 2 Limit

4

Limit 2 Rtn

5

Channel 3 Limit

6

Limit 3 Rtn

7

Channel 4Limit

Signal indicating results of Channel 4 limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail or
TTL-low = Fail. Pins 7 is also used as the TTL handshake for external trigger mode.
TTL-high = VNA has compeleted a measurement and is ready for another trigger

8

Limit 4 Rtn

Return for the Channel 4 limit signal or VNA measurement complete signal. Pin 8 is
also the return for pin 7.

9

Limit Fail

Signal indicating failure in any channel limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail
or TTL-low = Fail.

10

Spare

11

Spare

12

Limit Fail Rtn

13

Spare

14

Spare

15

Ext Dig In

Allows an external signal to sync the 37xxxE measurements; TTL level

16

Dig In Rtn

Return for External Dig In signal

Figure B-5.

B-8

Return for the Channel 1 limit signal
Signal indicating results of Channel 2 limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail or
TTL-low = Fail.
Return for the Channel 1 limit signal
Signal indicating results of Channel 3 limit testing. User selectable TTL-high = Fail or
TTL-low = Fail.
Return for the Channel 3 limit signal

Return for the Limit Fail signal

Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (1 of 2)

37xxxE OM

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

PIN

NAME

DESCRIPTION

17

Ext Ana Out

Provides an up-to-±10V signal for use in driving an external plotter or antenna (CW
draw).

18

Ana Out Rtn

Return for Ext Ana Out signal

19

Spare

20

Spare

21

Spare

22

Gnd 1

23

Port 1 Bias

Provides for applying an external bias to the active device connected to test port 1.

24

Port 2 Bias

Provides for applying an external bias to the active device connected to test port 2.

25

Gnd 2

Figure B-3.

Return for Port 1 Bias.

Return for Port 2 Bias.

Pinout Diagram, External I/O Connector (2 of 2)

37xxxE OM

B-9

CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

6
7
8
9
10

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

11
12
13
14
15

1
2
3
4
5

Pinout Diagram
PIN

DESCRIPTION

1

Red

2

Green

3

Blue

4

Not Used

5

Not Used

6

Red Return

7

Green Return

8

Blue Return

9

Not Used

10

Digital Ground

11

Not Used

12

Not Used

13

Hsync

Horizontal sync

14

Vsync

Vertical sync

15

Not Used

Figure B-4.

B-10

NAME
Red signal
Green signal
Blue signal

Red return
Green return
Blue return

Sync ground

Pinout Diagram, VGA IN/OUT Connector

37xxxE OM

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

5

1
9

PIN

DESCRIPTION

1

CD

2

RXD

3

TXD

4

DTR

5

N.C.

6

N.C.

7

RTS

8

CTS

9

N.C.

Figure B-5.

6

Pinout Diagram, Serial Port Connector

37xxxE OM

B-11

CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS

Test Set
Control Out
2
3

7
1
6

4
5

PIN

NAME

1

Ground

Ground return

2

N/C

No connection

3

H Coax/L mm

4

N/C

5

L Reverse

6

N/C

7

L Forward

Figure B-6.

B-12

DESCRIPTION

HIGH <65 GHz, LOW >65 GHz
No connection
LOW reverse sweep, HIGH forward sweep
No connection
LOW forward sweep, HIGH reverse sweep

Pinout Diagram, Test Set Control Out Connector (Option 12)

37xxxE OM

Appendix C
Performance Specifications
For printed versions of this manual, this appendix contains a copy of
the 37000E Vector Network Analyzers Technical Data Sheet,
Anritsu Part Number 11410-00573.

SUBJECT INDEX

! TO D

Index
!
3 dB Compressed Smith Chart Display Mode . 6-10

A
Active Channel Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Active Device Measurements . . . . . . 8-24 to 8-28
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 to 8-28
Adapter Removal Measurements
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 to 8-38
Address, GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Analog Instrument Status . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Analyzer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Apply Cal Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-10
Arrow Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Autoscale Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25
Average Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Avg/Smooth Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Avg/Smooth Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

B
Bandpass Impulse Response . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Begin Cal Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-10
Bias Input Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

C
Cable Length Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
CAD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Calibrating for a Measurement . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Calibration
See Measurement Calibration
Calibration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Calibration Key-Group Description . . 4-10 to 4-19
Calibration Keys . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-10 to 4-19
Calibration Kits
3650A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3651A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3652A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3653A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3654D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Calibration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Ch 1 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

37xxxE OM

Ch 2 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Ch 3 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Ch 4 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Ch1 - Ch4 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Channel Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-24
Channels Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Channels Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Copying Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

D
Data Display
Active Channel Selection. . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Analog Instrument Status . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 to 6-14
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Linear Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Log Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Polar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Smith . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
S-parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Sweep Marker Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Data Display Modes
3 dB Compressed Smith Chart . . . . . . . 6-10
Dual Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Dual Channel Rectilinear Graticule . . . . . 6-8
Dual Trace Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Four Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Graph Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Linear Polar Graticule. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Log Polar Graticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Normal Smith Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Single Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Data Display Modes and Types . . . . . . 6-3 to 6-6
Data Entry Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Index-1

E TO I

SUBJECT INDEX

Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Data Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Data Points Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21
Default Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3,8-10
Default Program Key . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-33
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Device ID Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Display Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 to 4-28
Display Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25
Domain Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21
Drive, External SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Dual Channel Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Dual Channel Rectilinear Display Mode . . . . 6-8
Dual Source Control
Pre-operational Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Dual Source Control Measurements
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 to 8-33
Dual Trace Overlay Display Mode . . . . . . . . 6-6

E
E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
Measurement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
Enhancement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7,4-29
Enter Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Error Modeling and Flowgraphs . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Error Terms
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
External Monitor Connector . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

F
Four Channel Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fourier Transform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Frequency
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Frequency Domain . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3,9-8,9-12
Front Panel
Calibration Key-Group Description . 4-10 to 4-19
Channels Key-Group Description . . . . . . 4-24
Display Key-Group Description . . . 4-25 to 4-28
Key-Group Descriptions . . . . . . . . 4-3 to 4-9
Markers/Limits Key-Group Description . 4-36 to
4-39
Measurement Key-Group Description4-21 to 4-23
Output Key-Group Description . . . 4-31 to 4-32

Index-2

Save/Recall Key, Description . . . . . . . . 4-20
System State Key-Group Description 4-33 to 4-35

G
Gain Compression
Swep Power Gain Compression Measurement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Swept Frequency Measurement . . . . . . . 8-51
Gain Compression Measurements
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 to 8-57
Gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 to 3-4
GHz/10E+3/Ms/m Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
GPIB
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
GPIB Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
GPIB Interface to External Plotter . . . . . . . 2-6
GPIB Setup and Interconnection . . . . . . . . 2-5
Graph Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Graph Type Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25
Group Delay
Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Frequency Aperture . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Group Delay Measurements . . . . . . 8-20 to 8-23

H
Hard Copy
Plotter Output . . . . . .
Screen-Image Printout . .
Tabular Printout . . . . .
Hard Copy and Disk Output
Hard Copy Keys . . . . . . .
High Level Noise Test
Test Procedure . . . . . .
High Level Noises Test . . .
Hold Key . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

. . 6-15
. . 6-15
. . 6-15
. . 6-15
4-5,4-31

. . . . . . . . . . 11-7
. . . . . . . . . . 11-6
. . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21

I
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Impulse Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Insertables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

37xxxE OM

SUBJECT INDEX

K TO N

Interface
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

K
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Keys
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 to 4-19
Channel Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Display Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 to 4-28
Markers/Limits. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 to 4-39
Markers/Limits Key-Group . . . . . 4-36 to 4-39
Measurement Key-Group . . . . . . 4-21 to 4-24
Output Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 to 4-32
Save/Recall Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
System State . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 to 4-35
System State Key-Group. . . . . . . 4-33 to 4-35
kHz/10E-3/ps/mm Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

L
Limit Frequency Readout Function . . . . . . 4-36
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Limits Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-36
Linear Polar Graticule Display Mode . . . . . . 6-8
Load Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Log Magnitude Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Log Polar Graticule Display Mode . . . . . . . . 6-9
LRL/LRM Calibration Procedure
Coaxial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 to 7-45
Microstrip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Waveguide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
LRL/LRM Calibration Setup Menu Flow . . . 4-15

M
Marker
Display of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Marker Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Marker Menu Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-36
Markers/Limits Key-Group . . . . . . . 4-36 to 4-39
Markers/Limits Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-36
Measurement Calibration
Calibration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

37xxxE OM

Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 to 7-12
Error Modeling and Flowgraphs . . . . . . . 7-6
Evaluating the Calibration . . . . . . . . . 7-11
LRL/LRM Procedure . . . . . . . . . 7-36 to 7-45
Offset-Short Procedure. . . . . . . . 7-28 to 7-31
Sliding Load, Procedure . . . . . . . 7-13 to 7-18
Standared (SOLT) Procedure . . . . 7-19 to 7-27
Triple Offset-Short Procedure . . . . 7-32 to 7-35
Understanding the Calibration System . . . 7-5
Measurement Key-Group Description . 4-21 to 4-23
Measurement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21
Measurement Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Measurement Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Measurements
Active Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 to 8-28
Adapter Removal . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 to 8-38
Dual Source Control . . . . . . . . . 8-29 to 8-33
Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 to 8-57
Group Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 to 8-23
Receiver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58 to 8-61
Time Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Transmission and Reflection . . . . . 8-3 to 8-11
Menu Flow
Calibration Key-Group Menus . . . 4-10 to 4-19
MARKER MENU Key . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Save/Recall Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-31
Menu Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Menus
Channels Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Display Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 to 4-28
Markers/Limits Key-Group . . . . . 4-36 to 4-39
Measurement Key-Group . . . . . . 4-21 to 4-23
Output Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 to 4-32
System State Key-Group. . . . . . . 4-33 to 4-35
MHz/X1/ns/cm Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Microwave Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Multiple Source Control
Control Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31

N
Network Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Index-3

O TO S

SUBJECT INDEX

Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 to 3-11
Non-insertables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Normal Smith Chart Display Mode . . . . . . . 6-9

O
O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Equipment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Measurement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Offset-Short Calibration Procedure . . 7-28 to 7-31
Offset-Short Calibration Setup Menu Flow . . 4-13
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Operational Checkout
High Level Noise Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Required Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Sampler Efficiency Test . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Self Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Optical Application . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65 to 8-76
E/O Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
O/E Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
Option 2 Time Domain
Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 to 9-20
Option 2A Time Domain
Gating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 to 9-13
Gating Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Windowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Option 4 Additional SD Card . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Option 5 Receiver Mode
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Set--On Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Sweeper Source Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Option Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7,4-29
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Output Key-Group . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 to 4-32

P
Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Phasor-impulse Response . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Plotter Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Polar Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Port 1 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Port 1 Test Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Index-4

Port 2 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Port 2 Test Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Preparation for Storage and/or Shipment . . . 2-10
Preparation for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Printing
Stop/Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Program File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

R
Readout Marker key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Readout Marker Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Receiver Mode Measurements . . . . . 8-58 to 8-61
Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
Recovering, Disk Write/Read Errors . . . . . . 4-41
Ref Plane Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25
Reference Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Reference Position Marker . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Rotary Knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

S
S Params Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25
s2p File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
S2P File
Comment Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Creating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Data Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Option Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Sampler Efficiency Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Save/Recall Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Save/Recall Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 to 4-5
Save/Recall Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Scale Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Scattering Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Screen-Image Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Set Scale Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-25
Setup Menu Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8,4-21
Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Single Channel Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Sliding Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Pin Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Used in Calibraton. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
3 dB Compressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

37xxxE OM

SUBJECT INDEX

T TO Z

Measurement Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Smith Chart Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Source Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Source Module
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
S-parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 to 3-10
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Selection, Display of . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Specifications, Performance . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Standard Calibration Setup Menu Flow . . . . 4-11
Start Print Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-31
Start Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Stop Print Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5,4-31
Stop Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Storage Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Storage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Sweep Marker Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
System GPIB Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
System State Key-Group . . . . . . . . 4-33 to 4-35
System State Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-33

Triple Offset Short Calibration Procedure . 7-32 to
7-35
TRM Calibration Setup Menu Flow . . . . . . 4-17

U
USB Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Utility Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-33

V
Verification Kit
3666 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3667 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
3668 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Used in Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Video IF BW Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7,4-29

W
Windowing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Z
T
Tabular Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Test File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Test Ports
Establishing, Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Test Set
Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Test Set Module
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Time Delay
Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Time Domain Measurements . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Trace Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Trace Memory Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6,4-26
Trace Smooth and Average Keys . . . . . . . . 4-29
Trace Smooth Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Tracking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Transmission and Reflection Measurements . . 8-3
Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 to 8-11
Setup and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Smith Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

37xxxE OM

Zo Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Zo Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Index-5



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Create Date                     : 2008:02:29 15:19:42Z
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Modify Date                     : 2010:08:16 11:05:44-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:08:16 11:05:44-07:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Keywords                        : 37xxxE; 37247E; 37269E; 37297E; 37347E; 37369E; 37397E; 37xxxD; Vector Network Analyzer; VNA; Operation; Manual; RF; Microwave; Vector; Network; Analyzer; VNA; Lightning
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Lightning 37xxxE Vector Network Analyzer Operation Manual
Creator                         : Anritsu Company
Description                     : Operating instructions for the 37xxxE series of instruments
Rights                          : Copyright 2010 Anritsu Company
Subject                         : 37xxxE, 37247E, 37269E, 37297E, 37347E, 37369E, 37397E, 37xxxD, Vector Network Analyzer, VNA, Operation, Manual, RF, Microwave, Vector, Network, Analyzer, VNA, Lightning
Document ID                     : uuid:aa876d08-b4ca-4769-b471-ea2dabdd7bb5
Instance ID                     : uuid:b8f7619e-ddca-4688-947f-c96f851f738d
Authors Position                : Anritsu MMD Technical Publications
Startup Profile                 : Print
Marked                          : True
Web Statement                   : http://www.anritsu.com
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 553
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : Anritsu Company

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools